^^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-i, 1.0 1.1 lii|2£ 12^ |jo ^^ !■■ S; 1^ 12.0 u IL25 M 1.4 U& Hii^l 1.6 FhologrEiphic Sdmces Carporation 23 WIST MAIN STtHT WnSTIR,N.Y. 14SM (716) 173-4303 CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Instituta for Historical IMicroroproductions / institut Canadian da microraproductions historiquas \ \ Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D D D D D D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagAe Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurte et/ou pellicula I I Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque □ Coloured maps/ Cartes giographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Relii avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrie peut cause: de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge intArieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, thsse have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, iorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont pas M filmtes. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplAmentaires; Various pagings. L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'ii lui a 4tA possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dtns la mAthode normale de filmage sont indiquAs ci-dessous. I I Coloured pages/ D Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagies Pages restored and/oi Pages restaur6es et/ou pelliculies Pages discoloured, stained or foxei Pages d^coiories. tacheties ou piquies r~~| Pages damaged/ I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ I ~| Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Pages detached/ El Pages d^tachdes Showthrough/ Transparence I I Quality of print varies/ Quality intgaie de I'impression Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du materiel supplimentaire Only edition available/ Seuie Edition disponibie Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure, etc., ont M film6es d nouveau de fapon A obtenir la meilleure image possible. The tol Th« po( oft filn Ori be( the sioi otl\ firs sioi ori Tht sht Tl^ wh Ma difl ent be( rigl req me This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est fiimA au taux de rMuction indiquA ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X >/ 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X aire details ues du t modifier ger une > filmage The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: National Library of Canada The images appearing here are the best quality posaible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in Iteeping with the filming contract specifications. L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grAce h la ginArositA d«: BIbliothdque nationale du Canada Les images suivantes ont 4tA reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la netteti de I'exemplaire filmd, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. lies Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. Les exempiaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimie sont fllmte en commen9ant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la derniire page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exempiaires originaux sont filmte en commenpant par la premiere page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. The !ast recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol —^(meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Un des symboles suivants apparaftra sur la derniire image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols — ► signifie "A SUIVRE", le symbols V signifie "FIN". ire Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many f.'ames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre filmAs d des taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour 6tre reproduit en un seul clich6, il est fllm6 A partir de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas. en prenant le ncmbre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mithode. »y errata ed to tnt ne pelure, ipon it 1 2 3 32X 1 2 3 4 5 6 AN ELEMENTARY GEEEK GEAMMAE \/ BY WILLIA.M W. GOODWIN, Ph.D., LL.D., BUOI FfiOriSBOB OF aBBBK LIISBATUiUt IN HABTABD OOLLiaii UEVISED AND ENLARGED EDITION, % -■■.pm m ■fm ;v1 ■■■X J ROSE PUBLISHING COMPANY. p/^ ti ,f' •"#' -0 tmm- h«5'8' |;«79 *' -r & H ' i^r ;'<^ '1^ % ^1 ^ < ^ •' PREFACE. This Grammar is partly a revised edition of the Elementary Greek Grammar published in 1870, and partly an independent work. The part which precedes the Inflection of the Verb contains the substance of the former edition revised and enlarged, with many additions to the Paradigms. The part relating to the Inflection of the Verb, §§ 88 — 127, has been entirely re-written, and increased from fifty to one hundred pages. Part III., on the Formation of Words, is entirely new. The Syn- tax is in most parts substantially the same as in the former edition ; but some changes and numerous addi- tions have been made, the chief increase being in the sections on the Prepositions. Part V., on Versification, is almost entirely new, and is based to a great extent on the Rhythmic and Metric of J. H. H. Schmidt, which has just been published in an English translation by Professor J. W. White. I have not followed Schmidt, however, in making all iambic and anapaestic verses trochaic and dactylic ; and I have followed the ancient authorities in recognizing cyclic ana^jaests as well as cyclic dactyls. I have adopted the modern doctrine of log'aoedic verses, which enlarges their dominion and reduces them to a uniform J measure, thus avoiding Iv PREFACE. many of the incongruities which beset the common theory of thesvj verses. The Catalogue of Verbs is increased from nineteen to thirty-two pages, and contains a greater number of verbs and gives the forms more completely than the forr^er one. The object has still been to present only the strictly classic forms of each verb, and thereby to save the learner from a mass of detail which he may never need. It is surprising how simple many formidable verbs become when all later and doubtful forms are removed. In pre- paring the Catalogue I have relied constantly on Veitch's Greek Verbs, Irregul'^r and Defective, a work in the Clarendon Press Series, for which every classical scholar will bless the author. It will be seen that the enlargement has been made chiefly in the part relating to the Inflection of the Verb. There I have adopted ^§ 108) the division of verbs in eo into eight classes which is employed by G. Curtius : this reduces many of the apparent irregularities of the Greek verb to rule and order. In the former edition I adopted Hadley's addition of a class of " reduplicating '* verbs. I have omitted this class as unnecessary in my present arrangement. Of the six verbs (apart from verbs in fxv and verbs in ) which composed this class, ^^vyvoiiai, iaxo>^ and irlirrw are now assigned by Curtius to his " mixed class " ; the first syllable of tUto) is now not considered a reduplication by Curtius; fii/iv(o is used only in the present stem ; while TiTpdm seems too late a form to affect classification. The chief innovation which I have now ventured to make in the classification of Cur- tius relates to the large class of verbs which add e- to the common Ti^er one. PREFACE. V stem in certain tenses not belonging to the preseiit stem. I have no thought of disputing the remark of Curtius that this phenomenon and the addition of e- in the pres- ei ' :em (as in Box-, Bokc-o)^ are to be explained on simi^ V r principles. But it seems obvious that the former is not, like the latter, a process by which the present stem is formed from the simple stem, aud it therefore has no place in the classification which we are here considering. Further, the addition of e- in other tenses than the pres- ent occurs in every one of the eight classes of Curtius, so that it must confuse the classification to introduce it there at all. I have therefore included this among the modifications of the stem explained in § 109, thus class- ing it with such phenomena as the addition of a- in certain verbs and other modifications which affect only special tenses. (See § 109, 8.^) In § 120, 1, I have followed the doctrine of F. D. Allen, stated in the American Philological Transactions for 1873 (pp. 6-19), by which Homeric forms like 6p6(o for opduy are explained by assimilation. I fear I may have offended many scholars in giving the present stems of Xug), \&^(Ot XetTrw, &c. as \i>-, \€7-, \et7r-, &c., and not as \vo(^€)', \e7o(e)-, \et7ro(6)-, &c. I have been careful to state in several places (see foot-notes, pp. 82 and 144) that the latter is the better approved and more correct form of expression ; but I have not ventured to make the first attempt at a popular statement of the tense stems with the variable vowel-attachment. A slight reflection showed me that this must be made by a pro- * See also the Proceedvigs of the American Philological Association for 1879. vl PREFACE. fessional etymologist, who can settle, at least consistently, the many doubtful questions which still bcbct the subject of tense stems. I was finally decided by finding that G. Curtius himself had made no change in this respect in the latest edition (1878) of his Schulgrammalik^ and continued to call \v-, Xey-, XetTr -, &c. present stems, evidently thinking the other forms too cumbrous for a school-book. I have had no hesitation in following his example. The sections on the Syntax of the Verb contain a con- densed statement of the principles which I have explained at greater length in a larger work. Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verh^ to which I must refer more advanced students, and especially teachers, for a fuller exposition of this subject.^ I must still confess myself unable to give any general definitions which shall include all the uses of either the indicative, the subjunctive, or the optative, and yet be accurate enough to meet modem scientific demands. The truth must be recognized that these moods were not invented deliberately to express certain definite classes of ideas to the exclusion of all others, and then always held rigidly to these pre-deter- mined uses. On the contrary, their various uses grew up gradually, as language was developed and found new ideas to express. Both the Greek and the Latin inherited most of their modal forms through a line of ancestors now lost. ^ For a still fuller explanation of the classification of conditional sen- tences here introduced, with the corresponding arrangement of relative clauses, I must refer to articles in the Transactions of the American Philo- logical Association for 1873 and 1876, printed also in the Journal of PhU lology. Vol. v. No. 10, pp. 186-206, and Vol. viii. No. 15, pp. 18-38. PREFACE. Vtt and each language employed these forms, partly in con- formity with tradition, and partly to suit its own peculiar needs and tendencies of thought. We must have a far better knowledge of the uses of the moods in the original Indo-European tongue and of the earliest uses in both Greek and Latin than we are likely ever to get from our present stock of material, before we can hope to trace historically each use of the moods in the classic languages. Investigations made through the Sanskrit, like those of Delbriif>k, are looking in the right direction ; but scholars differ widely in their interpretation of the results thus obtained, and the moods are used too vaguely in Sanskrit (compared with Greek or Latin) to be decisive in the comparison. We know enough, however, not to be sur- prised when we find the same idea expressed in Latin by the past tenses of the subjunctive, and in Greek by the past tenses of the indicative, especially whon we find the two constructions coincide in a few instances in Homeric Greek. Much that is contained in the Notes of this Grammar, especially all in the smallest type, is intended to be used for reference, or to be read by the mc e interested pupils as they study the remainder of the book. A great change has gradually come upon the study of grammar in these practical days ; and no teacher (it is hoped) now believes in cramming pupils in advance with grammatical details which they are not expected to use or even understand until they have learnt the language in some other way. I £,m strongly of the opinion that a pupil should begin to translate easy sentences from Greek into English and from English into Greek as soon as he has learnt the forms via PREFACE. absolutely necessary for the process. The true time to teach each principle of grammar (beyond the most general rules, which every student of (J reek will have already) is the moment when the pupil is to meet with it in reading or writing ; and no grammar which is not thus illustrated as it is taught ever becomes a reality to the pupil. But it is not enough for a learner merely to meet each con- struction or form in isolated instances ; for he may do this repeatedly, and yet know little of the general principle which the single example partially illustrates. Men saw apples fall and the moon and planets roll ages before the principle of gravitation was thought of. It is necessary, therefore, not merely to bring the pupil face to face with the facts of a language by means of examples carefully selected to exhibit them, but also to refer him to a state- ment of the general principles which show the full meaning of the facts and their relation to other prin- ciples.* In other words, systematic practice in reading and writing must be supplemented from the beginning by equally systematic reference to the grammar. Mechanics are not learnt by merely observing the working of levers and pulleys, nor is chemistry by watching experiments on gases; although no one would undertake to teach either without such practical illustrations. I have, there- fore, no faith in classical scholarship which is not based on a solid foundation of grammar ; while I still believe that more attention to practical illustration than has generally been paid is urgently needed, and that the * These objects seem to me to be admirably attained in the First Lessons in Oruk, which was prepared by my colleague, Professor J. W. White, to be used in connection with this Grammar. PREFACE. study of grammar may thus be relieved of most of its traditional terrors and made what it should be, a means, not an end. These remarks apply especially to syntax, the chief principles of which have always Keemed to me more profitable for a pupil in the earlier years of his classical studies than the details of vowel-changes and exceptional forms which are often thought more seasona-> ble. The study of Greek syntax, properly pursued, gives the pupil an insight into the processes of thought of a highly cultivated people ; and while it stimulates hia own powers of thought, it teaches him habits of more careful expression by making him familiar with many forms of statement more precise than those to which he is accustomed in his own language. The Greek syntax, as it was developed and refined by the Athenians, is a most important chapter in the history of thought, and even those whose classical studies are limited to the rudiments cannot afford to neglect it entirely. One of the best practical illustrations of any language, ancient or modern, one which is available even for those who have no teachers, is committing to memory passages of its best literature, and using them as a basis for both oral and written exercises. This " natural method," which has proved so successful in teaching modern languages, can be made of great advantage in classical education by a skilful teacher ; although I am convinced that in the ancient languages it should always be accompanied by careful grammatical study, and especially by constant reference to a systematic grammar. As an important aid, however, it cannot be too highly commended, and it can hardly begin too early. PREFACE. I have not thought that the subject of Pronunciation, in its only practical form, belongs properly to Greek grammar. The question of the ancient sound of the Greek letters is too extensive, and involves too much learned discussion and controversy, to be treated in a work like this. A very different question, it seems to me, is the practical one. How are boys to be taught to pronounce Greek in our schools? Even if we had a complete ancient account of Greek pronunciation, — which we are very far from having, — it would be a much harder task to teach boys of the present day to follow it than it would be to teach them to pronounce French or German by rules without the help of the voice. The chief practical considerations here are simplicity and uniformity. For more than a generation, until very re- cently, there has been no system of pronouncing Greek in the United States which could claim notice on the ground of uniformity. Only our oldest scholars remember the prevalence of the so-called " English system," which uses English vowel-sounds and Latin accents ; and this would now be unintelligible in most of our schools and cr.ii >ges. ]viy own efforts have been exerted merely towards bringing some order out of this chaos. Our scholars have generally assumed that the written accents should be used ; and, whatever theory of ancient accent we may hold, it will be admitted that the Greeks marked the first syllable of dydprniroi^ and the Romans the first syllable of homines^ in the same way. The English vowel- sounds are not easily combined with Greek accents, especially when a short penultimate is accented, as in irpayfiaTtov. Harvard College has for the past eighteen PREFACE. xl ciation, Greek of the ) much id in a sems to ,ught to had a ition, — ' I a much follow French e. The ;ity and very re- g Greek on the member ' which and this ools and merely Ds. Our accents it accent marked the first h vowel- accents, td, as in eighteen years recommended schools to use the Greek accents, and to pronounce a as a in father^ rj and e as ^ m fete and men, i as i in machine, leaving further details to each teacher's discretion. The American Philological Asso- ciation has twice recommended the same; and to this extent some degree of uniformity has thus been secured within the last ten years. The other sounds have generally remained as they are in the English system, with the exception of ov, which is generally pronounced like ou in group. Perhaps the majority pronounce av like ou in house (as the Germans do). To those who ask my advice, I am in the habit of recommending the following system, which I follow chiefly from its simplicity, and because it is adopted by more scholars in the United States than any ether, not pretending that all the sounds (e.g*. those of ei and the aspirated consonants) rest on a scientific basis : — a as a in father, ^ as ^ in fete, e as e in men, i as i in machine, eo as o in note, v as French u; short w.wels merely shorter than the long vowels ; — at as ai in aisle, €1 as ei in height, oi as oi in oil, vl as ui in quit or wi in tvith, av as ou in house, ev as ejA in feud, ov as ou in group; a, y, ^, like a, rj, to; — the consonants as in English, except that 7 before k, 7, f, and y(^ has the sound of n, but elsewhere is hard ; that 6 is always like /// in thin ; «md that ;^ is always hard, like German ch, I have always pronounced if like English z, but it would prob- ably be more correct to give it the sound of soft ds (not that of German ^), as it is a double consonant (§ 5, 2). Many scholars prefer to pronounce €i like ei in eight ; and this has much to be said in its favor on several xU PREFACE. grounds. I do not think we have any positive knowl- edge of the sound of et before it reached the sound of I (our ee), and I have held to that of ei in height simply to avoid another change from both English and German usage. I need not enumerate here the familiar works to which I am indebted for most of the facts of Greek Grammar. These have been collected so often and so thoroughly, that there is little room for originality except in the form of presentation. The best examples of every principle have alreaxiy been used scores of times, and I have never hesitated to use them again. I must again acknowledge my deep obligations to the late Professor Hadley for his kind permission to use the valuable material in his pub- lished works, and for the friendly aid and advice on which I constantly depended for many years. The influ- ence of his profound learning and his noble example will long survive in American scholarship. I am greatly indebted to all who have given me their counsel during the preparation of this book. I must mention particularly Professors F. D. Allen, Addison Hoge, M. W. Humphreys, and J. W. White. Professor Caskie Harrison of Sewanee, Tennessee, has done me the great kindness of sending me an elaborate criticism of Part I. and the whole Syntax of my former edition, with discussions of many of the most impoitant points. I have often been aided by his remarks in revising these portions of my work ; and even when I could not agree with his opinions, his criticisms have shown me some weak points in my former state- ments. :ii PREFACE. xiu My special thanks are due to Mr. Henry Jackson, of Trinity College, Cambridge, who has kindly read the proofs of the English edition, published at the same time with this, and has given me many valuable suggestions during the printing. W. W. GOODWIN. Harvard College, Cambridge, October, 1879. CONTENTS. Introduction. — The Greek Language and Dialects Pau PART I. — LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. § 1. The Alphabet .... §§ 2, 3. Vowels and Diphthongs . § 4. Breathings .... §§ 5-7. Consonants and their Divisions § 8. Collision of Vowels. — Hiatus . § 9. Contraction of Vowels § 10. Synizesis § 11. Crasis § 12. Elision § 13. Movable Consonants . § 14. Metathesis and Syncope . §§ 15-17. Euphony of Consonants § 18. Syllables and their Division §§ 19, 20. Quantity of Syllables . §§ 21-23. General Principles of Accent § 24. Accent of Contracted Syllables . § 25. Accent of Nouns and Adjectives § 26. Accent of Verbs . . . , §§ 27, 28. Enclitics .... § 29. Proclitics . . . . , § 30. Dialectic Changes in Letters § 31. Punctuation>Marks 5 6 6,7 7,8 8 8-10 10 10, 11 11, 12 12 13 13-16 17 17, 18 18-20 20, 21 21, 22 22, 23 23, 24 24,25 25 25 xvl CONTENTS. PART II. — INFLECTION. § 32. Definitions. — Inflection, Root, Stem, Ending . § 33. Numbers, Genders, Cases .... 26 . 26, 27 NOUNS. § 34. Three Declensions of Nouns 28 §§ 35, 36. Stems and Terminations of First Declension . . ,28, 29 § 37. Paradigms of First Declension 29, 30 § 38. Contract Nouns of First Declension 30, 31 § 39. Dialects of First Declension 31 §§ 40, 41. Stems and Terminations of Second Declension . . 31, 32 § 42. 1. Paradigms of Second Declension 32, 33 2. Attic Second Declension 33 § 43. Contract Nouns of Second Declension . . . . 33, 34 § 44. Dialects of Second Declension 34 § 45. Stems and Case-endings of Third Declension . . .34, 35 Note. Coi.iparison of Case-endings in the Three Declensions 35 § 46. Nominative Singular of Third Declension . . . . 36, 37 § 47. Accusative Singular of Third Declension .... 37 § 48. Vocative Singular of Third Declension .... 38 § 49. Dative Plural of Third Declension 39 § 50. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Declension with Mute or Liquid Stems 89~41 §§ 61-56. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Declension with Stems in 2 or Vowel Stems (chiefly contract) .... 42-47 § 57. Syncopated Nouns of Third Declension . . . . 47, 48 § 58. Gender of Third Declension ....... 49 § 59. Dialects of Third Declension ...... 49 § 60. Irregular Nouns 49-52 § 61. Local Endings, -Oi, -dev, -de, &c 52 ADJECTIVES. §§ 62-64. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions . . 53, 54 § 65. Contract Adjectives of the Firet and Second Declensions . 54-56 § 66. Adjectives of the Third Declension 56, 57 § 67. First and Third Declensions combined .... 57-59 § 68. Participles in -tav, -ay, -fts, -vs, -wy 59-61 § 69. Contract Participles in -owv, -euv, -ouv . . . . 61, 62 § 70. Declension of m^a^ toMs, and ir/>aos 62, 63 CONTENTS. xvli • 26 . 26, 27 28 . 28, 29 . 29, 30 . 30, 31 31 . 31, 32 . 32. 33 • 33 . 33, 34 • 34 . 34, 35 isions 35 . 36, 37 • 37 38 • 39 or in 39-41 42-47 47, 48 49 49 49-52 62 . 53, 54 54-56 . 56, 57 57-59 . 59-61 61, 62 . 62, 63 Comparison of Adjeotiyei< § 71. Comparison by -Tf/jos, -totoj 64 § 72. Comparison by -luv, -(j-toj 64, 65 § 73. Iwegular Comparison 65, 66 ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON. § 74. Adverbs formed from Adjectives 67 § 75. Comparison of Adverbs 67 NUMERALS. § 76. Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and Numeral Adverbs . . 68, 69 § 77. Declension of Cardinal Numbers, &c 69, 70 THE ARTICLE. § 78. Declension of b,i\,r6 71 PRONOUNS. § 79. Personal and Intensive Pronouns 71-73 § 80. Reflexive Pronouns 73, 74 § 81. Reciprocal Pronoun 74 § 82. Possessive Pronouns 74 § 83. Demonstrative Pronouns 74, 75 §§ 84, 85. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns . . . . 76, 77 § 86. Relative Pronouns 77, 78 § 87. Pronominal Adjectives and Adverbs 78, 79 VERBS. §§ 88-91. Voices, Moods, T-^nses, Numbers, and Persons . . 79-81 § 92. Tense Stems. — Principal Parts of a Greek Verb . . . 81-84 § 93. Conjugation. — Two Forms: Verbs in w and Verbs in fu . 84, 85 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 12. § 94. Present Stem of Verbs in w 85 § 95. 1 . Synopsis of the Regular Verb in w . . . . 85-91 2. Meaning of the Forms of the Verb 92, 93 § 96. Paradigm of the Regular Verb in « 94-110 § 97. Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of Verbs with Consonant Stems . 111-114 §98. Contract Verbs in aw, eci;, and ow ..... 115-118 xviii C0NTENTS. i § 99. §100. §101. §102. §103. §104. §105. §106. Augment. Temporal Augment and Reduplication Syllabic and defined Augment of Imperfect and Aorist Indicative . Augment of Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Attic Reduplication Augment of Diphthongs Syllabic Augment prefixed to a Vowel . . Augment of Compound Verbs .... Omission of Augment Verbal Stems. § 107, 108. Formation of Present from Simple Stem. — Eight Classes of Verbs in w 109. Modification of the Stem in certain Tenses . 110. Fonnation of the Seven Tense-Stems . . . . 111. Table of Tense-Stems 119 119, 120 120, 121 122 122 123 123, 124 124 125-131 131-135 135-141 141 Personal Endings. § 112. Table of Personal Endinf s. — Connecting Vowel . § 113. 1. Connecting Vowels of .he Indicative 2. Personal Endings of Indicative with Connecting Vowel § ll:t. Terminations of the Subjunctive § 115. Terminations of the Optative § 116. Terminations of the Imperative § 117. Terniinations of the Infinitive, Participles, and Verbal Adjectives § 118, Periphrastic Forms Dialects. § 119. Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs in w. § 120. Special Dialectic Forms of Contract Verbs . coif JUOATION OF VEBBS IN |iu §§ 121, 122. General Character of Verbs in fu. — Two Classes . § 123. 1. Synopsis of Verbs in -rjixi, -ufu, -vfii 2. Paradigms of peculiar Tenses 3. Full Synopsis of Indicative § 124. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the /tti-form . § 125.- Enumeration of the /xt-forms § 126. Dialectic Forms of Verbs in fu § 127. Inegular Verbs in fii. — Paradigms .... 142-144 144, 145 145, 146 146 146-148 148, 149 149, 150 150, 151 151-153 154, 155 156-158 158, 159 159-165 165, 166 167 168-170 170-172 172-179 igiBfami.LkiJM Bg CONTENTS. xix 119 119, 120 120, 121 122 122 123 123, 124 124 125-131 131-135 135-141 141 142-144 144, 145 el 145, 146 146 146-148 148, 149 149, 150 150, 151 151-153 154, 155 156-158 158, 159 159-165 165, 166 167 168-170 170-172 172-179 PART III. — FORMATION OF WORDS. § 128. 1. Simple and Compound Words .... 2. Verbals and Denominatives 3. Suffixes §§ 129, 130. Formation of Simple Words .... § 131. Formation of Compound Words .... § 132. Meaning of Compounds 180 180, 181 181 182-187 187-189 189, 190 PART IV. — SYNTAX. § 133. Subject, Predicate, Object 191, 192 § 134. 1. Subject Nominative (of Finite Verbs) ... 192 2. Subject Accusative (of Infinitive) . . . . 192 3. Subject of Infinitive omittsd 192 Notes. Subj. Nom. omitted, Impersonal Verbs, &c. . 192, 193 § 135. Subject Nominative and Verb 193, 194 § 136. Predicate in same Case as Subject 194, 195 § 137. Apposition 195, 196 ADJECTIVES. § 138. Adjectives agreeing with Nouns § 139. Adjective used as a Noun . THE ARTICLE. § 140. Homeric Use of the Article (as Pronoun) § 141. Attic Use of the Article (as Definite Article) § 142. Position of the Article § 143. Pronominal Article in Attic (6 /jl^v . . . 6 Si, kc). PRONOUNS. §§ 144, 145. Personal and Intensive Pronouns . § 146. Reflexive Pronouns § 147. Possessive Pronouns § 148. Demonstrative Pronouns § 149. Interrogative Pronoun § 150. Indefinite Pronoun § 151. Relative Pronoun as related to its Antecedent . § 152. Relative with omitted Antecedent §§ 153, 104. Assimilation and Attraction of Relatives § 155. Relative in Exclamations, &c § 156. Relative Pronoun not repeated in a new Case . 196-198 198, 199 199, 200 200, 201 201-204 £04, 205 205, 206 206, 207 207 208 208 209 209, 210 210 210-212 212 212 CONTENTS. THE CASES. I. NominatiTe and VooatiT*. § 167. 1. Nominative, as Subject or Predicate 2. Vocative used in addressing 212 213 1!^ II. Aeoniative. Remark. — Various Functions of the Accusative ... 213 § 158. Accusative of Direct (External) Object . . . . 213 § 159. Cognate Accusative (of Internal Object) . . . 213-215 § 160. 1. Accusative cf Specification {Synecdoche) . . . 215 2. Adverbial Accusative 215 §161. Accnaative oi Extent of Time nr Space . . . . 216 § 162. Terminal Accusative (Poetic) 216 § 163. Accusative after Ni) and Md 216 Two Accusatives with Verbs signifying § 164. To ask, teach, clothe, conceal, deprive, divide, &c. . . 217 § 165. To do anything to or say anything of a Person . . . 217, 218 § 166. To name, appoint, consider, &c. (Predicate Accusative) . 218 III. Oenitive. Remark. — Various Functions of the Genitive . . . . § 167. Genitive after Nouns (Adnominal) .... § 168. Partitive Genitive (specially) § 169. 1. Genitive after Verbs signifying to be, become, belong, &c. 2. Partitive Genitive after Verbs signifying to name, make, &c § 170. Partitive Genitive after other Verbs .... § 171. Genitive after Verbs signifying 1. To take hold of, touch, claim, hit, miss, begin, &c. . 2. To taste, smell, hear, remember, forget, desire, spare, neglect, ad/tnire, despise, &c 3. To rule or command § 172. 1. Genitive after Verbs of Fulness and Want . 2. Accusative and Genitive after Verbs signifying to fill § 173. Causal Genitive, — 1. After Verbs expressing Praise, Pity, Anger, Envy, &c. 2. After Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, &c. 3. In Exclamations • 218 219, 220 220 221 221 221, 222 222 222, 223 223 222 223, 224 224 224, 225 225 CONTENTS. xxi 212 213 218 219, 220 220 221 221 221, 222 222 §174. §176. §176. §177. II It II 213 213 1 § 1^«- 213-215 215 1 ^ '^'" 215 216 216 1 ^" 216 M § 182. fl § 183. 217 ■' . 217, 218 ' 218 ^H Rema Genitive as Ablativo. — Genitive of Separation . . 225 Genitive after Comparative . 225, 226 Genitive with Verbs of surjiass- ing, beinfi inferior, &c 228 1. „ „ Genitive of Source . . . 226 2. „ ,, Genitive (Poetic) of Agent or Jnatruincnt 226 Genitive after Compound Verbs 226 Genitive of Prvx or Valm 227 Note. Genitive after d^tos and d{(6(» . . . 227 1. Genitive of Time within which 227 2. Genitive of Place within which (Poetic) . . . 227 Objective Genitive with Verbal Adjectives . . . 227, 228 Possessive Genitive with Adjectives denoting Posses- sion, &c 228 Genitive with Adverbs 229 Genitive Absolute (see also § 278, 1) . . . . 229 222, 223 ■jm 223 jB 222 fl 223, 224 B 224 W §189 224, 225 m ^^^^ 225 'S lY. Dative. Remark. — Various Functions of the Dative . § 184. Dative expressing to or for: — 1. Dative of Indirect Object 2. Dative after certain Intransitive Verl s . 3. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage . Note 6. Ethical Dative .... 4. Dative of Possession (with elfd, &c.) . 5. Dative denoting that with t sped to which, &c. § 185. Dative after Adjectives kindred to preceding Verbs . § 186. Dative of Eesemblance, Union, and Approach Note 1. Dative after Verbs signifying to discourse with or coTiUend with § 187. Dative after Compound Verbs .... §188. 1. Dative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Instrument Note 2. Dative after x/><4oMa*, wse . 2. Dative of Degree of Difference (with Comparatives) 3. Dative of Agent (with Perf. and Plup. Pass. ) . 4. Dative of Agent (with Verbal in -Woj or -t^ov) . 5. Dative of Accompaiiimeni (sometimes with oi>t6s) Dative of Time Dative of Place (Poetic) Note 1. Occasional Use iu Prose (Names of Attic Demes) 230 230 230, 231 231, 232 232 232 232 232 233 233 233 234 234 234 234 235 235 235 236 m xxii CONTENTS. \y- PREPOSITIONS. |§ 191, 192. Prepositions with Genitive, Dative, and Accusative 238-242 § 193. I repositions in Composition taking their own Cases . . 242 ADVERBS. § 194. Adverbs qualifying Verbs, Atyectives, and Adverbs . t48 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. Voices. § 195. Active Voice 243 § 196. Passive Voice 248 § 197. Agent after Passive Verbs (inrS and Genitive) ... 244 Note 2. Passive Construction when Active has two Cases 244 § 198. Cognate Accusative made Subject of Passive . . . 24f 245 § 199. Middle Voice (three Uses) 246, 246 Tenses. Teniei of the Indicative. § 200. Tenses of the Indicative (Time of each) .... 246-248 § 201. Primary and Secondary Tenses of Indicative . . 248 Teniei of Dependent Xoodi. § 202. Not in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and Aorist) . 248 1. Distinction between Present and Aorist in this Case 249 9. Perfect not in Indirect Discourse (seldom used) . . 249 3. Future Infinitive not in Indii'ect Discourse (exceptional) 250 4. Future Optative (used only in Indirect Discourse) . 250 § 203. Optative and Infinitive in Imiirect Discourse . 250, 251 Note 1. Present Infinitive and Optative includes Imperfect 251 Note 2. Infinitive after Verbs of Hoping, Promising, &c. (two Constructions allowed) 251 § 204. Tenses of the Participle 252 Onomie and Iterative Teniei. § 205. 1. Gnomic Present, expressing Hahit or General Truth . 252 2. Gnomic Aorist ,, ,, ,, ,« • 252,253 3. Gnomic Perfect ,, „ ,, ,, . 253 § 206. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with Aif , . . • 253 3.. CONTENTS. xxiii The Particle "Av. § 207. Two Uses of the Adverb "Av . § 208. 'Af with the Indicative 1. Never with Present or Perfect 2. Witli Future (chiefly Homeric) 3. With Secondary Tenses (see § 222) § 209. "Av with the Subjunctive § 210. "Av with the Optative (always in Apodosis) § 211. "Av with the Infinitive and Participle (in A|)odosis) § 212. Position of dv. — "Av repeated, or used in Ellipsis 263, 264 264 254 254 254 264, 265 255 265, 256 256 The Moods. General Statement and Olaiiifloation. § 213 1. Various Uses of Indicative 266, 257 2. Various Uses of Subjunctive 267 8. Various Uses of Optative 258 4. The Imperative 258 6. The Infinitive 258 § 214. Classification of Constructions of Moods .... 269 I. Final and Object Claniei after tvc^ m«, 8ir«»t, |i^. §215 Three Classes of these Clauses 259 Note 1. Negative Particle in these Clauses . . 260 § 216. Final Clauses (after all the Final Particles) : — 1. With Subjunctive and Optative .... 260 2. With Subjunctive after Secondary Tenses . . 260, 261 3. With Secondary Tenses of Indicative . . . 261 § 217. Object Clauses with 6irui after Verbs of Striving, &c. . 261, 262 Note 4. "Oirws or 6irm jui) with Fut. Ind (elliptically) 262 § 218. Object Clauses with fi-^ after Verbs oi Fearing, &c. . . 262 Note 2. MiJ or 6irws fi-ff used elliptically . . 262 Note 3. MiJ with Present or Past Tenses of Indicative 262, 263 II. Conditional (Sentences. § 219. 1. Definition of Protasis and Apodosis 2. Use of iv (Horn. Ki) in Protasis and Apodosis 3. Negative Particles in Protasis and Apodo3it . § 220. Classification of Conditional Sentences . . 263 268 263 263-267 XXIV CONTENTS. Four Forms of Ordinary FrotasU. § 221. Present and Past Conditions with simple Indicative . , 267 Note. Future sometimes used in these Conditions . 267 § 222. Present and Past Conditions with Secondary Tenses of In- dicative (dv in Apodosis) 267, 268 Note 1. "Ai* sometimes omitted in the Apodosis . . 268 Note 2. "ESet, exRW* &c. with Infin. in Apodosis (without Av) 268 § 223. Future Conditions. — Subjunctive with i&p in Protasis . 269 Note 1. Future Indicative with et in Protasis . . 269 Note 2. Ei (without &v or Ki) in Protasis (Homeric) . 269 § 224. Future Conditions. — Optative in Protasis and Apodosis 269, 270 NcvE. 'A.V very rarely omitted here .... 270 Present and Past General Suppositions. § 225. Subjunctive and Optative in Protasis Note 1. Indicative with d (occasionally) 270 270, 271 » i I Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentences. § 226. 1. Protasis contained in Participle or other Word . . 271 2. Protasis omitted. — Potential Indie, or Opt. with Hlv 271, 272 3. Infin. or Partic. in Indirect Discourse forming Apodosis 272, 273 4. Infin. (not in Indirect Discourse) forming Apodosis . 273 §227. 1. Protasis and Apodosis of different Classes . . . -273,274 2. A^ introducing an Apodosis 274 § 228. E/ after Verbs of Wondering (davfii^w), &c. . . . 274 III. Relative and Temporal Sentenoea. § 229. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent explained . . 274, 275 § 230. Relative with Definite Antecedent .... 275 § 231. Relative with Indefinite Antecedent. — Conditional Relative 275 § 232. Four Forms of Conditional Relative Sentence (corresponding to those of ordinary Protasis, §§ 221-224) . . 275, 276 § 233. Conditional Relative Sentences in Present and Past General Suppositions (as in Protasis, § 225) . . . 276, 277 Note 1. Indicative with 6 or iavep6s elfii with Participle . . . 305 Note 2. ^tjvoiSa and avyyiyvuifKu with a Participle in Norn, or Dat. SDii 293 293, 294 294 295 295 295 295, 296 If 296 296 296, 297 297 297, 298 298 298 298 298 Verbal Adjectives in -Wos and -Wov. § 281. 1. Personal Construction of Verbal in -Hos 2. Impersonal Verbal in -riov (or -ria) INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. § 282. 1. Direct and Indirect Interrogatives 2. Direct Interrogatives, — 'H, 8.pa, ov, fir), imwv 3. "AWo Ti i} ; or AWo rt ; 4. Indirect Questions wich ci (Homeric ^ or ije) 5. Alternative Questions, — USrepov . ,.1}, kc. . NEGATIVES. § 283. 1, 2. Oil or /lit; with Indie, Subj., Opt., and Imper. 3. Negative with Infinitive .... 4, 6. Negative with Participles and Adjectives 305 9m 306 307 307 807 807, 308 308 308 XXVlll CONTENTS. 6. M?7 with Infin. after Verbs with Negative Idea (§263) 308 7. Mr? oi) with Infinitive (after Negative Leading Verb) . 309 8. 9. Two or more Negatives in one Clause . , . 309, 310 PART v.— VERSIFICATION. §284. §285. Foot. — Ictus. — Rhythm and Metre Times §286. 1. Long and Short Syllables. — 2. Enumeration of Feet 3. Place of the Ictus in a Foot 4. Anacrusis 1. Resolution and Contraction 2. Syncope .... 3. Irrational Time . 4. Cyclic Dactyl and Anapaest 5. Syllaba Anceps § 287. 1. Rhythmical Series and Verse 2. Close of Verse 3. Catalexis 4. Pauses § 288. 1. Caesura .... 2. Diaeresis § 289. 1. Verses .... 2. Monometers, Dimeters, &c. 3. Rising and Falling Rhythms 4. Systems and Strophes . §§ 290, 291. Trochaic Rhythms §§ 292, 293. Iambic Rhythms §§ 294, 295. Dactylic Rhythms §§ 296, 297. Anapaestic Rhythms § 298. Anapaestic Systems Note. Iambic and Trochaic Systems §§ 299, 300. Logaoedic Rhythms" § 301. Rhythms with Feet of Five or Six Timed § 302. Dochmiacs Arsis and Thesis 311, 3i2 312 313, 314 314 314 314, 315 315 315 315 315 315, 316 316 316 316 316 316, 317 317 317 317 318 318, 319 319, 320 321, 322 322, 323 823 323 323-325 325, 326 326 APPENDIX. Catalogue of Verbs 329-360 Indexes • * • 361-393 TABLE OF PARALLEL REFERENCES. 11, 312 812 13, 314 314 314 14, 315 315 m 315 315 15, 316 316 816 316 816 16, 317 317 317 317 318 18, 319 19, 320 21, 322 22, 323 323 323 523-325 25, 326 326 This includes all cases in which references to the former edition are affected by changes in numbering made in the new edition; except those in §§ 88-132 and Part v., which are too much changed to make any such comparison possible. Old Editicm. § 3 (paragraph 2). § 4, 1, Note. § 7 (par. 2). § 9, 4, Note. § 13, 2. § 16, 1, Note. § 16, 5 (par. 2), & Notes 1 & 2. § 16, 5, N. 3. § 19, 1, Note. § 25, 3, Note. § 29, Note. § 37, 2, N. 2. § 42, 2, Note. § 47, Note. § 53, 2, N. 1. § 64 (par. 2). § 56, 1, Note. § 59, 1 (par. 2). § 59. 2. § 59, 3. § 59, 4. § 70 (end). § 70, Note. § 72, 1 (last line). § 72, 2 (end). § 77, 2, N. 4 (end). §79, 1, N.2 (last 4 par.). § 82, Note. §134, §141, §142. §142, §142, §145, §159, §163, §166, §173, 2 (par. 2). N. 6 (par. 2). 1 (par. 3). 2, N. 5. 4, N. 1 & 2. 1 (par. 3). (par. 3). Note. N. 1. 1 (par. 3). Nev> Edition. § 3, Note. § 4, 1, Note 1. § 7, Note. §9,4,Notes2&l. § 13, 2 & 3 § 16, 1, N. 2. § 16. 6, and Notes 1 &2. § 16, 6, Notes 3 & 4. § 19, 1, Note 1. § 25, 3, Notes 1, 2, 3. § 29, Notes 1 & 2. § 37, 2, Notes 2 & 3. § 42, 2, Note 1. Omitted. Omitted. § 54, Note. § 56, Note. § 59, 2. § 53, 1, N. 3. § 53, 3, N. 4. § 52, 2, N. 4. § 70, N. 1. § 70, N. 2. § 72, 1, Note. § 72, 2, Notes 1 & 2. § 77, 2, N. 5. § 79, 1, Notes 3-6. § 82, Notes 1 & 2. § 134, 3. § 141, N. 7. § 142, 1, Note (end). § 142, 2, N. 6. § 142, 4, Notes 5 & 6. § 145, 1, Note. § 159, Remark. § 163, Notes 1 & 2. Included in § 164. § 173, 1, N. 1. Old Edition. § 173, 1, Note. § 180, 2, N. 1. § 184, 3, N. 5. § 184, 3, N. 6. § 189, Note. § 190, Note. § 191, 1, 2, 3. § 192, 1-6. § 195, Note. § 201 (par. 5). § 206 (par. 3). § 207, 2 (par. 3). §210 (par. 2). § 213, 1 (par. 4). §219, 3 (par 2). § 220 Mast par.). § 223 (par. 3). § r24. Note. § 225 (par. 3). § 225 (par. 4). § 226, 2 (par. 3). § 226, 3. § 226, 3, Note. § 228 (par. 3). §232, 3 (par. 3). § 235, Note. § 239, 2, Note. § 242, 1 (par. 3). § 242, 3 (par. 2). § 244 (par. 3). §251, 2, N. 1 (par. 2). § 260, 1 (par. 3). § 261, 1, Note. §261, 2 (par. 3). § 263, 2 (par. 3). § 269 (last clause). § 279, 1. § 279, 2 & Note. § 283, 8 (par. 2). § 283, Note. New Edition. § 173, 1, N. 2. § 180, 1, Notes 1 «& 2. § 184, 3, N. 6. § 184, 3, N. 5. § 189, Notes 1 & 2. § 190, Notes 1 & 2. § 192, 1, 2, 3. § 191, 1.-VI. § 195, Notes 1 & 2. § 201, Rem. § 206, Rem. § 207, 2, Rem. § 210, Note. § 213. 1, Rem. § 219, 3, Note. § 220, Rem. 1. § 223, Rem. § 224, N. 1. § 225, Rem. § 225, N. 2. § 226, 2, N. 1. § 226, 3 & 4. § 226, 4, N. 1. § 228, Note. § 232, 3, N. § 235, 2. § 239, 2, N. 1. § 242, 1, Note. § 242, 3, Note. § 244, N. 2. § 251, 2, N. 2. § 260, 1, N. 1. § 261, 1, N. 1. § 261, 2, Rem. § 263, 2, Note. § 269, Note. § 279, 1 & 2. § 279, 4 & Note. § 283, 9. 5 283, 1, Note. GREEK GRAMMAR. INTRODUCTION. THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS. The Greek language is the language spoken by the Greek rata. In the historic period, the people of this race called themselves by the name Hellenes^ and their language Hellenic. We call them Greeks, from the Roman name Graeci. They were divided into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians. The Aeolians inhabited Aeolia (in Asia), Lesbos, Boeotia, and Thessaly ; the Dorians inhabited Peloponnesus, Doris, Crete, some cities of Caria (in Asia), with the neighboring islands. Southern Italy, and a large part of Sicily ; the lonians in- habited Ionia (in Asia), Attica, many islands in the Aegean Sea, and some other places. In the early times of which the Homeric poems are a record (before 850 B.C.), there was no such division of the whole Greek race into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians as that which was recognized in historic times ; nor was there any common name of the whole race, like the later name of Hellenes. The Homeric Hellenes were a small tribe in South-eastern Thessaly, of which Achilles was king ; and the Greeks in general were called b}' Homer Achaeans, Argives, or Danaans. 2 INTRODUCTION. The dialects of the Aeolians and the Dorians are known as the Aeofic and Doric dialects. In the language of the lonians we must distinguish the Old lonic^ the New lonic^ and the Attic dialects. The Old Ionic or Epic is the language of the Homeric poems, the oldest Greek literature. The New Ionic was the language of Ionia in the fifth century b.c, as it appears in Herodotus and Hippocrates. The Attic was the language of Athens during her period of literary eminence (from about 500 to 300 B.C.).* The Attic dialect is the most cultivated and refined form of the Greek language. It is therefore made the basis of Greek Grammar, and the other dialects are usually treated, for convenience, as if their forms were merely variations of the Attic. This is a position, however, to which the Attic has no claim on the ground of age or primitive forms, in respect to which it holds a rank below the other dialects. The literary and political importance of Athens caused her dialect gradually to supplant the others wherever Greek was spoken ; but, in this very extension to regions widely sepa- rated, the Attic dialect itself was not a little modified by various local influences, and lost some of its early purity. The universal Greek language which thus arose is called the Common Dialect. This begins with the Alexandrian period, the time of the literary eminence of Alexandria in Egypt, which dates from the accession of Ptolemy II. in 285 b.c. The name Hellenistic is given to that form of the Common Dialect which was used by the Jews of Alexandria who made • The name Ionic includes both the Old and the N"ew Ionic, but not the Attic. Wlion tlie Old and the New Tonic are to 1)6 distinguished in tlie present work, Ep. (for Epic) or Horn, (for Homeric) is used for the former, and Hdt. or Herod. (Herodotus) for the latter. INTRODUCTION. Dwn as onians nd the age of le New ).c«) as ic was [linence )d form lasis of treated, tions of iC Attic )rm8, in ;ts. sed her lek was ly sepa- ed by purity, led the period, Egypt, 5 B.C. mmon made not the bd in the former, the Septuagint version of the Old Testament (283-13.5 b.c.) and by the writers of the New Testament, all of whom were Hellenists (i.e. foreigners who spoke Gre6k). Towards the end of the twelfth century a.d., the popular Greek then spoken in the Byzantine Roman Empire began to appear in literature by the side of the scholastic ancient Greek, which had ceased to be intelligible to the common people. This poi-uiar language, the earliest form of Modern Greeks was called Romaic ('Pw/natKi;) , as the people culled themselves 'Piafiaioi. The name Romaic is now little used ; and the present language of the Greeks is called simply 'EAAi/i/iKiy, while the kingdom of Greece is 'EAAas and the people are "EXAt/vcs. The literary Greek has been greatly purified during the present century by the expulsion of foreign words and the restoration of classic forms ; and the same process has affected the spoken language, especially that of cultivated society in Athens, but to a far less extent. It is not too much to say, that the Greek of most of the news- papers now published in Athens could have been understood without difficulty by Demosthenes or Plato. The Greek language has thus an unbroken history, from Homer to the present day, of at least 2,700 years. The Greek is descended from the same original language with tlie Indian (i.e. Sanskrit), Persian, German, Slavonic, Celtic, and Italian languages, which together form the Indo- European (sometimes called the Aryan) family of languages. Greek is most closely connected with the Italian languages (including Latin), to which it bears a relation similar to the rtill closer relation between French and Spanish or Italian. This relation accounts for the striking analogies between y fi 1.1 1' i 4 INTRODUCTION. Greek and Latin, which appear in both roots and termina- tions ; and also for the less obvious analogies between Greek and the German element in English, which are seen in a few words like me, is, know, &c. PART I. LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. THE ALPHABET. § 1. The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters : -^ A B r A E z H e I K A M N n o n p T r X w n a 7 h € V ${> I K \ V f o TT P a 9 T V •A X to Equivalent. a b g d e (short) z e (long) th i k or hard c 1 m n X o (short) P r s t u or y ph kh ps o (long) Name. AXa Brjra rdfjL/jia AeKra *E y^i\6v ZijTa ^Hra Srjra KiivTra Adfi^Ba Mv m m *0 filfcpov ni 'p& Tav T yjriKop ^t i Alpha Beta Gamma Delta Epsilon Zeta Eta Theta Iota Kappa Lambda Mu Nu Xi Omicron Pi Rho Sigma Tau Upsilon Phi Chi Psi Omega Remark. The Greek v was represented by the Latin y, and was prob- ably ponounced somewhat like the French u or the German «. For remarks on Pronunciation see ths Preface. . 6 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§2. Note 1. At the end of a word the form s is used, elsewhere the form from their pronunciation are called open vowels; t and u are called c/ose vowels. § 3. The diphthongs (hl-(f>doyyoiy double sounds) are at,, av, €1, €v, 01, ov, r}v, vi, a, y, «. These are formed by the union of an open vowel with a close one ; except w, which is formed of the two close vowels. The union of a long vowel (a, rj, w) with i forms the (so called) im- proper diphthongs a, y, «. The Ionic dialect has also a diphthong cav. Note. In a, rj, w, the t is now written below the first vowel, and is called iota subscript. But with capitals it is written in the line ; as in THI K12MOIAIAI, rfj Ka)n take it upon the first vowel, even when the i is written in the line. Thus otx/r, are called surd (hushed sounds) ; the other con- sonants and the vowels are called sonant. § 7. The only consonants which can stand at the end of a Greek word are v. p, and s. If others are left at the end in forming words (cf. § 46, 1), they are dropped. Note. The only exceptions are found in the proelitics (§ 29) fK and ovK (or ovx)j which have other forms, «^ and ov. Final ^ :ind yjr (ko- and na) are no exceptions. EUPHONY OF VOWELS. COLLISION OF VOWELS. HIATUS. § 8. A succession of two vowel sounds, not forming a diph- thong, was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In tlu^ middle of a word this could be avoided ])y contraction (§9). Between two words — where it is called hintus, and was especially offensive ^ — it could be avoided by rrasis (§ 11), by elision (§ 12), or by adding a movable consonant (§ 13) to the former word. Cr\TRACTION OF VOWELS. § 9, Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, are often united by eontraction in a single long vowel or a m [§7. §9-1 EUPHONY OF VOWELS. 9 diphthong ; as ff>iXe(o, LX.(t) ; <^iXee, c^iAei ; Ti)i,ae, rifxa. It seldom takes place unless the former vowel is open (§ 2, Note). The regular use of contraction is one of the characteristics of the Attic dialect. It follows these general principles : — 1. Two vowels which can form a diphthong (§3) simply unite in one syllable ; as nCxii, nix^i ; yipdi, yepai; pato-To?, pacTos. 2. If one of the vowels is o or w, the;* are contracted into w. But €0, ooy and oe give ov. Thus Br]\6r)T€y BrfXHre ; i^iAcuxri, ^iXu)(n ; rifudofjiiv, rifjiwfiiv ; Tifidiaficv, rifiCifiev ; BrjXowy BrjXia ; — but yci/eos, ycVous ; ttAoos, ttAovs ; voe, vov. Note. In contract adjectives in oos (§ 65) o is dropped before a and Tj, ai and 17 ; as inXoa, dnXa ; dTrXd;;, dirXfj ; AnXoai, dTrXal ; dirkorjy dirXfj. 3. If the two vowels are a and c (or rj) , the first vowel sound prevails, and we have d or rj. Aa gives d, erj or rjc gives rj ; but €€ gives ct. Thus, irifiat, irifia ; Tt/u,d?yrc, Ti/xarc ; Tei;(ca, Tci;(iy ; /u,vaa, /lii/a ; ^lAciyre, ^iA^€ ; ti/ui^ci/tos, Tt/x^vros ; c^iAee, c(A6t. Note. In the first and second declensions, ta becomes 5 in the dual and plural, and in all numbers after a vowel or p (§§ 38, 65) ; it also becomes a in the third declension whenever it follows a vowel (§ 52, 2, N. 2; § 53, 3, N. 3). In the dual of the third declension tt sometimes becomes t; (§ 52, 2; § 53, 1, N. 2). In the accusative plural of the third declension fas generally becomes fis (§ 51. 2). 4. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong beginning with the same vowel. Further, c is always ab- sorbed before 01, and in contract nouns and adjectives also before at. In other cases, a simple vowel followed by a diph- thong is contracted with the ^rsif vowel of the diphthong, and the second vowel disappears unless it can be retained as iota subscript (§3) in ^, iy, or oi. Thus, /umai, /xvat ; /xvaa, /mvci; ffii\€€L, iXti ; t.\€y, '^lA^ ; Brfkooi, Si/Aoi ; vooi, vQ ; St/Aoov, BrjXov ; <6iAcot, ^tAoi ; ;^vo-€ot, ^(pva'o'i ; ;(pv ; i\€ov, ff>LX.ov ; Avcai, \vr) (v. Note 1 ) ; Xvriai, Xvy ; /xc/nn/oio, ^tfiv^o ; TrAaKoei?, TrXaKoOs (v. N. 2). Note 1. In the second person singular of the passive and middle, eat (for fam) gives a form in f i as well as that in ^ ; as Xvrat, \vri or \vn. (See § 113, 2, N. 1.) Note 2. In verbs in 6a>, oti and orj give ot ; as 8T)\6tis, 8t)\ois ; Brjkof], 8i;Xoi (cf. AirXoT], iirX^, 2, Note). Infinitives in dtiu and otti' lose I in the contracted form; as rifidfiu, Tifidv; SrjXoeiu, 8tj\ovv (§ 98, N. 5). 5. The close vowels (i and v) are contracted with a follow- ing vowel in some forms of nouns in is and vs of the third declension. (See § 53, 1, N. 3 ; § 53, 2.) Remark. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the third declen- sion, contraction is confined to certain cases ; see §§ 53, 67. For exceptions in the contraction of verbs see § 98, Notes 1, 2, 3. SYNIZESIS. § 10. In poetry, two successive vowels, not forming a diphthong, are sometimes united in pronunciation for the sake of the metre, without being contracted. This is called syni- zesis (cruvi^T/o-is, settling together). Thus. Oiol may make but one syllable in poetry ; o-n/^ea or xpvfrita may make but two. CRASIS AND ELISION. ' § 11. 1 . A vowel or diphthong at the end of a word Is often contracted with one at the beginning of the following word. This is called crasis (Kpaa-i^, mixture). The cor on is (') is placed over the contracted syllable. The first of the two words is generally an article, a relative pronoun, or kui. Crasis generally follows the laws of contraction (§9), but with these modifications : — {a.) A diphthong at the end of the first word drops its last vowel before crasis takes place. [§10. §12.] CRASIS AND ELISION. 11 {b) The article drops its final vowel or cliphthong in crasis before a. The particle roi drops oi before a ; and Kai drops tti before t], av, cu, ov, and the words ci, cis, oi, al. 2. The following are examples of crasis : — To oi/o/ia, Toxji/ofia', tu ayadd, rdyaOd] to ivavriov, TovpavrioPy 6 €K, ovK ; o cTTi, oviri ; TO ifioTiov, ooinaTiov (§ 1 / , i^ ; a uc, av ; Kat ai/, Kav ; Kai (iTa, Kara ; — 6 dvijp, di/i}p ; ol d8e\(f>oi, &8(\oi ; tco dv8pi, rdvdpi ; TO avTo, Tovro ; tov avrov, ravTov ; — Tot up, rav (/xtWot av, fievrav^ ; Tot Spa, Tapa; — »cat auToj, Kavros', Koi avrrf, )(aijTT) (§17, 1); Ka\ ft, Kfl ; Kai oi), Kov ; Ka\ oi, )(ol ] Ka\ at, ;^at- So tyu oiba, tyada ; 2) avOpamf, uvdpumf ; rfj inapjif Ttynapfi j Trpot\a>v, Trpoijxoiv. Note 1. If the first word is an article or relative with the rough breathing, this breathing is retained on the contracted syllable, taking the place of the coronis ; as in &v, &vT)p. Note 2. In crasis, erepos takes the form artpos, — whence Qarepov, 6»aTf>a), &c. (§11, 1, i; §17,1.) Note 3. Crasis, like contraction (§ 10), may be left to pronun- ciation in poetiy. Thus, /iij ov makes one syllable in poetry; so pi} flbevai, fTTfl ov. Note 4. A short vowel at the beginning of a word is sometimes dropped after a long vowel or a diphthong. This is called aphaeresis (^d for p.fi tyto; nov *ariv for ttoC (OTiv] cyo) *(f)diniv for tyo) (n(o. So ((p!* fTtpia'^ vvxff o\t}v for viiKTa oXrjv (§ 17, 1; 16, 1). 2. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it comes before a vowel in forming a compound word. Here no apos- trophe is used. B,g. *An-atT«'a) (diro and aheoi), bi-e^dKov (8td and ?/3aXoi/). So d(f)-aip((o Cdrrd and aiptw, § 17, 1) ; 8f\-T)pfpos (Se/ca and r)p,fpa). 12 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§13. Note 1. The poets sometimes elide at in the verbal endings /xat, o-oj, Tat, and o-^at. So oi in ot/xot, and larely in fioi. Note 2. The prepositions nfoi and np6, the conjunction ot;, that, and datives in t of the third declension, are not elided in Attic Greek. The fonn or stands for oxf, token. Note 3. The poets sometimes cut off a short vowel even before a con- sonant. Thus in Homer we find dp, Av, k6.t, and irdp, for Upa, dvd, Kurd, and irapd. In composition, Kdr assimilates its r to a following consonant and drops it before two consonants; as /cdj3j8a\e and KdKxave, for Kari^aXe and KariKTave ; — but KaTdaveif for KaraBaveiv (§ 15, 1). Note 4. Elision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain writers (as Thucydides). Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use. MOVABLE consonants. § 13. 1. Most words ending in on, and all verbs of the third person ending in e, add v when the next word begins with a vowel. This is called v movable. E.g. liatn 8i8a>Kfv (Kflva. So dibaai /not; but bidaxrip €fiot. Note 1. *Eoti takes v movable, like third persons in o-t. The Epic Ke (for av) adds v before a vowel. The enclitic vvv has an Epic form vv. Many adverbs in -dev (as rrpoadep) have poetic forms in -df. Note 2. N movable may be added at the end of a sentence or of a line of poetry. It may be added even before a consonant in poetry, to make position (§ 19, 2). 2. Ov, not, becomes ovk before a smooth vowel, and ovx before a rough vowel ; as ovk avros, ovx ovra. M-q inserts k in ixrjK-eri, no longer, (like ovk-€ti) . 'Ek, from, becomes c| (cks) before a vowel ; as ck 7roAf<«>s, but ii aoTcos. 3. Ov. j>9, thus, and some other words may drop s before a consonant ; as ovruys c^ci, ovru) doKci. i §16.] EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. 13 METATHESIS AND SYNCOPE. § 14. 1 . Metathesis is the transposition of two letters in a word ; as in Kpdroq and Kopro?, strength ; 6dp(To<: and Spdao^, courage. (See § 109, 7, a.) 2. Syncope is the omission of a vowel from the middle of a word ; as in TTa.ripoKa, Epic perfect of /SXcuo-ko), go, from stem /ioX-, /iXo-, (/iXo>-, § 109, 1), /Lie-^Xa)-Ko, fif-fi^Xat-Ka. At the beginning of a word such a /bi is dropped before /3; as in /SpoTos, mo-tal, from stem pop-, upo- (cf. Lat. morior, die), fi^po-ros, /SpoToj; so /SXtTTO), , xx» ^.nd 66, Thus Sa7r(o, Ba»c;(os, Kar^avai', not 2a(^<^u>, Ba;^os, Ka66avv,v (§ 12, N. 3). So in Latin, Sappho^ Bacchus. 2. Initial p is doubled when a vowel precedes it in forming a compound word ; as in dvappvm-ta {dvd and piirrm) . So after the syllabic augment ; as in tppL-jrrov (imperfect of pivroi) . But after a diphthong it remains single ; as in €vpoo), ypdyjroi (for ypa(f>-(Ta>), \(^a> (for Xcy-cro)) n(i(Toi> (for TTft^-tro)), atrui (for afi-ao)), (rdypaai (for cr (for*0X€/S-O, e'XTrtv (for {"XttiS-s), vv^ (for vvKT-s). See examples under § 46, 2. 3. Before /*, a labial mute (tt, j8, <^) becomes /a ; a palatal mute (k, X ' becomes y ; and a lingual mute (t, 8, 0) becomes (T. E.g. A(\€ipp.ai (for XeXeiTT-pai), rerpippai (for rerpi^-fiai), yty pap.p.ai (for yfypa. 4. In passive and middle endings, ), (Tvpptat (for trvv-pta}). MtXdf (for /ifXav-s). <« (lor eVj), Xvovo-i (for Xuo-i/o-t, § 112, 2, Note). So f(nr(i(T-fim (from 07r€i'8&)) for ((nrfvb-fiai, (trirevfr-fiai (§ 16, 3). Note 1. The combinations w, v8, v6, are often dropped together before o- (§ 16, 2 and 6), and the preceding vowel is lengthened, as above (§ 16, 6); as wao-t (for iravr-ai), yiyds (for ytyaws), Xe'ouo-t (for XfovT-trt), Tttffto-i (dat. plur. for riQf m-aC), riBfis (for ridtw-s), 8ovs (for fioi/T-r), a-nda-oi (for o-7rav-(rai. (See § 97, 4, with N. 2.) 7. The following changes occur when •,, representing an original j of the root ja (pronounced ya), follows the final consonant of a stem. (a) Palatals (x, y, x) and rarely other mutes with such an i be- come a-a- (later Attic tt) ; as (f)v\d (ray-), forrny-t-cD; (Xda-arav, less, for eXax-i-av (comp. of ptxpor, § 73) ; rapao-o-o) (rnpa^-) , for Tapa;^-t-paS-), for ; Kpd^-0) (', p.((av-), for (frnv-i-ot (cf. Lat. fug-i-o from stem fug-)', rdv-ta (t«i/-), for rcv-i-a>; dutlpwv (^Afitv-), better, for dfitp-i-tav, xtip; xpt^i/o) (»(pt»/-), for icptv-i-a (« be- coming t) dfiCvat (a/iiJi^), for aftvi^-(-a>; (r<$po) for avp-i-at (v'i becoming v). So fifXaiva rfem. of /xcXar, black, stem /ifXav-) for /irXav-t-a (§67); adtTfipa (lem. of aarrip, saving, saviour, blcm crur^p-), for (Towfp-i-a. § 17. 1 . When a smooth mute (tt, k, t) is brought before a rough vowel (either by elision or in forming a compound word) , it is itself* made rough. £.y. *AiTffu (ior dn-irjpi), KaOaipta (for Kor-atpcca), a^' 5>i' (for dno iv), vvxff oX>;i/ (for vvKTa Sknu, § 12, 1 ; § 16, 1). So in crasis, where the rough breathing may affect even a conso- nant not immediately preceding it. (See examples in § 11, 2.) Note. The Ionic dialect does not observe this principle, but has (for example) citt^ oH, dirirfpi (from diro and Irfpi). 2. In reduplications (§ 101, 1) an initial rough mute is always made smooth, to avoid two rough consonants in suc- cessive syllables. E.g. Tl€; Ktxriva (for x^XV^")* perf. •oixdoKd', TfBrjKa (for 6 driKa), perf. of ^aXXa>. So in rl-Brfpn (for ei-er^pt), § 121, 3. Note. A similar change takes place in a few verbs which origi- nally had two rough consonants in the stem ; as rpt^w (stem rptf^' for 6pt<^-), nourish, f ut. 6pfy^Tjv, from ffaTrrw {Ta- for oa(f>-\ bury; see also Bpxmra, Tv, and stem (dair-), in the Catalogue of Verbs. So in fTvOriv (for tBvdrjv) from $vdv6r]Ti (for tJMvOrj-Bi) ; but i^avrj^Oi. [Sir. «19-] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. IT \-a)y for eap, for lius). is then ' (fxiV-t-fO dfiflvav Xtp-i-oav I) (ti be- ecoming fxfXav-i-a tp-), for t before [npound OTTO &v), a conso- .2.) but has mute is in Buc- a), perf. hifn (for ich origi- Bin rptif)' [rptx- for , bury ; Verbs. r)y) from and in ) the first V^I. N. 3. 3ive be- rjTi (for SYLLABLES. § 18. 1. A Greek word lias as many syllables as it has separate vowels or dlplithonj^s. The syllable next to the last is called the peftult (pen-ultima, almost last) ; the one before the penult is called the antepenult. 2. A pure syllable is one whose vowel or diphthong immediately follows another vowel or diphthong ; as the last syllable of ^iXio), oIkiu, '^^pva-eo^. Note. In most editions of the Greek authors, the followh'g rules are observed in dividing syllables at the end of a line : — 1. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin a word (which can be seen from the Lexicon), and mutes followed by p or V, are placed at the beginning of a syllable. Other combi- nations of consonants are divided : tlius, e-^o), t'-yu), f-ant-pa, vt-Krap, u-Kpfj, Se-vpos, pi-Kp6v, Trpd-ypa-Tos, irpd(r-; and u> and all diphthongH are long by nature ; c and o are short by nature. (See § 2.) When a, t, and v are not long by position, their quantity must generally be learned by observation. But it is to be I'cmembered that 1 . Every vowel arising from contraction or crasis is long ; as a in yc'pd (for yepaa), UKutv (for dcKu>v), and Kav (for Ktti dv). 2. The endings a? and vq are long when v or vr has been dropped before a- (§ 16, 6, and N. 1). 3. The accent often shows the quantity of a vowel. (See §21, 1; §22.) The quantity of the terminations of nouns and verbs will be stated below in the proper places. ACCENT. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. § 21. 1. There are three accents, the acute, ('), the grave (^), and the cirrumflex ("). The acute can stand only on one of the last three syllables of a word, tlie cir- cumflex only on one of the last two, and the grave only on the last. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable long by nature. Remark. The marks of accent were invented by Aristophanes of Byzantium, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 B. c, in order to teach foreigners the correct accent in [)ronouncing Greek. By the ancient theory every syllable not having either the acute or the circumflex was said to have the grave accent ; and the circumflex, originally formed thus '\ was said to result from the union of an acute and a following grave. [§ 20. conipo- it onec. c and o [uantity is to be is long ; KOI av) . las been . (See } will be 22,] ACCENT. 19 Note 1. The grave accent is never used except in jiluce of the iicute in the cu.s(; nuMitiontul in § 'Jli, I, anil uccusiunully un the indefinite pronoun m, rt (§ 81). NoTK 2. The accent (like the breathing) stands on the second vowel of a diphthong. (See § 4, 1, Note 1.) 2. A word is called oxytone {sharp-toned) when it has the acute on the last syllable ; paruxt/tone, when it has the acute on the penult ; proparoxytone^ whon it lias the acute on the antepenult. A word is called perispomenon when it has the circumflex on the last syllable ; properispoinenon, when it has the circum- flex on the penult. These terms refer to the shape of the mark ( '^ " * ) as twisted, or circumjlexed, Trepio-Troj/Aci'os. A word is called barytone {grave or Jlat-toned) when its last syllable has no accent, i.e. when (on the ancient theory) it has the grave accent. 3. When a word throws its accent as far back as possible (§ 22), it is said to have recessive accent. This is especiall}' the case with verbs (§ 26). (See § 25, 1, Note.) ('). the |,n stand the cir- ve only syllable phanes of r to te.ich le ancient mflex was ly formed following § 22. !• The antepenult cannot be accented if the last syllable is long either by nature or by position. If accented, it takes the acute ; as TreXe/cu?, dvdptDTro^. 2. The penult, if accented, takes the circumflex if it is long by nature and if at the same time the last syllable is short by nature; as p^rjXov, vrfaof;, ^\i^. Otherwise, if accented, it takes the acute. Note 1. Final at and ot are considered short in determining the accent; as avOpamoi, pfjaoi: except in the optative mood, and in tlie adverb oikoi, at home ; as rt/i^o-at, Trot^o-oi (not rintjaai or iroitjffoi). Note 2. Genitives in cws and ewv from nouns in ts and vs of the third declension (§ 53, 1, N. 2), all cases of nouns and adjectives in ws and uv of the Attic second declension (§ 42, 2), and the Ionic genitive in c« of the first (§ 39, 3), allow the acute on the antepenult ; as ivJjyewv, irdXtus, Ti/ipeu (T^Tjs). For Cbairep, oX5c, &c., see § 28, N. 3. 20 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§23. ."! S § 23. !• An oxytone changes its acute to the grave before other words in the same sentence ; as tov<; irovrj- povi, and dvri- In Homer it occurs when a preposition follows a verb from which it is separated by tmesis (§ 191, N. 3); as o\fi\ffT€ , Tifiui f I'om r(/ida> ; \ffiauii. This proceeds from the ancient principle inf. fll« fivfllinflpY f^ninna fi*n.iTi ' niwl ' iiairoi* -fv/-*!!! circumflex comes from ' and ' , never from gives Ti}i£i, but jSf^awy gives /3f/3a)s Note. If neitiicr of the original syllables had an accent, the accent is not affected by co.\traction ; as rlfxa for rt'/xae. Some exceptions to the lule of § 24, 1 will be noticed under the declensions. (See § 43, Note; § Go.) 2. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost and that of the second remains ; as rtiya^a for ra dyaOdy ty<38tt for cyo> oi3u, KuTu for Kai cira ; ruAAa for ra uAXa. 3. In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose tl>"ir accent with the elided vowel ; other oxytones throw the [§23. §25.] ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 21 accent back to the penult, but without changing the acute to tb3 grave (§ 23, 1, Note). E.g. 'Ett' avT(a for eVl avT^, aXX' thttv lor oKKa (infu, <^r)^ (ya> for (j)rjfu (ya>, KCLK cttt; for kokci en-i;. ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. § 25. 1 • The place of the accent in the nominative singu- lar must generally be learned by observation. The other cases accent the same syllable as ♦he nominative, if the last sellable permits (§ 22) ; otherwise, the following syllable. E.g. OaXaffffa, ^aXdacnjs, 6aKacr(Tav, OuKavaai, doKaaaais ; Kopa^, KopoKoSt KopaKfs, KopaKiov] irpayfutf irpdyp-aros, 7rpuy/iaTo)j/ ; oSovs, odoPTos, 6^6vtu)i/, oSovaiv. The kind of accent is determined as usual (§ 22); as j/^o-os, vrjaov, v^trou, v^aoi, vrjaon. (See also § 25, 2.) Note. The following nouns and adjectives have recessive accent (§21, 3) : — {a) contracted adjectives in oos (§ 43, N. 3): (b) the neuter singular and vocative singular of adjectives in wv, ov (except those in p(av, compounds of (ppriv), and the neuter of comparatives in (av\ as et)5cU- liwv, €iS5aifj.ov (§ 66) ; /SeXrfwi', PiXrlou (§ 72, 2) ; but Satippuv, dattppov : (c) many barytone compounds in tjs in all forms ; as a^rd/jKijs, aUrapKes, gen. pi. avrdpKwv ; tpiXa'K'ridrfs, r, slave, s, light, ovs, ear, and a few others, violate the last rule in the genitive dual and plural ; so nas, all, in both genitive and dative plural : as irals, irai86s, iraiSi, nauri, but iraihav ; way, -iravros, navri, ndvrav, jratrt. Note 2. The interrogative ris, tIvos, rivi, &c., always accents the first syllable. So do all monosyllabic participles; as &u, ovros, ovri, ovTwv, o^o"t; /3as, ^dvTos. Note 3. Some further exceptions occur in irregular nouns, and others will be noticed under the different declensions. \ I ACCENT OF VERBS. (' i I § 26. Verbs throw the accent as far back as the last syllable permits ; as l3ov\evv, has d>iK(ov (not (hiKeov), (bikovv (§ 69). Note 3. The chief exceptions to the principle just stated (§ 26) are these : — (1.) The following forms accent the penult : the first aorist active infinitive, the second aorist middle infinitive, the perfect passive infinitive and participle, and all infinitives in rat or ptv (except those in ptvai). Thus, ^ovXtva-ai, ytvtaSai^ 'XiKvvBai, XfXw- ptuos, iaravai, 8i86vat, XcXuKffat, 86ptv and 86p(vai (both Epic for iovpai) . Add the compounds of 8df, «, dts, and i, (r<^tV, o-«^€, o-^oic, (r^coiV, ar€u)Vy (Tc^eas, (r<^as, (T€a, to, cC, €^€i', /aiV, wV, § 79, 1). 2. The indefinite pronoun tIs, ti, in all its forms ; also the indefinite adverbs Trov, tfo^i, 717;, iroi, tto^cV, Trore, 7ro9 rts, KaXSts rjr), honor. In tiw, therefore, the stem of the verb and the root are the same. I The stem itself may be modified and assume various forms in different parts of a noun or verb. Thus the same ver^'J stem may in different tenses appear as Xiir-, Xctn-, and Xotn--; and the same nominal stem may appear as rifia- and rifii]-. § 33. 1. There are three numbers ; the singular, the dual, and the plural. The singular denotes one object, the plural more than one. The dual is sometimes used to denote two objects, but even here the plural is movp, common. §33.] INFLECTION. 27 4 2. There are three genders; the masculine, the fem- inine, and the neuter. Note 1. The f/rammatical gender in Greek is very often different from the natural gender. Especially many names of things are masculine or feminine. A Greek noun is called masculine, femi- nine, or neuter, when it requires an adjective or article to take the form adapted to either of these g'aders. The gender is often indi- cated by prefixing the article ; hs (6) dv^p, man ; (Jf) yvvfi, looman ; (to) npayfia, thing. (See § 78.) Note 2. Nouns which may be either masculine or feminine are said to be of the common gender: as (6, 17) ^for, God or Goddess. Names of animals which include both sexes, but have only one grammatical gender, are called epicene (cVikoivos) ; as 6 deros, the eagle ; fj d\nrj^, the fox. Note 3. The gender must often be learned by observation. But names of males are generally masculine, and names of females fem- inine. Most names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine; and most names of countries, towns, trees, and islands are feminine. Most nouns denoting qualities or conditions are feminine; as fj dptrr], virtue, eKiris, hope. Diminutive nouns are neuter; as naidiov, child. Other rules are given under the declensions (§§ 35, 40, 58) and in § 129. 3. There are five cases; the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative. The nominative and vocative plural are always alike. In neuters, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are alike in all numbers ; and in the plural these cases end in a. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are always alike ; and the genitiv e and dative dual are always alike. Note 1. The cases have in general the same meaning as the cor- responding cases in Latin; as Norn, a man (as subjectj, Gen. of a man, Dat. to or for a man, Accus. a mar (as object), Voc. man. The chief functions of the Latin ablative are divided between the Greek genitive and dative. (See Remark before § l.':7.) Note 2. All the cases except the nominative and vocative are called obliqu£ cases. 28 INFLECTION. LS34. NOUNS. § 34. There are three declensions of nouns, in which also all adjectives and participles are included. Thusc correspond in general to the first three declensions in Latin. (See § 45, 2, Note). The first is sometimes called the A declension, and the second the declension; these two together are sometimes called th^ Voi^el declension^ as opposed to the third or Consonant declension (§ 4.5, 1). The principles which are commoii to adjectives, participles, and g"! jtantives are given under the three declensions of nouns. Note. The name noun (6voiia), according to ancient usage, includes both substantives and adjectives. But by niot'.ern custom noun is often used as synonymous with substr.iitiv^e, and it is so used in tho present work. \i . I FIRST DECLENSION. Ir! § 35. Stems of the first declension end originally in a, which is often modified into r) in the singular. The nom- inative singular of feminines ends in a or ?; ; that of mas- culines ends in a? or i;?. § 36. The following table shows the terminations in all the cases of this declension. These consist of the final a (or 17) of the stem united with the case-endings (§32,2). See § 4i;, 2, N. Sthgular. Dual. Plural. Fi'inhiine. AfascuHne. Ma:,c. and Fern. Masc. and Fern. N. a 1, as T)s N. ai Ct. as or t|s TjS ou {for ac) N. A. V. d G. wv (for d«v) P. ^ orH Tl t ^ G. D. atv D. ais A. OV t)V dv T|V A. ds V. a ij tt aori) V. «<. IS 34. §37.] FIRST DECLENSION. 29 NfJir)v ; PI. yvCifiat, yvo)fx5>v, &C. TTfipa, attempt, ireipa?, Trupq., inlpav ; PI. Trcipai, Trciputv, &C. 2. Nouns ending in a preceded by e, t, or p, and a few proper names, retain a throughout the singular, and are II 80 INFLECTION. [§88. declined like oUia or x^P^ (those with a like ye^vpa or trelpa). Other nouns in a are declined like Movaa. NoTK 1. The nouns in tjs which have a in the vocative singuhir (like TToXiTijr) are chiefly those in njs, national apiHjllutives (like TJf pKf| ('E/3/ieaj) 'Ep|i{)s G. (/uciia;) |ivas ((Tv/ceas) M^as) 'Ep|ias ( 'E/>/ita() 'Eppiat NoTK 1. Bop/ar, North wind, which appears uncontracted in Attic, has also a contracted form Boppas, (with irregular p^), gen. (of Doric form, § 39, 3) Boppu, dat. bopp^, ace. Ooppau, voc. Buppa. Note 2. J'or ca contracted to d in the dual and the accusative jdural, see § 9, 8, Note. For contract adjectives of this class, see § 65. Dialects. § 39. 1. Ionic j;, r)s, rj, T)u, in the singular, for d, as, 9, dv. Doric d, as, 9, av, for 1;, &c. in the same cases. (See § 30.) The Ionic generally uses the uncontracted forms of contract nouns. 2. Nom. Siny. Horn, sometimes a for rjs; as lirnoTa for fn-TroVi;?, horseman. (Compare Latin poeta = iroiTjrfjs-) 3. Gen. Siny. For ov, Ilom. ao, eo), sometimes o; as 'Arpet'Sao, 'Arpet'dco), /Sopeo) : Ildt. (a>, rarely ea> for ifto (sometimes coo in old Attic proper names) : Doric d (rarely in Attic nouns in as). 4. Gen. Plur. Horn. d(ou, eau (whence, by contraction, Attic av, J)oric av) ; as vavrduv, vavTiwv (Att. vavroiv) : Hdt. iav. 5. Dat. Plur. Poetic ato-t, Hom. r/ai, ^s] Hdt. jjs', as rt/natat, MoixTj/fn or Moucn/r (for Movcats). . SECOND DECLENSION. § 40. The nominative singular of most nouns of the second declension ends in 09 or ov (gen. ov). Those in 09 are masculine, rarely feminine ; those in ov are neuter. NoTK. The stem of nouns of this declension ends in o, which is sometimes lengthened to a. It becomes e in the vocative singular ; and a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of neuters. § 41. The following table shows tlie terminations of nouns in OS and ov in this declension, that is, the final o of the stem (with its modifications) united with the case-endings : — "i >. *: 8S INFLECTION. [§42. Singula 11. Dual. Plukal. Afusc. it' Fein. Neuter. Afasc, Fern., «fr Neuter. Masc. it; Fem. Neut N. ot ov N. ot, & G. ov (for 00) N. A. V. w (foi o) G. Mv (fur owv) D. (p I'ur Oi) U. D. oiv 1). Oil A, W A. ov« (for ovt) & V. t OV V. 01 a Note. Looking at the original forms of these terminations (§ 36, Note), we see the stem in o in all the cases except in the vocative singular in e and the neuter plural in a. (See § 45, 2, Note.) § 42. 1. The nouns (o) \0709, word^ (Jf) vrjaoti, island^ (o, r;) avdptoTTO'i, man or human being^ (Jf) 6h6f. 2. A few masculine and feminine nouns of this de- clension end in w? (gen. a>), and a few neuters in . So 'Adats, TAi/^Atfo)!/ or*A^o); Km, t^v KStv or K and o» into CO (not <5). See § 24, 1. 2. Adjectives in eos circumflex the last syllable of all contract forms; as xpvfrcoi., xpvaovs (not vpvaovs, § 24, 1), golden. So Kavtov, Kavovp, basket. Except a> in the aual, just mentioned. 3. The contracted forms of compounds in oos follow the accent of the conlrac*ed nominative singular; as duTiiruooi, avrinvovs, blowing ag::in,st, gen. avrintfoov, dvriTrvov (not dvrinvov), &c. For ea contracted to a in the neuter plural, see § 9, 3, Note. Dialects. § 44. 1. Oen. Sing. Epic oio (for q/o), Doric o> (for oo)', as Gfoio, fifya\a>. Attic ov is contracted from oo. 2. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Epic ouv for oiv\, as lirvoiiv. 3. Dat. Plur. Ionic and pcptic ouri for oiy ; as tmroKri. 4. A re. Plur. Doric wy or or for ovs ; as vofian, tois "Kvkos. 5. The Ionic generally omits contraction. THIRD DECLENSION. § 45. 1. This declension includes all nouns not be- longing to either the first or the second. Its genitive singular ends in c? (sometimes w?). [§44. §45.] THIRD DECLENSION. 85 Note. This is often called the ConsonarU Declension (§ 34), because the stem here generally ends in a consonant. Some stems, however, end in a close vowel (t or u), some in a diphthong, and a few in o. The last two are supposed to have ended originally in a consonant (f or (Lat. t, ai, ae, o). Accus. Masc. and fem. 1st and 2nd l for fi (Lat. m) ; 3rd v (T^at. m), or a for av or afi (Lat. em), cf. ripm-v with Lat. turri-m, o-86vr-a(y) with Lat. dent-em. Dual. N. A, V. 1st and 2nd a and o of stem lengthened to a and v\aK-os', yv^, vulture, yvir-os; «, f\m8-os (§ 16, 2); xap^s, grace, \dpiT-os', opvts< bird, opvi$-os; vv^, night, i>vKT-6i\ fida-Ti^, scourge, pda-Tiy-os', (rdXniy^i trumpet, ad\Tnyy-os. So Aidr, AJax, Atai/r-os (§ 16, 6, N. 1); \v(ras, Xvaavr-os '^ nds, iravr-os', rideis, Ti6eirr-os', \api- eis, vapievT-os', dtiKviis (v), dfiKvvi/r-os. (The neuters of the last five words, Xvtrav, nav, rtdev, xaplfv, and 8eiKvvv, are given under § 46, 1.) 3. Masculine and feminine stems in v and p lengthen the last vowel, if it is short, but are otherwise unchanged in the nominative. HJ.g. Aibiv, age, aiau-os', 8aip,a)u, divinity, 8aipop-os', Xipfjv, harbor, Xipiv- os; Btjp, beast, $r)p-6s', drip, air, dip-os. Exceptions are pcXdr, black, peXap-ut', rdXas, wretched, rdXav-os', els, one, tv-os; KTfis, comb, Krtv-os', pis, nose, pip-os', which add s- 4. Masculine stems in ovt generally drop r, and form the nominative like stems in i/ (§ 46, 3). E.g. \f (OP, lion, XeoPT-os] Xiy/i( change ovt to ovi (§ 46, 2); as StSovr, (I'uHng, Movt-os (§ 10, 0, N. 1). So a few nouns in ous; as ohovs, tooth, obovr-os. Neuters in ovt- are regular (§ 46, 1). In TTovff, noh-os, foot, -o8i becomes -ovs. Note 2. The perfect active participle (§ 68), with a stem in or, forms its nominative in tos (masc.) and os (neut.) ; as XeXvKoif, hav- ing loosed, XtXvKos, gen. XfXvKor-os. Note 3. For nominatives in r)s (es) and os, gen. eoi, see § 52, 1, Note. A few other peculiar formations in contract nouns will be noticed below, §§ 53-56. and Accusative Singular. § 47. 1 • Most masculines and feminines with stems ending in a consonant form the accusative singular by adding a to the stem ; as (fivka^ (0uAaK-), <^i'AaKa ; AeW (Acovt-), lion^ Ac- OVTU. 2. Nouns in 19, o^, aus, and ovs, if the stem ends in a vowel or diphthong, change s of the nominative to i/ ; as tto'Ais, state, TToAii' ; Ix^v's, fish, l)(6vv ; vav^, ship, vavv ', /3ovq, ox, ^ovv. But if the stem ends in a consonant, barytones of these classes have v in prose (rarel}'^ a) and 1/ or a in poetry, while others have only the form in a ; as Ipi?, strife, cpiv (poet, also IpiSa) ; 6pvipov') , continent, voc. a-wffipov. But if the last syllable is accented, the vocative is the same as the nominative ; as X. ifir]v (Xifitv-) , harbor, voc. Xip-^v ; uWyp (ai^cp-),, sky, voc. ai07]p. (b) In barytone nouns and adjectives whose stems end in vT, final T of the stem being dropped (§ 7) ; as yiya9 (yiyavr-), giant, \OC. yiyav; AtW {Xeovr), lion, \0C. Aeoi/ ; )(apUiq {^a- puvT-), graceful, voc. x'^P^^^' But all participles of the third declension have the A'ocative and nominative alike. (Compare kvviv, lov»iiiy, voc. \vm; with XcW, lion, voc. \iov.) (c) In nouns and adjectives in is (except those in Is Ivo^), €vs, vs, and avs. These drop s of the nominative to form the vocative; as rv/jams (rvpawih-), tyranny, voc. rvpawi (§ 7) ; TToAis (TToAt-) , state, voc. ttoXi ; i\Ovi, l\Ov ; /iaaiXevs, fiatriXtv (§ 53, 3, N. 1) ; y/oavs, ypaC (§ 54, Note) ; iraU (for Trais), TTOL (for Trai). So in /3ovs, )8oi) (§ 54), and sometimes in OiSiTTous, OlSiirov, Oedipus. (d) In nouns and adjectives in t/s, gen. to; (ois). These form the vocative in cs (§ 52) ; as SwK/jaTT^s, voc. StoK/aarcs (v. Note) ; rpn^pr)^, voc. rpi^pcs ; dXry^iys, VOC. dAiy^e's. Note. For the recessive accent of many vocatives, as 'Aydfie/ivov, Ztiffpo- Tfi, "AvoWov, KaK68aifJLov, see § 25, 1, Note. 3. Nouns in w, gen. ous (§ 55), form the vocative in oi. So a few in civ, gen. oOs (§ 55, N. 2) ; as arjStav, voc. diySoi. [§48. / WvJ.^v /ff^iv r ■ §60.] THIRD DECLENSION. 89 Dative Plural. § 49. The dative plural is formed bj^ adding a-i to tiie stem. E.g. *vXa^ {(f)v\aK-), (f>v\a^i ', pfj Totp (prjrop-), pfjTopai ; e\ms (f\nt8-), f\iTi(Ti] iroiis (ttoS-), iroai ; Xewu (Xfo>T-), Xeovat ; ^iii^vXaK-) Tj (^Xc^-) TJ (troXiriYY-) 6 (Xcovt-) watchman. vein. Singular. truvipet. lion. N. G. D. A. V. t»XaS <|>vXaKos <^vXaKi <^vXaKa <|»vXa$ 4.x^ <|>Xcpds Xcp£ <|»X^^ Dual. ordXiriY$ crdXiriYYOS o-dXiriYyi cdXiriyya cdXiriYt X^VTOS X^OVTi X^ovra X^v N. A. V. G. D. ^vXaKc ^vXdKOiv XcPotv Plural. vXaKcs ^vXdKttv ^vXa(t ^vXaKas 4»xvos 8a£)iovi 8aC|iova Salfiov 8al)M>vc 8ai|u>'voiv 8a(|u>v(s Sai|ioVwv 8aC|M|ia CtifUliTOS crcG|iaTi Simular. iripas ■r^aros "Tjirop iiiraTos <|iraTt N. A. V. G. D. trMparc a-w|fcdroiv Dual. iripaTt ircpdroiv 4jiraTe I^OTOIV N. A. V. G. D. €a) -yivt, G frpLiipewv) Tp.rjpwv YcWttV Ycvwv D. Tpi^P'Tl ■y^v«rt A. hpi/jpfai) TpiVjpets (761/60) -y^vt] Tote 1. Like the singular o*" TiJifjprjs are declined proper names ill tjs, gen. («os) our, as ^rjfiotrdfvrjs, ScoKparrys : for accusatives in rjv 1 iee § 60, 1 (>') i auu for the accent of the vocatives Arffioadevts, w 2a)KpaT(i, &c., see § 25, 1, Note. Tpirjprjs has recessive accent in the contracted genitive and dative dual and gen. plural. Some other adjectives in rjs have this in all forms (§ 25, 1, N. ; § 66). Note 2. When the termination ea is preceded by a vowel, it is generally contracted into a; as vyifjs, healthy, accus. sing. vyUa, vy ' (sometimes vyt^); XP*°^' ''^*'' ^^- ^- ^' P^"*'- XPrt)X^oiv Plural. dcrWoiv N. V. (ir6\ffs) trtfXcis (ir^X«s) •T^X'W {dare a) dorrii G. ir<$Xciiiv ir^X«"V iLvriwv D. ir6X«n irVjx«o-t 6.« N. A. V. ixev« G. lX0^v D. lxe« (Horn. IxOv:) G. D. Ixdvoiv D. IxMcn. A. IxWv A. dxeias) ixeo* V. IxW Note 1. "Eyxf^vs, eel, is declined like IxBvs in the singular, and like itrjxvs in the plural. 'i! §54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 45 NoTF. 2. Adjectives in vs are declined in the masculine like nfjxvs, and in the neuter lilie nv. Thus, Ilft/jatfus, Peiraeiis, gen. Iletpatews, Ilftpata*;, accus. JJf ipaUa, Uftpaia'i [xo^^^r] (i kiv/)of-, and mf- twfoie a vowel of the ending (conipai-e the Latin bov-is and nav-is). Afterwards F was dropped, leaving /3o-, -ypd-, and I'd-. (See § 53, 3, N. 1.) In Doric and Ionic, vavj is much more regular in its declension than in Attic : Dor. voOs, vd6i, mi, vavv ; pi. »»a«j, vdCnr, i/apfft or vdtffffi, vaat. Ion. vrivs, vi}6s or v(6:, vrjl, v^a or via ; pi. v^s or via, vijiii* or veuv, vrivffl (vT^taai or I'^eaffi), vrjas or I'^oj. In Attic, it changes va- to cc- or vt}: STEMS IN on fi. § 55. Some feminincs in o\ contract 6o, in the accusative singu- lar) ; as aida>r« aidovs^ atdot, a(dr, hcro^ rjpiaos^ fjpo'h or ffptp, fjpwa or rjpiat &c. NoTK 2. A few nouns in tav (untiv, iimujp, and ar^hmv, nif/hthiffale) occasionally have forms like those of nouns in «o; as gen. cuoOr, drjiovs ; accus «uca ; voc. dtjfioi. NoTK 3. The uncontracted forms of these nouns in oos^ 6t, and 6a are not used. Herodotus has an accusative singular in ovv ; as 'lovv for *1«, from 'I©, Jo, gen. *loCt. STEMS IN AS, on IN AS AND AT. § 56. 1. Neuters in as, gen. aos, are contracted when the o of the stem is followed by a vowel ; as (t6) yfpa9 ; dat. Kcpdri (Kcpai) Kcpai;plur. KtpaTa (Kcpaa) Kcpd ; gen. Kcpdroiv (Kcpauii') Kcpwv ; dat. Ktpaxn. Note. The original stem of nouns in as, gen. aot, is supposed to have ended in oir;Tept) AyfirjTp. \ accus. {Arjfir'jTepa) ArjfxrjTpa ] VOC. ArjfirjTip, I §60.] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 49 Ctoiider of the Third Declension* § 58. The gender of many nouns in this declension must be learned by observation. A few general rules, however, may be given. 1. The following are masculine: substantives ending in dv, -qv^ CV5, most of those in >/p, wp, and wv (gen. wvos), and all that have vto<; in the genitive. Except (r/) prjvi mind. 2. The following are feminine : those in aus, nys (gen. rrj- T05), as (gen. aSos), to or ws (gen. ovs), and most of those in i;. 3. The following are neuter : those in a, i, v, op, op, os, and as (gen. aros or aos) . Dialect*. § 59* 1. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Homeric ouv for otv. 2. Dat. Plur. Homeric cero-i, €Kpar)/s, 2 Jnound, ^oofj xot> x**^" (like /3oCr, § 54). 34. XP'^^ (°)' ■''^■"^ XP'*'''''^' XP^'''h XP^"*"^'^ poet, also xpooy, XP^*- Xpoa; dat. xp<» (o"ly Jw «" XP¥' "t«r). X x LOCAL ENDINGS. § 61. These endings ma^' be added to the stem of a n'>un or pronoun to denote place : — -Oi, denoting where; as dWoOi, elsewhere; ovpavoBi, in heaven. -^€1/, denoting w/*ewce / as oiKo$€v,from home; avroOev, from the very spot. -Se, (-^6 or -crc) , denoting whither ; as McyapaSc, to Megara ; oiKttSc {xYVGg.), homeward. NoTK 1. In Homer, the forms in -Bi and -dev are governed by a preposition as genitives; as 'iXco^t irpo, before Ilium; i^ &\66fv, from the sea. NoTK 2. Sometimes a relic of an original locative case is found with the ending t in the singular and ai in the plural; as 'Ict^^oi, at the Isthmus ; oIkoi (oIko-i), at home; 'Adfjvqai, at Athens. These forms (and indeed those of § 61) are commonly classed among adverbs. NoTK 3. The Epic ending <^t or (j>iv forms a genitive or dativo in both singular and plural. It is somet'.nes locative, as K\iair)(f>i, in the tent ; and sometimes it has other meanings of the genitive or dative, as ^ir)(f>i, with violence. So after prepositions ; as irapa vav3 ADJECTIVES. FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. § 62. 1. Most adjectives in 09 have three endings, 0?, 7], ov. The masculine and neuter are of the second de- clension, and the feminine is of the first; as ao(f)66p, wise. 2. If a vowel or p precedes 0?, the feminine ends in « ; as d^iof;, d^ia, a^iov, worthy. But adjectives in 009 have 07] in the feminine, except those in /:oo9; as tt7r\oo9, aifKorif atrXooVi simple ; a6p6oos vo^iy o-o^xiv AJws a|la &|iov G (ro(t>ov (roi)S o-otjrav d|U>v d$(as d|£ov D. o■o4^^ «ro4»]n oro<|>(p decs, dgfif dgtcp A. (ro4>6v oiv P/'wraZ. N. V. co^oC (rod G. (ro(|>wv wv (TO^MV D. CiX^lS o-o^ais cro<|K>is A. croi|>ov$ o-o^as (TOt^d d^Cw &££a d|£u d|Coiv d|laiv d|f9' Agioi &|iab &|»^ d|iu»v a|£(i>v d^t«Mr cmiois d|iais i'^o\.% d^Cous d|£as u^^a So fiaKpo^, fiaKpd, fiaKpov, long ; gen. fiaKpov, fxaKpa^^ fiaKfjov ; dat. fiaKpw, fiaKpa, /xaKpw ; acc. /xuKpov, fiaKpav, fiaKpov, &C., like o^ioq. All participles in os are declined like tro<^ds. 54 INFLECTION. [§63. J "\ V fA/ NoTK. Proparoxytones in or have recessive accent also in the feminine ; as a$ios, a^im (not d$iai, like d|ia). For the accent of av in the feminine of the genitive plural of barytones, see § 25, 2. § 63. Some adjectives in os, especially compounds, have onl}' two endings, os and oi', the feminine being the same as the masculine. They are declined like u-o(f>6q, omitting the feminine ; as aAoyos, dXoyov ; gen. dAoyou ; dat. uXoyw, &c. Note. Some adjectives in or may be declined with either two or three endings. § 64. A few adjectives of the second declension end in 0)5 and wv, and are declined like veo)v CXcii) tXcuv tX«(>s tX(o> Dual. Plural. d7^p«s dY^po) d>y^p«j» dY^pwv d-y^pwv ayi\p(a d-y^pfp d-y^pwv dY^po dTrtpipv dY^pw Mps, golden., upyvp€offi(^) XPVflTw A. (xpwo'toj') XP^'*''')^V Singular. {xpvffia) XP«<»^ (XPffftaj) XPV<''^S (Xpi'o-^9) XP««r^ (xpi'o^^ai') XP"*''^^ (xpvffiov) xpvtTOV (xpw^(^) XPVO-V (xpiJfffoi') yjpwovv §65.] ADJECTIVES— FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 55 N. (xpiJffeot) XP^<''<>^ G. (x/ofc/wf) xpvtrwv D. (xpvff^ots) xpvirois A. (x/>v(r^oi;;) xpvvovs Dual. (Xpw^o) Xpuflra (xpi'o'^oti') xp^oi^atv Plural, (xp«5ffcat) XP^"'*'^^ (xpi'ff^w*') \pviruv (Xpuff^atj) xpvtrats (xpfo'^as) xpv*'*'^^ (XPVffioiv) xpv7i$/ofo;) dpyvpovs G. {apyvpiov) &pYvpov D. (dp7u/)^v) oLp^vpi^ A. (dp7()/3eoi') dpYvpoOv N. (apyvp^w) &pY\ipc& G. (d/}7u/3^(i') dpYvpoiv N. {&py6pfoi) dpyvpot G. (apyvpiuv) Apyvpfiv D. (d/}7i;p60(s) &p'yvpots A. (apyvpiov% ) dp^upovs N. (d7r\6oj) airXo{>s G. (av\6ov) airXoC D. (d7r\6v) airX^ A. (dir\6oi.) airXoSv N. (dTrX6w) airXtt G. (dir\6o(i') airXoiv Singular. {apyvpia) dpyvpa (dp7u/)^as) dp^vpas {a.pyvpi(i.) dpYvp^ {apyvpiav) dp^vpav Dual. (&pyipcov) dpYvpofiv (d/>7i;/3^ou) apYvpov (apyvpiifi) dpYvp<^ {^pTfipeov) dpYupovy (d/)7i^p6a) dpyvpa (apfy\)^>i(x>' Ap^vpu (dp7up^a(i') dpYvpaiv (apyvpio<.v) apYVpotv (d/07i}/06a() dpYvpat {dpy6p(a) dp-yvpa (d/J7i;/)fw»') dp^puv {apyvpiuv dpTvpMV ! (apyvphais) dp^upats {apyvp4ois ) apYvpois B (apyvpias) dpYvpds {apytipea) dpYwpo Singula-) {&w\6v) dirXf) (av\6ov) dirXoOv {av\6r)s) dirXfjs {airXdov) airXov i&irUv) dirX^ {air\6(i>) dirXt^ {aw\6r)i') dirXf)v {air\6oy) dirXovv Dual. (dirX6a) dirXd (dTrXAw) dirXu {air\6aiv) dirXaiv {air\6oiv) dirXotv 56 INFLECTION. ne^ N. (air\6ot) airXot G. (dTrXuuf) airXwv IX [airXdois) dirXois A. (air\6ovs) ct-rrXovs Piural. {airXitai) 4irXat {airXdui') airXwv (dir\6ais) fti') dirXwv (dir\6o({) aTrXois (dirX6a) dirXd For the accent, see § 43, Note. For irregular contraction, see § 9, 2, Note; and § 9, 3, Note. No distinct vocative fuiuis occur. l\\ THIRD DECLENSION. § 66. Adjectives belonging only to the third declen- sion have two endings, the feminine being the same as the masculine. Most of these end in 7;tf ana €vi. A. ir/irova Wirov cv8a(|fcova cfi8ai|iov V. tr^irov i', eKovaa, (k6v, willing, has three endings, and is declined like participles in av (§ 68). So its compound, Ukuv (ockui/), umvilling, aKovaa, ^kov. NoTK 2. The poetic tSptr, knowing, has ace. 'ibpiv, voc. tfipt, nom. pi. Idpia. NoTK 3. Adjectives compounded of nouns and a prefix are generally declined like those nouns; as tviXms, fiopefnl , gen. fve'X- nidos'i tvxapii, (jmceful, gen. €vxdpiTos (§ 50). But compounds of TTUTtjp and pfirrjp end in up (gen. opof), and those of rroKts in is (gen. ifiof). NoTK 4. Some adjectives of the third declension have only one ending, which is both masculine and feminine; fi^ (j}vyas, (f>vydbos, fuf/ilice : anais, airaiboi, c'hildlcsx ; dyva>s, dyvioros, unknotvn ; uvoXkis, dudXKidos, xceak. The oblique cases occasionally occur as neuter. A very few adjectives of one termination are of the first declen- sion, ending in ar or i^y; as yfvvdbai, noble, gen. ytvvdbov. ■f. ll|fcOV ll|M>V FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS COMBINED. § 67. 1. Most adjectives of this class end in u?, em t/, or in 669, ecraa, ev. Three end in ak<« YXvKfolV yXvk^a yXvk^mv YXvK^trt ^XuK^a Sivgular. N. Xopfiis XapCco-tra XapC *.^«> V /. HiotDgrafAiic Sciences Corporation 4 ^^ m v V <^ 33 WIST MAIN STRIH WIMTIR.N.Y. USM (71«)t72-4503 4^ 60 INFLECTION. [§68. I u Plural. N. v. XttfOVTcs XvoiKrat Xvovra G. XikSvtmv XvoiNTMV Xv6vruv D. XvouvToiv tiO^vtoiv riOctoxuv tiO^vtoiv Plural. N. v. SciKvvvTcs SciKvinrai SciKyvvrr, G. SciKVvvrMV 8ciKvv(rMV 8v, except in the nominative and vocative singular ; as 8i8ovs, 8i8ovaa, 8i86u, giving; gen. diBoprosy dtdovatjs ; dat. dtdovrt, BibovvTi, &c. Aorist active participles in as are declined like tords ; as 'Kvaasy \v(ratX€ODv, i\6t>Vy loving, are declined as follows : — Singular. N. {rifMuv) Ti|fcuv (rifiaovffa) ri|uao'a {Tt/mov) Ti|fc6v G. {TifMOVTOs) ri|AuvTOS {rifmoiffris) Ti|u&on)S {TifMOvroi) Ti|fcwvTO« D. {TlfMOVTt) Ti|IMVri (TlfiaoiffXl) Tl|U&iK4ovToi) ^iXoOvros ^iXoOvTi {i\iovffi) A. (0tX^oi^oj) V. (iK4ovTti) Plural. <^iXo{iVT<$ (^tX^ovcrat) ^iXofwrai {tfi^^ovTa) ^lAoOvra ^iXovvTttV (^tXcouffwi') «^iXov«r«av {^pCKibvrtav) ^iXoilvTMV ^iXoOiTi (0(X6ot/(ra(s) ^iXovirais {(fnXiovci) i^iXoiitri ^iXovvTOt (^iXeot/aas) ^iXov (contracted w) are declined like 0iX(op, the contracted form of <^tk(iav. Thus hrjKatv, SriXovaa, briXovv, manifestituf : gen. brjKovvros, brjkovtnis ; dat. drjkovvri, br/Kovaji, &c. The uucoutracted form of verbs in 6a> is not used. § 98, Rem. Note. A few second perfect participles in aas of the fu- form (% 124) have S»ra in the feminine, and retain <0 in the oblique cases. They are contracted in Attic ; as (coraciir, corauo-a, forao's), contr. ccrebr, iarmaa, eorrfy (irregular for ecrtus), standing: gen. taT&Tos, iardxTrit^ (ararosy &c. But re^vccar, rtdvfottra, t(0p«6s, dead, from 6vfj, muchy and irpao^t, mild^ are thus declined : — Singular. N. lUyat IM-jfAXlJ |ilya iroXvs iroXX'/| iroXv 0. IM-ydXov liryAXtp |iC7dXov iroXXoO troXXii$ iroXXoO D. |MY&X<|> |M7<(Xtl |MYaX iroXX^ iroX.\iO iroXXt^ A. fU-yav |fcrydXi)v Ulya iroXvv troXX^v iroXv V. firydXi JMY^I M*lfa ■It §70.] ADJECTIVES — IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 63 Dual. N. A. V. |irydX(» iirydXa |irydX» G. D. itrydXoiv ifcrydXcuv fUY^Xoiv Plural. N. y. luydXoi iiry&Xai itrydXa G. |irydX«v |ftrydX«v (fcrydXttv D. |ft«YdXois iMYdXfus |j«y^iXois A. iicydXovs |iryAXas iirydXa iroXXo( 'voXXaC iraXXd iroXXwv iroXXfiv iroXXAv iroXXots iroXXats iroXXot« iroXXoiir iroXXdt iroXX& Singular. N. G. D. A. irpttot irpdou irp^ irpaov irpoMta upcuCcis vpacCf irpMtav Dual. irp&ov irp^v irpd<|> irpaov N. V. G. D. irp^ irpdoiv irpacCa irpac(aiv Plural. irpdM irpdoiv N. A. G. D. A. irpooi, irpacCt irpa/6t (o-), wise, if the penultimate vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid (§ 19, 3). See irtxpor above. Note 2. Metros, middle, and a few others, drop os and add aire- pos and airaros ; as pitros, pftrairepos, pfaairarof. Note 3. Adjectives in oos drop or and add (ortpos and toraror, which are contracted with o to ovarepos and ovararos ; as (tCvoos) (t>vovr, toell-disposed , evvovartpos, (vvovpov-) , prudent, awt^povtarepoi, aartfipoviaTceros. Note 5. Adjectives in etf change final cvr- of the stem to co--, and add rtpos and raros; as p^aptetr (;fapi«ia'-), graceful, \apuu, fjBiaroi. Taxvs, swift, raxiatp (commonly dda«Ti't to-ros and rtpos, rarof. ^ 3 4 §73.] IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 65 2. Comparatives in l(au, neuter lop, are thus declined : — Dual. Singular. N. ^SCwv iiSiov 0. i^8tovo« D. Ifitovt. A. ifiloya ^SU Ifiwv N. A. y. IfiUvf 0. D. ^voiv I Plural. N. v. 'fjSfovcs VjSbvt VjStova ^8(m 6. 4j8i6vttv D. IfiCwn A. ^SCovat ijSCovs ifjSCova ^8(» Note 1. The terminatious -ova, -ovti, -ovas may drop v, and be contracted into -u and -ovs (§ 47, N. 1). The vocative singular of these comparatives seems not to occur. For the recessive accent in the neuter singulai', see § 25, 1, Note. Note 2. The irregulai* comparatives in av (§ 73) are declined like hbitav. ' / III. Irregular Comparison. § 73* !• The following are the most important cases of irregulai' comparison : — 1. &Ya0tfty good, &|u6ovos, c^x^P*^' fiaBvs, ^Xa^, ^paivs, yr- patos, yXvKvs, tiriX^ariiov, iirixapit, rjavxos, idior, laos, XdXor, poKap, paKpoSt vios, itaKaios, iraxvs, ntnav, map, TrXr)v, a\f}B6iv)\ (rab ^ . , . irist gen. plur. aato»v, aac»v) ; ntutros, wholly (nas, geu. plur. TrdvTuv) . Note Adverbs are occasionally formed thus from participles; as biaas (a>TaTa, most wisely. 'A^tfdm (aXrjOifi), truly; oKrfBfarfpov, oKijd^tTTaTa. 'Hbean (^dur), sweetly, rjbto', {jdiara. Xcpuvrois (\apieii), yracefuUy : x^P**' oTfpov, xapiifTTora. 2a>(f>p6v(f)povfirrepov, aai^povicrrara. Note 1. Other adverbs generally form a comparative in repo), and a superlative in raT©; as ava, above, dvorrfpoo, auaTaTa. A few comparatives derived from adjectives end in repox; as ^e- ^MOTipos, more firmly, for fitfiaioTepou, from ^fj3a(o>r. Note 2. MaXa, much, very, has comparative ftaWop (for naKutv, § 16, 7), more, rather; superlative ^uXto-ra, most, especially. .NFLECTION. [176. i' NUMERALS. § 76. The cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives, and the numeral adverbs which occur, are as follows : — t i Sign Cardinal. Ordinal. Adverb. 1 a' tU, ifcUif Iv, one irpMTOt, first dira(, once 2 r SiOf two 8Kai8^KaTot 19 16' IvvcaKcUScKtt 4vv«aK(u84KaTo« 20 k' ftKO |ii»ptOi, ai, a Ordinal. mvraKoo'iovr^ 4(aKv D. rpurC Wo'craptri A. Tp€tt TpCa Wovapas Wcrirapa Note 1. Homer has fem. tS, t^r, &c., for /xi'a; and to) for m. Homer has 8u« for Suo, and forms fioto), fiotoi (declined regularly). For hvtiv, hvStVy dvoio-t, and other forms, see the Lexicon. At^o is sometimes indeclinable. Herodotus has reo-rcpe;, aud the poets have r/rpcurc 70 INFLECTION. [§77. { I f I if- NoTR 2. The compounds oidtis and /ii;dm» no one, none, are de- clined like tit' Thus, ov6tis, ovdtfAia, ov8«p', gen. oidtv6t, ovitfuas', dat. oiilifvif oidtfii^ ; ace. ov8iva, oiidtfiiau, ov6iy, <&c. Plural forni8 some- times occur; as ovdivts, ovliivtiiv, ovdiai, ov6ivas, fAtffiivfs, &o. When ovdi or findc is separated from tU (as by a preposition or by Hv), the negative IS more emphatic; as <{ oi/dtvot, from no one; ovV t^ iv6s, from not even one. Note 3. Both is expressed by Hn6- Ttpotf generally plural, ayif^artpoi, ai, a. 2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 are indeclinable. The higher numbers in loi and all the ordinals arc declined regularl}', like other adjectives in os. Note 1. When rpctr xal bixa and riaaapts itai Hko are used for 13 and 14, the first ptirt is declined. In ordinals we may say Tpiros Koi dcxaror, &c. Note 2. (a) In compound expressions like 21, 22, &c., 31, 32, &c., 121, 122, &c., the numbers can be connected by xal in either order; but if koi is omitted, the larger precedes. Thus, tls tal tUoai, one and twenty, or tiKotri koi «U, twenty and one ; but (without koi) only tXKoaiv th, twenty-one. (b) The numbers 18 and 19, 28 and 20, 38 and 39, &c. are often expressed by iu6i (or dvoti/) diovris tiKoai (rpidicovra, TtaaapaKOvra, &c.) ; as €Tij ivoi biovra rptdicovTa, 29 years. Note 3. With collective nouns in the singular, especially n innos, cavalry, the numerals in tot sometimes appear in the singular; as T^v diaKoaioM iirnoVf the (troop of) 200 cavalry (200 horse) ; dmris fivpia Koi TtrpaKoala (Xen. An. i. 7, 10), 10,400 shields (i.e. men with shields). Mvpiot means ten thousand : fivpiot, innumerable. Mvp'os sometimes has the latter sense ; as fivpios xpovoi, countless time : ftvpta irtvia, in- calculable poverty. For nvpla as numeral, see above. Note 4. The Greeks often expressed numbers by letters ; the two obso- lete letters, Vau und Koppa, and the character San, denoting 6, 90, and 900. (See § 1, N. 2.) The last letter in a numerical expression has an accent above. Thousands begin anew with p., with a stroke below. Thus, ,owfV. 1868 ; pxK€, 2625 ; ,5»fe', 4025 ; ,/Sv', 2003 ; 0/*', 640 ; ph', 104. (See § 76, second column.) Note 5. The lettei-s of the ordinary fereek alphabet are often used to number the books of the Iliad and Odyssey, each poem having twenty-four books. --» §79.] THE ARTICLE - PRONOUNS. 71 THK ARTICLE. I § 78. The definite article 6 (stem to-), the, is thus de- clined : — Singular. Dual. Plural. N. h 1i r6 N. ol al Td G. TOO Tf|« TOO N. A. T(& (rd) r«i G. rm D. TV T^ T«p 0. D. TOtV (Talv) TOtV D. TOtfl Tatt TOtt A. rdv T^v r6 A. TOilt Tdt Td Note 1. The Greek has no indefinite article; but often the in- definite ris (§ 84) may be translated by a or an ; as av6pu>ir6s rtr, a certain manj often simply a man. Note 2. The feminine dual forms rd and ralv (especially rd) are rare, and rc!> and row are generally used for all genders. (S 138, N. 5). The regular nominatives rot and rat are Epic and Doric; and the article has the usual dialectic forms of the first and second declensions, as roio, rolti', rdutv, Toiai, r^orc, r^g. PRONOUNS. Peraonal and IntenslTe Pronouns* § 79, 1. The peraonal pronouns are iycl>, I, 0 o^ ot 1 Duai. a^Tot avTov avr^ avT6v fill aOroO avri N. A. v«S G. D. vyv 0^ aivolv a«Td a^Tit aiTotv 72 INFLECTION. [§79. N. G. D. A. {l|ftWV Plural. o-(^t« (o-^^a) ivy iT<\>«a, never occur ; ol and « (chiefly Epic) very rurely ; ot, c (Notes 2 and 3). Note 2. The following is the Ionic declension of «yw, av, and ot). The forms in ( ) are not used by Herodotus 1. Sing. N. iy,i) (iyibv) w) (a^uu', owv) (a) Plur. N. rifuU (Snnes) i/fjL€is {Hfi/us) G. ilftiwv (iffielwi') ifiiuv (pneluv) a^ibtv {(Tifttluv) D. iffuv {dn/u) i/fjuv (if/Afu) ffiftlat, l{v) A. VH^as (&nfu) viUa% (Umie) c4at (o-^etas), as, changing the circumflex to the acute, as ^fiiv, Tifidt, &c. ; and sometimes accenting rifuv, ^ftas, &c. Note 6. Herodotus has avrtw in the feminine (not in the mas- culine or the neuter) for avrS>v (§ 39). See § 83, N. 3. The Ionic contracts 6 uiiroi into covroc or aiurcJr, and ro avro into roivro (§ 3). §-^1 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 73 Note 7. The Doric has kfilv (for Attic t/utl); dju^s, afuuv, afiiv, a^U (for ijiuls, iifiup, iifuv, rifiai); tO (for dXXiiXa &XX^X« Plural. dXXijXttv &XXiiX«v &XXiiX«iv &XX1JX01S &XXi)Xait &XXifXoi« dXXijXovt &XXijXaf; AXXi|Xa PoMcsstve Pronouns. I § 82* The possessive pronouns are e/io?, mi/, a-o^;, thy, rffiirepof!, our, vfierepo^, your, a^erepo^f their, and the pootic o?, his. They are declined like adjectives in 09. for (rv D. 8v, 6Teotav- (sometimes in the form ^-qv-) as the basis of the other tenses. Again, in fiavOdvu), learn, we have the stem fiSiO- in cfiaOov ; and in Xafipdvo), take, we have Xd/3- in eXa^oi'. (See the Catalogue of Verbs.) As these stems XXir-, av-, fiaO-, Xa)8-, are simpler and more primitive than Xcitt-, <^ai»^, f^avOav-, Xafipav; they are called the simple stems of these verbs. Note. The simple stem, or (in verbs like Xv-w, Xey-a) the sin- gle stem, is often identical with the root (§ 32, 2, Note) ; as XXtt-, Xaj3-, Xv-, Xfy-, ir\(K-. In other verbs the stem is formed by adding a suffix to the root ; as in Tt/ua-o) the single stem nua- (the same as that of the noun n/n^, § 37, 1) is formed from the root rt- by adding fia ; so in (fmlvm the simple stem ^av- is itself derived from the root vy-)^ irtCOia {yrtid-^ iri^-), aiv, Avo--, AcXvk-, and Xv^c- (or Xv^-) enlarged to Xv^i/o--. In ifxuvo} the simple stem ^k- appears also as ^i/v-, vcfJHiv^ fjtavOt- (or tfnivOrj-)^ av€{r))-, and avriav€-ofiai) avovfiai. Tlie last form (in e) be- longs to liquid stems. * The term tense stem is here used, in conformity with general usage in elementary works, to denote the fixed form which (with certain internal modifications) is the basis of a tense. Strictly, the present stem of Xiyu is X«7- -4- a variable vowel (o or e) ; the aorist stem of \6u) is \v(r- ■+■ a or e, fcc : see § 112, 4. This variable element is not included in the tense stems M they are here given. 192.] TENSE STEMS. 83 u III. The Firs'*" AoRisT stem, of the aorist active and mid- dle ; as Avo" in c-Awr-a, i-\vr)v in €-<(ir}vu, i-a(T-tirjv (§16,6,N.4). (6) The Perfect- Active stem ; as AcAv-fc- in AcAuK-a and McAu/c-eii', irc<^av-K- (§ 16, 5) in 7r€<^ay-Ka and e-Tret^y-Kciv. (Brf-v and (Aci^dc-d)) Ack^^cu (subj.), tftavde^t))- in €-(ivBri-v and ((^ai^dc-u)) <^i/^a> (subj.) ; (i) Av^i;Or)(r- in \€ufi$rjdvrj-v and (<^ve-(a) (^ai'cu (subj.) ; {b] rfnivria-- in (^i/i/tr-o/mat. Note. The three verbs Xi5«, Xe/ir«, and tpaluu, from which the preced- ing examples are taken, give a general idea of the most common forms which the seven tense stems assume. 5. The principal parts of a Greek verb (by giving which we describe the verb) are the first person singular of the present, future, first aorist, and (first or second) perfect indicative active, the perfect and (first or second) aorist indicative pas- sive, with the second aorist (active or middle) when one occurs. E.g. Ada), Xivta, tkvtra, XtXvKa, XfXvfiai. tXvdrfv. ArtVo), X«t^fi>, XcXoiTra, XtXeinfuu, iXei(f)dr]Vf eXifrot . ^iVa>, (f>avii, €(f)riva, mayKa (and frc'^i^i/a), Trc^cr/xat, ((frnvdrfv (and 84 INFLECTION. I §03. Ilpdirtra), ^/o, npa^a^ ftrpa^a, nirrpaxa (2 pf. ninpuya), niirpayfuu, ivpa\Briv. 2T«XXf), .s[, are very rare. 6. In deponent verbs the principal parts are the present, future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative. B.ff. BovKofuu, fvixh, /Soi'Xijo-o/iai, /3r/3oi;Xi;pat, t^ovKrfdrjv. riypoftai, Itccnme^ ytufivofim, ytyivr}ftai, tytvanrjv. (AlBfOfuu) aidovfiai, respavt, aiScVo/iat, fjtifiTfini, rjdiadrjp, 2K(7rro/xat, vieic^ o-Kc^ofiai, iaKtixfuu, taKtyjrafirfv. Conjugation* § 93. 1. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons in tlieir proper order. 2. These various parts of the verb are formed as follows : — (rt). By modifications of the stem itself in forming the dif- ferent tense stems (§ 92, 4). These are explained in §§ 107-111. (A). In all cases, by adding certain syiluliles to the tense stems ; as in kv ofitv, Avo-cre, AcAu-rat, AcAvK-are. These sylla- bles and their composition are explained in §§ 112-117. (r). In the secondary tenses of the indicative, by also pre- fixing c to the tense stem (if this begins with a consonant), or lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins witli a short vowel) ; as in e-Au-oi/, c-Aucr-e, c-^T/iz-aro, c-AeAvK-cti/, and in riKovov, T^Kova-a, imperfect and aorist of ukovw, to hear. This prefix or length- ening does not belong to the tense stem, but disappears in the dependent moods and in the participle. A prefix, seen in Ac- of Ae'AuKa and AcAci/x/txai, in ttc- of ttc- aa-ixai, and e of tcrraXuai (§ 97, 4), for wliich a lengthening of the initial vowel is found in ^Wayfiai (dAAay-) from dAAdo-o-w (§ 97, 4), belongs to the perfect tense stem, and remains In all the moods and in the participle. These prefixes and lengthenings (e), called augment (increase) , are explained in §§ 99- 106. iw.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN n. W 8. There are two principal forms of conjugation of Greek verbs, that of verbs in o) and that of verbs in fit. NoTK. Veibs in fu form h Hniiill class, compared with tliose in u, and are distinguished in their iuHection almost excluHively in the present and second- aurist systems, in the other systems agreeing with verbs in u. The conjiw gation of the latter is therefore given first, und under this head are stated the general principles which belong e([uully to both coiyugations. 1 . CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Q. § 94. The prese it stem of a verb in w is found by drop- ping (\v-), Xci'ttw (\ci7r-), irpdcra-ui (Tr/juo-o--) ; j3ovkofiat, (/3ou\-), yiyvofiai (ytyv-). Note. The simple stem, when there is one distinct from the present stem, must be learnt by observation and by familiarity wiiii the principles upon which the present stem is formed from the simple stem (§108). § 95. 1. Tlie following synopses include : — I. All the tenses of Xvu), loose. II. All the tenses of Xcitto), leave ; the second perfect and pluperfect active and the second aorist active and middle be- ing in heavy- faced ty\iQ. III. All the tenses of ^aiVw, show ; the future and aorist active and middle and the second aorist and second future passive being in heavy-faced type. The synopsis of Xvo), with tho iorms in heavier type in the synop- ses of XftTTo) and (baiva, will thus show the full conjugation of the verb in a>; and only these forms are inflected in § 96. For the peculiar inflection* of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of verbs with consonant stems, see § 97. Note. The paradigms in § 96 include the perfect imperative active of Xi5w, Xf/irw, and if>alvu}, although it is hardly possible that this tense can actually have been formed in any of these verbs. As it occurs, however, ui some verbs (§ 118, 2, Note), it is given here to complete the illustration of the forma. For the perfect subjunctive and optative active, which are more common in periphrastic forms, see § 118, 2. For the quantity of v in \6u, see § 109, 1, N. 1. i ■r 86 INFLECTION. I. XiH». PASSIVE VOICE. I. Xu- IV. (a) XeXif. IV. (c) XeXuc- VI. (a) Xi;(?e(7;)- VI. (6) XMi;-S cCl]V XvoC|M)V X«Xv(ro{|&ip> Xv6<(i|v XvOT| MIDDLE VOICE. Xik>v XvcS Xvi{|UVOS Xvcro<|Jiipr XiKTCordai X\iOrfn \ei&viw) ^avA Aorist l^ijva IV. (6) iretftayK- for j Perfect ir^0a7Afo ire0oj'-/c-(§16,5) j Pluperfect iiredyK€iv IV. (d) irer)v (§109,3) I. ^ev- il, tpdve' III. ipijy- IV. (a) Te0ai" 2 Perfect iriiftjjva 2 Pluperf. iir€iiv€iv MIDDLE VOICE. i Present iftalpofMi Imperfect i«paiv6fjir)v Subjunctive, ipcUvtt ve^dyKu or v€atvfuu Future Aorist J Perfect TlipacfMi I Pluperfect iveipdafiiiv I. ^atf- IV. (a) ire^f- VI. (a) ^cw^cCtj). VI. (ft) VII. (a) 0ai'e(i7)- VII. (p) imvTiff- PASSIVE VOICE. Present and Imperfect ) „ . ,,. , ,, T> «• i. I ni -p ^ ( '*»?«< as %n Middle. Perfect and Pluperfect ) Aorist iipdp0T}v Future Wanting. 2 Aorist ^dvi)v 2 Future ^v^ano|Mu ipafdw (for 4>wiuv) ^y&v j ::l'SriZ [W0«7.e.§95,N.] ,e^7.^.a. .e^a^^ci. j ::f &r. t''*"'"' « ^5' ^-3 -*'"'^- -0'^'"^^ ire^ijyti); cFi;*' :l I ^awolfJLifv MIDDLE VOICE. ^mUvov au>6ftM»ot J (^awcffdot) J (^m6mci'oj) Te^dl'dot (§ 16, 4) TC^CMT/UCTOS PASSIVE VOICE. av99jvai tftaudHs 92 INFLECTION. [§95. 2. The following table shows the meaning of each tense of \vu)f Acoro), and <^aiV commonly means to release for one^s self, or to release some one belonging to one\ self hence to ransom (a captive) or to deliver (one's friends from danger). See § 199, 3. In the passive the tenses are changed merely lo suit that voice; as / am loosed, I was loosed, J shall be loosed, I haiu- been loosed, &c. The future perfect passive means / shall have been loosed (i.e. before some future event referred to). I. I II. AcClTM. ACTIVE VOICE. Indicative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. Pres. I leave ov am leaving. Leave tliou. To leave or to be leaving. Leaving. Imperf. I left or waa leaving. Fut. I shall leave. To be about to leave. About tu leave. 2 Perf. Iliave left (some- times / have failed or am wanting). (§ 118, 2, N.) To have left. Having left. 2 Plup. I had left. 2 Aor. I left. Leave thou. To leave or to Having left or (§202,1.) have left. leaving. The passive of Xeiira is used in all tenses, with the meanmgs / am lefi, I was lefi, I haoe been left, I had been left, I shall have been left, I was left, I shall be left. It also means lam inferior {left behind). t§95. §96.] TENSES. 98 The middle of X*/ir« means properly to remain (leave one's self), in which sense it diifers little (or not' at all) from the passive. But the 2nd aor. 4\iir6fjLriu often means / left for myself (?is a memorial or monument^ • «a with the present and future middle in composition. 't\nr6iiiriv ;n Homer sometimes means I tens left behind or teas inferior^ like the passive. III. ^a(v». Indicative. Pres. / show or am showing. Imperf. / showed or loas showing. Fut. / shall show, Aor. / showed. 1 Perf. / have shoivn. 1 Plup. / had shotvn. 2 Perf. / have appeared. Imperative. Show thou. Infinitive. To show. Participle. Showing. To be about to show. To show or to have shoivn. Show thou. (§ 202, 1.) (§ 118, 2, N.) To have shown. Having shown. About to show. Having shoivn or showing. (§ 118, 2, N.) To have ap- Having ap- peared, peared. 2 Plup. / had appeared. The passive of alvaiva> in I. Xte(Xv), PRESENT. Active Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative, S.J 2. (3. Xii«* X^ Xiqi X^it Xtei (3. Xvrrov Xilrrov XVT|T0V Xvi|rov XVMTOV XV0oi« Xi;i)i(v XwOiTC Xvooiiv ] } I i I 1, r \ i f 96.1 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O. 95 the tenses above mentioned (§ 95), are thus inflected : — to loose. Voice. PRESENT. Imperative. Infinitive. Ma.- XWtw p 5 2. XvCTOV (.3. Xu Xv«T€ TMV p. (2. XiJ, (3. Xv. Xvciv XWruirav or XvdvTttv Participle. Xiiicav, Xvovo-a, X«ov (§ 68) :;: ? FUTURE. Xflwv (§ «8) 96 8. -12. (3. Indicative, fkwra IX\Kra« IXvcc p. <■ 2. IXvo-arov * ( 3. IXv■ I ! S. S 2. 1 ^^" ^'\l ! P. -^2. j f Il i S. J2. li "'^^^ f 1 1 p. ^ 2. 1 \ ^3. I 1 : S. -^2. 1 i (3. "is. IXtMrd|iii)v IXvo-aro 4XikrairOov 4Xv(rd|uu Xiiirg Xvert|T(u XiioT|ywJ/M»urfm. Optative 1 i 'S Xc\i{o-o|iai XcXiMrrrai X(Xvaro(|&i|v XcXvtroio XcXinroiTO 1 1 ^-{l: XiXihrctrOov XcX^oitrOov X(Xv(ro((rOi]v 1 "^' XcXiKT^IMOa X(Xi(o-«re< X(Xv^ XvMjvoiTo \^i\o-w9ov - Xv6^(r Xav4oifti) ^vot|u, or {av€olriv) ^vo(i)v {i/>av4oii) ^vot«, or {av€olT'n»} ^vo£tt|v, or (^afeoti^i^i') ^voiVJTT|v (ipavdotnev) ^vot|Ji«v, or {(payeol-nfuv) ^vo ((papeolfi7i») ^vo(|ii)v {(pavhiTo) <^voiTO 1 ''■^' (0ai'/e(r0oi') (tpavitaOov) ^vavlvTi»v no INFLECTION. L8 96. ^a(vM (continued). SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE. ill I I ■If 1 H Indicative. Optative. ^vij which are not inflected above follow the corresponding tenses of Xuo) ; except the perfect and pluperfect middle, for which see § 97. AeXct/i-fiat is inflected like rcVpt/i-fiat (§ 97, 3), and matr'fuu is inflected in § 97, 4. Note 3. Some of the dissyllabic forms of Xva do not show the accent so well as con'esponding forms with three or more syllables. The correct accent will be seen in the following forms of kuXvu, to hinder : — Pres. Imp. Act. Aor. Opt. - ci. Aor. Imp. Act. Aor. Imp. Mid. K«&Xu< K«iXikrai)u K(&Xvo-ov KiiXvfnu kmXWtw KttXvoxut or -liociat KtfKva6.ro KuXwr&(r9o kmXWtov KttiXiKrai or -ito-cu KttXt&o-aTov KuX6vwr9ov &0. &c. &c. kc. Aor. Infin. Act. KttXdtrai. The three forms KuXtorat, KuXvo-at, and noKvaai (Xvcrat, XOo-at, and XOo-ai) are distinguished in form only by the accent. See § 26, with N. 3 (1) ; and § 22, N. 1. i 11 §97.] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. Ill Perfefit and Pluperfect Middle and Paulve of Verb! with Consonant Stemi. § 97. 1. In the perfect and pluperfect middle and pas- sive, many euphonic changes (§ 16) occur when a final consonant of the stem comes before an initial /i, r, a, or a0 of the ending (§ 118). 2. When the stem ends in a consonant, the third person pUiral of these tenses is formed by the perfect participle and etVt, are^ and ^ ir^irXc(o ir^cM-o IffToXtro ircirX^X^ imrcCcrOtt lirrdXOM j^ 52. Wrpu^v ' ( 3. TtrpCt^v ir^irXcx9ov ir^«i(r6ov COTaAOOV ircirX^X^v irfirc( {av-)^ show, dWaa-ao) (dWar/-), exchange, and iXeyx^ (€*^^7X")» coiivict, are thus inflected : — Subj. Opt. -{I % Perfect Indicative. ir4^ao'|fcai 4(XXaY|iai ir4^vav6ov f^^^X^^ ir«^d> IX^Xryiuu; IX^Xry(ai 4X^X<^Tai iX^Xryx^v 4X^X9c ir^vee Trr-3ov tor rerpt^-aOov, Ttrpi^-dov (§ 16, 4 and 1). So irtir'Kty-pM is for TTcn-Xf K-/ia( (§16, 3) ; iTf7r\€x-Bov for mirktK-adou (§ 16, 4 and 1). niirna-pai is for ■ntnfi.6-}iai (§ 16, 3); mnd-irat for Trfnetd-aai (§ 16, 2) ; n«7r(iaa-priv is a substitute for >/ of the stem (§ 16, 6, N. 4) ; which v reappears before all other letters, causing the *ops o"e y (§ 16, 3, Note) ; eX^Xey^^at and «\Tj\«yK-Tai are for cXi;Xeyx-o'at and fXrjXeyx-Tai (§ 16, 1, 2); eX^Xfy;^- Ot is for iXriKeyx-frde (§ 16, 4) ; see also § 102. Note 3. (a) All perfect-middle stems ending in a labial inflect these tenses lilte Terpifi-fiah &c. ; as XeiVo), XeXtifi-fjuu; ypdcfxo (ypa0-), write, ytypafi'fiai (§ 16, 3); piirra) (pt0-), throw, eppifi-fiat. But v.'hen final fxir of the stem is reduced to p before p (§ 16, 3, Note), the original tt recurs before other consonants; as KapirTut (Kapir-), bend, K«Kap-pai, KfKapy^tai, KeKapir-rai, KfKap-3f, iripnat (nepw), send, ninep-pai, irentpylrai, ireirf pir-rai, TreTrt pXXay-^t; as Trpdaao) (npay-), do, nenpay-pai ; rapacrao) (rapa;^-), confuse, Tfrapay-pai; (f>v\dtTaa) (v\aK-), irt^vXay-pai. But when y before p represents yy, as in eXi^Xfy-fiat from fXey;^-*!) (end of N. 2), the second palatal of the stem recurs before other consonants. (c) All ending in a lingual mute inflect these tenses like irinficf- pai, &C.; as <^pa^to (pa8-), tell, 7r(pa(r-pai, 7r(pa-(rai, 7rc(^pno--ra. ; (Oi^tti (($18-), accustom, eiBiir-pai, tWi-aai, ft6ur-Tai, eidi ('jav-), weave, v(f>aa-pai, v(f}av-dv-dai ; (njpaiva} (^trripav-), show, aetrr}- puKT-pai] piaipa {;.uau-), pollute, ptpiaa-pai. Rarely such a v becomes p, as ill 6^vv-a>, sharpen, at^vp-pai (later at^vtr-pm)', and even then the V recurs before other consonants, as a^vu-trat, &^vv-Tai. When final v of a s*flm is dropped (§ 100, 6), as in itXiV<», hcnd, KfKXi-pcu, the stem becomes a vowel- stem., and is inflected like XfX^-pai. (e) Those ending in X or p are inflected like faraX-pai; as ayyc'XXw (ayyfX-), announce, ^yyeX-pai; atpat (dp-), 7'aise. ?ip-pai ; iydpat (tytp-), rouse, fyriytp-pai; trtipia (rrfp-), pierce, mnap-pai (§ 109, 4); no change being made except the dropping of ) 2. (rj/udoiTf) 3. (rt/idoi^f) Tiffcqls Tl|MlrOV Tl|iaTOV Tl|fc»)JkCV TlflATC Ti|i«Mrb Tl|ii\4eT0p) (0t\cOl/<7t) Present Subj (<(>l\47)TOv) {(piK^riTou) (|>iX(a i^iXcis (^iXci ()>lXctTOV <^lXctTOV <)>iXovpv ^iXciTC ()>iXovlX(0 «l»iXtis +iXti <^iXf)rov <)>iXf|rov <}>i,Xu|icv ^kX^rc <|>iX«Mri Presold Optative. (i\eolTr}v) {(piXioififv) ((ftiXioiTf) (|>iXois <{>iXoi (^iXoiTOV (|>iXo£ri)v (^iXot|icv <^i\oirc <^iXollXo£T]T« (|)iXoCi|0'av or (iTtXoolriv) {SrjXoolrfs) (driKooirj) {Sr)\ooiriTOp) (5rfKoon^TT}p) (SriXoolrifiev) (8r)\oolr)T€) [8r)\oolriffav [§ 98. 8i]Xo(i|v 8i)Xo£ii]$ 8t|XoCi) 8T)Xo(t)TOV 8t|Xoi^tt)v 8t)XoCT)|uv 8t|Xo£i)tc 8T|Xo(T)(rav^ Present Imperative. ifjLae) (jifiaiTUi) ^' \ 3. (r (2. (ri^tdcToi^ ^13. 2. (rifidere) rCffca Tl|idT(l> ri|ulTov TifidTcav TI,|iaTC (0f\ce) (0i\e^Tw) (0tX^€TOI') (^tXeeVwi') (^iX^erc) «|>£Xci (t>iXtCTW ()>lXctTOV ^iXcCtwv <^iXcZrc (SijXoe) (57;Xo^rw) (577X6€TOI') (SljXo^TWI/) 8^Xov 8T)X0VTa> 8T)XodTOV 8T)X0VTttV (8r}\6€T€) 8i)Xovrc is. D. p_ ) 3. (Tifm^ruaav) in|idTfi>(rav (^piXe^Twtrocv) <)>iX(lTi\e6vT S^* Present Infinitive, (rtfideiv) Ti.|Jav ((piXieiu) (^iXciv {SriXdeiv) 8i)Xo{>v rs. ;1£: Present Participle (see § 69). (rt/ido)!') Ti|i«i> (0(X^(>;i') <|>iXwv (StjXAuv) 8t)Xi S. S 2. (^W/uaes) !1. (i-rilJLd< 2. (irifid 3. (rr/ua (^Tt/ldfTOf) (iTi/JLairrjv) (^Tt/udoMf) dfTf) (rr/fiaoi') CT^IUAV 4r(|fca iTlfldTOV iTl|iC»|i(V irl\tMV Imperfect. (((piXfirtjv) (eiX^onev) (€(fnX^(Tf) (flXeop) 4(f>iX(iTov l4>lXov(<.€V 44>tX(iTc I^CXovy (eS^Xooj') (eS^Xoej) (e5?JXoe) ISVjXovv ^Si^iXovs j8^Xov (eSrjXoeTOp) 48t|Xovtov (eSrjXo^rrfp) &i\\ovTi]}f (iSrjXoofXfp) l8rXov|A€V ((Sr)X6eTf) ^8T)Xo(rr( (iSi^Xoop) 48^Xovv 1*. [§98 / / §«8.] CONTRACT VERBS. uv ir)v) 8i]Ko(i|V irfi) 8l)Xo£vjS Irf) 8t|XoCl| iriTov) 8T)XoCt)TOV i^tt;!/) 8t|Xoi^tt)v irifuv) 8t)XofT||MV irjre) 8t|Xo£t)TC \ljjffav 8T|Xo(T|(rav^ ) frw) 8^Xov 8T)X0VTa> ■Tov) 8t)Xo0tov hwv) 8t)Xovtmv re) 8i)Xovrc iruiaav) 8i|XovTaKrav or or \o(tirriXov|Jiai {(piX^erai) <|>iXciTai {ipiXieadov) 4>iXciiXov|Ji€6a ((piX^effde) iXcii\ioiTai) (|>iXovvTai (TifiAofiai) Ti|fc«i>|xai {7iHuji,Tiiideiyri^ (njuderat) Ti|iarai (rifideadov) (jiiideadov) Ti)ia.6|;,S?;\6et)8TjXoi {drjXderai) 8T|Xo{}Tai {SrjXdeaOoi') 8T)XoviX{\Tat (0(X^i7o-^oi') (t>iXf|(r9ov {iXoC|iiT|v {iKioiQ) <)>iXoio (0tX^OtTo) <^iXotTO (0tXe'o(0'&oi') <{>iXot(r9ov (0(Xeo/(r0)7i') <)>iXol(r9T|v (^(Xeo/jueda) <)>iXo£|ic9a {(fnX^oiffde) i|>iXoi(r9c {«pl\^0lVT0) <)>iXoiVTO Present Imperative. {STJ\6 {4>i\e^ff0(>)) rv)iaa-9ov {i\^fa0ov) Ti|fcd(r9c*v (0tXe^(r9(«;i') TV|iai\e4a0iXc£o^ca <|>iXciir9ov iXc(v <|>iXct(r9c 4)>iXcC(r9w(rav or i^XcC(r9«>v {8tj\6ov) {Srj\oi(r0b)) {dri\6ea0op) {8ri\o4p) 8T)Xu)tab 8t)Xoi 8T]Xi\ieff0at) t^tXcto-Oai (Sij\6effdai) 8T)Xoflcf0ab Present Farliciple. {rifiadfitvoi) n|ii(&|icvos (i\e6nevos) <|>iXov|icvos (SrjXoi/utws) 8i)Xoiii|Uvos 'I -I 1. {irifiadnriv) {Ti|i(&|fct)V 2. {(Tiiidov) in^M 3. (cTi/xdeTo) {Ti|iaTO 2. {erifideffOov) {Ti|iai\4e(76ov) {(^iX(i(r6ov (tdr)\6€a6ov) &r{Kovv99v 3. (irtiixtiadrfv) ^Ti|iidiX(l(r6i)v (idrjXoiadriv) ^8t|Xovo'9i)V 1. (en/xa6/xcda) in^\u9a {e(pi\e6fieda) ^iXov|u6a (idrjXodfieda) l8i)Xov)u6a 2. {€Tifxdfcr0€) {Ti|fcair6c {(ipiXieaee) 4^iXci(r6c (fdriXdeffde) <8i)Xov(r6c 3. (cVt/tdoiTo) 4Ti)iwvT0 {iffuX^ofTo) 4<|>iXovvro (idrjXdovTo) iBi\kovvro Remakk. The imcontracted forms of these tenses are never used in Attic Greek. Those of verbs in aw sometimes occur in Homer ; those ot verbs in ew are common in Homer and Herodotus ; but those of verbs in ow are never used. For dialectic forms of these verbs, see § 120. Note 1. Dissyllabic verbs in fo) contract only ce and fti. Thu? irXe'ft), w//, has pres. ttXco), TrXcIy, rrkel, TrXctroi/, TrXcofiev, TrXf ir«, vrXcovat ; iniperf . rn-Xeoi/, (irXeis. eirXti, &c. ; infin. ttXciv; partic. itkiatv. Aeo), hind., is the only exception, and is contracted in most forms; as hoxxTL, dovfiai, dovvrai, (8ovv, partic. tav, 8oiiv. Aeo), to want, is contracted like ttXcq). Note 2. A few verbs in aco have rj for o in the contracted forms; as fit^^do), 8t^a), tJiirst, 8t>/^.^r, 8t\/^.^, 8iyjrrJT€ ; imperf. ebl'^av, fbi^rjs, fdiylnj] infin. Bi^frrjv. So (da, lire, Kvdat, ."tcrape, irdidd), hunger, cr/iua>, smear, xpdco, give oraclea, with xp^onai, and y^dai, I8p^f}, l8p(ov- Tl, &c. Note 4. The third person singular of the imperfect active doe? not take u movable in the contracted form ; thus f(f>iXf( or €iK((v gives c0iXci (never €l\eiv). Except txP^" ^^ XP^" (^^^' fxp"*"' s*^*^ Not« 2), and a very few poetic forms. Note 5. The present infinitive active of verbs in act and oat (in av and ovu, not av and oip) is probably contracted from forms in atv and oep. The infinitive in €v is Doric (§ 119, 14, c). See § 9, 4, N. 2. Note 6. The optative active in oirii') j8t|Xov :To) {8i)Xovro ■adov) {8t)Xov(r6ev 'adr)p) l8T)Xovnier ; those ot ose of verbs in 120. id (fi. Thu.* kf tre, TrXcovo't ; 'Xccof. most forms; to want, is •acted forms ; tatger, cr/iuo), piyovv), and , active does' 6 or €r €Xpa«V) see i> and ooi (in forms in atv See § 9, 4, perhaps was § 99. 1. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, and in the perfect and future perfect of all the moods and the participle, the stem of the verb receives an augment (i.e. increase^ at the beginning. 2. There are three kinds of augment, syllabic augment, temporal augment, and reduplication. (a) The syllabic augment prefixes e to verbs beginning with a consonant ; as \v(o, ekvov. (6) The temporal augment lengthens the first syllable of verbs beginning with a vowel or a diphthong ; as a7«, lead^ ijyov ; oiKeto, oIk, write, ye- ypa, tell; niir^ov from irtida (md-), persuade; rt- rapnonrjv (§ 109, 4, N. 1) from rfpirw, delight; KekXafirfv and KfKXofifvos (§ 109, 7, b) from xcXo/iat, command ; ^papovirom dpapiaK (ttoX-), shake; KfKduep-), eTre(f>pa8op. Note 4. "Ayat, lead, has a second aorist with Attic reduplication (§ 102), ^yayoi/ (dy-ay-), which adds the temporal augment in the indicative, subj. dyayepu>; oXoXkop (for dX-aXfK-op) of dXe^o), ward off; and tpepinop of tpima (fpiTT-), chide. Note 5. In Homer a liquid (especially X) may be doubled like p (§ 15, 2), after the augment e; as eXXaxop for €Xa\op. So sometimes epa> ; regular reduplication 8ta, from deida, fear. 2. Verbs beginning with ^«^o consonants (except a mute and a liquid), with a aouble consonant (f, ^, -^/r), or with p have the simple syllabic augment e in all forms of the perfect and future perfect. U.g, SrcXXo), semi, faroKKa] fijTc'o), seek, efi^Tijica; >/^ftSo), lie, eyjffvaiMai, eylrevcTfAevos] pirrTo), throw, tppififtai, fppl6ai (for pp see § 15, 2). Note 1. Verbs beginning with yv, and some others beginning with a mute and a liquid, take € instead of the reduplication ; as yi/w- pi^ut, recognize, iyvapiKa; yiyvoxTKo) (yi/o-), know, eyvaKa', but k\(i(o, shut, K€K\eiKa (regularly). Note 2. Mipvfjaica) (pva-), remind, has pfpvrj fiat (memini), remem- ber, and KTaopai, acquire, has both KtKTrjpai and cKTTjpat, possess. See also Homer, pf. pass, of pinrcj and pviroat. 3. Verbs beginning with a short vowel have the tem- poral augment in all forms of the perfect and future perfect. E.g. "Ayco, lead, ^^a, ^y/xat, rfyptvos] aKoXovdea, follow, r)Ko\ov6r)Ka, f)Ko- XovBrjKepai; 6p66u>, erect, apdapai; 6pi((o, bound , &ptKa, upicrpai; aTifiou), dishonor, f)Tipa>Ka, ffTip,(apai, fut. pf. r)Tipu>aopat; the fut. pf. is very rare in verbs which have the temporal augment. 4. When the perfect has the reduplication, the pluper- fect generally prefixes to this the syllabic augment e. But when the perfect has the syllabic augment e (or et) or the temporal augment, the pluperfect and the perfect are augmented alike. E.g. Avo), XeXujca. tKcXvKdv, \f>,vpai, eXeXvprjV, (TTeXXo), earoKKa, fordK- Kfiv, «(TTd\pMtiaTa.\pT)v', Xa/i/Sdvo). etKrjcfia, €l\Tj, oXXv/xt, upvvfii, opvTToi, (l)€pu>. See also, for Ionic or poetic forms, atpeco, dXdopai. d\vKTfa>,dpupiaK, updut (oTTcoTra), opiyu), opvvpi. The Attic redupl'-catiou Tso called by the Greek grar^'narians) ls not peculiarly Attic, and is found in Homer. Note 1. 'Eje/po) (eyep-), rouse, has 2 perf. eyp-riyopa (for Jy-i;yop-a, of. § 109, 3), but fy-T)y(pp,ai. For the Attic reauplication iu rjyayov, 2 aor. of ayo), in {jvfyKa and ijpfyKov of (/)fpa), and in Homeric SKoKkov of aXc^o), see § 100, 2, N. 4. Note 2. The pluperfect rarely takes an augment in addition to the Attic reduplication. But dKovv>, hear, dKTjKoa, generally has fjKi]- Kofiv in Attic; and djr-(o\a}\ei (of dn-oWvfii, dn-oKaXa), MfiafioKfi (pi ofiwfii, ofioiftoKo), and di-apciovKvo (of 8t-opiaaoi, St-optapvyfJiai) occur in Attic prose. See Homeric pluperfects of eXavvw and epddot. Augment of Diphthongs. § 103. Verbs beginning with a d'lphthong take the temporal augment on the first vowel of the diphthong. ai or a becoming 77, ol becoming &>. E.g. AiTtu), asli, fiTr,iaa] oiKeco, dwell, uKTja-a, , liken), ei/dou or rjv8ov (eilSu). sleep), evpjjKo and evpfdr)v or rjvpriKa and ijvpeBrjv i^evpicrKca , find) , ev^tnirjv or rji^dpr^v (cy- Xopai, praii). Editions vary alsf* in the augment of avaivat, dry, and of some verbs beginning with ot, as oiaKoaTpo(o, po). See r»cft), ififi- I, opvvfii. is) js not y-ijyop-a, ii ^yayov, a oKakKOf lition to has ^Ki;- copiryfiai) ,kfc tlie ithong. increase, without orms, as pijKa and i/iijy (fv- ilry, and 106.] AUGMENT. Syllabic Augment be/ore a Vowel. 123 § 104. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syl- labic augment, as if they began with a consonant. When e follows the augment, cc is contracted into et. U.g. 'fi^co) (oiO-), push, (uxra, eaurfiai, (taadrju; dXtWofim, be captured, ctiXuKu, 2 iior. ioKuiV (or i^utv)', iiypvfii (ay-), break, ea^a, 2 pi", tayai fp8^a (^F(6-,b)d- for F(o6-) and cotKo (Ik-), and plpf. fIo-T»;- Ktiv (for ((av) of tffrnui. See also Ionic and poetic forms under 6v8dvo), dnrto, fido/iat, ctXo), €(7rof, ftpo), cXtto}, evcu/it, (^a>, and e^ofiai. Note 1. 'Opdco, see, and dv-oiya, open, generally take the tempo- ral augment after the syllabic; as eopuv, iutpdKa (or iopoKo), eupdfiai', du-f(pyou, du-€, fia-Tjyov (§ 26, N. 1); fK-^dWw, f^-f^aWov (§ 13, 2); arvX- Afyoj, avu-f\eyov', vvfi- ttXcko), (tvu-€7t\€kov (§ 16, 5) ; atry-xfo), aw-f^fov, a-vy-Kc^^vKa', avaKevd^a, aw«TKfva^ov (§ 16, 6, JST. 3) ; d7ro-j3dXX(u, aTr-e/SaXXoi* ; — but Tre/jt- i^aWov and Trpo-eXeyoi'. See § 131, 7. Note 1. Up6 may be contracted with the augment; as trpovKeyov and irpoxj^aivov, for irpoiXeyov and irpoi^aivov. Note 2. Some verbs not themselves compounds, but derived from nouns or adjectives compounded with prepositions (called indirect 124 INFLECTION. !' I Ul- 1 [§io«. compuunds), are augmented after the preposition; as vTroTrrcvw (from vnoirros), nuspect, vntimTtvov, &H if the verb were from vn6 and uTTTfCoi; dndKoytofiai, defend one's self an-t\oyT}(rafir}v :, see also ckkXi;- (rid(, fKoBiCov; Ka6ti8ia, sleep, iitd6tvhov and Ka^Odoi/ (£p. KuQivhov)', dvixui, T}Vftx6pT)v, fjv«t- ■vvofd, dfji7ri, dispute, t]p(f)itafirjTovp (as if the last part were -(r^Tfrtu). 2. Indirect compounds of Svo--, lU, and occasionally those of cv, well, are augmented after the adverb, if the following part begins with a vowel. U.ff. ^voraptarifa, he displeased, bvaifpiarovv ; (Vfpyfria, do good, tvrjpyi' njKa (or fiffpy-'). Note. In other cases, compounds of 8v(r- are augmented at the beginning, and those of c^ generally omit the augment. 3. Other indirect compounds are augmented at the begir ning. See, however, 68o7rote'a*. Omission of A ugment. § 106. 1 • In the imperfect and aorist, the temporal aug- ment is often omitfctv' by Herodotus ; as in d/xci/ScTo and d/xci- ij/aro (for rifi€i^€To and rifi€iil/aTo) ; and both temporal and syllabic augment by the Epic and Lyric poets, as in ofiiXtov, ^X^^) ^K^ {^^^' iip-i^iov, tlxoV) e& (<^«p-), bear, fut. oio-w {ol-}, aor. rjvtyKa (ci'cyK-). § 108. Verbs in w are divided into eight classes with reference to the formation of the present stem from the simple stem. I. First Class. (Stem unchanged.) Here the present is formed directly from the single stem of the verb ; as in Xu-w, loose, Xc'y-u), say, ttAck-o), weave ^ ay-w, lead, ypd;, i to ct (sometimes to I), V to €v (sometimes to v) ; as tt/jk-u} (tolk-), melt, AetV-w (Xitt-), leave, €vy-(i) (^vy-), Jlee, rpi/S-d} (jpX^-), rub, \f/vx^o) (i/'vx-), cool. Here belong, further, Kfj8■)» piy<» (cev^o) (kC^-)* T/i^yw (ruay-), and (d&n- or Ta. See also § 08, V. Note 1 (ft). 2. Six verbs in cw with stems in v belong by formation to this class. Those originally lengthened v to cv, which became ef (§ 1, N. 2) before a vowel, and finally dropped F and left € ; as ttAC-, irAcu-, TrXefS-o), ttAc-w, «at7. These verbs are dia (Sv-), run, via (vv-), swim, jr\it» (rrXiJ-), sail, nvia (npv-), breathe, pia (pv-), Jlow, xto> (x^-)^ /x'fir. The poetic o-fvw (, vyov; rpKa, rq^a, ririjica, tTdicnv, pia (for p«Fa>), ptvaopm, tppvrjv Exceptions are the perfect middle of d\tiut, iptUta, fptiira, rjv; and in KaXvirroo (koKv^-), cover, it is seen in Ka\v^-r), hut. The verbs of this class are arrr-w {&<\)-), fidnT-to (^d(f)-), fiXdnr-o (/3Xn/3-), ddTTT-to (Ta(f>-), 0pvirr-a> (Tpv(f>-), KdXvrrr-a) («ca\v/3-), Kdpirr-at («Ca/Un--), xXfTTT-'J) (xXfTT-), KOTTT-Ci) ((COTT-), KpxmT-Oi (upvfi- OT KpV(f>-) , KviTT-a> (>ci)0-), pdiTT-ca (pa(f)-), piirT-(o (pi(f)-), (TKdnT-w (aKa(f>-), , belongs here. IV. FouKTH Class. (Iota Class.) This includes all verbs in which occur any of the euphonic changes arising from the addition of i to the simple stem in forming the present stem (§ 16, 7). There are three divisions : — 1. ( Verbs in o-o-co or tto) and ^(o.) (a) Presents in o-o-w (ttw) generally come from palatal stems, k, y, or \ with i becoming I 108.] VKRRAL STKMS. 127 trrr {rr). These have futures in ^oi; as Trpdatrut (irpdy-), do-(rb> (Ildt.), and poetic Ipdcro-ia, Kopvavut (KopiiB-), piatTopai. One has a labial stem, niaaa (n-fTr-), fooX', fut. Treyo). (b) Presents in ^w may come from stems in 8 and have fu- tHres in o-w, or from stems in y (or yy) and have futures in ^w ; as tfipd^ta {pd^)y say^ fut. (dpTroS-), davpd^o> (tfaupa^-), fpifw (cptfi-), ifu (16-), uopi(dCa> (trAoy-) , pvC (m^^v) ' ff rumble ; (iraib-, iraiy-), play, fut. irai^ovpai (§ 110, II. N. 2), aor. (naura. See also poetic forms of Apnd^a and i/do-. Note 2. Nt'fo) (w/S-), u?a.s/t, has a labial stem. 2. ( Feris wiVA lengthened Liquid Stems.) (c) Presents in \\(t) are formed from simple stems in \ with added i, At becom- ing XX; as (TTcXXo), «ene?, for o-TcX-t-o); dyytXXo), announce, for dyycX-i-o); dX\u), trip up, for o-<^aX-i-a>. See § 16, 7 (c). See also ^dXXo) OdX-), ^dXXo) (^dX-), okcXXo) (okcX-), 7rdXXa> (ttoX-), irxeXXa) (cricfX-), TeXXo) (tcX-), aWopai (dX-), &C. (d) Presents in aii/w, nvo), atpco, and €ip(o are formed from simple stems ^r liv, €v, ap, and ep, with added t, which, after ' The lists of verbs of the fourth class are not complete, while those of the other classes which are given contain all the verbs in common xwe. m 128 INFLECTION. [§ 108. ii m metathesis, is contracted with the preceding vowel ; as aiv(t), show, for c.if-i-o}, fut. tftavio', KxeiVo), kill, for KT«/-t-a); cdpo), raisCf for ap-t-ta ; aireipo), SOW, for ctttc/d-i-o). See § 16, 7 (d) . Those in Ivo), vvto, and vpta may be formed in the same way from simple stems in Xv, vv, and vp, u becoming I, and v'i be- coming V ; as Kptvo), judge, for KpXv-i-u), fut. KptvCt ; d/mvi/o), loarc? q/^ for d/AUK-i-o), fut. ap-vvSi j avpto, draw, for (Tvp-i-to. See also cvtftpaivta (€vpav-), KepSatvto (KcpSar-), pxaivta (fitav-), iripaivio (^ripav-), (T-qpaCvto {(Tr/fiav), iaivav-), reivu) (rev-), poetic OitviD {Ocv), ytLVo/Jtai (yiv-), (Taip «yctp<«) (eycp-), Kcipo) (Kcp-), iftOeipotJ^tfiOep-), Kktva) (. Xii^-), irXwo) (ttXuk-), o^uvb) (o^iJv-), ai(r;(i;va> (aiff^'^v^), oX.ovpopM (pXoijivp-), &c. Note 1. *0€iX(o (o<^cA-), 6e obliged, owe, follows the analogy of stems in cv, to avoid confusion with 6€X\(o (o<^eA-), increase; but in Homer it has a regular "'orm oc^eAAo). Homer has eiAo/uai (e\-) /)rcss. Note 2. Verbs of this division (2) regularly have futures and aorists active and middle of the liquid form (§ 110, II. 2). For exceptions (in poetry), see § 110, II. N. 4. Note 3. Many verbs with liquid stems do not belong to this class; as Bt/io) and Scpw in Class 1. For ^aivto, &c., see V. Note 1. 3. (Lengthened Vowel Stems.) (e) Here belong two verbs in aio) with stems in av, KaOo, burn, and KXaiwy weep (Attic also Koo) and KXdto). These stems Kav- and kXxlv- (seen in Kava-ta and KXawrofiai) became ku/ti- and KXa/ri-, whence km- and KAai- (see II. 2). Note. The Epic forms other present stems in this way; so Saia> (8o-)) burn, fialonat (/uo-), seek, vaiw (^va-), inhabit, oirvlu (oiru-), marry, and per- haps Saiojxci, divide, V. Fifth Class. (N Class.) 1. Some simple stems are strengthened in the present by adding v; as 6dv-Oi), tvaste; SaKv-u) (8aK-), bite; Kap.v-*a (Ka;u.-), be weary ; T€fiv- (with Sua)), iJom. (9vvo) (with Ovw), rush: for cAawto (cAa-), see N. 2. 2. Some consonant stems add av; a/naproVa) (afiapr-), err; al(rOdv-ofiai {al (8o-), and per- tems are . {ea-), -0) (8aK-), \vv(a (with N. 2. JT-), err; or y be- le vowel ; § 108.J VERBAL STEMS. 129 as Xav0d.V'io(\a9-, Xav6-) , escape notice ; Aa/xj8ai/-a) (\tt/?-,Xa/x/8-), take; ^lyyai/to (ffiy-^Oiyy-), touch. So ai^av-o) (with aij^-at), Bapdau-o) (8ap$-), a7r-€;(dni/o/Liat («X^-), tfai^o) (witli if-oj), poetic Kt^ai'-o) (ftX")' otSav-w (with oid-eo), Class 7), oXt(T^ai/-(i) (oXtrr^-), 6a(f)paiv-opai ipa (6(f>\-, 6(f)\urK-, yl.), with poetic aKiraiv-opai (aXXr-., N. 1), d^:f>av-(a (dX0-), fpibaivoi (epi8-). With inserted »/, y, or /li, Avdav-o) (aS-), Xayxaiz-ea (Xa;(-), pavddu-a> (pad-), irvvddv-opat (ttv^-), Ti;y;(av-(» (tu;(-), witn po- etic ^avhuvbi (;(aS-), epvyyav-a> (epiJy-). 3. A few stems add vc : j8ui/c-cj (with /?v-w), sto/j i, Xavddva, rvyxdvat. See also fpvyydvta, ep^opat, ^evywpi, and nvvddvopai. Note 2. 'EXavva (eXa-), rfriuc, is irregular in the present stem (probably for eXa-uv-w). "OX-Xvpi (oX-), destroy, adds Xv instead of vv (by assimilation) to the stem 6X-. Aappdo) {8dp-), subdue, adds va. VI. Sixth Class. ( Verbs in o-km.) These add o-k or (after a consonant) i, dna(f)-i(TK(ji (poet.), dpap-iaKd (poet.), ^d- (yvo-), 8t-8pd-orKO) (8pa-), (iravp-iarKOi (poet.), ^j3d-(rKa>, Bvfj- (TKat (dau-. Ova-), 6pw- iyvo-). *Ap-ap-i teach, and Xd-ffKU) (Xa/c-), speak, omit k or x before (tkw instead of inserting t. So Homeric elaKU or lirKW (etVc- or ik-). Note 4. These verbs, from their ending (tkw, are often called inceptive verbs, although fow of them have any inceptive meaning. VII. Seventh Class. (E Class.) A few simple stems add € to form the present stem ; as Sokc-w (Sok-), seem, fut. 86$(i); wdt-io ((i^-), j»MsA, fut. axro) (§ 16, 2); ya/Mc-w (ya/w,-), marry, fut. (ya/Acw) yafiio. These verbs are, further, yrycocco), yrfdfo). KTtmeto, Kvptto, fiaprvptta (with fiafyrvpofiai) i, pimfa (with pinTta), (fjikeot (v. Epic forms); and poetic hariopai^ bovnto}, ctXe'cu, iiravptat, Kfvreo), Tiareopai, piyta, oruyeo), ropco), and \paurpfm. See also TrexTeo) (7rf»c-, »re»cT-). Most verbs in fa> belong to the first class, as Troteta (Trote-). Note, A few chiefly poetic verbs form present stems by adding a in the same way to the simple stem : see fipvxdofiai, yodu, 8ripidw, prjKdopxii, prfTidu, pvKdopai. VIII. Eighth Class. {Mixed Class.) This includes the few irregular verbs in which any of the tense stems are so essentially different from others, or which are otherwise so peculiar in formation, that they cannot be brought under any of the preceding classes. They are the following : — aipiat (A-), take, fut. alpijcra), 2 aor. clXoi'. dXc'^o) (dX«#t-). ward off, fut. aXf^^o-a> (§ 109, 8), dXe^Vo/xai, and dXe^o/iat; 2 aor. a\a\Kov (Horn.) for ak-akfK-ov (§ 100, 2, X. 4). yiyvopai (ytv- or yv-, yev(-, yn-), become, for yi-yevopat, fut. ytinj- aopm, 2 aor. eyei/o/xi/f, 2 pf. yeyova (§ 109, 3) with ytydao-t, &C. (§ 125, 4). €0a {Ft6-, FatO-, a>d-)> ^^ accustomed, 2 pf. eiotBa, 2 plpf. eludtw. fibou (FtS-, Id-), saw, vidi, 2 aorist (no present act.); 2 pf. olha, know (§ 127). Mid. cifio/iat (poetic). elitov {fin-, fp-,pe-), spoke, 2 aor. (i»o pres.); fut. {(pta)^ epw, pf. «i-pT)-Ka. The stem eiw- is for t-tn (orl^,. N-Ffn-), and e'p- (pe-) is for fep- {Fp(-), seen in Lat. rer-htuu (§ 109, 7. «). So tv-eVo). fpXOfjMi {f'Kvd- or eX^-, f'Xev^-), e about : mid. evofiai, follow ( 2 aor. eap^oi* (for <-o'e;(-oi'). Also tffyo) (tor (n-iXr]tXTfpai, ec^tXij- 6tjv, i^riXoat (finXo-), show, dijXoiaa), &c. ; SO Ti only in the future and aorist active and middle and in the future perfect. 'AKpodofiai, hear, has aKpodaofiai, &c. ; XP^^^^ 0^^^ oraclefi, lengthens a to 17 ; as xph''^^ ^^- ^ rp^o-o) and frprja-a from stem Tpa-', see Tf Tpaiv(o, bore. Note 2. Some vowel stems retain the short vowel, contrary to the general rule (§ 109, 1); as yf\ai;a>, dpK€oi, dpoat, dpixo, ycXdo), iXKv, ^Xdco, kXcxo), break, ^e&), Trruo), cmdcii, rfXeoi, rpfo), ^Xda>, XaKd, vtiKfta, and the stems {ad-) and (df-); — (other verbs with vowel stems) dpfOKa (dpf), axBopai (d;(df-), fXauj/ft) (eXa-), (XdirKo/iat (IXa-), fifdv (fifdv-) ; also all verbs in avw(ii and tvpvfii, v.ith stems in a and c (given in § 125, 5), with oXXvfii (oXe-) and ofivvf^u (ofio-). (b) The final vowel of the stem is variable in quantity in differ- ent tenses in the following verbs: (pure verbs) atVeco, aipect, 8i(o, bind, 8voi (v. 8vvu>), epvu) (Kpic), dvco, sacrifice, KoKiui Xuo), /nuw, noBfo, tto- vccd; — (other verbs) ^alvoi (/3a-), (vpiaKut {tvp-, eupt-), fidxonai (fiaxf-)^ itivui (jtX-, TTO-), <^Bdv(ii (6i-). 2. Many vowel stems have o- added, before all endings not beginning with o-, in the perfect middle and first passive tense systems. E.g. Tf\f(i),^fivish, T(TfXe-(T-p.ai, fTcreXfO-fiTfu, eTf\((TdT)u (§ 97, 4); ye\d, ^v(o, Tratb), TraXaiA), TraucD, Trpto), add, ripa, vu), ;(da), XP^^^ pCP''<"f ^'^^^ P^^ etic pato). Some, however, have forms both with and without a-. See the Catalogue. 3. In the second perfect the simple stem generally changes € to o, and lengthens other short vowels, a to 77 (after p to d), o to €0, I to at, and v to cv. E.g. Srepy-o), love, earopya', y ly vopai (y(v-). become, yfynva, fytydvtiv', TiKTot (tck-), bring forth, Wrojca; (baivro (^«i/-). 7rf, (aa-) and , axdofMi ) all verbs , 5), with in differ- , fit'o), /^«»a), Terpappau (Tpdnrju (but erp((f>dt)v, Ion. fTpd(f)6Tiv) : Tp(6rjv). It occurs, further, in the second aorist (active or mid- dle) of Krrti/o), /■///, Tf/u/o), CM/, TptVa), and Tt'pTro); viz., in cktovov (poet.), trauov, (Tap,6pr)v, €Tpanov, (Tpan6pr}v, Terupnoprjv (Horn.); also in several Homeric aud poetic forms (see 8epKopat, ntpda, and Trrryo-- O-ft)). Note 2. The first passive system rarely appears in verbs with monosyllabic liquid stems. TetVo) («!»-), stretch, in which Tti/- diops V in this system (§ 109, G), changes c to a in (Tddr)v and tK-radijao- fiat. 5. Liquid stems lengthen their last vowel in the aorist active and middle; as o-tcX\(o (o-tcX-), co-rciXa. See § 110, III. 2, and the examples. 6. Four verbs in vw drop v of the stem in the perfect and first passive systems, and thus have vowel stems in these forms : — Kpivm (KpTi/-), separate, KcVpiKa, KCKptp,ai, iKpiOrjv ; kXiv(o (kXIv), incline, kckXiko, K€Kkifiai, ckXi^i^v ; r-XtVw (irXvv-), wash, Tren-Xv/Aat, ^Au^?;!/ ; tciVw (tcv-), stretch, TcraKa (§ 109, 4), tctu- 134 INFLECTION. [§ 109. /tut, irdOrjv, iK-TaO^(Tofiai. So KT«Va> ill soiiie poetic forms : see also KtpSaivui. Note. When final 1/ of a stem is not thus dropped, it becomes y before Ka (§ 16, 5), and generally becomes o- before /xat (§ 16, 6, N. 4) ; as aiva) ((pav), iTf (/SaA.-, /SAu-), throw, fie/SXtj- Ktt, ^tf^Xrjfiaiy iftkrjOrjv ; BtpKofiai (ScpK-) , see (poetic), 2 aor. ISpaKoi/ (^paK-, § 109, 4, N. 1). (i) Sometimes syncope (§ 14, 2) : (1) in the present, as yiyvofiai (yev-), become, for ■yt-yfv-o/utai ; (2) in the second ao- rist, as irrToixriv for i-ireT-ofirjv ; (3) in the perfect, as Tmdvvvfii (TTCTtt-), expand, TrcTrra/Aai for Trc-ircTa-fiai. (c) Sometimes reduplication (besides the regular reduplica- tion of the perfect stem) : (1) in the present, especially in verbs of the sixth class and in verbs in fit (§ 121, 3), as yt- yvtucTKOj, know, yi-yvofiai, i-arT7}fii ; (2) in the second aorist, as ireCdio {irXB-), persuade, ire-irXOov (Ep.). Attic redupl. in aya>, lead, i^yayoi/ (ay-ay-) ; SCO apaplaKUi. §110, V. N. 2; §100, Notes 3 and 4. 8. E is sometimes added to the present stem, sometimes to the simple stem, making a new stem in c. From this some verbs form special tenses ; and others form all their tenses except the present, imperfect, second perfect, and second aorists (§ 90, N. 1). E.g. BovXofiai (/3ouX-), wli^h, Pov\rf(rop.ai (fiovXe-, § 109, 1), &C.; alcrdd- vopai (alad-), perceive, alaOriaopal (aladf-), jfo-^ij/iiat; fifua (fiev-), remain, ptptvrjKa (/xei/e-) ; pA\opai (pax-)i,/if/hl, fut. {p.a\f-op.ai) paxov- flat, (paxeadprfv, pfpdxipai', x^'^P*^ (x^P')* ^'cjolce, x'^'-PW*^ (x'**P*')» Kfxdpr)Ka (xapf-). (a) The following have the stem in e, in all tenses except those mentioned; (1) formed from the present stem: aXc^ai. tiKOopai (Ion.), tixOopai, (iovXopai, /Sdo-Ko), t^fo), want, (deXot and dcXto, epopMi and eipo- pat (Ion.), (pp(o, fv8a>, (^a», KfXopai (poet.), pdxopai, pfHopat (poet.), ptWco, pfXo), pvC<>>i i^fic/i', otopai, oixopai. ocfxiXto ntTopai; (2) formed from the simple stem: ala-ddvopai (ata-d-). npaprdvoi (Atiapr-), &v8dya> (iS-), dn-tx^dvopai (-^X^*)' oif^dvat (av^-), ffXaardvut (^Xatrr-), (vp'uTKta (jfvp-), Kixdva {kix'), XdaKut (Xok-), pavddvoi (^paB-), oXiaBdvio (pXiaB-), /S P a 110.] FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 135 oWvfit (dX-), 6(f}\t,, pefua, iratci), ttcto- fufilf^irra ; (2) formed from the simple stem : hapOavta (8ap6-), K^but ^iSHh), oacfipalvofiai {6(r(f)p-), neidca (nX6-), pea (pi>-), o-Taopai. So rpv^oi, exhaust, Tpv\aa(o. So probably oixu- pai, be gone, has stem oi^o- for olxc- in the perfect otxtn-ica (ci. Ion. oixr}-pai). olorBd- paxov- Xaipc), &v8dvo» fvpiaKta I Formation of Tenae Stems. Remark. This section explains the formation of the seven tense stems enumerated in § 92, 4. They are generally formed from the simple stem of the verb (when this is distinct from the present stem). But verbs of the second class commonly have the lengthened stem (§ 108, II. Note) in all tenses except in the second periiect, second aorist, and second pas- sive tense S3^stems. The verbs enumerated in § 109, 8 form some tenses from stems lengthened by adding e. The stem ma}' be modified in different tenses as has been explained in § 109. § 110. I. {Present Stetn.) The present stem is the stem of the present and imperfect in all the voices. The principles on which it is deriv ed from the simple stem, when they are not identical, are explained in § 108. II. {Future Stem.) 1. Vowel and mute stems add with o- be- come ij/; K, y, X with a- become $; t, S, before a- are dropped (§ 16, 2). Kg. Tt/xd(i>, honor, Tipr^arat', dpdm, do, 8p^a>; kotttw {kott-), cut, Koyjroi', ^\ditT, ^\d^opai ; ypd(f>oi. write, ypdyf^at, ypdylro- pai; TrXtKto, twist, ttXc^o); iTpdaaroi {npdy-), do, wpd^ia, npd^opai; rapdc- (Tta {rapax'), confuse, rapd^to, rapd^opai; (f)pd{^(o {(fipab-), tell, pda'pad-, § 16, 2 and 6, N. 1) ; Tpf, Opi^opai (§ 17, 2, Note). 2. Liquid sU'ins add c (in pliicc of a) to tbnn the future stem ; this e is contracted with u> and o/xat to aj and mmx E.g. mJ Latvia (^ai/-), show, fut. (j^avi-ut) (fiapat, ((fyavt-ofiai) (jiavovfiai] (rreX- Xo) ((TTfX-), send, (crreXe'-a)) trrcXo), (orcXe'-o/iat) aTcXoO/xat ; v€fiu>, dicide, (pf fi€-u)) pffiS)', KpiPia ixpip-), J'>dge, («c^.W- ,») Kpivu. .\oTE 1. (At!i( Fn'ur\) a) i is Mures ^f KoKia, call, and T(\fa>,fnish, KoKiaai and TfX«o ,.< * '3, 1, N. 2), drop o- of the future stem, and contract »caXf- id ■ \t- \\'d\\ &> and o/nat, making KaXu, Ka\ovpiMy TcXco and (poetic) rcXoii^iji. IT 'o futures have the same forms as the presents. So oXXv/xt (oX-, okt- ,, desfroi/, has fut. oktaui (Horn.), <5X«a) (Hdt ), 6\Si (Attic). So fiax€aofiai, Homeric future of pdvopai (paxf-), fiyht, becomes pa\ovpai in Attic. KaBf(opxii (cS-), sit, has Kadtdovpai. (b) In like manner, futures in aaca from verbs in a»ia;/it (stems in a), some in eo-o) from verbs in cwy/Lu, (stems in f), and some in and ea> to S}. Thus JKtbdppvpi ((TKf8a-\ scatter, a-Ktbdaca, (rrKfdda)) aKtba; aro- ptppvp-i (arope-), spread, aTopiaut, {arop(, (J^i^dni) /3t/3a). So e\avpa> (Aa-), ^r/we (§ 108, V. N. 2), eXdo-o), (c'Xnb)) eXoi. For fut. eXdo). Kptpoio, &c., in Homer, see § 120, 1, (/.). (c) Futures in to-w and to-o/xai from verbs in tfw (tS-) of more than two syllables regularly drop nnd tco/Liat are contracted to «o and lovpai ; as Kopi((o, carry, Kouitro}, {Kopifu>) Ko/xtm, Kopiaopxu, (Kopifopai) Kopiovpai, inflected like (f)iXcJ, , flee, (f)fv^ovp.at ; mnra, fall, Trta-ovpai. See also Trat'^o) and irvpOdpo- pai. The Doric forms middle futures like these, and also active futures in o-fo) contracted acj (§ 119, 6). These few are used in Attic with the regular futures rrkevaopxii, Tri/fvo-o/^at, KKavaofiai, (fxv^onai (but never nfaopai). Note 3. A few irregular futures drop o- of the stem, which thus has the appearance of a present stem. Such are ;^6a> and x^<>M^'> §110.] FORMATION OF TEXSE STEMS. 137 ocea- lat. oi" veto, />o«/- • e8o/iot, from (a$i(o (f8-), eat; niofiai, troiii niuu) (m-). drink. : OTE 4. Afewliouid .aems iuM n like mute stems; KeXXa)(KeX-), etic; so (pOelpci ( pdtp-), (Icstmi/, Ep. iii<^. >pd(p'ja>, fypa\l/a, fypa^dpr^v\ irXfKa, i'nXt^a, cTrXf^'' fXTfu'., irpdaaoi, (irpa^a, (npa^dp,t)v\ rapdaao), €Tdpa^a\ (f>pd( pt (8o-), f/ive, Irffn («-), send ana Tidrffii (d«-), put, form the aorist stem by adding k instead of •> iv ix^, ebfiMca, fJKa, eBrjKo. These forms are seldom used except iu ci.e indicative active, and are most common in the singular, where the second aorists €8a>v, ^v, edqv, are not in use. (See § 122, N. 1.) Even fiKaptfu and i6t]Kdpj)v occur, the latter not in Attic Greek. Note 2. Xew, oour, has aorists txta (Hom. fxfva) and exedfirjv, correspoiiding to the futures ;(ea) and x^^l'^'' (II- ^- ^)' ErTrov, said, has also first aorist 6?7ra; and <^epoi, bear, has Ijvfyk-a (from stem «Vf yic-) . For Homeric aorists like ejSTjo-ero, ibiacTo, l^ov, &c., see § 119, 8. 2. Liquid stems form the first aorist stem by lengthening their last vowel, a to >? (after i or p to a) and « to ct. JH.g. ^aivat (av-), €(\>rjv-a, ecjtr/vdfiTjv (rare); ffreXXo) (oreX-), co-retX-a, €VretX-d/ii»;i' ; ayye'XXo) (ayytX-), announce, ^yy€i\a,f)yy€iKdfiriv; nepalixa (ntpdv-),Jinish, €7r€pava; p.taivcd(pidv-), stain, ip-idva; pfp(o,diride, evfifxa, (V(ipMp.r]v', Kpiui\fffirjV] dpaa, (y(ypa(iv', opvaata (opvx-), diy, opiipvxa. So Kop.i(ui (/coyitS-), carry, KtKOfiiKa (§ 16, 1, N. 2). This stem may be modified (§ 109) in various ways : — (1) A short final vowel is regularly lengthened ; as d>{X(a>, 7r€(f>i' \T)Ka. (§ 109, 1.) (2) Most monosyllabic liquid stems and some others change e to a; as o-rcXXo) (o-TeX-), f(rTa\Ka, tara\Kfiv. (§ 109, 4.) (3) A few labial and palatal stems change e to o, as in the sec- ond perfect. (§ lp9, 3, N. 2.) (4) A few stems in v drop v, and become vowel stems. (§ 109, 6.) (5) Metathesis sometimes occurs; as /3dXXw (/3oX-, /SXa-), /3f- ffKfjKa. (§ 109, 7, a.) 9110.] FORMATION JF TENSE STEMS. \3\) wbile ^09,6.) NoTK. The only form of first |H'rf«'ct fouml in Honu-r is tliiit in ku of verbs having; vowel stfins. The pcrtcct in ku of liquid and lin<{U!il sttins, and tilt! uspii'uti'd (k rlccts ol lulnal and [tahital istcnis, l)ulon^ tu a lutur di!Volo[>inont of the langua^u. (c) Future Perfect Stem. The stem of the future perfect is formed by adding cr to the stem of the perfect middle ; as AcXv-, AcAuo--, XiKviTUfiai ; y/Jtt<^-, ytypa(f>-y ytypui//-, yiypdipofiui ; Acitt-, AeAetTT-, AcAcn/^-, AcAcii/^oyuai ; irpda-aoi (Trpuy-), irtirpay-^ Trfirpa^-, ireTT/jri^o/xai. NoTK 1. The future perfect is found m only a small number of verbs. Its stem, when a consonant precedes o-, is subject to all the euphonic changes noticed in the future stem (§ 110, II. 1). NoTK 2. Two verbs have a special form in Attic Greek for the future perfect active; $vj)aK, xhall be dead, formed from TtdvrjK; thr^ stem of jierf . T«6vr)Ka, am dead : and larript, ttct, has iaTrj^oi, Khali stand, from cVti^k-, stem of jierf. tarrfKa, stand. In Homer, we have also K(xapr)(rui and Kfxapf}\ofiai, wish, ni/^v^a from fi^Xu, canceni. Homer has many varie- ties of the 2 perfect participle of the Att-form ; in dftif, gen. auras (some- times adros), fem. avta, as yeyaiii, /3f/3at6s ; in v^s, gen. r?wTos or 7;6tos, tem. ■nvla, as TeOvriilis, Ttevqun-os or -6tos, reevrfvia. Herodotus has fws, ewaa, c6s, gen. €u>tos, eibav^, as iareus, &c., some forms of which [e.g. iffTeura, TfOvrCxri) occur in Homer. The Attic contracts ows, auxra, a6s, to w$, Qffa, 6s (§ 69, N.), gen. wros, (bffrjs, &c., but leaves Tedmuss (of dvT^ffKw) uncontracted. Note 4. The stem of the feminine of the second perfect participle in Homer often has a short vowel when the other genders have a long one; as apripiis, apSpvici ; redrfKiis, redSXvia. 140 INFLECTION. [I no. i; Hi ftr 1 1 V. (Second Aorist Stem.) The stem of the «e(!Oiul aorist jiftivo juul iiiiddlo is thi' simple stem of* the verb, to which the secoiul uorist hIuikIs in the same rehition in vvliich the imper- fect stands to the present stem ; as AciVw (Aitt-) , 2 aor. cXittoi/, iKiTrvfirfv (impf. iKtiiroVf i\€iw6iJLr)v) ; Xa/x^dviit (Au)3-), /aX:tX<;-/iat (§ lO*' 1), ((f)iKri- 6rjv] Tipdo), T(-Tipt)-pai, fTiptjOijv, Tipr)dr}); rpitpu) has redpaniMi, i0piu has ^aTpafifiai, with (rave) earpitpdrfv (Ion. and Dor. iffrpdupdrjp). 4>a/cu has vitpaapai (§ 16, 6, N. 4), but Note 2. N is added in Homer to some vowel stems before 9 of the ao- rist passive ; as lipiiu, erect, XSpUfMi, Ibpiv-driv (Attic ISpiSdrjv). So Horn. ^kXIv- eifp and iKplvd-nv (§ 109, 6). Note 3. For ^T^^»>»'(for ide-Oriv), from rldrtiu (dt-), and Mdyiv (for ^^u- Oniv) from^t^w, sacrifice, see § 17, 2, Note. We have, however, iOpiaivtii (a'yK- IotoXk- ir€<|»t|v- irpaxOc(T))- <|>av9c(i|)* VII. ( 2(1 |(r^)2 Aor. I Pass. J (6.) 2 Fut. ^avc(i))- having no endings in these i)ersons. The original ending ai of the second person singular is found only in the Epic »o-poar in Latin, as in rra-tn, pva-s, ,ra-t, era-nt. In /«, i-t, and rt, hjkI iu the original fxfi in the first person plural (compiuo Latin mus), we see § 112.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 143 3. In the perfect and pluperfect passive and middle, and in both aorists passii'e (except in the subjunctive and opta- tive) , the endings are added directly to the tense stem ; as \i\v-fiai, AcAu-trai, XeXu-rat, AcAu-vrat, i-XeXv-firjv ; i-XvOrj'Vt i-XvOrj-s, l-XiOrj, i-XvBrj-aav (§111). So also in verbs in fii, in most of the forms which are peculiar to that conjugation (§ 121, 1) ; as <^a-/u,€V, ^a-re, from iX^-o-)j.ai Ti6^-|i46a i^iXc-d-picOa TlOc-o-ai <|>iX^-c-( (for kiyo-fii) and \iyu (for Acyc-Tt). Indicative. § 113. 1 . The original connecting vowel in the indicative of verbs in ^ (except in the aorist active and middle, and the perfect and pluperfect active) was o before /u, or i/, and elsewhere «. In the singular of the present and future active, \vhen /u.i and n were dropped and o-i became a- (§ 112, 2, Note), the primitive o and c were lengthened into (o and n..^ The connecting vowel is a in all persons of the first aorist middle ; also in the perfect and first aorist active, except 1 The name "connecting vowel" belongs to the doctrine formerly held, by which this vowel was made a third element in the formation of the verb, distinct from both the stem and the ending. The more correct view con- siders it a part of the tense stem, which thus consists of the fixed portion {e.g. Xey-, \u-, XetTr-, in the present) and a vowel sound which varies accord- ing to the following letter {e.g. \eyo- or Xe7e-). In the original language it was uniformly a, as it appears in the Sanskrit bhara-mi (below). In an elementary work, it is more convenient to treat this variable formative suffix separately, so that the tense stems are given (as in § 95) in their shorter forms (Xu-, XetTr-, &c.). ^ The supposed original forms of the present indicative of \iyu) and the Latin lego are thus given by G. Curtius (Gricchisckes Vcrbum, I. p. 200). The actual forms of the Sanskrit present bharami, I bear (= 4p(a, fero), are given on the right, and the Attic forms of X^yw on the left. Attic Greek. Primitive Greek. Irimitive Latin. Sanskrit. Xiyta XcYO-|j.i lego-m(i) bhara-mi X^'ycis \tyi-(ri lege-s(i) bhara-si Xfyei Xcy«-Ti lege-t(i) bhara-ti X^YO-|i.cv Xryo-)iics lego-mas bhara-mas \iy(-rt Xry€-T€ lege-tes bhara-tha \iyova-i XCYO-VTI lego-ut(i) bhara-nti for Xcyo-v (for 00*0, ao) aTO ao'Oov ao-Oriv a|xc6a ao^c avTO Ie7e-Ti By adding these terminations to the unprolonged tense stems as the}' are given in § 111, all the tenses of the in- dicative, except those included in § 112, 3, may be formed. The latter may be formed l)y adding the personal endings given in § 112, 2 directly to the tense stems. Note 1. The endings am and ao in the second person singular of the passive and middle drop a after a connecting vowel (§ 16, 4, N.), 10 146 INFLECTION. r§ 114. ::■ and are then contracted with the connecting vowel (§ U, 4, X 1). Thus, Xvrj or XiJft is for Xveaat, Xvfat; eXvov is for rAuco-o, i\vto; cAvo-o) (aorist middle) is for f^ivaaao, eXvoao. The uncontracted forms (without er) are common ii Ionic Greek (^ 119, 2). Note 2. The second persons jSoOXet (of (iovXofuu, wish), oiti (of oXofiaiy think), and o\lr(i (of o^ofiai, fut. of opaw, Nff) have no forms in jj. Note 3. A first person dual in fttdov is found very rarely in poetry; as XtXeifinedop (pf. pass, of Xdnci). Note 4. The Attic writers sometimes have rj (contracted from the Ionic ea, § 119, 4) for eti* in the first person singular of the pluperfect active, as ifitfiadfjKr]. Note 5. In Homer tov and aBov are sometimes used for ttjv and aOrjv in the dual. This occurs rarely in the Attic poets, who some- times have TTjv for tov in the second person. The latter is found occasionally even in prose. Subjunctive. § 114. The Subjunctive has the primary endings with long connecting vowels, w, rj, and y, for to (or o), c, and « of the indicative, as follows : - Passive and Middle. Sing. Dual. Plural. wfjiai (i)|jLc6a i]irOc wvTat Acth '^E. Sing. Dual Plural. I. w WftCV 2. Tis tyrov TJTt 3. Tl TJTOV «0"l (f( y\ (for T|, Xvda>; ; (t€ before final v of llie tiiivu jiersoa i)lural). li'i § 115.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 147 1. Verbs in w have a connecting vowel o (in the first aorist active and mirUUe, u) in the optative. This is contracted willi e (or u), maiving vTat 3ond), I active I above IS TlOui [dings inal V Active. Passive and Middle. Sing. Dual. Plural Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. Ol|Jll Ol|fcCV Ol|iT]V oi|u6a 2. Ol« 01T«V OlT€ oio (f'oi oi » • >• Ol OlT1)V OICV oiTO oi(r0t]v OIVTO Aorist Active . Aorist AJiddle. 1. ai|fci ai|JLcv ai)ii)v at|Jic9a 2. ais aiTov aiTc aio (for aitro) a'trOov aicrOc 3. ai aiTTJV aicv aiTo ate 9t]v aiv-o For j>eriphrastic forms of the perfect optative see § liS, 1. the aorist passive see below, 3. For 2. In the present and second aorist middle of verbs in rjfjLc and oifiiy the final vowol of the tense stem (a, c, or o) is con- tracted with I into ai, «, or oi, to A^hich the simple i- ladings fiqi . &C. are added ; as 'urra-i-firfv, la-Taifiqv ; Oe-t-fx-qv, 6dix.r]v ; 8o-i- fxrjvy Boiix-qv. (See § 122, N. 4.) See also the cases of per- fect optative middle in rjfirjv in § 118, 1, Note. 3. The present and second aorist active of the /ni-foni (§ 121, 1), and both aor'sts passive in all verbs, have tli ending v in the first person singular and a-av in the third per- son plural. Here the modal sign is irj, witli which a, t, or o the stem is contracted to airj, €irj, or oir} ; as la-Ta-Lrj-i; larTuirft ; In the dual and [)lural, forms with i for tr/, and uv for ufo-av in the third person plural, are much more common than the longer forms ; as (rroifxci/, crrauv, for i\€'0-i-fii, fjiiXtoi/xi, i\oifii; Sr)\o-o-i-fiij SrjXooifii, SrjXoifii. (See § 98.) Note 1. A few verbs have oiriv in the second perfect optative; as eKnf(f)fvya, iKnf(t>€vyoirjv. The second aorist optative of t^a, hare, is (Tx°h^ (o"Xo*M* i" composition). Note 2. The Attic generally uses the Aeolic terminations «ns, tie, and fiav, for ms, at, auv, in the aorist optative active. See \vu> and orOwv (rOwv ao-OoMrav 1 or ai- Tifiiafii ; . (See iptative ; (o, hare, ons €ias, See \vut e are as LE. ural, rOc If or (tOmv -e IS f ; it is a. fs in ov, ith the Plural. rOc rOoio-av cv § 117.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 149 3. The first aorist passive adds the ordinary active termina- tions (Oi, TO), &c.) directly to B-q of the tense stem, after which 6i becomes n (§ 17, 3); as XvOrj-ri, Au^tJ-tw, &c. The second aorist passive adds the same terminations to rt of the tense stem {Ol being retained) ; as ^at/ry-^i (fiavrj-TU) ; (TTaAr^-^l, O-TttXTj-TO), &C. Both aorists have cvtwi/ in the third person plural. Note. For the form of the imperative in verbs in fii, see § 121, 2, (b) and (c). The Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal Adjectives. § 117, 1. The terminations of the infinitive of verbs in w (including connecting vowels) are as follows : — €€1-1/ (cont. fX'v) €rVat at Present and Future Active Second Aorist Active Perfect Active Aorist Active Aor. Pass, (no connecting vowel) mt Perf. Pass, and Mid. ,, cr^at Aorist Middle a-a-Oai Other tenses, Pass, and Mid. i-adai. All /Ai-forms add mt (act.) or aOat (pass, and mid.) di- rectly to the tense stem. 2. The stem of the active participle ends in it (t in the perfect), which is joined to the tense stem by o (a in the ao- rist) ; except in the aorist passive (§ 112, 1) and in /At-forms, which add vt directly to the stem. The passive and middle participle ends in /ici/os (stem /XCV0-), which is preceded by o (a in the aorist middle) ; ex- cept in the perfect and in //i-forms, which add /xcvos directly to the tense stem. Note. Participial stems in vt add era to form tlie stem of the feminine; as Xuoi^-ora. Xuowfieda)', opt. fKfivafirjv (Hom. fiffivea}To),or fiffiinjfirjv. So poetic K(K\^fir)v (for KfKKrf-i-fitjv) of KaXeo), and Homeric XtXi-To (for XeXv-i-ro) or \f\vvTo of Xw'o). See also pr. opt. SatvvTO of Saivvfii- 2. The perfect subjunctive and optative active is more fre- quently expressed by the perfect active participle with w and itrp' than b}' the special forms given in the paradigms ; as AcAu- Ku)s w and AeAuKojs elr^v for AcAvko) and AcAi;f(ot/jti. Note. The perfect imperative can be expressed by the perfect participle and la^t, co-tcd, &c. ; as (IprjKlas tirra, let him have spnlen (before a given time); dprjfxevov earoi (§ 202, 2, N. 1). The forms like \(\vKe, XcXotTTf, &c. weie probably used only when the perfect had the meaning of the present; as vdo-KO) (xau), gape, pf. Kextjua, imper. Kexh^fre, gape. (See § 95, 1, Note.) I § liy.J DIAIA%(TIC AND I'UKTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 12. 151 3. The futuic perl'ect actiie, for which very few verbs have a special form (§ 110, IV. c, N. 2), is generally expressed by the perfect participle with arofxai (I'uture of ci/i-t, be) ; as iyvwKo- Tcs cavt/ic^a, we shall ham learnt. 4. Even tlic perfect and pluperfect indicative are occasion- ally expressi'd by the perfect participle and ei/u.i'; as ycyovais ia-TL for ye'yove, TrcTrotr/Kws r/v for iTmroi-^Kei. 5. The periphrastic third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect indicative middle and passive, formed by the parti- ciple and cwri and ^a-av, is necessary when the stem ends in a consonant (§ 97, 2). The participle may be used in all gen- ders ; as ovToi XiXeififitvot iia-i, these {men) have been left ; avrai AcXcc/x/jtcvat cicrt'; Taxrra XeXeifx/xcva iari (§ 135, 2). Note. Here, however, the Ionic endings arm and aro for vrai and vro (§ 119, 3) are occasionally used even in Attic prose; as rr- Tdx-arm and fTfTd)(-aTO (Thiicyd.) for TtTayfifvoi (t and fo/nat) of liquid stems; as fitpiay, Attic ix€vu}. When they are contracted, they follow the analogy of verbs in t, aovfiai or o-eO/xat) for 0-0), aofiai in the future. The Attic has aovfiai in the future middle of a few verbs (§ 110, II., N. 2). 7. In Homer a- is sometimes doubled after a short vowel in the fni'.ry imp. €;^-ccoi'; epvat, 1 aor. fpitr-aaKf ; Xiy(ii, burn. From these special stems are formed — sometimes presents, as (^Xeye^w; sometimes imperfects, as €8ia>Kadou[ sometimes second aorists, as taxtOov {ax-) and also subjunctives and opta- tives, as (iKa6Kdd€iv, (rxfOtriv, v or a-x^dav. As few of these steins form a present indicative, many scholars consider (h3 &c., with the 8ubjimctive8,&c. second aorisLs, and accent the infini- tives and participles 8ia>Ka$ttv, dfivvadtlv, tiKaOtiv, tiKadiitv, &c., although the traditional accent is on the penult. See in the Lexicon aKKdBtiv, dfiwdBo), di>y (fidivvdio, . 12. (Suhjunciivc.) (x(v (a^fip). For the perfect ("nly of the fit-form, § 125, 4) see § 126, 9: the inf. in tvai does not occur in Homer. So Horn, ptvai, Dor. peu, in the aor. pass. ; as 6poi) Homer often has the uncontracted 2nd aor. inf. act. in eetf; as idt'fiv. (c) The Doric has eu (§ 98, N. 5) and the Aeolic rjv for ctv infin. ; Doric also ^v for eav or eti/; thus dflbtv and yapvtv (Do in the yapvfv (Dor.) for dddeiv and yijpvfiv; (f)fpriu and f)(^r}v (Aeol.) for (ptptiu and exfti/; ftTr^v (Dor.), fiTTTju (Aeol.), for tlnt'ip. 15. {Participle.) The Doric and Aeolic have otaa for outra, and atr, ato-a for aa, ao-a, ill the participle ; as t^oiaa, Opt^^ais, Bpf^aitra. ^, IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) ii 1.0 1.1 ^M2» 125 m "^^ mi ■^ lii 122 2.0 111 itt u I 1^ H >4 1 >4 ♦- 6" ^ ^ 4^^ ^m > > Sciences Corporation aa VVIST MAIN STRUT WIISTM.N.Y. USM (7l6)t72-4S03 \ t ^ '^ ^x^ 154 INFLECTION. [§ 120. Special Forms of Contract Verbs. § 120. The present and imperfect of verbs in aa>, ea>, and oo have the following dialectic peculiarities : — 1. (Verbs in aw.) (a) In Homer verbs in aa> are often contracted as in Attic. In a few cases they remain uncontracted ; sometimes without change, as vauTaovai, vaifrdau, from vauTam, dioell ; some- times with d, as in irfivda, hunger, bt^Om, thirst ; sometimes with (ov for aov in the imperfect, as fievoiveov from nevoivato, long for. (b) Commonly, when they are not contracted in Homer, the two vowels (or the vowel and diphthong) which elsewhere are contracted are assimilated, so as to give a double A or a double O sound. The second syllable, if it is short by nature or has a diphthong with a short initial vowel, is generally prolonged; sometimes the former syllable ; rarely both. We thus have aa (sometimes aa) for at or 07 (aa for aei or aij), and oa> (sometimes too or uto) for ao or acv ,, 6pdouv ipdoivrai ,, opdovrai alTi(((po ,, alridoio The lengthening of the former vowel occurs only when the word could not otherwise stand in the Homeric verse; as in fj^aovrts for fj^ovres, ^/3a>o(ft( for ^jS^otfit, fivAa ; this occurs in the dual of a few imperfects in Homer, as irpotravBrjTriv (from npoaavBda), , ao, and aou to ro), eo, and «ov, especially in opdoa, ctpcardo), and 0otrda) ; as 6pca>, opcoin-ec, Speovai, €ipaTeov, e(f)olT«uv. These forms are generally uncontracted ; but eo and eov sometimes become €v (2, a), as ctporevv. In other cases Herodotus contracts verbs in am regularly. (e) In Homer, cptvai (§ 119, 14, a) in the pres. infin. act. of verbs in ao and eon becomes tjfitvai by contracting « with a or « of the stem (1, c); as yoi]Hfvai (yodoj) for yo€-ep.€vaii 7reivrip.evai (neiuda). See 2 (r/). 2. (Fer6.s in eo).) (a) Verbs in (cd generally remain uncontracted in both Homer and Herodotus. But Homer sometimes contracts te or ett to et, as rdp/Set (rdpiSee); and both Horner and Herodotus some- times contract €o or eov to ev (Hdt. especially in dyvoeat, diavoeoftat, fftfeofiai, voto), TTote'u)); as frof6t)(rt, dyweCvrcf, dtai/oeCyro. So in the Attic futures in lata, taopai (§ 110, II. Note 1, c), as Konieifieda (Hdt.). Hdt. has generally Set, must, but impf . efiee. (b) Homer sometimes drops e in eat and eo (for eo-at, eo-o, § 11&, 2) after e, thus changing eeat and e'eo to eat and eo, as iivdeai for fivdffat (from nvdeofuu), dnoaipfo (for dn-oatpe'eo) ; but he oftener con- tracts e'ent and e'eo to eiat and *to, as pvBeiai, atSeto (for atde'eo). He- rodotus sometimes drops the second e in e'eo ; as <^o^c'o (also 0o^eO), otreo, e'^i/yc'o. (c) In Homer, final e of the stem is often lengthened into et ; as vetfceto), TTveto), for veiKeony irvim. So in cVeXet-ero from reXeo, reXetcu. A similar change takes place in ea> of the 2nd aor. passive subjunc- tive (§ 119, 12, c). (ri) Homer has a present infinitive in rip.evai for e-efxei/at (1, «), as ^tX^fiei/at (iKem) for ^tXe-e/Liei'at, KoXi^/itei/at (KoXe'co). So t^op^vat ((f>opt-eiv) from (^opc'o). Homer has Doric contraction in the auals oftapTrirriv (ofiopre'u)) and OTreiXi^Ti;!' (djreiXe'ci)). See 1 (c). 3. (Verbs in oa>.) (a) Verbs in oca are always contracted in He- rodotus, but he sometimes has eu (for ov) froin oo or oov, especially in dtKotdo), think just ; as ebiKaievv, biKoievpros, bticauvai. (b) They are always contracted in Homer, except in the few cases in which forms in o, plough)] dr}t6^ev and (impf.) Brnomvro (from Stfiom):, iSpmovaa and tdpuovra (from \bpnm). 156 INFLECTION. [§ 121. ,' B , CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. Remark. The peculiar inflection of verbs in fu affects only the tenses formed from the present and second aorist stems, ana in a few verbs those formed from the second perfect stem. Most of the second aorists and perfects here included do not belong to presents in fu, but are irregular forms of verbs in a>; as e/Si/v (/SaiW), eyvav (yiyvaxTKa)), eTTTafitjV (TrtVo/iat), and Tedvufifv, Ttduairjv, Tfdvdvai («nd per- fect of $vrirf-(rif , and ij to v. But in the second aorist, a after p becomes a in e8pav, e becomes ei in the infinitives Ouvai and tlvaif and o becomes ov in bovvai. (See § 126, 3, Notes 1 and 2.) Note 2. The only verbs in pi with consonant present stems are the irregular elpi, be, and rjpat, sit (§ 127). See also oi8a (§ 127, vii.), and a few poetic second aorists and perfects (§ 125, 3 and 4). 2. The following peculiarities in the endings are to be noticed in these forms : — (a) I'he endings ^t and rf-pi, (h) Gt is retained in the second aorist imperative active (§ 116, 1) after a long vowel, as in arridi, fifjdt\ but it is changed to s in ^fj, 86s, ey, and axis- Tt is rare in the present, as 4>odi Wi- The present commonly omits 61, and lengthens the preceding vowel (a e, o, or v) to n, f, ov, or v; as torn (for iora-^t), Ti0ei, didov, deUm (See § 123.) § 122.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 157 ((•) In the second person singular passive and middle, o-at ai.d ao are retained (see, however, § 122, N. 3); except in the second aorist middle and in the subjunctive and optative, which droj) a and are contracted (§ 114, N. 2; § 115, 2, 3). In the present imperative both forms in , ffs, fj, &c. (act.), and a>fuu,jj, ^rm, &c. (mid.), as if from stems in e; which stems are found in Ionic, as in o-rc-6>-/ici/, are-w-o-t (Attic arapev, orwo-i). See § 126, 7 (a). NoTP. 5. Verbs in vvfii form the subjunctive and optative like verbs in 6> ; as 8etKn>-o», dtiKuv-oi/jn, SeiKuv-otfiai, SeiKvvoifiTjp. In other moods forms of verbs in pvu often occur; as BeiKvvovai, ofivvovai. Note 6. Only one verb in wfii, a^ivvvyn (o-/3e-), tfueuchy has a second aorist active; and this, fa^ijv, teas tjuenched, with infin. , formed as if from dv-/it), is added in the active voice. No second aorist middle in vfirjp occurs, except in scattered poetic forms (see Xvta, irvfct, atva, and Yco)). "Ebvv has no aorist optative in Attic; but two forms of an old optative hvjuv (for dv-tij-v) occur in Homer, viz. bvri and r« 123. vs, (dc egular le first he sin- •e gen- ere r\Ka !. (also , 601T0, eguhir ^ opta- lat, Kpf- 1); and ed like iugular tive of iut the .), and ms are ^ See re like other las a iu e stem (from ts the as if niddle Ills of and $ 123.1 Pres. Imp. 2 Aor. Imp. 2 Aor. Mid. (CONJUGATION OP VERBS IN MI. 159 ACTIVE. Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative, Imperative. Infinitive. Partieiple. r t«mi|u (^ ScCKVvp 'Xvrr\v M9t\v l8(8ovv . 48«Cicvvv ICTTTJV (Jleriv) (8vv Ijttw TiOtt 8180 l vrai't\v 0cCt|v 8o£t|v |iai irpiaf|iiT)v 49^|fcT|v 6co|iai 9cl|i.T)v <8. 8(8o|uii 8ai 8(8oo-ai 80ov 8<(KWpta/ive. i (^• UrTa(|i.t)v TlO((|M)V 8i8o{|ii)v 8ciKW0<|i1)V Sing. V- Urrato TiOcCO SkSoto 86ttv irpCoo'Ot irpidv9aMrav or irpUUr9ttv Mo^cMrav or MrOwv 8<$o^ h6cr9wrav or S^vOmv Secand Aorist Middle Infinitive. irp{aa9ai MvOai 84o-9av Second AoHst Middle Participle. irpid|MVo« M|Mvot 86|Mvot 3. The following is a full synopsis of the indicative of laTrj/jLi, TiOriixi, BiBcofii, and heUvvfiit in all the voices : — ACTIVE. Pres. to*n||u, 9U place 8(8tt|u, 8cCkw|ii, give show Imperf. t (\. foTT|ox^ set Aor. •J2. %n^f\v, stood (\. l9T|Ka ■j 2. lOcTOV, &c. ( in dual and plur. tin ISttKa l8oTov,&c. 1. I8|Mi^ Fut. Pf. lo-Wi(o|uu, shall stand. (8<8<(to|Mi, late) i I §124.] SECOND PERF. AND PLUPERF. OF MI- FORM. 167 Second Perfect and Pluperfect «f the Ml-form. § 124- 1- A few second perfects and pluperfects are in- flected like the present and imperfect of verbs in fiu But they are never used in the singular of the indicative, the forms (coraa), {rtOvaa), (y€V<»<»)> ^^- ^®i"g imaginar}'. The partici- ple is formed in ws, wo-a, 09, which is contracted with a preced- ing a to ojs, wva, 05 (irregular for ais) . 2. The principal verbs which have these forms in Attic prose are )8atVu),^o, 2 perf. infin. fie^dvai ; Ovqa-KiDy die, TtOvdvai ; and limjiii, set, iardvai, with stems in a. All these have ordi- nary perfects, ftefirjKa, riOvriKa, eoTrjKa, which are always used in the singular of the indicative. The second perfect and plu- perfect of lony/Ai (o-Ttt-) are thus inflected : — SECOND PERFECT. Indicative. Sing. Dual Subjunctive. itrr» Optative. l4rra(i)v Imperative, 2. 3. lforins. § 125. The forms which have this inflection are as fol- lows : — 1. Verbs in /iiwith the simple stem in the present. These are the irregular ei/i,i, Ac, ci/ii, go, ffirnxi, say, Ktifuu^ lie, and ij/tai, sit, all of which are inflected in § 127 ; with ^fUySay, x/wy, ought, and the deponents aya/xat, Svvafiai, cTriVra/tat, ipa/xai, Kpi- ftafxai. See these in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly Homeric) forms under ai;/Lu, dca/xat, diV/xat, bi^ijfiai, eda, iXi;/lu, Ki)(dvc», Svofiai, pvoftai and tpvofuu, oreO/iat, <^cpo ; also ddpvtfpi, Kipvrjp*, Kprj- ppfjiu, papvapLOi, iripvripiy iriXvapai, irirvtipiy aKidinjpi and Kibvrjpi. 2. Verbs in fii with reduplicated present stems (§ 121, 3). These are larrjfjii, riO-qpn., and SiBtafiif inflected in § 123, ?»7/x,i, inflected in § 127, BiSripn, rare for Scod, bind, Kixpi/fti {xf^a-) , lend, ovivrjfii (om-), benefit, ■irifiTrXrffii (ttXm-), fill, irifiirprjp.i (Trpu-), bum. See also iinapai (late), and Horn. /StjSdf, striding, present partici- ple of rare ^i^^fu. Note 1. nlnirXrjpx and irip.nprjpi insert p. before jr; but the p generally disappears after p (for i;) in ep-ninXripi and ip-rriirprjpi ; but not after v itself, as in (v-cnipiiKaaav, Note 2. *Oviin)pi is probably for 6p-ovri-pu by Attic reduplication from stem oca-. 3. Second Aorists of the pa-Form. The onlj"^ second aorists formed from verbs in pn. are those of 177^^,1 (§ 127), of la-Trjpi, rie-qp.1, and StSw/w (§ 123), of a-l3ivwp.i (§ 122, N. 6) ; with f.TFpiap.'qv (§ 123, 1), the iri'egular uivqpi.7p/ (rarely wm/uwyi/) , of ovivrjpii, and iTr\rip.7}v (poetic) of irip.TrXrfp.i. See the last two in the Catalogue, and also Homeric aorist mid- dle forms of piyw;:t, Spwpi, and Tniywpi. The second aorists of this form belonging to verbs in a are the following: — Baivo (/9a-), go: ffirjp, ^w, Palrjv, ^rjBt, firjvai, /3df. Uiropai (irra-, irrt-)yfiy: act. (poetic) eimjv, (tttw, late), nraiijv, (imjOi, m^vat, late), nrdr. Mid. enTaprjv, Trrdadat, irrdptvoS' ^ § 125.] ENUMERATION OF THE MI- FORMS. 169 fol- [TXaw] (tXo-), endure : crXi^i^, tXw, rKair^v, rX^dt, rkr^vai, rka^. ^6ava> {(^6a-), anticipate : e^Ot^Vy i/ or ^Xcoy, was /aAen, dXoJ, £Koir}p. dXavai, dXovr. (See Note 2.) Bi6a> (^10-), live : «^iu>u, /3«», /Stbii/f (not -oii/c), ^lavai, /Stovs (Horn, imper. /3ta>ra)). TiyvaMTico (yvo-), know : tyvoiv, yi/w, yvolriu, yvStBi, yvovai, yvovi, Avo> (dv-), en/er; eSSe, entered, dv'o). (opt. § 123, 1,) 8vdi, dvvai, bif (§ -23). ^vo {v-), produce : fipvu, was produced, am, , (ftvvah <^vf (like S8vv). Add to these the single forms, yripdvai (yrjpds, Hom.) of yTjpdaKa, grow old ; dito- imperat. of e\a, have : mdi, imperat. of viva, drink. See also in the Catalogue Homeric ^t-forms of the following verbs : diravpdta, aa, /SaXXo), /Si/Spoxnco), kXi/o>, kti^o), Xvo), ouraa>, TreXa^o), ttXaW, irveoi, irniaaa, trtvoi, , fyvarov, fyvanrjv, eyvoip,ev, (yptoTf, (ypuxrav. Subj. -yv© (like 8&). Opt. ypolrjp (like doti^i/). Imperat. yi/m^i, yruro), yi/torof, yvoro)!', ypcire, ypatraxrap or •yi/dirrcai'. Inf. yfca^at. Part, yi/ows (like fiovs). The optative ftu^rjp is irregular. 4. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the fii-Form. The following verbs have these forms in Attic Greek, even in prose : — "loTiy/ii (ara-); see § 123, 2 (paradigm). BaiVfo (0a-), go; 2 pf . /3f jSao-t (Hom. fie^dairi), subj. /3r/3(S(rt, inf. ^f/3avat (Horn, ^e^dfttv), part. /3f/3a>v (Hom. -aox); 2 plup. (Hom. ^Qacrav). ] I ■ i 170 INFLECTION. [§ 126. rlyvoftai (yfy-, ya-), become, 2 pf . yiyova, am : (Horn. 2 pf . ytyaatn, inf. ytyafifVi, yeyaats), Att. ytyws (poetic). Qif^ ($au; Ova-), die ; 2 pf . rfdvarov, Ttdvafttv, Tedvarty TfQvaai, opt. Tfdvatrjv, iinper. ridvaOi, TeOvarm, inf. reOvdvai (lloin. T«dvdfi€vai or -vofifv), pai't. Ttdvfas (Mom. xfOvrim), 2 plup. iriOvavav. Aeiba (fit-), Epic in pres., fear, Attic 2 pf. BiBia (Horn. 8«i8ta), "^liin ifitfiixiu. hnf.h rponilar in inHio.. alsn 9 nf fiifimxtt fiiftirx 9 rtlim 1 1 J' part. 8(i8im, plup. fdfiBifiev, «8ei8ia-av.) [Eu(o] (tV-, ei*c-). 2 pf. ?ot)[TXa(0], ^voi. 5. Verbs in wfii, with w (after a vowel, vw) added to the verb stem in the present. These are all inflected like SeiKi/u/xi (§ 123), and, with the exception of cr^Scwv/uti, quench (§ 122, N. 6) , have no /lAi-forms except in the present and imperfect. The following belong to this class : — (Stems in a), icfpa-vvvfu, Kptfui-vvvfu, irerd-vvvpi, aKtbd-vvvpi ; (stemj in e), €-pvvpi, Kopi-vvvfu, crpe-puvfu, aTope-viwpi ; (stems in a>), (it-wvpx, put-vwpi, arpoi-vvvpi; (consonant stems), ay-vvpit ap-wpai, driK-in;^ (§ 123), eXpy-wpx, ^evy-wpi dno-KTiu-iwp* (o. icrctW), piy-pvp*, oXy-wpi, SK-\vpi (§ 108, V. 4, N. 2), 8p-wpi, 6p6py-wfu, Sp-vvfu, nm-wiu (»ray-), TTTap-vvpxu, pfiy-wpi (pay), arSp-wfii, take the form hi fu ; as (ftiKripi (with <^iXet(rtfa, <^tXci), in Sappho, for 0(Xra>, ftc. ; optjpi, KoKrjpi, atvtjpt. : § 126.] DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI. 171 Tpoa- (also 3. A few verbs in Horn, and Hdt. drop o- in am and ao of the second person after a vowel; as imperat. irapiarrao (for -aao) and impf. €iMpvao (Horn.); f^ciria-Tfai (for -aaai) with change of a to « (Hdt.). So dio, imperat. for Bftro (Att. 6ov). and (v6(o (Horn.). 4. The Doric has rt, vrt for at, vai. Homer sometimes has ada for a- in 2 pers. sing., as biStoada {8i8oia6a or Bibo'iada), r/^/tr^u; u for aap (with preceding vowel short) in 3 pers. plur., as earap (for eart)- aav), Up (for leaap), irpondtp (for irpoeriOfaap); see § 119, 9. • He some- timcis has 6i in the pres. imperat. act., as 8i8a>6i, oppvdi (§ 121, 2, b). 5. Herod, sometimes has arm, aro for vrai, pro m the present and imperfect of verbs in /it, with a preceding a changed to e; as Trpon- Bearai (for -fprai), edvptaro (for -apro). For the iterative endings aKov, aKOfiijp, see § 119, 10; tliese are added directly to the stem of verbs in /it, as tara-aKOP, do-aKop, ^appv-aKfro, t-aKOP («(/i(t ^^)' 6. Some verbs with consonant stems have a 2 aor. mid. of the ut- form in Homer; as 2X-to, aX-/i6i«r, from aXXo/iat, leap; 2>p-To, with imperat. opo-eo, opaev, opao, from oppvfu, rouse. So irtfypviu (ctti^kto). See § 125, 3. « 7. (a) Herodotus sometimes leaves ea> nncontracted in the sub- junctive of verbs in rjfu ; as Becofup (Att. Ba/Aep), 8iadeMaMrt (Stems in c.) OcCo|icv (Stems in o.) TVt&n, 8t&t|, 8(&x|oav ^c&Axn, 8(*MMn See also § 119, 12 (c). (c) A few cases of the middle inflected as in (&) occur in Homer; as ffK^-erai (v. j9aXXa>), cfX-crat (c(XXo/iat), an-o-de to/tat, xara-deto/iat ; SO K«rtf-^at (Hesiod) for xara^c-i^at (Att. Kara^). 172 INFLECTION. [§ 127. ^ 8. For Homeric optatives oldaiwfti, fivw, \va, and <^tftVa>, — dtavCro, ^vtf, and dv/ifv, XeXOro or \t\vpro, ipOiutfv (for (f)$i-ifAriv), — see those verbs in the Catalogue, and g 118, 1, Note. 9. Homer has /lepat or fuv (the latter only after a short vowel) for pai in the infinitive. The final vowel of the stem is rarely lengthened in the present; as riffi-fttvat, rarely riffrjutvai. In the 2 aor. act. the vowel is regulaily long (§ 121, 1), as trrfufwii, ywo- fitvai] but Ti%t and 8»'8o)/it (§ 125, 3, N. 2) have ei-fievai and 8(5- fievat. For ri-fuvai in the aor. pass, infin. see § 119, 14. In the perfect of the ^t-forra (§ 125, 4), we have iaT&fji€vai, i for etww; eaavy ifirfp, eWo, &c., by omission of augment, for tir)iJi.iy ^?, fftrfo-L', KJiarov, aT6v\ tfiafxtv, tJMTe, ^oxtC, Subj. air]Vj 0a6;s, <^a»;, &C. Imper. dTO)Vf &C. idmi. Panic, (not Attic) ttcra Infin. ^c (not Attic) <^as., ^ttcra, ^o gen. t^ff Td(rr)s, &c. (§ 25, 3, N. 2). c / Cl/XC- ilvTO, gen. § 127.J VERBS IN MI. 177 Imperfect. • tffnjirOa or C<^TO|/, irjrj(Ta, i}o-ai/yii, ^^aatjt^i^O'as. Verbal Adj. aTds, <^arco;. A perfect passive imperative iTt(f)ddni, (f)aTi, (f)avTi\ Horn. /• Hoiii. <^^v, <^^s or i]a(. Note 2. Homer has some middle forms of <^i7/ii; /)re.s-. imperat. ^do, d\os (Aoyo-, ypa0-) , writer of speeches. 2. ( Verbals and Denominatives.) (a) When a noun or adjective is formed directly from a root (§ 32, Note), or from a stem which appears as the stem of a verb, it is called a ver- bal or primitive ; as apx;^ (stem apxa-), beginning., formed from "PX"' stem of ap;((o; ypa^eus (ypa<^£V-), writer, ypa^i's (ypatKo-), ai/e ^o write, all from ypa-, stem of ypatfuo, write; 7rotr/-Ti/s, /?oe< (ma^er), Trooy-o-is, poesy, iroirj-pa, poem, iroirj-TiKoq, able to make, from Trotc-, stem of Trou'to, make: so Siki; (SiKa-), justice, from the root 8tK-, Ka/co?, 5aiKO-j &c. are suffixes. NoTK 1. Barely a noun stem has no suffix, and is identical witb the verb stem ; as in ^liXa^, a guard, from stem a, § 109, 3, N. 2); rpdiroi, turn, from rpeir-; ^X6f, flame, gen. 0X07- 6s, fromV^e7-. So also in adverbs; see ctuX-XiJ/S-Stji', § 129, 18, {b). 1 The root oped into a noun Ypa- contains only the general idea write, not as yet devel- _j an, adjective, or verb. By adding a it becomes 7 o0a-, the stem of the noun 7pa0Tj, atvriting, which stem is modified by cacc-endiugs to ypai>a-t, ypad-i, &c. (§ 45, 2, Note). By adding or e (the so-called connecting vowel, § 112, 4) it is developed into ypa-fv-s, writer, from ypa(fi- (ypd(f>, ep<3, *'Aa// say). ra- (nom. Ti;t): wotijr^f, /Joe< (wia^er), from iroif- (iroiia); opxrj- oTTji, dancer, from opxe- (opxfopai, dance) ; liriroTTfs, horseman, from iTTjr*- (tWTTOf, hon:e). To these correspond the following feminine forms : — TCipa- (nom. retpa) : o-wre tpa, fem. of crr^p. rpia- (nom. rpta): iroif^Tpia, jwetess ; opxTjorpia, dancing-girl. Tpi8- (nom. TpU): 6pxr)(TTpis, dancing-girl, gen. -I'fioy. T18- (nom. Tis): irpofJTis, prophetess ; oiKerii, female servant. Note. Verbals in rrfp and rpis are oxytone : those in riop, rpia, and reipa have recessive accent (§ 25, 1, N.). 3. (ilcf/on). These suffixes denote action (in verbals only): — Ti- (nom. Ttf, fem.): irla-ns, belief, from md- (irfidta, believe). o-i- (nom. ais, fem.) : Xv-irtr, loosing, from Xw- (Xva>). pn-(rvini, continence, from aatPpotv (crox^pov-) , continent. la- (nom. ta, fem.): ao(f>-ta, wisdom (r, Hom. also Il^XntdSrjf, as if from a form TItiXtjios (/>). Note. Occasionally patronymics are formed by the suffix lov- or Cwv- (nom. f«v); as Kpoviwv, gen. Kpoutwvos or Kpovfovoi (to suit the metre), son of Kronos {Kpbvo-i). 10. (Gentiles.) These designate a person as belonging to some country or toion, and are formed by the following suffixes: — €v- (nom. (vi, masc.) : ^Eperpuvs, Eretrian ('Eperpta) ; Meyapevr, Megarian (Meyapa, pi.) ; KoXavfvs, of Colonos (KoXavo-i). ra- (nom. njs, masc. parox.): Teyea-rijs, of Teyea (Teyea), 'Httw- pw-Ti/f, of Epirus (*H7rf tpop), StfcfXtai-n;;, Sicilian (StxrAia). See § 128, 3, N. 3. , r§ 129. >se in 00 nil, from the fol- , child) ; I-, vXXio* lov, little versicle, id. aibia-KoSf imes con- >r ances- 3 by the m. oxy- directly ; ighter of add tda- , (laugh- |nge o to ©fOTtaf, se in f« ^ecrojtSj I KfKpOTT- \s, gen. IrjXfv-s, \os (/')• or Cwv- tre), so)t some iyapfvs, 'HTrei- See § 129.] FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 185 Note. Feminine stems in i8- (nom. /s, gen. ISos) correspond to mascu- lines in «u-; as Meyap/j, Mcyarian woman; and feminines in ti8- (nom. Tis, gen. TiSoj), to masculines in to-, as ^ikcXiu-tis, SicUian woman. ADJliCTIVES. 11. The simplest suffixes by which adjectives (like nouns) are formed from roots or stems are o- and a- (nom. masc. os; fem. i;, a, or Off ; neut. ov) \ (ro(f>-6s, o-oc^ij, 6u, loise ; kuk-os, bad ; 'Kom-os, re- maining (XtTT-, XoiTT-, § 128, 3, N. 5). 12. Adjectives signifying helonghig or related in any way to a per- son or thing are formed from noun stems by the suffix lo- (nom. tot) : ovpdv-ios, heavenly (ovpavo-i), oiKeios, domestic (see § 128, JJ, N. 3), 8i- Kaios,just (8iKa-), 'Adrjvaios, Athenian (^^Adrjvai, stem 'Adr)m-). 13. (a) Verbals denoting ahility or ftneas are formed by iko- (nom. tKo'f), sometimes tiko- (tikos)'. dpx-KOi, Jit to rule (apx(o), ypa(f>iK6s, capable of writing ov painting (y/jd<^a>), /3oi;Xfv-Tt«cds, able to ad rise (fiovXevm), vpaK-TtKos, Jit for action (practical), from irpny- (7rpdo"). 17. Other adjectives with various meanings are formed by va- rious suffixes besides the simple o- (11), as vo-, Xo, po-, no-, or 0-1^0-, all with nom. in op; co-- with nom. in j;f, fj. Some of these are dis- tinguished by an active or a passive meaning; as 8fiXd? timid, 8ft- vdff, terrible, (Set-, fear) ; sometimes the same adjective has both senses ; as o^€p6s, frightful and afraid. Adjectives in r}s are generally compounds (§ 131, 6); a few are simple, as ylrtv8-ris, false. Note. For verbal adjective in tos and reoi, see § 117, 3. 186 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 130. !^ \ i'^ ADVEKUS. 18. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives, as is explained in §§74,75. Adverbs may bs formed also from the stems of nouns or verbs by the followirig suffixes : — (a) Stfv (or 8d), t|86v : ava-<^av-b6v, openly (ava-(t>aiu(i>, av-)y poet, also dvaavbd', Kwrfdov, like a dog {kixov, gen. kvv6s). (Ji) Bijv or d8T|v : Kpv^-8t)v, secretly (Kpvmw, conceal) ; i/vXX^/3-di;i/, collectively (avXXa/i/3avo>, Xa/3-, § 128, 3, N. 5) ; aTrop-dSrjv, scatteredly {anflpa, soiv, scatter, stem arntp-) ; dve-^iyv, profusely (ai-irjpi, let out, stem €-). (c) tC : uvofuur-Ti, by name (ovofidCot, § 16, 1) ; ikXtjvia-Ti, in Greek ((X\r)vi((a). See also the local endings di, dtv, be, &c., § 61. II. DENOMINATIVE VERBS. § 130* A verb whose stem is derived fron^ the stem of a noun or adjective is called a denominative (§ 128, 2, h). The following are the principal teinninations of such verbs in the present indicative active : — 1. Hm (stem in a-): rt/tido), honor, from noun ri/iij (ripa-), honor. 2. cttf (e-): dpidp.fa», count, from dptOpos, number (Note 2). 3. 0(1) (o-) : finrdooi, let for hire, from piado-s, pay. 4. (vw (ev) : ^aaiKevto, be king, from ffaaiXev-s, king. 5. outfit (a8-): 8iKdCe. 7. aivw (dv-): rrqfuiiva), signify, from ai}pa (aT)paT-), sign. 8. vvu (vv-) : i^St^i/o), sweeten, from ^8y-r, .swce^ For the relations of the present to the simple stem, see § 108. Note 1. Desiderative verbs, expressing a desire to do anything, are sometimes formed from other verbs and from nouns by the ending ffeiu (stem in Tvxiy-7roii/o5, unavenged; vrj-p-eprrj^, unerring. (d) yjfiL- (Latin semi-) , half; as r]fii-0€ooiv6i, bloody. Note 2. The prefix a- is sometimes copulative (denoting tcnion) ; as in d-\oxos, bedfellow (from Xex^s). (B.) Last Part op a Compound Word. 5. At the beginning of the last part of a compound noun or adjective, a, e, or o (unless it is lengthened by position) is generally lengthened to 17 or w. Kg. 2TpaT-r}y6s (orparfj-p, oyo)), general; im-^Koos (yiro, aKoCto), obe- dient* KaT-Tiptfis (^Kard, «p€), covered ; iir-oivvpos (tirl, Svofm), nam- ing or named for; KaT-r)yopoi (Kara, and stem of dyopA), accuser. (See § 12, 2.) [§131. illy <" ; oTpc htintj. t of a a, con- i occur I- vvlicn Trpov\(o jipovbo^ i occur >nly as with a ixed to y forms ulty or ; hv(T- -TTOIVOS, ept-, Sa-, u'oJi); as § 132.] COMPOUND WOKDS. 189 d noun tion) is 1*0)), o6f- la), nam- r. (See 6. The last part of a compound noun or adjective may be changed in form when a suffix is added (§ 129). This takes place especially in compound adjectives, and when an abstract noun forms the last part of a compound noun. E.g. some ^Xd-T(/AOf {TipTi), honor-looiny ; iroXv-Trpdyfiav (n-poy/ia), ineddle- le ; avT-apKffs (avros, apK(, accuse, from Kar-riyopoi, accuser (cf. 5). See § 105, 1, N. 2. (C.) Meaning of Compounds. § 182. Compound nouns and adjectives are of three classes, distinguished by the relation of the parts of the com- pound to each other and to the whole. 1. Objective compounds are those composed of a noun and a verb, adjective, or preposition, in which the noun stands to the other part in some relation (commonly that of object) which could be expressed b}' an oblique case of the noun. E.g. Aoyo-ypa(f)os, speech-writer (\6yovs ypdtfxav) ; ptc-dvdptoTrov, man- hating (piv) ; d^id-Xoyoff, worth}! of mention (li^ioi \6yov) ; Apapr-i-voos, erriny in mind (Apapriiiu uov) ; lao-dfos, godlil'e (twos otto) ; Tfpir-i-Kepavvosy de- lighting in thunder (repnopevos Kepavv^) \ 8to-Tpc <<^-tWtoy, be- longing on a horse (e^* itttto)). Note. "When the last part of an objective compound is a transitive ver- bal in OS formed by the suffix o- (§ 129, 1 ), it qjenprnlly accents the ponnlt if this is short, otherwise the last syllable. But if the last part is iutrau- 190 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 132. 1^ sitive or passive (in sense), the accent is recessive. Thus \oyo'ypdot, speech-writer; \t0o-p6\ot, thrower of stones, but \id6-po\ot, pelted with stones ; firirpo'KTdvot, matricide, matncidal ; ffTpaT-riy6s, general ; \oyo- iroi6t, story-maker. 2. Determinative compounds are nouns or adjectives in which the first part, generally as adjective or adverb, quali- fies (or determines) the second part. E.g. 'A*cpd-7roXtf, citadel (dxpa TrdXtr); ftfi-6«aTpov, amphitheatre (theatre extending all round); ti-ypa(f>os, unwritten. Here belong adjectives like /zeXt-i/dijf (fjbvs), honey-sweet, 'Aprfi-Boos, swift as Ares (Ares-swlfi). Note. Here belong a few compounds sometimes called copulative, made of two nouns or two adjectives, and signifying a combination of the two things or qualities. Strictly, the first part limits the last, like an adjective or adverb. Such are larpd-fMuns, physician-pi'opliet (a prophet who is also a. physician); ^io-fidxo-ipo., swwd-sabre ; iuSp6-iraii, man-child; yXvKii-iriKpoi, sweetly bitter ; ded-ravpot (of Zeus changed to a bull). 3. Possessive or cUtributive compounds are adjectives in which the first part qualifies the second (as in determinatives), and the whole denotes a quality or attribute belonging to some person or thing. E.g. *Apyvp6-To^os, with silver how {dtpyvpovv t6^ov fxmp) ; KaKo-baipxov, ill-fated (kokou 8aifiova «\civ)', iriKpo-yafios, wretchedly married (iriKpif yaftov ex*"") i op.6-vop.oi, having the same laws; exaroy-«cc<^aXor, hundred- headed; 8«Ka-«Tr}s, of ten years (duration); ayado-tarjs, having the appearance (et8os) of good ; fv-6eoi, inspired (having God within) ; oMW-novs, swijl-fooled (atK€ls noSas «\Ki)i (irodas mKvs), foot-swifl, is a determinative. Remark. In corripound verbs, the original verb remains the funda- mental part, modified more or less in meaning by the preposition prefixed. Other compounds than those here mentioned present no difficulties in re- spect to meaning. PART IV. SYNTAX. DEFINITIONS. funda- brefixeil. in re- § 183. !• Every sentence must contain two parts, a subject and a predicate. The subject is that of which something is stated. The predicate is that which is stated of the subject. Thus in the sentence Aap€Lorj^e riv, it was late; KaXms (xti, it is well ; hriKoi, it is evident (the case shows') : so in the impersonal con- struction with the verbal in reov, as in Treiareov («*ot1) to vofuo, we must obey the law (^ 281, 2). (d) When the verb implies its own subject, as Krjpva-aei, the her- ald (KTJpv^) proclaims, (aaXniy^f, the trumpeter sounded the trutnpet, KcoiXvei, a hindrance occurs. In passive expressions like rrapea-Ktv- aarai fioi, preparation has been made by me (7 am prepared), like ven- tum est in Latin, the subject is really the idea of preparation^ &c. contained in the verb. See § 198. f 135.1 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 193 (c) With verbs like {/ft, it ram.i, dcrrpdnrct, it liyhtem, trtiu, there ia an eurl/uiuc':c (it shakes), where, however, 8ome subject like Ztiit or 6t6s was originally HUpplied. NoTK 2. Many verbs in the third person singular have an infini- tive or a sentence as tlieir subject. These are called impersonal verbs. Such are nptntt and n-poo-^xci, it is proper, ivtari and iitari, it is possi- ble, boKti, it seems yoou, avufiaivti, it happens, and the like ; as f^fffriu ifiiv TovTo iromv, it is in your power to do this (to do this is possible /or l/ou). 8o also d(i and xp^^ i- <^ required, we ouaht; as del hpai aitiK- 0tiv, we must yo away (hero, however, the infinitive might be consid- ered an object, and d*l and xp^ might be classed under Note 1 (c) ; cf. § 17-J, N. 2). 'he name impersonal is applied with still greater propriety (though less frequently) to the verbs included in (c) and ( Subject Nominative and Verb. § 135. !• A verb agrees with its subject nominative in number and person ; as (€70)) Xcyo), / «a^, outo? \ey€i, this man nays^ oi dvhpeLaavTo TToXefieiv, the majority voted for war. Note 1. When several subjects are connected by and, they gen- erally have a plural verb. But the verb often agrees with one of the subjects (generally the nearest), and is understood with the rest. 'The latter generally happens when they are connected by or or nor. E.y. Svfi(fia>vovfiev eya Ktii vfifii, I and you ayree : trocfto) tyto kqi ai) ^fi(v, I ami you were wise ; koI av Ka\ ol abf\i\ovs eluai, it is for their interest to befriends. (b) So when a participle (in any case) represents the leading verD,and its noun the leading subject; as ^\dop eiri riva rav 8okovu- Ta)v (ipai iro(f)S>v, I went to one of those who seemed to be wise ttoXXoi Toil' npofmoiijcrapfvtov etr:u ovs, you, the wise ones. 'iip.iau rutv ^Adrj- vaiciv, of us, the Athenians. QtpiaroKKfjs fJKto (sc. «yw), / Themisto- cles am come. ^CS.riaioi koi Amav oi 'A;^ato:, Philesius and Lycon, the Achaeans. Note 1. Possessive pronouns and adjectives may have a geni- tive in apposition with a genitive which they imply; as 6 tpos tov ToXatTrwpov (iioi, the life <>/' ine. miserable one ; ^AOrjPoioi &v, TroXctur rrjs ptyifTTtft, being {a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city. So ra vp,€Ttpa avrwy (for ra vftav avT&v), your own (§ 147, N. 4). 196 SYNTAX. [§ 338. Note 2. A noun which might stand in the partitive genitive (§ 168) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts, especially when the latter include the lohole of the former; 3s oiKiai ai fieu TToWai ncirrviKtaav, oKiyai 8e irfpi^a-au, most of the houses hud fallen, hut a few remained (where we might have rSiv oIkiwv). So ov- Toi aXKoi «XXo Xcyet. This is called partitive apposition. Note 3. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence, being in the nominative or accusative as it is more closely con- nected in thought with the subject or with the object of the sen- tence; as Keivrat netrovrfs, Trt'orTtr oii aynKpa TroXet, thetf lie prostrate, — no small (cause of) con/idence to the city : 'EXeurju Kravtofiev. MfveXfo) XviTTjv iriKpdv, let us kill Helen, {which ivill be) a bitter yricf to Menelaus. NoTK 4. A noun may be in apposition with the subject or the object of a sentence, where we use as or a like word; as lirnoi tjyovro Oiifiara to 'HX(^, horses were brouyht as oJferin6s duT]p, the wise moii ; tov aocbov dvbpos, toJ a-o(f)oi uv8pi, top a-obv avdpa, twi/ o"o0o)i/ dvbpoiv, &c. Ovtos 6 dvi]p, this man ; tovtov TOV dv8p6i, TOVTtav Twv dvdpSiP. At npo tov (TTOfiaTos prjes vcivp.axovfrai, the ships enyatjed in buttle before the mouth {of the harbor). It includes predicate adjectives with copulative verbs, the case of which has already been considered (§ 136) ; as ai apivTai doKoiaai tlvai (f)i(T(is, the natures which seem to be best. Rkmakk. The adjective maybe either attributice ov predicate. An attributive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without the inter- vention of a verb (like all the adjectives above, except apiaTai). The predicate adjective may be connected with its noun by the copula (§ 133, 1, N. 1), or by a copulative verb (§ 136); as 6 dvrjp dyados (cf)p6v(ou tWi Kai du8p6i Koi yvvaiKos oilro) Troieii/, it is the part of prudent (persons), bi.th men and women, thus to do. Note 2. (a) A. predicate adjective is regularly plura. if it be- longs to several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to tw«. ]f the nouns are of different genders, the adjective is connnonly masculine if one of the nouns denotes a male person, and connnonly neuter if all denote things. Thus, eiBt nartpa re koi p.r]Tfpa koi d8€\(f>ovs koi Tf)V eavroO yvvaiKa ai\p.a\(i)Tovs ytytuqfifvovs, he saw that both his father and his mother, his brothers, and his own wife had been made captives : noXefios kqI ardais 6\fdpia rais noXfaiv (ariv, war and fac- tion are destructive to states. (b) But it sometimes follows both the gender and number of the nearest or most prominejit noun; as npoppi^os aiiros, f) yvufj, to. naiSia, dnokoifirjv, may I perish root and branch, myself, my wife, my children. (c) A predicate adjective is sometimes neuter, being used like a noun (§ 139), even when its noun is masculine or feminine; as KaXov f) d\T)6(ia, a beautiful thiny is truth. Note 3. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons may take a plural 7)a?*//o//>/e ; as Tpot'ai/ iXovres 'ApyetW aroXos, the Argices^ army hariny taken Troy. Note 4. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the grammatical gender of a noun denoting a person ; as qjiXt TfKvov, dear child ! Note 5. The masculine form of the dual is very often used for the feminine in adjective pronouns and the article; as roOrw tw rixva, thes". two arts. Especially rare are the feminines tq, ravra. Note 0. Avo, tico, is often used with a plural noun. "Oo-o-e, the eyes, and Sovpe, two spears, in Homer, may have plm-al adjectives. Note 7. A predicate adjective is sometimes used where we should great distinction between the adjective and the adverb; as npoirot avrnos (i8ou, I was the first to see them : TrpwTouy avrovs (J8ov, they were the first whom I saw: npStrov (adv.) avTot-y udov, first (of all thp' " did) 7 saw them. 198 SYNTAX. [§ 139. Note 8. (a) Wlien the subject of an infiiiitive is omitted be- cause it refers to the same jHirson or thing as a nominative, geni- tive, or dative connected with the leading verb (if 134, 3), adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles which belong to the omitted sub- ject are generally assimilated in case to the preceding nominative, genitive, or dative; but they sometimes stand in the accusative (agreeing with the omitted subject) instead of the genitive or da- tive, rarely instead of the nominative. This occurs chiefly in the predicate of tivai, or of a copulative verb; for the usage in such cases and for examples, see § 136, Note 3. (6) With the infinitives of other verbs, the assimilation of an ad- jective to a subject nominative is regular and very rarely neglected ; after a genitive, assimilation seldom (if ever) occurs, and the accusa- tive is regular ; after a dative either the dative or the accusative may be used. E.g. (^Nom.) Ovx ofivkoyrffTUi aK\i]Tos TJKfiv, I shall not admit that I am come unbidden ; uvk f(f)rj auros, d\X fKtlvov aTparqyeiv, he said that not (he) himself, but he (Nicias) was general ; he said oiiK (tyw) avros (uT liorrfya}) dXX' tKfivos orpuTi^yft, ofvros being adjective (§ 145, 1) and cKflvos substantive. (Dat.) edo^fu avToii avaKevaaanfuots a (i)(ov Koi e^oTrXicra/Lic- vois npoUpai, they decided to pack up what the// had and arm themselves completely, and to advance (A nab. ii. 1, 2); but eBo^tv avrols 7rpopa to ^8o>Kav, gijts which they gave. Note 1. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as nouns (§ 139, 1) have the article, as in Attic Greek ; as oi yap apiaroi f'u vrfv&iv KfOTM, for the bravest sit in the ships ; oi aXXot, the others ; to T eovra to r eaopeva, both things that are and things that are to be. Note 2. (a) When the article is used with nouns in Homer, it is generally a piououn, with which the noun is in apposition; as 6 8' e^paxf xo^ffOf^Api/f, and he, brazen Ares, roared ; ^ 8' dUova apa To'ia-i yvufi kUv, and she, the woman, went with them unwilling. (h) Nearer the Attic use of the article are examples like these : aiiTup 6 Toio-t yf'poiu 686u fjyfpoufvfv, but he, the old man, showed them the way; rov o olov miTtp' flpov, and they found him, the father, alone. (c) Hardly, if at all, to be distinguished from the Attic article is that found in examples like these : ore 8^ Tr}v p^a-ov a(f>iK€To, when now he came to the island ; to t€ trdevos *Qpio'i avrjp, the wise man ; twv fieyaXcov iroXewv, of the great cities. The position of such an adjective with reference to the article (with the two modifications mentioned in 2) is called the attributive position, as opposed to the predicate position (see 3). I! ¥' :i < l\ V i 1) I' U I 1 *. i 202 SYNTAX. [§ 142. Note. This applies to possessive pronouns and all expressions which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are pre- ceded by tlie article (§ 141, N. 3), and to dependent genitives (ex- cept purtifices and the genitive of the personal pronoun) ; as 6 tfios n-ar^p, nil/ father ; 17 a^ Mt^p, thy mother ; 6 efiavrov naTtjp, my own father ; ol tv aarfi HvBpanroi, the men in the city ; oi8(\s rav totc 'EXXij- i/cDi*, none of the (ireeka of that time ; to t^ ovti yj/ddoi, the real false- hood ; fls T^v fKfivuv TTokiv, into their city; ol tchv Qrj^aifou aTparrjyoi, the generals of the Thebans (2, N. 2). For participles, see 2, N. 5. Two or even three articles may thus stand together; as rL t^j T«v TToXXcoi/ V/wx^* Sppara, the eyes of the soul of the multitude. 2. The article together with any of these qualifying expressions may follow the noun, in which case the noun itself may have another article before it. £.ff. 'O dvfip 6 aoffios, or dv^p 6 ao6s, see § 142, 3 ; ai noXetr ai 8r)poKpaTovpfvai, the states which are under democracies ; avdpamoi 01 tore, the men of that time; irpos ddiKiav TTftf iiKpaTov, with regard to pure injustice. Kfmakk. Of the three attributive positions, the first {e.g. 6 aobs dvi^p) is the most con;:r.on and the most sim[>le and natural ; the second (6 dvrfp 6 aoipos) is t^e most formal ; the third (di'rjp 6 aov TToXiTotv oi kokoi, the bad among the citizens (rarely oi tuv ttoXi- Tav KOKoi). Even the other forms of the adnominal genitive occu yionally have this position, as tup iraXaiav ff t\o(ro(f>ia, the phdosophy of the ancients. Note 3. oi oKKoi, the others : as i; , Xii. another state); oi aXXot "EXXi^vfj, the other Greeks. Both 6 nXXos and a\\os (rarely erepos) may have the meaning of besides; as €v8at- poviCoptpos imo tS>v n-oXirmj/ tcai tuv aWiav $fviKOfiev, to this stranger who has come. See Note 3 (b). 204 SYNTAX. [§ 143. IM Note 2. "EKatrros, ittartpoi, tifKfia), and dfi(f)nT€pos have the predi- cate position (3), like a dt'nion.strative; but with fKuaros the article may oe omitted. TotoOror, TotroCror, ToiotrSt, roaoade. and ri^XiKovror, when they take the article, have the attributive position (1). Note 3. (a) A dependent genitive of the personal pronoun (whether partitive or not) has the predicate position (3), while thiat of other pronouns (unless it is partitive) has the attributive position (1) ; as fjftav fj TToXtf or ^ n6\is fjfiap, our city (not f) i^/xcov TroXir); ^ TovT(ou noXis, these men\'i city (not f) irSKn tovt(ov) ; fierfn-c^x/^aro 'AoTvdyTjs TTjv iavTov Ovyaripa Koi top nalSa avrfjs, Asly ayes sent for his oivn daughter and her son. (b) But if a qualifying word is added, the personal pronoun may stand between this and the r.oun ; as 17 BoKoiJtTa f)fi(op nportpov aa)", has the predicate position ; as avros 6 dvrjp, the man himself. But o avrbs apm, the same man (§ 79, 2). Pronominal Article in Attic Greek. § 143. 1. In Attic prose the article retains its origi- nal demonstrative force chiefly in the expression o fiiv . . . 6 Be, the one . . . the other. E.g. 'O /X6i/ ovbkp, 6 8f TToXXa Kep8aipfi, one man gains nothing, another gains much. Aft tovs fitp eivai dvirrvxf'is, tovs 8* tirvxeU, some juust be unfortunate, and others fortunate, lav nokfap at p.(p rvpavpovprai, ai 8e 8r}p^KpaTovvTai, of states, some are governed by tyrants, others by democracies. § 144.] PRONOUNS. 205 Note 1. The neuter tA /icV ... to 5* may be used adverbially, partly . . . partly. For toOto ^liu . . . tovto hi in this sense, see § 148, N. 4. Note 2. 'O 8«, &c., sometimes means and he, hut he, &c., even when no 6 fitu precedes : as ^Ivdpus 'A6r)vaiovs (nrjydytTo • oi di . . . ^\dov, Inarus called in Athenians ; and they came. 2. A few other relics of the demonstrative meaning of the article are found in Attic, chiefly the following : — Top Koi top, this man and that ; to Ka\ to, this and that ; to Ka\ rd, these and those ; as tbu yap t6 kqI to voi^aai, koi to fif) Trot^o-at, for we oufjht to have done this thing and that, and not to have done the other. npo Tov (or TrpoToC), before this, formerly. Kill TOV or Kai ttju, before an infinitive ; as koi tov KtXtvaai hovvai (so. Xfyftai), and {it is said) he commanded him to yive it. Cyr. i. 3, 9. So occasionally Ty, therefore, which is common in Homer- . PRONOUNS. fiev PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. § 144. 1. The nominative of the personal pronouns is seldom used, except for emphasis. (See § 134, N. 1.) Note. The forms tpov, e/ioi, and tpe are more emphatic tlian the enclitics pov, poi, pt. The latter seldom occur after prepositions, except in np69 pt. 2. (fl) The pronouns of the third person, ou, ol, e, Siv, (TL pt} (rd>as nepiopav ) In Homer and Herodotus they are generally per- sonal pronouns, though sometimes (direct or indirect) reflexives. E.g'. 206 SYNTAX. [§ H5. *Ek yap at^ttov ptvat ttXtro UaWas 'A^wj, for Pallas Athena herefl them of their seniles (lloin.); avriM 6* ol tvdovrt tniaTti ovtipot, and noon a dream came to him in his sleep (Ildt.). § 145. !• Avr6 at dtdn^cD, / will teach you from your own case {from yonrsalf). li; fact, these ])ronoiin.s correspond almost exactly in their use to tlio English reflexives, my self, thyself, himself, &c. NoTK 2. The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used for the first or second; as del fjfias ttfr/xVdai iavruvst we must ask our- selves. NoTK JJ. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal (§81); bia\ty6fu6a fin'iv avTols, we discourse ivilh one (mother (i.e. amony ourselves). POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 147. The possessive pronouns are generally equiva- lent to the possessive genitive of the personal pronouns. Thus 6 rjfiirepo^i Trarijp, ^ o Trarr^p r/fiwv, ovr father. The possessive is regularly preceded by the ai iicle. See § 107, 1; § 141, N. 1 (t); and below, N. 4. NoTK 1. The possessive is occasionally equivalent to the objective genitive of the personal pronoun ; as ^ cV") fvvoia, which commonly means my good-will {towards others), rarely means good-will (shoiun) to me. NoTK 2. In Attic prose, a<^kTfpo9t their, is always (directly or indirectly) reflexive, and oy, his, her, its, is not used at all. (See § 144, 2.) NoTK 3. By the j^ssessivs pronouns and the possessive genitive (§ 167, 1) the 'voius my father can he expressed in Greek in five forms: 6 iyios irarfip, 6 irarfip 6 e/nos, irarrfp 6 ifjos (§ 142, 1, 2), 6 narrjp ftov, and (after another word) fiov 6 iraTrjp (as rt^i; fiov 6 irarfip). So o aos irarrjp, &c. Note 4. Our own, your own (when your refers to more than one), and their own are generally expressed by ^/icrrpov, vpirtpos, and i/ implied in the possessive (§ 137, N. 1); as rov ffpertpou avTwu "naripa, our own father; rtj vfitrtpa avroiv fujTpi, to your own mother; roiis i/ avrav iraihus, without the article) ; but very seldom ^/iv Syv ex«t, from the citiea tvkich he holds (for &s c^ft) ; ToUdyaBois ols exo/ifi/, with the f/ood things which we have (lor a f^o- fifv). This is often called attraction. Note 1. When an antecedent is omitted which (if it could liave been expressed) would liave been a genitive or dative, the assimila- tion still takes place; and a preposition which would have belonged to the antecedent passes over to the relative ; as €8i7Xo)(Te tovto ols eirpoTTf, he showed this by what he did (like tVf tWs ci) ; avu ofs f\(o ra oKpa KaraXrj^oiiat, 1 tcill seize the hei(/hts with the men whom J hare (as if it weie avv rots dv^paaiv oty ^x^) '■< ov8(u S>v (iov\fcr6f Trpd^fTf, yoH will do none of the things ichich you ivish (like fKflvuiv a). 8ee § 148, N. 3. Note 2. A relative is very seldom assimilated fnwi any other construction than that of the object accusative, or into any other case than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions occur; as S)u fjmaTci TToX^ovf, many of those whom he distrusted (like fKfivmv ols)- Even Hie nominative may be assimilated; a.fi ^XdnTfadm d mv ffpluirapfOKfia- arm, to he injured by what has been prepared hy us (like dn tKeivoiu d). Thuc. Note 3. A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs ; as dificofii^ovTo (v6vs o6(v vTTf^tOfVToTTaidas KoiyvvaiKas, they immedialcly brouffht over their children and women from the places in which they ha*/ placed them for safety (where odev, from which, stands for (kuBcp of, from the places whither). Thuc. Note 4. The antecedent occasionally is assimilated to the case of the relative, when this immediately follows ; as (\(yov on navTiou SiP diovrai irfirpayoTfs erti/, they said that they had done all thinys which they needed (vvheie iravTcnv l>v for navra S}v is very irregular). This mjrr/e^/ r/.s'.s'/w^//«/« takes place in ovdtis oans ov, ex'ery- body, in which ovSds follows the case of the relative; as ovdtvi oTta oiiK dnoKpiperat (for ovdfis tanv otcj), he replies to everybody. Note 5. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions with oios; as xopiCfp ^p KtKTtfirdf 86^ap koKtjp, do not take from yoiii'sclirs the yood reputation which you hare yained (for ttju Ka\f)p 86^ap fjp K(KTT)adf): here notice the omission of Ihe article. Even the subject of a verb may be attracted ; as oixerai (btvyap 6v ^yjf pdpTvpa, the witness whom you brought (for 6 fidprvs op ^y€f) has run away. Note. This attraction may be joined with assimilation (§ 153); as diiadtaraTo'i ( Object. § 158. The direct object of the action of a transitive verb is put in the accusative ; as touto aco^ei ij/x-a?, this preserves us; ravra iroiovfiev, we do these thing's. Note 1. Many verbs which are transitive in English, and govern the objective case, take either a genitive or a dative in Greek. (See § 171, § 184, 2, and § 188, 1, N. 2.) Note 2. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intransi- tive in English ; as o/xoO/xat rovs deovs, I will swear hy the Gods ; Train-as TKaQfv, he escaped the notice of all. Note 3. Verbal adjectives and even verbal nouns occasionally take an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive (§ 167, 3; § 180); as cVtori^/ioi/ef rjaav to 7rpo(ri7»coi/Ta, they were act/uainted with what was proper. Xen. So to ^f rem pa povTi(o}v). Plat. Cognate Accusative (Internal Object). § 159. Any verb whose meaning permits it may take an accusative of kindred signification. Tliis accusative repeats the idea alreadt/ contained in the verb, and may follow intransitive as well as transitive verbs. E-g", R !il ,!1 i 214 SYNTAX. [§ 159. "HbofiaiTas n(yi^i/ ypd(f)ea-6ai, to bring an indict- ment ; ypa(})fju 8iKfiu, to prosecute an indictment ; htKr)v u^Xeti/, to lose a lawsuit ; viKtjv vimu, to gain a victory; pdxrfv vikuv, to gain a battle ; TToptrffv nefiireiu, to form or conduct a procession ; TrXijyrjv Tiinreiv, to strike a blow. Remark. It will be seen that this construction is far more ex- tensive in Greek than in English. It includes not only accusatives of kindred formation and meaning, as vIktju pikop, to gain a victory ; but also those of merely kindred meaning, as pdxrjp pikcip, to gain a battle. The accusative may also limit the meaning of the verb to one of many applications ; as 'OXvfiTrta pikop, to gain an Olympic vic- tory ; ydpovs i(TTiap, to give a wedding feast ; y^ri<^i.apa pikop, to carry a decree {to gain a victory with a decree) ; to. Ilapa6ripai,a ■n(p.„eip, to cele- brate the Panathenaea by a procession. For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive verb, see § 198. Note 1. The cognate accusative may follow adjectives or even nouns; as kqkos naa-ap KOKiav, bad wih all badness; dyaOns naaap dpfTTfP, good with all goodness: 8oi>\os ras peyioras SovXeiav, a slave to the direst slavery. Note 2. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate *iccusative, its noun being implied in the verb; as pfyd\a dpaprd- p(ip,(sc. dpapTT)paTa) to commit great faults ; Tavrd ^vnovpai Koi Tavrd. Xaipot), 1 have thr same griefs and the same joys. Ho ri xpr^aopai Tourw ; (= Ti'i/a ;^pet'ai/ xpT]iTopai. ;) what use shall I marc of this f and ox/bev xpriaopai touto), / shall make no use of this (§ 188, 1, N. 2). !So xpi^oi^os ovbip, good for nothing (N. 1). See § 160, 2, Note. Note 3. Here belongs the accusative of efect^ which expresses a result beyond the action of the verb, which is eifected by that action; as Trpfc^fvouo-i t^i/ (lpr}vrjp, they negotiate the peace {as am- bassadors, TrpcV^ftf), but TTpfcr^evfip npfor^fiap, to go on an embassy. Compare the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a .^tivk. So after verbs of looking (in poetry); as "Ap?; fiffiopKtVat, to look war (Ares); fj /3ovX^ f^Xf^/^6 vanv, the Senate looked mustard. Note 4. A transitive verb may have a cognate accusative and another object at the same time; as •ypaf]p ravrriv, to bring this indictment against any one : T]FiiKT](Top(v tovtov oirfifV. we did this man no wrong : nwra 8i8aaKf pe, Iforh me this (§ 164); ToaovTOP ex^oi fx^aifxa tre. so great haired do I feel for thee ; 'rf]v pdxrjp Toxis ^apfidpovi piKTjaas, having defeated the barbarians in the battle. § 160.] ACCUSATIVE. 215 Note 5. Connected with the cognate accusative is that which follows verbs of motion expressing the ground over which the motion passes; as 6b6v Uvai (e\6flv, nopfCfcrBm, &c.), to fjo (ocer) a road : nXdv BdXaaaav, to sail the sea ; opos Karafiaiutiv, to tiescend a mountain : &c. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning. See § 170, li. Aceusatlve of Specification. — Adverbial Accusative. 2). esses that aui- assfj. ilk: look and WTOV this hce : like § 160. 1. The accusative of specification may be jOined with a verb, adjective, noun, or e^en a Vvhole sentence, to denote that in respect lo which the expression is used. E.ij;-. TvK6s el TO ofi/jLara, you are Mind in your eyes; KciKbi to eidor, beautiful in for, n; ancipoi to TfKrjdos, infinite in number; dUaios rov rponov, Just in /< is character ; bfivol iidxr)", mixfhtij in battle ; Kauva tt)i» Ke/xai otto dfmv opuaaoai, even in small matters I try to bey in with the Gods. Note. This is sometimes called the accusative by synecdoche, or the limiting accusative. It most frequently denotes a part ; but often a character or quality, or any circumstance to which the meaning of the expression is restricted. 2. An accusative in certain expressions has the force of an adverb. E.g: ToijTou Tov TpuTTov, iu thls wtty, thus ; t^u TavioTrji/ (sc. 686v), in the quickest way ; ttjv apx^fv, at first (with negative, not at all) ; TeXoy, finally ; irpoUa, as a yift, gratis ; xdpiu, for the sake of; 8iKrfv, in the )i,(inner of; to irpoiTou or irpioTov, at frst; to Xoinov, for the rest; T are intransitive, meaning to be well oJ/\ to be badly off. NoTK 3. Verbs signifying to do may take the dative of a iierson; as aya^di/ Tt TTotoOcrt Tfl TToXet, they do some yood to the state. § 166. Verbs signifying to name^ to choose or appoint, to make, to consider, and the like, may take a predicate accusative besides the object accusative. E.g". Tt rffu noXiu npoaayopfveis ; what do you call the state ? — so koXoixti TovTo TO ovofia, they call me by this name : arparijyov airov dirfBti^f, he appointed him yenend ; fvfpyfTrjuTou^iXinTrovfjyovvro, (hey thouyht Philip a benefactor; Travrav deiriroTTjv eavrou 7rfnoir}Ktv, he has made himself master of all. Note 1. This is the active construction of which the passive appears in the predicate nominative with passive verbs (§ 136). Like the latter, it includes also predicate adjectives; as Toir (rvp.- fidxovs irpodvfiovs noida-dai, to make the allies eayer ; ras A^priat fieydXas fjyeu, he considered the faults great. Note 2. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate accusa- tive in apposition with the object accusative ; as eXa/Se tovto batpou, he took this as a yift ; imrovs ayeiu dvfiara ra ijXt'i^, to briny horses as offerings to the Sun. Es])ecially an interrogative pronoun may be so used; as rLvas tovtovs 6pS); who are these whom I see ? (§ 142, 3.) Note 3. A predicate accusative may denote the effect of the action of the verb upon its direct object; ?is iratdtvetv rtva aocfiov (or KaKov), to train one {to be) wise (or bad) ; tovs vitis 'nrnoTas f8i8a^cu, he taught his sons to be horsemen. See § 159, N. 3. Note 4. In the passive, when the object accusative becomes the subject nominative (§ 197, 1), the predicate accusative (of every kind) becomes a. predicate nominative. See § 136, Rem. ; and § 137, N. 4. III. GENITIVE. Remark. As the chief use of the accusative is to limit the meaning of a verb, so the chief uise of the genitive is to limit the meaning of a noun. When the genitive is used as the object of a verb, it, seems to depend on the nominal idea which belongs to the verb; thus iiridv/xC) involves iiriOv- (xiav (as we can say itnOvfiCi) iindvfilav, § 159) ; and in eiridv/jLu toijtov, I have a desire for this, the nominal idea preponderates over the vorbal. The Greek is somewhat arbitrary in deciding when it will allow either to pre- ponderate in the construction, and after some verbs it allows both the accusative and the genitive. In the same general sense the genitive follows verbal adjectives. It has also uses which originally belonged to the abla- tive ; for example, with verbs of separation and to express source. (See Rem. before § 157.) [§ 166. in thi.s KaKWS )ei'tiou ; dicato KoKovaL Ihuuy/tt s made passive \ 136). accuaa- > 8iTa)v, two quarts of meal. Oenitive of Material. 5. Measure, of space, time, or value: as rpiwv rjfieptov 086^, a journey of three days; 6ktu> o-TaSiwi/ Ttixona>v, the (jand mnong the Dim; o rjfiKxvK rov dpt^/xoO, the half of the number; apdpa oida tov ^ffpov, i know a man of the people : rois dpavirais ratv povt&p, to the upper benches of the xailors; oi/fit\s twi' Traibav, no one of the children; itavriav rov prfTopoiv bfivoraros, the most eloquent of all the orntorH ; n ffovAnptPos Twi/ *A.$T)paio)v, any on e who p leases of the A then iav " ', b'la yvpaiKitp, dirine amonf/ women (Hoin.); ttov rijs yijs ; ubi tcirarumy where on the earth? ris twi/ noXirap; who of the citizens? bU T^f f)fi€pas- twice n day; tls tovto di/otar, to this pitch of folly ; tp rovrtft napa- trictvfji. in this state of preparation ; A pip 8ia>K€i rov ^i;<^io-f(aroc tout' eo-Ttv, these are the parts of the decree which he prosecutes (lit. what parts of the decree he prosecutes, &c.) So opBorara ap$pa>iroip re irpos (Kfipovs koi iKtiptap Ttpim iavTovs, they said that some of their own men had mixed with them, and some of them with their own men {ripas being understood with a<^a>p and (Ktipap). Compare § 169, 2; § 170, 2. NoTK 3. Similar to such phrases as ttov yrjs ; ds tovto apoias, &c., is the use of ()((o and an adverb with the genitive; as nm c^ftf Bo^rjs; in what stale of opinion are yoti f ovTto rponov (X^is, this is your character (lit. in this state of character) \ ios ctx* ravowy, as fast as he could (lit. in the condition of speed in tvhich he was)\ so i>s etx* fro deal'; eZ ^X'^tv <^p(PvtPy to be right in his mind. 1 170.] GENITIVE. 221 Genitive nffer Verbii. § 169. 1. Verbs signifying lu bf\ to become^ or to beloiru^ take a genitive wliich is equivalent to the pos- sessive or the partitive genitive. E.ii'. 'O vufAos ovTos ^puKovTot fOTiu, ihis iiiiv /."» Drftco'x. Ilmav (ftt'puv ov iravTos, akX* dvdp6s ov, to hear piu'erly is not in t/ie power of everji one, hut in that of a wise man. Aaptiov yiyvovrai 6vo iraidts, two sons are horn {belonijiny) to Darius. Tovriav ytvov fioi, become (one) of these for me, 2. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint, to make, to consider, and the like, which generally take two accusatives (§ 166), may take a partitive genitive in place of the predicate accusative. E.^. *Efii 6(t Tuv irtiTtia-fifvav, put vie down as (one) of those who are persuaded. Tovto t^s ^fUTtpas a/xeXrtar au riv Btiri diicaius, anyone might Justly consider this to helony lo our neylevl. NoTK. When these verbs become passive, they still retain the genitive ; as 2dXa>i/ tu>v iitra trof^nxTtav €K\r)6ri, Solon was vailed (one) of (he Seven Sayes. 3. The genitive after verbs sonietimos expresses other relations of the adnoniinal genitive. E.g. To T€i\os (rTadiov ^v oicro), the wall was (one) of eiyht stades (in lenyth); tntidav irStv fj rtv TpiaKovra, when one is thirty years old ; — Genitive of Measure. 01 aTfv qaav. the crowns were (made) of roses ; to rtlxos ireiroirjTai Xidov, the wall is built of stone . — Genitive of Material. Ov tu>u icaKovpywv oiktos (sc. tariv), there is no pity felt for the evil-doers; — Objective Genitive. § 170. 1. Any verb may take a genitive if its action affects the object only in part. E.<^. ITc/xTrrt twv \vbSiv, he sends some of the Lydians (but nefiirti rovi AuSous, he sends the Lydians). Illvei tov otvov, he drinks of the wine. Tijs yfjs fT( fiov, they ravayed (some) of the land. 2. This principle applies especially to verbs signifying to share (i.e. to give or take a part) or to enjoy. E.g. MfT«t;(oi' T^ff Xrtar, they shared in the booty; so oiiexi fitTattciii- (rdai rivot, to claim a share of anything (cf. § 171, 1); drroXavontv tu>v 222 SYNTAX. l§ 171. 1 1 1 ^ lijllii 1 m i 1 ^: 8 ' || bI ' P m f ' 1 m ii ayafiS)p, toe enjoy the blessings (i.e. our share of them'); ovrats Svato TovTdv, thus viayest thou enjoy these, iio ov jrpoat'jKfi fioi t^s dpx^s, / have no concern in the (jovernmenl ; fifTfo-rl /xoi tovtov, I have a share in this (§ 184, 2, N. 1). Note. Many of these verbs also take an accusative. M(Tfx<^ and similar verbs may regularly take an accusative like fitpos, part : as laov fxirf\ei fKaaros tov itXovtov fit pas, each has an equal share of the wealth (where fxtpovs would mean that each has only a part of (I share). This use of /nfpov shows the nature of the genitive after these verbs. § 171, 1. The genitive follows verbs signifying (o fake hold of, to touch, to claim, to aim at, to hit, to attain, tr miss, to make trial of, to beg-in. E.g-. 'EXa^fTO Trfs xeinos aiiTov, he took his hand; ovre nvpov ovrt «p(OTos cKo)!/ aTTTOfiai, I icillinfjly touch neither f re nor love; r^r $vvf(r(u)s pfTaTToiovvTai, they lay claim to s<'qacily , aro)(d(eardai rav dv0pu>7r(i>u, to aim at the men: rfji dpfrrjs f(f)iKiadai, to attain to virtue; erv^f rijs diKTji, he met with justice : aipaWfrai rfji fXiridos, he fa Us of (attaininy) his hope ; ntipdaBai tuv Tfi\ovs, to make an attempt on the wall; oi ttoXc/xou apxofxfv, we do not heyin war. Note. Verbs of taking hold may have an object accusative, with a genitive of the part taken hoH of; as ska^ou r^s (uurji rov^Opovrav, they seized Orontas by hk girdle. 2. The genitive follows verbs signifying to taste, to smell, to hear, to perceive, to understand, to remember, to forget, to desire^ to care for, to spare, to neglect, to admire, to despise. E.g. 'E\tv6epij)s yivadfxevoi, having tasted of freedom (Hdt.^; Kpop.' fivcov ua(f)paivoiJLai, I smell onions; (fxav^s aKovfiv, to hear a voice; aiaddvfadai, fiffiurifrOai, or f-'uXapdavfirdai Tovrav, !o perceive, remem- ber, OY forget these things; avvievui d XX 17X0)1/, to understand one another; rutv p.a6rfp.dTe dative oi a peison (>^ 181, 2, N. 1); as ficXft fim Tovrov, I rare for lliis ; ^(Timi\ei. trot tovtov, thou rcpentc.st of this. llpoaijKd., it roiicerns, has the same constrnction, but the geni- tive belongs under § 170, 2. Note 3. Causative verbs of this class take tlie accusative of a person and the genitive of a thing; as fir] fi avafivfians kokwv, do not remind vie of ecils (i.e. cause me to reinemher them); tovs TraiBas y(v- art'ou alfiaTOi, we must make the children taste blood. But verbs of remind imf also take two accusatives (§ 164). Remark. Most of the verbs of § 171 may take also the accusa- tive. See the Lexicon. "OCat, emit smell (smell of), maj' take two genitives ; as rrji «cr;0aX^r ofo) fivpov, I emit a smell of perfume (§ 170, 1) from my head. 3. The genitive follows verbs signifying lo rule or to command. E.g". "Ep'jf Twi/ 6(oiv ^aaiKtvei, Love is ling of the Gods; HoKvKparjfs 2d/biov ervpdvuei, Pulycrates was tyrant of Samos ; ottXitwi/ koI tTTTTfci)!/ f(TTpaTf)y€iy ?ie tvas general of infantry and cavalry; fj-ydrai wavTOi Koi epyov .".at }^6yov, he directs everything that is dotie and said. This construction is sometimes connected with that of § 175, 2. But the genitive here depends on the idea of king or ruler implied in the verb, while there it depends on the idea of comparison (see Remark before § 167). NoTK. For other cases after many of these verbs, as the dative after fiyfopm and ai/do-o-w, see the Lexicon. § 172. 1. Verbs signifying /w/wess and want take the genitive of material (§ 167, 4). E.g". XprjfidrtiP (viTopfl, he has abundance of money ; ol rvpavvoi eVa*- vov oiSirore omapiCeTe, you tyrants never have a scarcity of praise. 2. Verbs signifying lo fill take the accusative of the thing filled and the genitive of material. E.g. "Y Soros T171/ KvKiKa irXrjpovp, to fill the cup with water. Note 1, Afo^ai, T want, besides the ordinary construction (as TouTO)!/ cdroiTo, they were in want of these), may take a genitive of the person with a cognate accusative of the thing; as Sfijaopai vputp IKTpiap bftjvip, I will make of you a moderate request. See § 159, N. 4. Note 2. (a) Ael may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an accusative) of the parson besides the genitive; as 8fl fxoi v;»vtou. I 224 SYNTAX [§ 173. ^!ti 1,1 / need this; ov ttoXXoO rrovov /if 8ei, / have no need of much labor (cf. oil 8(1 fit eXdfiu). (b) Besides the common phrases ttoXXov Sei, it is far from it, uXtyou 8«i, it wants little of it, Vie have in Demosthenes oithf ttoX- Xov Set (like iravTos 8(1), it wants everything of it (lit. it does not even leant much). For dXiyov and fnKpov, almost, see the Lexicon. Causal Genitive. § 173. 1. The genitive often denotes a cavse^ especially after verbs expressing emotions, as admiration^ wonder^ pity^ anger ^ envy^ or revenue. E.g. Toi'/Touff Tr)i ToXfiTis davfid^du, to admire these for their courage ; (i8aifiovi(K(t p( 8oipo)v, he prosecutes me for bribery (for gifts); KXiava 8oipa>v (\6vT(s Ka\ K\oTrfjs, Jiaving convicted Cleon of bribery and theft ; (7rore, no man ever himself accused himself; Kara^dbovTai fiov fieyaXa, they tell great falsehoods against me: <^oi(iov ddiKiau KaTTj-yoptiv, to charge injustice upon Phoebus; (vlatv iTTtiaav vfias aKpirav ddvarov Kara^ffilaaaOai, they persuaded yvu to pass {sentence of) death upon some without a trial. Verbs of condemning may take three cases, as in the last example under § 173, 2. 3. The genitive is sometimes used in exclamations, to give the cause of the astonishment. E.g: *Q n6(T(t8ov, TTJs Tfxvqs ! O Poseidon, what a trade! *Q Ztv ^a(rtXel), t^s Xctttoti^tos ra-v (f)p(vS>v ! King Zeus! what subtlety of mind ! Genitive of Separation^ of Contparlson, of Source. § 174. The genitive may denote that from which any- thing is separated or distinguished. On this principle the genitive follows verbs denoting to remove^ to restrain^ to release, to abandon, to deprive, and the like. E.g. 'H vrivos oil ttoXu 8tf;^€t ttjs ^ireipov, the island is not far distant from the main-land ; ivi(TTi]p.ri xu>pt.(op.tvri aper^r, knowledge separated from virtue; \v, think ivorthy, is the genitive of price or value ; as a^ios ('an Oavarov, he is worthy of death : QepiuTOKXea rav fieyianav ff^iwaav, they thought Themistocles worthy of the highest honors. So sometimes arifios and dTifui(u, understanding his rights ; eVt/LieX^s dyaBap, dfieXfj^ kokuv, caring for the good, neglectful of the bad ; Vj destitute of allies : fj yjrvxf} yvpvrf rov aapaTost the soul stript of the body ; Kudapos (^ovoi , free from the stain of murder (§ 172, 1). "Evoxos deikias, chargeable with cowardice (§ 173, 2). ^id(f)opos roiu uX\u>v, dii,tinguistied from the othera (§ 174). "A^ioy ttoXXwi/, worth much (§ 178, Note). Note 1. Especially, adjectives of this class compounded with alpha privative (§ 131, 4, a) take the genitive; as aytvaros KaKwv, without a taste of evils ; dpvfjpi dvarptnTiKos, subversive of the state ; irpoKTiKoi ratv Ka\(av, capable of doing noble deeds; <^vT(i)v, belonging to the kings; Upos 6 x^P°^ T^f *ApT€pi8os, the place is sacred to Artemis ; koivov anavraiv, common to all ; dTjpoKpaTias dWorpui, things not belonging to democracy. For the dative after such adjectives, which with some of them is more common than the genitive, see § 185. Note. Some adjectives of place, like evain-ios, opposite, may take the genitive ii»stead of the regular dative (?! 185), but chiefly in g>etry; as eVamut farav 'A;(a(6)i/, they stood opposite the Achaeans. om. § 183.] GENITIVE. 229 G«nltlTe with Adverbs. § 182. 1- The genitive follows adverbs derived from adjectives which take the genitive. E.g. Ot (finetpai avrov (\ovT(i, those who are acquainted with him; dpa^ias T^9 TToXewy, in a manner unworthy of the state; ffid)(ovTo d^las Xoyou, they /ought in a manner worthy of mention. 2. The genitive follows many adverbs of yj/rtrp. E.g. Eicro) ToO tpviiaros, within the fortress ; e^w toC t€1)(ovs, outside of the wall ; ejcroc rmv opav, witfiout the boundaries ; x(<»p'(f tov amfiaTOi, apart from the body ; fifva^v ao(f>iai koi dftaBlas, between wisdom and if/norance; ntpav rov noTafiuv, beyond the river; irpotrBfu tov trrpa- Toiredov, in front of the camp : dfKJiOTfpaidfv Trjs 68ov, on both sides of the road: «vBv t^s *ao-iJXt8or, straight to PhasHl'is. Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly fWo's, within ; hl\a, apart from ; eyyvs, uyx'-i TreXa?, and irKriainv, near ; Tropptt) {npoaon), far from ; oniadtv and Karomv, behind; and a few others of similar meaning. The genitive after most of thera can be explained as a partitive genitive or as a genitive of separation ; that after dBu resembles that after verbs of aiming at (§ 171, 1). Add pa and Kpva, without the knowledge of, sometimes take the genitive. Note. n\f}u, except, ax pi and fie x pi, until, avev and artp, without, €V€Ka (ovvtKa), on account of , and p.(Ta^^'), between, take the genitive like prepositions. For these and ordinary preposition* with the genitive, see § 191. f 1 Genitive Abaolute. § 183. A noun and a participle not connected with the main construction of the sentence, may stand bji themselves in the genitive. This is called the g-enitive absolute. E.g. TavT (TrpdxBr) Kouavus aTparrjyovvTos, this was done when Conon was general. OuSfV raji/ htavratv irotovvTrnv vp.a>v KaKas ra npayiMara tx^i, affairs are in a bad stale while you do nothing which you ought to do. Qeatv diBovroiP ovk &v fK(\>vyni KOKd, if the Gods should grant (it to be so), he could not escape evils. "Ovroi ^evdovs ftrrip dndrr}, when there is falsehood , there is decei*. For the various relations denoted by ihe genitive absolute, se« §§ 277, 27ti. 230 SYNTAX. [§ 184. IV. DATIVE. Remark. The primary use of the dative case is to denote that to or for which anything is or is done : this includes the dative of the remote or indirect object, and the dative of interest. It also denotes that hy which or with which, and the time (sometimes the place) in which, anything takes place, — i.e. it is not merely », dative, nut also an instrumental and a locative case. (See Remark before i^ 157.) The object of motion after to is not regularly exon ssed by tl)e Greek dative, but bv the accusative with i nreposii on (See ;) 162.) Dative expressing T o or F w r. § 184. The dative is used to denote that to or for which anything is or is done. This includes, — 1. The dative of the indirect object after transitive verbs, which is generally introduced in English by to. E.g. Ai8(i)(Ti fiiadou TO) a-TparevfiaTi, he f/ives pay to the army; vm- o'xvftTai (TO I b(Ka raKavra, he promises ten talents to you (or he promises yoH ten talents) ; fforjdfiav nffi^ofieu rois a of this class may take the accusative. Others, whose ir.«ai.ing would place them 1 -^rc ( vS /ito-cw, hate), take only the accusative. AotSopcw, revile, has the accusative, but XotSopfo/tni (mid- dle) the dative. KfXtvoi in Attic Greek has only the accusative (commonly with the infinitive) ; iu Homer generally the dative. 3. The dative of interest (or of advantage or dis- advantage^^ which is generally introduced in English by for. E.g. riac avrjp avr^ Troi/fl, every man labors for himself : 26\a>u *A6r)- vaiois vopovs cdi^Kt, Solon made laws for the Athenians; ol Koipol irpotivrai rfi ttoXci, lit. the opportunities have been sacrificed for the state (for its disad^'antage)\ iKiriha f\ei aarrfpias rp 7rd\«t, he has hope of safety for the state. Note 1. A peculiar use of this dative is found in statements of time ; as tw ^87 8vo ytveal ((pdiaTo, two generations had already passed away for him (i.e. he had seen them pass away). Horn. 'Hptpai ^o^ovfifP

s avrw, pro/it ably to him- self; ffiTToboiP fpoi, in my way So KaradovT^aais rav'EWrjvwv roit *Adijvaiois, subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians. S 187.] DATIVE. 233 Dative of ReMemblance and Union. § 186. The dative is used with all words implying resemblance, union^ or approach. This includes verbs, adjectives, a^s verbs, and nouns. E.g. Sxtatr ioiK6Tts, like shndowH ; nfiiXov(Ti roU KnKotr, they nuaofinU with the hat/; tovs tvyovTas avroit ^vvrfWa^tu, he rccimciled the eri/es with them ; ofioKoynvmv aWrjXois, Ihei/ nr/ree with one another; BiaXfyovrai tovto is, they converse with these; roiis tnTTovs ^o<^o(t n\T)(Tid(nv, to brinfj the horses near to noises. "Ofioioi toU Tv(ji'Koli, like the blind; Kvfiara u/f '"'ntca-iu, waves like mountains (Horn.); Totff avToty Kvpa> onXon anXiafifvoi, armed with the same arms as (U/rus. 'Eyyi/s ofioi, near a road (also the genitive, § 182, 2); Sfia TJj fj/xtp^, as soon as (it was) day ; oftov t^ tti^X^, together with the mud ; ra tovtois ((f)t^TJs, what comes next to these. Note 1. To this class belong not merely such verbs as 8ia- "KtyofMi, discourse with, but also ;xa;^o/xat, TroXe/ic'o), and others signifying contend with, quarrel with; as fidxtvdai rols B^/Sai'otr, to Jiffht with the Thebans ; 7ro\ffiovu, abiding by the laics; ai f)8ova\ firit brother stand by him); rois kokoIs irr pininTovaiu, they are involved in trils : vnoKfirai To-ntdinv rw if pa, the plain lies below the temple. This dative sometimes depends on the jjreposition (§ 19:»), and sometimes on the idea contained in the compound as a whole. J 234 SYNTAX. [§ 1, I live so much the more happily ; t(\vt} avdyKrit dadtPfartpa fiaKpm, art is weaker than necessity by far. So sometimes with superlatives, and even with other expressions which imply comparison ; as poKpa KaXXiord t« koi iipia-ra, by far the most beautiful and the best ; 8fKa cTttrt itpo ttjs «V IdXapipi vavfiaxias, ten years before the battle of Salamis. 3. The dative sometimes denotes the ag-ent with passive verbs, especially with the perfect and pluperfect. E-g: TovTo tjbr) (TO I TTfTTpaKrai, this has now been done by you; cVetd^ 7rapf(TKeva(TTo toIs Knpiv$tois, when preparation had been made by the Corinthians (when the Corinthians had their preparation made). Here there seems to be a reference to the agent's interest in the result of the completed action expressed by the perfect and plu- perfect. With other tenses, the agent is regularly expressed by vno, &c. and the genitive (§ 197, 1) ; rarely by the dative, except in j)oetry. § 189.) DATIVL. 235 4. With the verbal adjective in -t€o/A(da, let us marc/i both with the strongest horses and with men ; o( \aKe8atfi6vtoi r^ re Kara yfjv arparcp npoaf^aWov r^ Tfi^iafiari koi rats vavalv, the Lacedaemonians attached the wall both with their land army and with their ships. This dative is used chiefly in reference to military forces, and is originally connected with the dative of means or instrument. The last example might be placed equally well under § 188, 1. Note. This dative sometimes takes the dative of avrdr for emphasis; as fiiav (vavv) avro'n dvbpdaiu tlKov., they took- one (ship) men and all (see § 145, 1). Here the instrumental force disappears, and the dative may refer to any class of persons or things : thus bfvbpta avrfjaiv /J»0/«^t> '''c^*' W'*'^ i^i^ir very roots. Horn. ' Dative of Time. § 189. The dative without a preposition often denotes time when. This is confined chiefly to nouns denoting day., night., nianth, or year., and to names oi festivals. E.g. Trj avTjj ^fifpqi dnfdavev, he died on the same day; 'Eppit fii^ vvkti ol nXftaroi ntpitKOTTTjaav, the most of the Hertnae were mutilated in one niffht ; ol 2dptoi i^«no\iopKr)6r}iTav ivdrtj^ fiTjvi, the Samians were taken by sieye in the ninth month; rtrdpra trei ^vvi^rftrav, they came to terms in the fourth year; atantpd &ecrfio(f>opiois vr)m dyp^, he remains in the country. Horn. 'HaBai 86p.ois, to sit at home. Aesch. Nvp dypolai rvyxdvei, now he happens to be in the country. Soph. Note 1. In prose, the dative of place is chiefly confined to the names of Attic denies; as fj MapaOwvi ftdxni fhe battle at Marathon; hwt iv "AOfivais. Still some exceptions occur. Note 2. Some adverbs of place are really local datives ; as TouTj;, T^8e, here ; oUoi, at home ; kvkKco, in a circle, all around. See § 61, N'. 2. PREPOSITIONS. § 191. The prepositions were originally adverbs, and it is chiefly as such that they appear in composition with verbs. They are used also as independent words, to connect nouns (or words used as nouns) with other parts of the sentence. Besides the prepositions properly* so called, there are certain adverbs used in the same wa}^ which cannot be compounded with verbs : these are called improper prepositions, and are av€Vf aTcp, a;(pi, p-^XPh /'*€'''«^''> €i/€Ka, ttXt/i/, wr. All of these take the genitive, except ws, which takes the accusative. I. Four prepositions take the genitive only : dvri, dTro, cK (c^) , Trpd, — with the improper prepositions ai/eu, arep, dxph p-^XP^i f^^Tf.$v, ei/cca, ttAj^j/. 1 . dvTf, instead of, for. Original meaning, over against, against. In COM p. : against, in ojiposition, in return, instead. 2. dw»^ § 191.] PREPOSITIONS. 237 now See aTTO, 3. JK cr 1$ (§ 13, 2; T^at. e, ex), /ro7n, out of; originally (as opposed to dw6)fi'0in within. (a) of PLACE : iK Sn-dpTT/j ipe&yei, he is banished from Sparta, {b) of TIME : e/f iraXaioTdrov, from the most ancient time. (c) of ORIGIN : 6vap (k At6s eVrti', the dream comes from Zetis. So also with passive verbs (instead of vir6 with gen.): rtfiaadai iK Tivoi, to be honored by some one (the agent viewed as the source). In comp. : out, from, away, off. 4. irp t^XPh until; puera^i, between; HvtKa, on account of; vXi^v, except. IT. Two take the dative only : cV and crvv. 1. 4v, in, ec^uivalent to Lat. in with the ablative : (a) of PLACE : fv Sird/»Tu, in Sparta ; — with a word implying number, among: eV SiJ^y X^etJ', to speak (waxou^ before tlu people. {b) of TIME : kv TO^T(p TV 'ret, in this year. In COMP. : in, on, at. 2. o-vv or {4v (Lat. oum), with, i.e. in company with or by aid of. In COMP. : with, together. III. Oiie takes the accusative only : eis or c?, — with the improper preposition o>s. 1 . (Is or k, Kdo, to ; originally (as opposed to in) to ivithhi (Lat. in with the accusative or inter): (a) of PLACE : ftpvyov ets Miyapa, tJiey fled into Megara. (b) of TIME : ets viiKra, (to) till night; els rbv (Lvaina XP<5*'0*'» for all time. " (c) of NUMBER and MEASURE : eh SiaKocrlovi, {amounting) to two hundred ; ctj 86vap.iv, up to mie's power. (d) of PURPOSE or REFERENCE ; xP'^t^^'^"- dvaXiaKekv ets rbv v6\(pov, to spend money on the war ; xpMi^po^ eJ's ti, useful for any- thing. In COMP. : into, in, to. 2. tt>s, to, only with persons : etVteVat tiis nva, to go in to (visit) any one. '(|; Vi (J p^ cxv IV.C ^\ - 'vA^ ^jlK: K)jV' > ^' '-^^''^ I^A^^^iX. d\^s Karaxeiv, to pour dotvn upon the head ; also against, under, concerning. (2) with the accusative, doivn along ; of motion over, through, among, into, agaiiist ; also according to, concerning. (a) of PLACE : /card povv, down stream ; Karh. yrjv /cat ddXaaaav, by land and by sea. (b) of TIME : Kara Tij/ wdXefiov, during (at the time of) the war. (c) DISTRIBUTIVELY : Kara rpeh, by threes, three by three ; Kad\ Tjixipavj day by day, daily. In COMP. : down, against. 3. im{pf over (Lat. super). (1) with the GENITIVE : (a) of PLACE : ivkp t^s ifc^aX^j, over (his) head; ivip t^s $a\daai)i, above {away from) the sea. (b) for, in behalf of (opposed to Kard) : ndxfffOai vir^pripoi, to fight for 07ie (originally over hiin) ; vvip acv d^SoiKa, I fear for you ; iirip twos xfyeiv, to speak in place of one ; in the orators sometimes concerning (like irepl). (2) with the accusative, over, beyond, of place and measure. In COMP.' over, beyond, exceedingly, in behalf of. V. One takes the dative and accusative (very rarely the genitive) : am. dvd (cf. adverb dv«, above), originally up (opposed to uard). (1) with the dative (only Epic and Lyric), up on : dvA aKi^rptp, oni a sceptre. § 191.] PREPOSITIONS. 239 (2) with the accusative, up along ; and of motion over, throtigh, among (cf. KarA.). (a) of PLACE : avb. ftovv, up stream ; olpol arparbv, through the army (Horn.). (&) of TIME ; avbi Tracrav tt^v vfiipav, all through tlie day. (c) In DISTRIBUTIVE expressions : avbi. rirrapai, by fours. In COMP. : up, back, again. (3) with the genitive, only in the Homeric expression, dvA vtjbi fialveiv, to go on board sMp. y the , on a VI. Seven take the genitive, dative^ and accusative : dficfii, CTTt', fl€Td^ TTUpd, TTtpi^ Trp6l rd e^-qKOvra, about sixty (circiter sexaginta); so d/i0i rt ^X"''* ^^ be {busy) about a thing. In COMP. : about, on both sides. ' 2. iirCf (wt, upon. (1) with the genitive : (a) of PLACE : iirl iripryov, on a tower ; sometimes towards : ivl ^dfiov irXeiv, to sail {upo7i) towards Samos. (6) of time : iip' rj/uwj/, in our time. (2) with the dative : (a) of place: iid rrj daXdffaxi oUeiv, to live upon {by) tJie sea. (b) of time: iirl Ti^ar^^dip, upon the signal; inl Toiyrois, thereupon. (c) Likewise over, for, at, in addition to, on account of, in the power of; and in many other relations : see the Lexicon. (3) with the accusative, originally up to ; then to, toicards, against : dva^alveiv i'v Tots iroXejilois fjLdx^ff^oLi, with {the help of ) tJie allies to fight with {against) the enemy (§ 186, N. 1). (2) with the dative (poetic, chiefly Epic), among. '■ i\ i I ill' 240 SYNTAX. [§ 191. h (3) with the accusative : (a) into (the midst of), after {in quest of), for (poetic). (6) generally a/j!cr, next to: /u,ctoi_t6>^ 7r6Xe/ui*;, ifter the war; /*^7t- (TTOj )wctA rbv "IffTpov, ilielargcst {river) next to tlie Ister. In COMP. : with (of sharing), among, after {in quest of) : it also denotes cJuxnge, as in ujeravoju, c/umge one's mind, repent. 4 . irapd, by, near, alongside of (see Note 1). (1) with the GENITIVE, from beside, from. (2) with the dative, near: irapk Kiptfi 6vt€%, being near Cyrus. (3) with the accusative, to {a place) near, to; also by the side of, beyond or beside, except, along loith, because of. (a) of PLACE : d^twctrat irapb. Kvpov, he comes to Cyrus. {b) of TIME : fl-opd jrdvra rbv xP^^'^^t throughout the whole time. (o) of CAUSE : irapa ttjv ijfieT^pav d/iiXeiav, on account of our neglect. {d) with idea of beyond or beside, and except: oCik Hart, iraph. raxha dXXo, tliere are no othars besides tJicse ; irapcL rbv vbixov, con- trary to the law (properly beyond it). In coMP. : beside, along by, hitherward, wrongly (beside tlie mark), over (as in overstep). 5. ir«p(, around (on all sides). (1) with the GENITIVE, about, concerning (Lat. de): vepl varpbi ip'tadai, to inquire about his fatlier ; also (poetic) above; Kparepbs vepl vavTuv, migfity above all. (2) with the dative, about, around, coticerning, seldom in \ttic prose. (3) with the accusative, nearly the same as a.p.J ylon, {b) in addition to : irf - r(,i,Tn^, Imdds this, furthr, -more. 191.] PREPOSITIONS. ^41 §191. lenotes beyond me. neglect. 4 TaOra ,Qv, cmi- •k), over ipkffOai, i6s trepl prose. ituafed \)re (btj) 1^ KCLpra having Le 11^6). (3) with the accusative: (a) to: Uvai irp6s''0\vfivov, to go to Olywpiis. {b) toioards: irpbi Boppav, towards the North; so of persons: iriaTWi BiaKeiffdai irpbs riva^ to be faithfully disjwsed towards one ; irpbi dWiJXous ijavxiav dxov, they kept the peace towards one another. (c) with a view to, in reference to : irpbi rl fie ravr epuTq.^, (to what end) for what do you ask me this? npbs ttji* di/va/iiv, according to one's power. In COMP. : to, towards, against, besides. 7. {m6, under (Lat. sub), by. (1) with the GENITIVE : (a) of PLACE ^67^5, tinder the earth ; sometimes from under. {b) to denote the agent with passive verbs: Tifiaadai iwb rwv iroKi- Twv, to be honored by the citizens. (c) of cause: {iirb S4ovi, through fear ; ixfi' i}dovr)i,through pleasure. (2) with the dative (especially poetic): Oayeiv vv' 'l\lv Stto, iraidos mpi ; oXfcras ano (for dnoXe- aas). For the accent see § 23, 2. Note 5. A few prepositions are used adverbially with a verb understood; as irdpa for ndpeari, en-t and /leVa (in Homer) for eirtari and fifT«m. So evi for eveari, and ava, up ! for dvaara {avd- oTTidi). For the accent see § 23, 2. Note 6. Sometimes ds with the accusative or «« or diro with the genitive is used in expressions which themselves imply no motion, with reference to some motion implied or expressed in' the context; as at ^vvohot fs TO lepov eyiypovro, the synods were held in the temple (lit. into the temple, involving the idea of going into the temple to hold the synods) ; toIs (k livKov \T)(f>6(i(ri (eoiKores), like those cap- tured (in Pylos, and brought home) from Pylos, i.e. the captives from Pylos; Birjpnaaro Koi aira to. duo rmv oiKitov ^v\a, even the very timbers in the houses (lit. from the houses) had been stolen. So fv with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of motion, referring to rest which follows the motion ; as tv tm iroTop^ ftreaov, they fell (into and remained) m the river; so iv yoivaai niTTTfiv, to fall on one^s knees. These are instances of what is called the constructio praeynans. § 192. (^Recapitulation.) 1. The following prepositions take the genitive: d,fi(}>L, d-vri, otto, Bid, iK (e^), ctti, kutu, ficrd, vapd, Trcp,', Trpo, Trpos, vir^p, vtto, — i.e. all except «is, iv, avv, dvd. Also the improper prepositions dv€v, arcp, a^pi, p-^xPh H-^Ta$Vf €V€Ka, ttXt^v. 2. The following take the dative : dfi^i, dm, eV, eVi, /xcra, TTapa, TTCpt, TTpds, (XVV, VTTO. 3. The following take the accusative: dfi t^ vra, his mother assisted him in this (i.e. fnpaTT€ crvv avrio). For examples of the genitive, see § 177; for those of the dative, see § 187. [§ 192. 'erb to aTToXe- a verb Bi) tor (» » ava- ith the notion, ontext ; ; temple [uple to )se cap- captives even the en. So jferring 'hey fell fall on natructio >sitions d, /uLcra, vVf dva. lACTtt^V, except enoting vn case / Italy; V yra, his oiples of § 196.] ADVERBS. advp:rbs. 243 § 194. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. E.g: OuTwy «in€v, thus he spoke; ins dvvafiai, as I am able; npSiTOP dn^\6e, he first went awaif . to d'Krfduts kqkov, that which is truly evil : fiaWov irpeirovTui fjfi(f).ic(Tfi€vr), more becominyly dressed. For adjectives used as adverbs, see § 1 38, N. 7. For a«lverbs preceded by the article, aud nuaht'yiug a noun like adjectives, sue § 141, N. 3. For adverbs with the genitive or dative, see §§ 168 (with N. 3); 182, 2; 185 ; 186. For adverbs as prepositions, see § 191. For negative adverbs, see § 283. thp: verb. VOICES. Active. § 195. In the active voice the subject is represented as acting ; as r/oeTrw rov^ 6(f)6a\ijLov^, I turn my eyes ; o irarrjp ^iXel rov iraiha, the father tones the child; 6 'iinTo^ Tpex^i^ the horse runs. Notp: 1. The form of the active voice includes most intransitive verbs; as rpt^to, run. On the other hand, the form of the middle or passive voice includes many deponent verbs which are active and transitive in meaning; as ^ovXofxai tovto, I waul this. Some transi- tive verbs have certain intransitive tenses; as HarrfKa, I stand, earrju, I stood, from torj/ftt, place. Such tenses are said to have a middle, or sometimes even a passive, meaning. Note 2. The same verb may be both transitive and intransi- tive; SLH f\avv(t>, drive (trans, or intrans.) or march. Tlie intransi- tive use sometimes arose from the omission of a familiar object; as fXavpeiv (iTTTTOi/ or apua), re\fVTai> (jov ^iov), to end (life) or to die. Compare the English verbs drive, turn, move, &c. Passive. § 196. In the passive voice the subject is represented as acted upon ; as 6 irah viro rov Trarpo^ ^tXetrat, the child is loved by the father. '!> Iti 244 SYNTAX. [§ 1^7. In I 4 f! I I ! § 197, 1 . T1i(^ objn'l of the active bocomos tho subject ot" the passive. I'tie subject of the active, the a^eiit, is j^enerally expressed by viro and tlv^ genitive in the pas- sive eonstruetion. (See § 190 and the example.) Kven a genitive or dative used as a direct object can become the "^subject of the passive ; as Karu0/;oi«((rai vr' tfioi, he is iletipisnl hi/ tite (cf. KaTa" Iriisled III/ his suhjects (cf. nurrfvovaip avra, § 184, 2); so df}\6fji(vos, ruled over, is passive of «px**'» '''^^^ (§ ^"1' '^)- NoTK 1. Other prepositions than iirro with the genitive of the agent, though used in poetry, are not common in Attic pros*?. Sucli are napd, irpot, €k, and otto. NoTK 2. When the active is followed by two accusatives, or l)y an accusative of a thijig and a dative of a per.son, the case denoting a /)erson is generally made the subject of the passive, and tlie other (an accusative) remains unchanged. £".//. Oi8fv «?.•:- ^idda-Ktrai dpSptonos, the man is taught nothing else (in t^' ctiV ^ ovuic onai, inflict; rifioipo) nut, I nvenf/f. n person, rifKapovfial Tiva, I ui'eutje mijuelj on n person or / punish a person : ai,Ta>, JaslcHy anrouai, cling to {fasten mijsel f to) \ 80 €xoitat, hold to. The passive of some of these verbs is used as a passive to both active and middle; thus ypaTJi/ai can mean either to he written or /(, he im/icted. NoTK 4. Tlie future middle of some verbs has a passive sense; as dSiKU), wrong, dbiKrjanpai, I shall he wronged. TENSES. I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. § 200. The tenses of the indicative express action as follows : — Present, continued or repeated present action : ypa.w, lam writing or I ivrile (habitually). Imperfect, continued or repeated past action : €ypaff>ov, I was writing or / used to write. Perfect, action finished in present time : ytypaa^ I have written. Pluperfect, action finished in past time : iyeypd, I am co^ne, a,n(\ oi\opai, I am (tone, have the torce of perfects ; the imperfects having the force of pluperfects, (('f. N. 6.) § 200.] TENSES. 247 (h^ The present tifu, I am fining, has a future sense, and is used as a tuture of ?p;^o/iat, iXeixrofxai not being ordinarily used in Attic prose. NoTK 4. The present with naXni or any other expression of past time has the force of a present and perfect combined ; as rraXat (rot tovto Xcyo), I have long been lelLing you this {^ichich I now tell). NoTK r>. (n) The aorist takes its name (adptoror, utt/imilrfl^ unqualified) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none of the limitations {opoi) as to completion, continuance, repetition, &c. which belong to tlie otlier past tenses. It corresponds exactly to the so-called imperfect iu Knglish, whereas the Greek imperfect corresponds to the forms J was doing, &c. Thus, tiroiei toCto is he icas doing this or he did this habitual I n ; -irtiroirfKf tovto is he has alreadji done this : fntiroirjKfi tovto is he had already (at some past time) done this; but f'noiijae tovto is simply he did this, without qualification of any kind. (h) The aorist of verbs which denote a stale or condition generally expresses the entrance into that state or condition; as ttXoutw, / am rich ; iirkovTow, 1 was rich ; fn\ovTT}a-a, I became rich. So c/SacriXfuo'r, he became Icing ; ^p^e, he obtained ojfice. (c) The distinction between the imperfect and aorist was some- times neglected, especially in the earlier Greek. See ^aivou and ^rj in //. i. 437 and 439; ^a>\(To and ^oKcto in //. ii. 43 and 45; tkintv and Xfln-f , //. ii. 106 and 107. Note 6. Some perfects have a present meaning; as dvrjaKtiv, to die, T(Bvr]K€uai, to be dead; yiyptadai, to become, ytyovivai, to be; p,ifjLvr}aKttu, to remind, fif ixvfjadai, to remember; KaXeiv, to call, KfK'Kfiadat, to be called. So ol8a, I know, novi. This is usually explained by the meaning of the verb. In such verbs the pluperfect has the force of an imperfect; as fidtiv, I knew (§ 127). (Cf. N. 3, a.) Note 7. The perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future; as ft ftf ala-6T)(r(Tat o\pd(f Koi fTcn-pa^crai, speaks and it shall be (no sooner said than) done. Compare the similar use of the perfect infinitive, § 202, 2, N. 2. § 201. The division of the tenses of the indicative into primary and secondary (or historical) is explained in § 90, 2. In dependent clauses, when the construction allows both subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and optative, the subjunctive or indicative regularly follows primary tenses, and the optative follows secondary tenses. E.sr. TlpaTTovfTiv & hv ^ovXwvTai, they do whatever they please; tirpaTTov A /SovXotvro, they did whatever they pleased. \iyov6s, on this condition may I gain the victory (aor.) and be considered (pies.) wise. BouXcTm toCto iToielv, he wishes to do this (habitually); /SovXeTot tovto Trot^aai, (simply) he wishes to do this. Tnis is a distinction entirely miknown to the Latin, which has (for example) onl^ one form, .si faciat, corresponding to ft n-otot^ and (( ironjaeieu. Even the Greek does not always regard it; and in many cases it is indifferent which tense is used. 2. The perfect, which seldom occurs in these constructions, represents an action &b finished at the time at which the pres- ent would represent it as going on. JS.g, AeioiKa fx^ X^diju neiroirjKri, I fear lest it may prove to hare caused forget fulness (fiti noifj would mean lest it may cause). Mijdfi/i /3o>;- $eiv ht n^ np6Tepos 0e^oT)drfKi}i v/iiv ^, to help no one who shall not previously have helped you (6s &v fifi .... 3017^0 would mean who shall not previously help you). Ovk &v dia tovto y eiev ovk ev6vs dedu- KOTes, they would not (on enquiry) prove to have failed to pay imme- diately on this account (with 8 180 lev this would mean they would not fail to pay). Ov /3ovXev«o-dat ert &pa, oKKa /Se/SovXcCcr^at, it is no longer time to be deliberating, but (it is time) to have fnished deliberating. Note 1. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command that something shall be decisive and permanent ,* as toOto elprftrBo, let this have been said (i.e. let what has been said be final), or let this (which follows) be said once for all ; nexpi Tovhe mpivBa vfi&v ij j8pa- dvT^s, at this point let the limit of your sluggishness be fixed. Tnis is confined to the third person singular passive; the rare second person singular middle being merely emphatic. The active is used only when the perfect has a present meaning (§ 200, N. 6). Note 2. The perfect infinitive sometimes expresses decision or permanence (like the imperative, N. 1), and sometimes it is merely more emphatic than the present; as elnov Ti\v dvpav KtK\e'i, / will W7Hte)', eKeytv on ypa^fiep, he said that he had written (he said eypa>/^a); eXt-yfi/ on ysypad)o>s «trj, he said that he had already written (he said yfypaaT(pos, he asked whether any one was wiser than I (he asked (an ns ;). § 203.] TENSES. 251 t>a>, / said had that sked ♦70-1 ypa(f)fiv, he sat/s that he in n'ritinff (he say^ ypdc^w) ; (^ijrri ypdylreiv, he says that he wilt write (ypd'^w) ; ifyrfoi ypdyj^ai, he satjs that he wrote (eypayj/a); (fujtri ytypa^tvat, he says that he has loritten {yiy pa(^a). EiTr*!/ on avbpa ay 01 ov (ip$at fitot, he said that he was bringing a man whom it was necessary to confine (he said nudpa ayat hu eip^at 8fi). 'EXoyi^ovTo cor, « nfj fidxaivTo^ anoaTrjaotuTo al TrdXftr, t/iey considered that, if they should not fght, the cities would revolt (they thought eau pfj naxv>fifOa, anoarrfffovTai, if we do notjight, they will re roll). These constructions will be explained in § 243, § 246, and § 247. 1 lere they merely show the different force of the tenses in indirect discourse and in other constructions. Compare especially the difference between eip and Ariai ypd^ai under § 203 with that between jiovXerai 7roi«tv and /SovXfrat noifiaat under §<202. Notice also the same distinction m respect to the present and aorist optative. Note 1 . The present infinitive may represent the imperfect as well as the present indicative; as rivas evxas vitoKap-^veT (vxeeQai Tov ^iKmitov oT ei/, take this and f)e oJf^Xa^wv being past to SneXde, but absolutely future). Note 1. The present may here also represent the imperfect; as oi8a KaKfivo pov(iTt)v). See § 203, Note 1. Note 2. The aorist participle in certain constructions does not denote time past with reference to the leading verb, but expresses a simple occurrence without regard to time (like the aorist infinitive in § 202). This is so in the following examples: — *Etux*i' «\Bav he happened to come; i\a6(v f\Outv, he came secretly; (v, he came frst. (See § 279, 4.) nepubtiur^v yrju Tfitidtia-av, to allow the land to be ravaged (to see it ravaged). (See § 279, 3.) So sometimes when the participle denotes that in which the action of the verb consists (§ 277) ; as «u y ciroiijo-as (ivapvijtras fie, you did well in reminding me. IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. § 205* 1. The present is the tense commonly used in Greek, as in English, to denote a general truth or an habitual action ; as TrXotoi; et? ArjXov *A0r]vaioi ire/nTrovo'iv, the Athenians send a ship to Delos {annualUj). 2. In animated language the aorist is used in this sense. This is called the gnomic aorist^ and is generally translated by the English present. £.g. § 207.] THE PABTICLE "AN. 253 Hv Tis TovToiu rt irapaPatvjj, (tjulau cvrois iiriBttrav^ i.e. (he;i impose n peuofftf on nit who trannffrcss. Mi" rifttpa rov ft«u KoBtiXtp vyjfodtp, Toi' 8' rjp ava, one day {often) brings down one man from a height and raises another high. Note 1. Here one distinct case in past time is vividly used to represent all possible cases. Examples containing such adverbs as noXKditis, often, rjbr}, already, oihra, never yet, illustrate the construc- tion; as dBvfiovvTfs avbpei oSrroi Tponatov sartjaav, disheartened men never yet raised a trophy, i.e. never raise a trophy. Note 2. An aorist resembling the gnomic is found in Homeric similes; as ^pme 8' m ore ris dpvs {jpiirtv, and he fell, as when same oak falls (lit. as when an oak once fell). Note 3. The gnomic aorist sometimes occurs in indirect dis- course in the infinitive and participle, and even in the optative. 3. The perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist. E.g. Tu hi fi^ ffiirobav dvavrayoiulaT^ tvvoiqi rert'/ii^rat, but those who are not before men's eyes are honored with a good will which has no rivalry. The gnomic perfect may be used in the infinitive. § 206. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used with the adverb au to denote a cvstomary action. E.g:. Alt} par a V &v avrovs ri Xfyotev, J used to ask them (/ would of en ask them) what they said. TIoWaKK riKovaafieu &v vftat, we used often to hear you. Remark. This construction must be carefully distinguished from the ordinary apodosis with av (§ 222). It is equivalent to our phrase he would often do this for he used to do this, and was probably developed from the past potential construction (§ 226, 2, N. 2). Note. The Ionic has iterative forms in -aKov and -aKopLtfv in both imperfect and aorist. (See § 119, 10.) Herodotus uses these also with av, as above. THE PARTICLE "AN. § 207. The adverb av (Epic kg) has two distinct uses. 1. It is joined to all the secondary tenses of the indica- tive (in Homer also to the future indicative), and to the optative, infinitive, or participle, to denote that the action 254 SYNTAX. [9 208. of the verb is dependent on some condition, expressed or implied. Here it belongs to the verb. 2. It is joined re^larly to ct, if, and to all relative and temporal words (and occasionally to the *inal particles &>?, OTTG)?, and 6pa^, when these are followed by the subjunctive. Here it belongs entirely to the particle or relative, with which it often forms one word, as in idv, oral/, iireiBdv. There is no English word which can translate uu. In its first use it is expressed in the would or should of the veib (/^ovAotro «»», he would wish ; iXoifjLrjv Av, 1 should choose). In its second use it has no force which can be made apparent in English. Remark. The ab ve statement (§ 207) includes all ivgulur uses of dv except the Epic constructieu explained in § 255, and the iterative con- struction of § 206. The following sections (§§ 208-211) enumerate the various uses of dy : when these are explained more fully elsewhere, reference is made to the proper sections. § 208* 1 . The present and perfect indicative never take uv. 2. The future indicative often takes av (or kc) in the early poets, especially Homer ; very rarely in Attic Greek. U.g. Kai Kf ri( 2>d' «p«€i, and perhaps some one will thus speak; SKKot, oi Kf fie Tifiriaovat, others who will honor me {if occasion offers). The future with av seems to have been an intermediate form between the simple future, will honor, and the optative with av, would honor. One of the few examples found in Attic prose is in Plat. Apol. p. 29 C. 3. The most common use of av with the indicative is when it forms an apodosis with the secondary tenses. It here denotes that the condition upon which the action or the verb depends is not or was not fuWllod. See § 222. For the past potential construction with dv, see § 226, 2, N. 2 ; for the iterative construction with dv, see § 206. § 209. 1. In Attic Greek the subjunctive is used with av only in the constructions mentioned in § 207, 2, where dv belongs to the introductory word. See § 223, § 225, § 232, 3, § 233; also§ 216, 1, N. 2. § 211.1 THE PARTICLE 'AN. 255 2. In Epic poetry, where the subjunctive is often used nearly or quite in the sense of- the foture indicative (§ 255), it may, like the future (§ 208, 2), taice dv or kc. E.ff. El bf Kt n^ Sdjjffiy, iyu> 8f Ktv aircv cXoi/iiat, and if he does nut give her up, I will take her myself. § 210* The optative with dv forms an apodosis, with which a condition must be eitiier expressed or implied. It denotes what would happen if the condition should be fulfilled (§ 224). Note. The future optative is never used with dv. See § 203, N. 3. erb the av dv 3, § 211* The present and aorist (rarely the perfect) infini- tive and participle are used with du to form an apodosis. Each tense is liere equivalent to tlie corresponding tense of the indicative or optative with dv, — tlie present representing also the imperfect, and the perfect also the pluperfect. Thus the present infinitive or participle with dv may repre- sent either an imperfect indicative or a present optative with dv ; the aorist, either an aorist indicative or an aorist optative with dv ; the perfect, either a pluperfect indicative or a perfect opta- tive with dv. E.g. (Pres.) ^fTiv avTovs iXevdfpovs &v eivai, d tovto eirpa^av, he says that they would (now) be free (^aav dv), if they had done this ; riaiv avToi/s fKfvdfoovs &v eivai, ti tovto Trpd^eiav, he says that they would (hereafter) he free (eUv dv), if they should do this. Otfia airoi/i (XtvBepovs &v ovras, « tovto eirpa^av, I know that they would (now) be free (rjaav dv). if they hid done this; oi8a avrovs iXevOepovs &v 5vTas, tl ravra Trpa^ctav, / know that they would (hereafter) be free (elev dv), if they should do this, (A or.) ^aa\v airitv €\dtiv &v (or olba aMv i\66vTa dv), et tovto eytvtTo, they say (or / know) that he would hare come (ffSBevdv), ij this had happened ; <^aa\v airbv eXdelv dv (or oi8a avTov eXdovra dv), ft TOVTO yevoiro, they say (or / know) that he would come (t\$oi dv), if this should happen. (Perf.) Et fiti Tas dpfTas fKtivas irapfK($r«r hvthv), ij' ifOH shouhl condemn them. The context must decide in each case whether we have the equiva- lent of the indicative or of the optative with av. In the examples given, the form of the protasis generally settles the question. NoTK. As the early poets who i.se the future indicative with Sv (§ 208, 2) do not use this construction, the future infiuiti'e and participle with uv are very rarely found. § 212. 1. When dv is us d with the subjunctive (as in § 207, 2), it is generally separated from the introductory word only by monosyllabic particles like /iacV, 8c, tc, ydp, &c. 2. In a long apodosis dv raay be used twice or even three times with the same verb ; as ovk &v riytia-O* auroi/ kuv iiriBpa- IJL€iv ; do you not think that he would even have rushed thither 'i In Thuc. ii. 41, av is used three times with irapix'^aBai. 3. "kv may be used elliptically with a verb understood ; as oi oiKtrai piyKowLV aAA* cvk uv irpo rov (sc. cppcyKov), the slaves are snoring; but in old times they wouldn't have done so. So in ei^ he toriles ; eypayjrev^ he wrote ; ypdyjrei, he will write ; y€ypa if '^'•' '•'' '^"*» ^ rejoice (§ 221); ct typay^tv, ^\$ov au, if he had written^ I should have come (§ 222); tt ypd^ti, ypoiorofuu, if he shall write (or if he writes), I shall know (§ 223, N. 1). 'Em/icXeirat ottok tovto yci/i)s nrjrroTt tovto tiroitfo'a, that thou hadst killed me, that 1 might never have done this! (§ 251, 2; § 216, 3). Et^c tovto dXij^cs ^v, that this were true! (§ 251, 2). Remark. These constructions are explained in the sections re- ferred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of giving any precise single definition, which will be of practical value, including all the u^es even of the indicative. With the subjunctive and optative it is equally impossible. do ced kite fe ; is iip- 2. The various uses of the subjunctive are shown by the following examples : — "Epxtrai lua tovto i8fi, he is coming that he may sec this (§ 216); (JMfittTai (ifi TOVTO yivtfTai, he fears lest this may happen (§ 218). *Eap tlXOrj, toCto TTot^o^o), if he shall come (or if he comes), 1 shall do this (§ 223); «du tis «\Bii, tovto nom, if any one (ever) comes, I (always) do this (§ 225). "Orav «\djj, tovto iroirjira, when he shall come (or when he comes), I shall do this (§ 232, 3); orav ris tXBjj, TOVTO TTotw, when any one cores, I (always) do this (§ 233). "laHfv, let us go (§ 253) M^ davp.a(rriT«, donot wonder (§254). Tt ei»ra>; what shall I say i (§ 256). Ov p.ri tovto ytvijTai, this (surely) will not happen (§ 257). "idofMi, I shall see (Horn., § 255). These constructions are explained in the sections referred to. Remark. The subjunctive, in its simplest and apparently most primitive use, expresses simple futurity, like the future indicative; this is seen in the Homeric independent construction, tdcD/iat, / shall see; ttirtftri xir, one will say. Then, in exhortations and prohibi- tions it is still future; as tafitv, let us go; p^ iroif)arjT€ tovto, do not do this. In final and object clauses; it expresses a future pur- pose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional relative sentences it expresses a future supposition; except in general conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly present) m its time. 17 268 SYNTAX. [I 218. 8. The various uses of the optative are shown by the following examples : — *H\6«if Iva Toxiro idoi, he came that he might nee this (§ 216); «0o- /3««To /i^ rovTo ytvoiTo, he feared lest this should happen (§ 218). El i\$ot, TovT hv notriantfth if he should come, J should do this (§ 224) ; «t Tif « X 0oif TOVT inoiovv, if any one (ever) came, I (always) did this (§ 225). *0t« f\Boi, tovt itv nointratfti, whenever he should come (at any time when he should come), I should do this (§ 282, 4); oTf Tis fX0oi, tovt iitoiovv, whenever any one came, 1 (always) did this (§ 233). *Eirtftt\t'iTo virus tovto ycvijo'oiro, he took care that this should happen (§ 217). Ernff (or i\tytv) on tovto notoitf (noiriaoi or iroi^atit), he said that he teas doing (would do or had done) this a 243). "EXffot avy he might go (if he shouUl wish to) (§ 226, 2). eW# /i^ atroXoiyro, that they may not perish! M7 yc'votro, may it not happen (§ 251, 1). These constructions are explained in the sections referred to. Remark. The optative in many of its uses is a vaguer and less distinct form of expression than tfie subjunctive, in constructions of the same general character. This appears especially in its inde- pendent uses; as in the Homeric 'EXci/171' ayoiTo, he may take Helen away (cf . dytaBo, let him take) ; loifxtv, may we go (cf. tu>ntv, let us go) ; fifi yiimiTo, may it not happen (cf. fifi ycvi;rat, let it not hapnen) ; cXotro av (Horn, sometimes cXotro alone), he would take (cf. llom. cXijrai sometimes with k<, he will take). So in future conditions; as ci ycvotro, if it should happen (cf. tav ytvrjToi, if it shall happen). In other dependent clauses it is generally a correlative of the sud- junctive, sometimes of the Indicative; it expresses the changed relation of a dependent subjunctive or indicative in these con- structions when the verb on which it depends is changed from present or future to past time. The same change in relation is expressed in English by a change from shall, will, may, do, is, &c. to should, would, might, did, was, &c. To illustrate these last relations, compare tpxtrai tva td^, 0o/3«trat fi^ yci^rnt, tav TK fl^Bji TOVTO TTOiSi, (7r(/iifX«ira( onas tovto ycvntrcrat, and Xcyrt ort TOVTO iroit7, with the corresponding forms after past leading verbs given in § 213, 3. 4. The imperative is used to express commands and prohibitions; as tovto Tro/et, do this; fit) ^ei/yere, do not Jiy, 5. The infinitive is a verbal noun, which expresses the simple idea of a verb without restriction of person or number. v; -■"-t»H»M»5!7.>v 215.] THE MOODS. 259 § 214. The following sections (§§ 215-257) treat of all constructions which require any other frni of the finite verh than the indicative in simple assertions (§ 213, 1). The infinitive and participle are included here only so far as they are used in indirect discourse or in protasis and apodosis. These constructions are divided as follows : — I. Final and Object clauses after ivo, o)s, ottwv, and fi^. II. Conditional sentences. III. Relative and Temporal sen- tences. IV. Indirect Discourse. V. Causal sentences. VI. Wishes. VII. Commands, Exhoilations, and Prohibi- tions. VIII. Homeric Subjunctive (like Future Indicative). — Interrogative Subjunctive. — Oi' ftiy with Subjunctive or Future Indicative. ;on- rom is Mr lese tav \ty(i md do bhe or I. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER Tm, o^€iTai firj TOVTO yivrjTai, he fears that (or lest^ this may happen. Remark. The first two classes (sometimes classed together as final) are to be distinguished with special care. The object clauses in B are the direct object of the leading verb, and can even stand in apposition to an object accusative like tovto; as aKonfi. rovro, on-wr Ikii rul(/e, that you may not pass over. Auo-trcXft f'aaai tu ra napovTi, nfj Koi tovtov jroXffiiov irpotrdoineda, it ts expedient to allow it for a time, lest ice may add him to the number of our enemies. Ilapa- KciKtis larpovs, oirios fifj Jwo^ai/)/, you call in physicians, that he may not die. *tXos (^ovKtro eivai tois niyurra bvvafitvois, Iva adiKotv fxri 8ibolr} BiKrjv, he wished to he a friend to the most powerful, that he might do tvronfj and not he punished. Tovtov tvtKa (f)iXa}v w«ro 8(i(rdai, its avvtpyovs «x°*» '**-' thought he needed friends for this purpose, namely, that he might have helpers. Note 1. The future indicative very rarely takes the place of the subjunctive in final clauses after oiraa, 6€v, t6 /iij ra irpdyfiaT dudpunois €\fiv (fi(oPTjv, iv ^(rav firjdtv ol dfivoi Xdyot, Alas ! alas ! that the facts have no voice for men, so that words of eloquence might be as nothing. ) B. Oliject Clauses with Hrrwi after Terbs of StrlTing, Ac. 5 217. Object clauses depending on verbs signifying to strive for, to care for, to effect, regularly take the future indicative after both primary and secondary tenses. The future optative may be used after secondary tenses, as the correlative of the future indicative, but commonly the indicative is retained on the principle explained in § 216, 2. (See § 202, 4.) E.g. 4»poi/Ttf' OTTOS fir]8fv dvd^tov Ttjs Tift^s ravnjs Trpa^fts, take heed \ that you do nothing unworthy of this honor. *Efir}xaPu>nfda orrois fjirjdfls TovTo yuanroiTo, we were planning that nobody should know this (here yi/oxrcrai would be more common). "Errpaaarov on-ms Tty j ^fj6fia n^fi, they were trying to effect (//iw), that some assistance J should come. • Note 1. Sometimes the present or aorist subjunctive or optative is used after these verbs, as in final clauses. In this case as also nriay be used. "Oiras &v or la av may be used before the subjunc- tive, never before the regular future indicative. Mij is sometimes used for otto)? p.{), generally with the subjunctive. Note 2. The future indicative with ottwp sometimes follows verbs of exhorting, entreating, command iny, and forbidding, which commonly take an infinitive of the object; as diaKeXfvovrai oiras TifKoprjafTai irdwas tovs toiovtovs, (hey exhort him to take vengeance on all such. Note 3. The construction of § 217 is not found in Homer; but such verbs as are mentioned in Note 2, and verbs signifying to con* li 262 SYNTAX. [§ 218. sider, to try, anpdaa€Tai &s Kf ve^rai] ^ovXevov orras 8x o-piara ytvoiTo. Note 4. Both oirm and oirais p^ are often used with the future indicative in exhortations or prohibitions, some imperative like QKovei or o-Kon-etre, take care, being understood. E.y. 'Ottcws oZv Haea-de &$ioi t^s tKevOfpia^, {see that you) prove yovr- seloes worthy of freedom. "Oiras pot pij ept-ls on eari ra bu>h«Ka b\i t^, see that you do not tell me that twelve is twice six. For a similar ellipsis of a verb oi fearing, see § 218, N. 2. C. Oljject Clauses vtrlth |>-^ after Verbs of Fenrlngt &c> § 218. After verbs denoting /o^ovpai pfj oii tovto y^vrjrai (vereor ut accidat), I fear that this may not hapjien (§ 215, N. 1). <^povTi(Kcrt enfTi6tvTo, bfSiores pfj dnoTprjOf itjaav, they no longer made attacks, fearing lest they should be cut off. 'Eripi, I deny), and not to the protasis as a whole ; as idv rt av koI "Apvtos ov i}Te edv re <^^rr, both if you and Anytus deny it and if you admit it. Classificatiox of Coxditional Sentences. § 220. Conditional sentences in Greek have six forms. The classification is based chiefly on the time to which the supposition refers, parti}' on what is implied with regard to the fulfilment of the condition, and partly on the distinction between particular and general suppositions explained in II. I ■J r 264 SYNTAX. • [§220. I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditions. The most obvious distinction of conditions is that of C«) present or past and {h) fviure. 4, I »! Present and Past Conditions. (a) In present or past conditions, tlie question of fulfil- ment has already been decided (in point of fact), but we may or may not wish to imply by our form of statement how this has been decided. In Greek (as in English or Latin) we may, therefore, state such a condition in one of two ways : — 1. "We may simply state a present or past condition, imply- ing nothing as to its fulfilment ; as if he is {now) doing this^ ct Tovro 7rpas t\fly, you ought to love him (but do not), or you ought to have loved him (but did not), is equivalent to you would love him, or would have loved him (c0(X(ts liv tovtop), if you did your duty (to dcovra). So c^^i' aoi tovto TToi^crai, you might have done this ; elK6s rjp ae tovto Trot^crat, you would properly have done this. The real apodosis is here always in the infinitive. "QifieXov with the infinitive in wishes is used in the same way; see § 251, 2, N, 1, and the examples. When the present infinitive is used, the construction refers io the present or to continued or repeated action in the past ; when the aorist is used, it refers to the past. Note 3. In Homer the imperfect indicative in this class of sentences (§ 222) always refers to the past. We occasionally find a present optative in Homer in the sense in which Attic writers use the imperfect indicative; and in a few passages even the aorist optative with xe in the place of the aorist indicativ« (see //. v. 311 and 388). f 224.] THE MOODS. 269 Iju lers are non- ases tlie loce I, is TOVTO you lys in ss of nd a use lorist 311 B Future Conditions. 1. Subjunctive in Protasis with Future Apodosis. § 223* When a supposed future case is stated dis- linctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go, or if Igo)^ the protasis takes the subjunctive with idv (Epic et xe). The apodosis takes the future indicative or some other form expressing future time. E.g. E2 fitv Ktv MfUfKaov *AXc^ai/dpor icaTane(})»]ji avroi tntiff 'E\tut}u tX«Tto Koi KTrinara ndvra, if Alexander shall slay Menelaus, then let him have Helen and all the goods himself. Horn. "Av ris dvOKrrfj- rai, ir(t,pa(r6fuBa xftpova-dai, if any one shall stand opposed to us, we shall try to overcome him. *Eav o5u ijjs vvv, rrtJre ecci oikoi; if there- fore you go now, lohen will you be at home? Remark. The older English forms if he shall go and if he go express the force of the Greek subjunctive; but the ordinary modern English uses if he goes even when the time is clearly future. Note 1. The future indicative with et is very often used for the subjunctive in conditions of this class, as a still more vivid form of expression; as « n^ KaOe^tis yKSxnrau, Hffrai trot KOKa, if you do not (shall not) restrain your tongue, you will have trouble. This common use of the future, in which it is merely a more vivid form than the subjunctive, must not be confounded with that of § 221, Note. Note 2. In Homer et (without ap or te) is often used with the subjunctive, apparently in the same sense as ei Kt or ^i/; as tl 8e vrf iB(\ri oXeVat, but if he shall wish to destroy our ship. The same use of et for edv is found occasionally even in Attic poetry. See § 239, N. 1. For the Homeric subjunctive with m in apodosis, see § 255, Note. 2. Optative in Protasis and Apodosis. § 224. When a supposed future case is stated in a less distinct and vivid form (as in English, if I should go)^ the protasis takes the optative with et, and the apodosis takes the optative with aV. E.g. Eti/ff (^opi/Toy ovK Af, ft TTpdtrfTois koK&s, yon would not be en- durable, if you should be in prosperity. Ov ttoXX^ &v dXoyta eii/, «t 270 SYNTAX. [§ 225. thofioiTo rbv Bavarov 6 toiovtos; would it not be a great absurdity^ if such a man should /ear death? oIkos d* avros, tl ^BoyyTju Xd/3ot, aa(f>iipoitv, which two men could not carry (if they should try). Hut ai> is sometimes omitted in the Attic poets after such expressions as ovk tltrO* oirms and OVK tariv oaris (see Aesch. Prom. 2U2, Eur. Ate. 52). Note 2. For the Homeric optative used like the past tenses of the indicative in conditions, see § 222, N. 3. r' II. Present and Past General Suppositions. § 225« In general suppositions, the apodosis expresses a cuatornary or repeated action or a general truth ^ and the protasis refers in a general way to any one of a class of acts. Here the protasis has tlie subjunctive with iuu after present tenses, and the optative with el after past tenses. The apodosis has the present or imperfect indicative, or some other form which implies repetilion. *Hu fyyvs eXdrj ddparos, ov8tis fiovXtrai dpfjaKetu, if death comes near^ no one is (ever) icilling to die. "Anas ^oyos, &v dirfj rh irpdyfiara, ndrtudu Tt 'ir ^n*pas \oyi(tTai, 1*07016$ ivnv^ if any one counts on two 0/ even more aays^ he is a fool. See § 233, N. 1. NoTK 2. Here, as mi ordinary protasis (§ 223, N. 2), ti is some- limes used with the subjunctive in poetry for tdv or u m . kary Ithe rois Ithe len- [)ast KOI Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentknces. £llip«ls and Substitution In Protasli or ApododU. ryy"^ § 226. 1 • Tlic protasis sometimes is not expressed in its fegular fbrni witli ct or liv, but is contained in a participle, or implied in an adverb or some other part of the sentence. When a participle represents the protasis, its tense is always that in which the verb itself would have stood in the indica- tive, subjunctive, or optative. The present (as usual) includes the imperfect. E.g. n&)f biKrjs oSarjs 6 Ztits ovk an-oXcoXcv; how is it that Zeus has not been i/ fiaet tai to rndure if you shouM dwelt amomf women (i.e. c{ fp(tv' SiappaytUu yap aVy they do not enf more than they can carry; for (f they did) they would hurst. "HytTf rrfv eipfivrjp o/iCi>r • ov yap ^p o ti &p fVoieiTf , you still kept the peace : for there was nothing which you could hare done (Jf you had not). \\< §^ \ f^ \ 272 SYNTAX [|22«. (b) Sometimes, however, the implied protasis is too indeft* nitc to be expressed (in Grceic or in English), as often when it is merely if he pleased^ if he eould^ if he should try^ if there should be an opportunity^ if we should consider^ if what is natural (or likely) should happen, &c. Sometimes it is even too vague to be really present in the mind. Thus arises the potential optative and indicative (with a.v)<, corresponding to the English forms with may, can, must, might, could, would, and should. E.g. / "itras av Tit cVtrt/ir/trrtr rolr tlpijuivou, perhaps some one might (or \mo}s, every one must have heard the sound. So riyff6ap(voi, for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you (Od. iv. 546); 6 $€a if Taj/avTt" ii/7rpdTToin"es ou fot/ietf' &v i if we are now unfortunate, how could we help being saved if we 18 'X \ 274 SYNTAX. [§ 228. should do the opposite? El oln-ot opd&s dnearrjaav, vfiels hv ov Xpfoiv apxoire, if these had a right to secede^ you cannot (could not) possibly hold your power rightfully. Note. Sometimes a protasis contains the adverb av, belonging not to et, but to the verb. Here the verb is also an apodosis at the same time; as et fi^ iroirjiraiT* hv toOto, if {it is true that) you would not do this (i.e. if it should he necessary), which differs entirely from (I fi^ TToifia-aiTf tovto, if you should not do this; d tovto iffxvpov rfv hv avT^ rcK/ii^ptoi/, if this would have been a strong proof for him (if he had had it). 2. The apodosis is sometiiaes introduced by the conjunc- tion Se, which cannot be translated in English. £.ff. Et 8e Ke fiff 8waaiv, cyo) Se k«v avros eXa/iat, but if they do not give her up, then I will take her myself. I) El after Terbs of Wondering, Ac. § 228* Some verbs expressing wonder^ contentment, dis- appointment, indignation, &c. take a protasis with ci where a causal sentence would seem more natural. So miror si in Latin. H.g. QavfM^oi 8' eyayyf el firibf\s vfxoiv fi^T evOvfiflrai firjT ofyyi^tTai, and I wonder that no one of you is eitler concerned or angry (lit. if no one of you is, &c., 1 wonder). See also § 248, 2, for the principle of indirect discourse applied to these sentences. Note. Such verbs are especially dav^a^&>, ala-xivofuu, dyairaa, and ayavaKTeoi. They sometimes take ort, becaust, and a causal sentence (§ 250). ITT. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. Kemark. The principles of construction of relative clauses include all temporal clauses. Those introduced by ?ws, vplv, and other particles mean- ing until, have special peculiarities, and are theref'^re treated separately (§§ 239, 240). § 229. The antecedent of a relative is either definite or indefinite. It is definite when tlie relative refers to a definite person or thing, or to some definite time, place, or manner ; it is indefinite when no such definite person, thing, time, place, or manner is referred to. Both definite § 232.] THE MOODS. 275 and indefinite antecedents may be either expressed or understood. E.g". (^Definite.) Tavra A fx<". °P9s, you see these things which I have ; or & e;^© opas' "Ort f^ovXtro ^XOtv, (once) when he wished, he came. (Indefinite.) Yldvra a &v ^ovKavTat fi^ovtrtu, the}/ wilt have evert/- Ihing which they may want ; or <4 hv /SovXuin-at t^ovcriv, they will hare whatever they may want. "Orav tXOrj, tovto irpd^u), when he shall come (or when he comes), I will do this. "Ore /SouXotro, tovto eTrpaaaeu, whenever he wished, he (always) did this. 'Qs av ('inco, iroiSyfXfv, as I shall direct, let us act. Deflnlte Antecedent. § 230. A relative as such has no effect on the mood of the following verb. A relative with a definite ante- cedent therefore may take the indicative (with ou for its negative) or any other construction which could occur in an independent sentence. E.g". TiV ftrff 6 x^P°s 8fjr' iv ^ ^e^r}Kap.(v ; i.e. the place in which, &C. *Eo)f coTt Kaipbs, dvTiXd^faat tSjv npaypLaruiv, (now) while there is an opportunity, &c. ToOto ovk firoirjafv, ivca tov 8fjftov erinrjafv av, he did not do this, in which he would have honored the people. So 6 firi ycVotro, may this not happen. IndeAnlte Antecedent. — Conditional Relative. W V^ § 231. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent has a conditional force, and is often called a protasis, the antecedent clause being called the apodosis. Such a relative is called a conditional relative. The negative particle is fi^. Note. Relative words (like d, if) take av before the subjunc- tive. (See §207, 2.) With orf, ^Trdrf, eVft, and fVetS.7, ^v forms oTav, oTTorni/, ei;dv or enrjv (Ionic tntdv), and (irfiBdv. "A with av may form av. In Homer we generally find oTt m, &c. (like d Kt, § 219, 2), or oTf, &c. alone (§ 234). § 232. The conditionil relative sentence has foitr forms (two of present and past, and two of fitture con- ditions) which correspond to the four forms of ordinary protasis (§§ 221-224). i: (j T(L\^ '-- <5 ri CLV I . i !' ! 276 SYNTAX. [§ 233. 1. Present or past condition simply stated (§ 221). E.g. "O Ti fiovXfTai doxro), / will gwe him whatever he (now) ivishes (like ft Ti jSouXfTot, doxro), if he (now) winhes ant/thing^ I will give it). *A fiT) oi8a, ov8e oiofiai (tdci/m, what I do not know, I do not even think I know (like ei nva firi otfia, if there are any things which I do not know). ^ 2. Present or past condition stated so as to imply that the condition is not. or was not fulfilled (^supposition con- trary to fact, § 222) . E.g. ^Afifi f/3ovXfTo dovvai, oiiK &v f8Tf, on condition that, which commonly takes the infinitive (§ 267), sometimes takes the future indicative; I as cVt TouTtB viTf^i r-^«, .. • . ' ^ § 238. The relative is sometimes equivalent to on, 6c- cause^ and a personal or demonstrative. The verb is in the indicative, as in ordinary causal sentences (§ 250). E.g. QavfjLaarov noids, os fjfiiv ovSeu 8iba>s, you do a strange thing in (jiving us nothing (like on ait ov8ev d(da>r). Ao^as dfiaBqs ctrat, or ... . (KfXevft having seemed unlearned, because he commanded, &c. Compare causal relative sentences in Latin. ^ Temporal Particles glgnifyliiK Until and Before that. ''■\ t X. \ § 239* 1. When ew?, eo-re, axP*' I^^XP''' ^^^ o(f)pat vntif^ refer to a definite point of past time, they take the indicative. U.g. N^X**" iToiKiv, emy €nrj\$ov fls iroTafiov, I swam on again, until 1 came into a river. Hom. TaOra iiroiovv, fitxpi (tkotos iyevtro, this they did until darkness came on. 2. These particles follow the construction of conditional relatives in the last three forms which correspond to or- dinary protasis, and in general suppositions. U.g. '*EvTto"xfy, fffT Ai/ r &p TovTta en biiK^yopriv, ton avrif .... dfrcduKa, *,*.•■' ^' S\ lU' r 280 SYNTAX. [§ 240. •: ^} ' I I / should (in that ca.^e) gladly have continued to talk with him until I had ffiven him hack, &c. (§ 232, 2; § 235, 2). *A 8' hv atrvvraKra .^, ai/ayKi; ravra del Trpdyfiara Trafif'xfiv, ews av xdtpav Xd^jj, whatever things are in disorder, these mu,st almii/s make truuhlc. until they are put in order (§ 233). ntpiffitvofitv (KuaroTe, tag dvui\deiri to 8f(Tfia>Ti^piou. we waited each day until the prison was opened (§ 233), or until the prison should he opened (Note 2) . Note 1. The omission of av after these particles and TrpjV, wlien the verb is in the subjunctive, is more common than it is after d or ordinary relatives (§ 223, N. 2), occurring sometimes in Attic prose; as iiixpt, TrXoOy yevfjrait Thuc. i. 137. Note 2. Clauses introduced by eias, &c. and by irplv frequently imply a purpose ; see the examples under 2. When these clauses depend upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of indirect discourse (§ 248, 3), like final clauses (§ 216, 2). See examples under § 248, 3. § 240. 1. When tt/oiV, before^ until, is not followed by the infinitive (see below, 2), it takes the indicative, sub- junctive, or optative, following the principles already stated for ew? (§ 239). E.g. OvK rjv akf^rjp! ovdep, irplv y iyat a(f>iaiv tbei^a, %c., tJiere was no relief, until I showed them, &c. (§ 239, 1). Ou xP'l i^^ fvBfvdt dneXBtlv, trpXv hv ha hUrfv, I must not leave this place until he is punished (§ 232, 3). OvK &u elSfiTjs irp\p tr(ipT)deiT)s, you would not know until you had (should have) tested it (§ 232, 4 ; § 235, 1). ^Expfjv pi) Tr/jore- pov avp^ovXfvfiv, irplv fjpds fbida^av, &c., they our/hi not to have given advice until they had instructed us, &c. (§ 232, 2; § 235, 2). 'Opaai Tovi irpfcr^tyrtpovs ov irpoaBfv dniovrai, irplv hv d(f>S>a-iv oi SpXavres, they see that the elders never go away until the authorities dismiss them. (§ 233). Ov8ap66fv d(f>ifa-av, irplv napaOdtv aiiToii apiarov, they dismissed them from no place before they had set a meal hef ore them (§233). *AirT)y6pfV€ prjbfva /SdXAfti/, nplv Kvpos tpirXtf- adtirj drjpav, he forbade any one to shoot until Cyrus should be sated with the hunt (§ 239, 2, N. 2; § 248, 3). For irpiv without ilv with the subjunctive, see § 239, N. 1. 2. In constructions in which irpiv (following the principle of Iws, § 239) might take the subjunctive or optative, these moods are generally used only when the leading verb is nega- tive or interrogative with an implied negative. It takes the indicative (when that would be allowed by the construction) after both negative and affirmative sentences, but chiefl}' after negatives. § 242.) THE MOODS. 281 When TrpiV does not take the indicative, subjunctive, or optative, it is followed by the infinitive (§ 274). In Homer, the infinitive is the form regularly used after 7i-piV, without regard to the leading sentence. Note. Tlpiu is by ellipsis for irpiv fj (priusquam), and is prob- ably for irpo-iov (irpo-iu), a comparative oi irp6, before. Ilpiv if, irporepov if, and npoadfp 7 may be used iii the same construc- tions as TTpiv itself. ms no sl^e(^ until npoTc hace 'A IV oi orities avToli vieal Tr'Krj- saleil iciple these nega- the 3tion) after IV. INDIRECT DISCOURSE. General Principles. § 241. 1. A direct quotation or question gives the exact words of the original speaker or writer. In an indirect quotation or question the original words conform to the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted. Thus the words ravra ^ov\op.ai may be quoted either directly, Xcyct Tts "raura ^ovXopai,'* OY indirectly, Xtyti ris on ravra ^ov- Xerat or 0jjo"t Tts ravra ^ovKeadai, some one says that he wishes for this. So ipardi " rt /SovXfi ;" he asks, " what do you want ? " But epara ri ^oiiXtrai, he asks him what he wants. 2. Indirect quotations may be introduced by on or a»?, that, or by the infinitive (as in the example given above) ; sometimes also by the participle. Note. "Ort, tJiat, occasionally introduces even a direct quota- tion; as in Anab. i. 6, 8. 3. Indirect questions follow the sam.e rule as indirect quotations in regard to their moods and tenses. Note. The term indirect discourse applies to all clauses (even single clauses in sentences of different construction) which indirectly express the words or thought of any person, even past thoughts of the speaker himself (§ 248). § 242. 1. Indirect quotations after 6ti and co? and indirect questions follow these general rules : — (r) After primary tenses, each verb retains both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse. n * < M 282 SYNTAX. [9 243. (ft) After secondary tenses, each indicative or sub- junctive of the direct discourse nuiy be either changed to the same tense of the optative or retained in its original 7iiood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the indica- tive implying non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 222) and all optatives are retained unchanged. Note. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in the optative, generally remain unchanged in all kinds of sentences. The aorist indicative likewise remains unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause of the direct discourse (§ 247) ; but when it belongs to the leading clause, it is changed to the optative like the primary tenses (§ 243). 2. When the quotation depends on a verb which takes the infinitive or participle, its leading verb is changed to the corresponding tense of the infinitive or participle {av being retained when there is one), and its dependent verbs follow the preceding rule. 3. "Av is never omitted with the indicative or optative in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form ; but av belonging to a relative word or particle in the direct form (§ 207, 2) is regularly dropped when the sub- junctive is changed to the optative in indirect discourse. Note. "Ai/ is never added in the indirect discourse when it was not used in the direct form. 4. The negative particle of the direct discourse is regularly retained in the indirect form. But the infini- tive and participle occasionally have fnfj where ov would be used in direct discourse (§ 283, 3). Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse. Indicative nnd Optative after 8ti and c&s, and In Indirect Questions. § 243. When the direct form is an indicative (with- out ai/), the principle of § 242, 1, gives the following rule 243.] THE MOODS. 283 rect for indirect quotations after 8tl or a>s" and for indirect questions : — After primary tenses the verb retains both its mood and its tense. After secondary tenses it is either changed to the same tense of the optative or retained in the original mood and tense. E.g". At'yft oTi ypa(j>€i, he says tfiat lie is writhif/ ; Xcyft on typat^xv, he says that he was writing . \iy(i on eypa^rf, he says that he wrote ; Xe^fi on yiypa(l>fp, he will say that he has written. 'Epuru n ^ov- Xoi/rat, he asks what they want; dyvoSt n iroifjaova-ip, I do not know what they will do. Einev on ypd^ot or on ypa(f)fi, he said that he was writing (he said ypaa^ I hare written). (Opt.) ^Eirttpa>fir)p airr^ beiKVVvai, on o^oito pkv tivai o-o0or, fti; 6' ov, I tried to show him that he believed himself to he wise, but was not so (i.e. oierai ftfv . . . tori 8 oC). 'Yirfiiratv art airos TOKft npd^ot, axfro, hinting that he wotdd himself attend to things there, he departed (he said avrbs raKtl irpd^a). "EXt^av 8n -ntpy^fif (rTepos, tie asked whether there icas any one wiser than I (i.e. eort ns aoiftu- Tf pos ;) • (Indic.) "EXcyoi* on eXiri^ovat at Ka\ ttjv iroXip e^fiv poi xdpiv, they said that they hoped you and the state would be grateful to me. *HKe 8^ dyyfXXav ns cas 'HXareta icaTftXijTrrat, some one was come with a report that Elatea had been taken (here the perfect optative might have been used). *A7roKpivafifvoi on irefi^ovai npta^eis, evdiis dntjXXa^au, having replied that they would send amha.s.mdors, they dismis.sed them at once. 'Htropovv n irore Xe'yct, 1 was uncertain what he meant (rt irort Xfyf*»)' ^E^ovXeiovro nv avrov KaraXfi^ovaiv, they were considering (the question) whom they should leace here. Note 1. The imperfect and pluperfect regularly remain un- changed in this construction after secondary tenses (§ 242, 1, N.). But occasionally the present optative represents the imperfect here ; as dittKpivavTo on oiibth iidprvs Trapeir], they replied that there had been no witness present (ov8eis irapriv), where the context makes it clear that irapfii] does not stand for irdpean. See § 203, N. 1. Note 2. In a few cases the Greek changes a present indicative to the imperfect, or a perfect to the pluperfect, in this construction, 284 SYNTAX. [§ 244. ' M ' i: instead of retaining it or changing it to the optative; as «V anopiqi ^aav, ivvoovfuvoi ort cVt rmr (iaaiXiats Ovpan ^aav^ npovStdrnKtirav 8i avTovs ol ^ap(iapoi, thei/ were in despair, cotisideriny tlial they were at the Kiiufs yaten, and that the barbarians had betrayed them. (See the whole passage, Anab. iii. 1, 2.) This is also the English usage. Subjunctive or Optative representluK the IiiterroKHtlve Sul^unctlve. § 244. In indirect questions, after a primary tense, an interrogative subjunctive (§ 256) retains its mood and tense ; after a secondary tense, it may be either changed to the same tense of the optative or retained in the sub- Kg. junctive. BovXf vopai oTTwff ae diroSpio, I am tryiny to think how I shall escape you {nunae diro8pw;). Ovk otS' c* Xpvvdvra rnvrtf 8a, I do not knoio whether J shall yice them to Chrysantas here. Ovk tx>'^ '^'^y "^'*'''^ deliberating whether they should burn them or dispose of them in some other way. Note 1. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the optative when the leading verb is in the optative, contrary to the general usage in indirect discourse (§ 201, N. 2); as ovk fii/ ?xois o rt finoii, you would not know what to say. NoTK 2. In these cases d (not tdv) is used for whether, before the subjunctive as well as the optative : see the second example. Indicative or Optative with ftv. § 245. An indicative or optative with av retains its mood and tense (with av) unchanged in indirect discourse after on or (1)5 and in indirect questions. E.g. Afyf I (ov fKey ep) oTi TovTo &v eyt'i/fTo, he says (or said) that this would hace happened ; eXeyev on ovtos 8iKaia>s &v diroddvoi, he .^aid that this man would justly die. 'Hparav d 8oUp &v to n-tora, they asked whether they tcoxdd give the pledges (jboiriTf av;). 247.] THE MOODS. 286 fire Ti InflnttlTe and Participle In Indirect Quotation* § 246. When the infinitive or participle is used in indirect discourse, its tense represents the tense of the finite verb in the direct form to which it corresponds, the present and perfect inchiding tl>e imperfect and phi per- fect. Each tense with di> can represent the correspond- ing' tenses of either indicative or optative with dv. E.ff. *\pprj(ii ToiiTovi, he sai/s that he detained them. "Ef^?; xpfjfta6' iaxrr^ Tovi Qr)^aio\)i iiti.KfKTipvx'vai, he said that the Thehuns had offered a reicurd for him. 'ETrayyeXAfTOi to. dUaia Tfotrfaeiv, he protnises to do what is right. See examples under § 203, and N. 1. "HyytiXt TovTovi i p)(op.(vovs, he announced that these were coming (oZtoi ip\ovTai)\ ayyiWa Tovrovi fXddvras, he announces that these came: ayytWti tovto yturfaofifvov, he announces that this wdl he done: fjyyti\( tovto yturjaofievov, he announced that this would he done: ^yyftXf T«ji5To yfyeurjfi(vov,he announced that this had been done (tovto y(ytur)Tai). See examples of av with infinitive and participle under § 211. Note. The infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse and its tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it depends on a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, and when also the thought, as originally conceired, would have been expressed bv some tense of the indicative (with or without au) or optative (witn oi/), and can therefore be transferred without change of tense to the infinitive. Thus in /SovXfrai f\dflv, he wishes to go, e\deiv repre- sents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative, and is not in indirect discourse. But in ), Note. Note 3. A dei^ndent optative of the direct form naturally remains unchanged in all indirect discourse. Note 4. Occasionally a dependent present or perfect indicative IS changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as iu the leading clause (§ 243, N. 2). I 248.] THE MOODS. 287 § 248. The principles of § 247 apply also to nnif dependent clause (in a sentence of any kind) which expresses indirectly the past thoughts of any person, even of the speaker himself. This applies cai)ccliilly to the following constructions : — 1. Clauses dci)endinjj; on an iuHnitivc after verbs of wish- ing^ commanding^ advising^ &c., which imply thought^ although the infinitive after them is not in indirect discourse (§ 24G, Note). 2. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied in the context (§ 226, 4, N. 1), or with the apodosis expressed in a verb like davfidCin (§ 228). 3. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention or purpose, especially those introduced by cws or irpCv after past tenses. 4. Even ordinary relative sentences, which would regularly take the indicative. This affects the construction of course only after past tenses. E.g. (1) 'E/3oyXoi/To fX^fji/, ft TovTo yei/oiTo, they wished to go if thin should happen. (Here t^ovXovro iXdtlu, tav tovto yfUTjrai might be used, expressing the form, if thin shall happen, in which the wish would be conceived. Here (Xdttv is not in indirect discourse. (§ 226, 4; § 246, N.) 'EkcXcvctci/ 6 ti Svuaivro Xo^oWar /icradia»c«tf, he commanded them to take what they could and pursue (he said o n hv hvvr^aBt, what you can, and therefore we mij^ht have had o rt hv hvvtavrai). Upotiirov avrois fiff pavfia)((iv Kopivdiois, fjv firf cVl KepKvpnv n-XcQxrt Koi peWaxriu arro^aivdv, they instructed them not to engage in a sea fight with Corinthians, unless these should be sailing against Corcyra and should be on the point of landing. (Here the direct forms are retained, for which €i pfj irXeoitv koi piWoiev might have been used.) (2) "fliKTf tpoi/, ft AXuxroivTo, they pitied them, in case they should he captured (the thought being d iXato-ovrai, which might have been retamed). ^vXokqs avpnfpnfi, onats (^vXarrotfi' airou, Koi d t6>i» dypioiv Tt (^avfit) Orjpiciv, he sends (sent) guards, to guard him and (io he ready) in case any of the sarnge beasts should appear (the thought being (dv ti (ftavy). TaXXa, fju (Ti vavpaxdv oi 'AOrfvaioi roX/x^o'aio-t, naptaKfvd^ovTo, they made the other preparations, (to be ready) in case the Athenians should still venture a naval battle. "Exuipov dyanwu ci 7"ty (daoi, I rejoiced, being content if Qny one would let it pass (the 51 ' 288 SYNTAX. [§ 249. r 11 thought was dyanio €i rtt eaa-ei). *Edavfia(tv el ris apyvpiov irpdr- T0I.TO-, he wondered that any one demanded money (Aen. Mem. i. 2, 7); but in the same book (i. 1, 13) we find eOavfia^e 8' a /*)) (f)avep6v avToie ecrrii/, he wondered that it was not plain. (3) ^novbas fnonjaavro eiwy dirayyeXdfiij ra "Kfxdfpra els AaKf- 8aifxoua, they made a truce, (to continue) tmtil ichal had been said should he reported at Sparta (then* thought was ews &u dnayytXdfj, which might have been retained). Ov yap 8»; a(f)fas dnifi 6 6(6s r^i diroi- Kirjs, 7rp\u 8fi diriKwvTai is avrffv At^vrju, i.e. until they should come, &c. (where dniKoivTo might have been used). Hdt. Mfvovres earaaau oimoTf nvpyos Tponou 6pp,iju ovk eire^dyot, they abused Pericles, because (as they said) being general he did not lead them out. Thuc. (This assigns the Athenians^ reason for abus- ing him, and does not show the historian's opinion.) VI. EXPRESSION OF A WISH. § 251. 1. When a wish refers to the future, it is ex- pressed by the optativv., either with or without eWe or el yap (Horn, at^e, at yap)-, O that, O if. The negative is /A»i, which can stand alone with the optative. E.g'. At yap €po\ Toaarjvde (9fol bvvap.iv rrapaBtlev, that t\e Gods would clothe me loith so much strength. Horn. To pev vvv ravra Trprjaaois rdnep ev xfpa\v exfis, for the present may you continue to do these things which you have now in han.l. Hdt. Eide i\os fjpiv yivoio, that you may become our friend. MrjKeTi C^V ^y*^' '"^^ ^ "^ longer live. Tedvairjv, ^rc poi, priKtri ravra ptXoi, may 1 die when I shall no longer care for these things (§ 235, 1). For the distinction between the present and aorist see § 202, 1. Note 1. In poetry ft alone is somet.mes used with the optative in wishes; as et pot yevoiro (\)66yyos iv ^pax^oa-iv, that 1 might find a voice in my arms. Eur. Note 2. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes prefix ins (not translatable) to the optative in wishes ; as is dnoXoiro koI aXkos ort? rotavrd ye ptCfih likewise may any other perish who may do the like. Note 3. In poetry, especially in Homer, the optative alone sometimes expresses a concession or permission, sometimes a command or exhortation ; as avris^Apyeirju 'E\€VT)v Meve'Xaos ayoiro, Menelaus may take back Argice Helen. 'Veftvuirfs, S) Hlpoir'^^ KOKrave BtWepo- (f)6vrriv, either die, or kill Belierophonten. Here, and in the optative aloue in wishes, we probiibly have au original independent use of the optative; while all the forms of wishes introduced hy fWf, tl ydp, or et are elliptical protases, as i' seen by the use of et, and by the force of the tenses, which is the same as it is in protasis. 19 1" ■■ ill ; 4: I 290 SYNTAX. [§ 252. 2. When a wish refers to the present or the past, and it is implied that its object is not or was not attained, it is expressed by a serondary tense of the indicative witli eWe or el yap, which here cannot be omitted. The imper- fect and aorist are distinguished here as in protasis (§222). jE.-. EiOe TovTo e fro let, that he iiHive doing thin, or O that he had done this. Etde TOVTO eiroir)e\ov of 6e\\ov, are used with the infinitive in wishes, with the same meaning as the secondary tenses of the indicative ; as w(f}€\e tovto Troifjfrai, would that he had done this. For the distinction made by the different tenses of the infinitive, see § 222, N. 2. XoTE 2. "fi^eXov is negatived by firj (not ov), and it may even be preceded by eide, et yap, or coy; as /uij ttot cd^eXof Xtiretv t^i» 2Kvpov, that I had never left Scyros; et yap w^eXoi/ oiot re etvat, that they were able, &c. ; so la (o(f>t\€s oXiadai. As this is really an apodosis, like edfi, &c., with the infinitive (§ 222, N. 2), the use of tide and ct yap with it is an anomaly: firj should perhaps be con- structed with the infinitive. '! I "\ i 4f VII. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, EXHORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS. § 252. The imperative expresses a command, exhorta- tion, or entreaty ; as Xeye, .speak thou ; (fyevye, begone ! i\6era>, let him come ; x^ipovroiv, let them rejoice. Note. A combination of a command and a question is found in such phrases asoto-^' 6 hpatrov; do — dost thou know what? § 253. The first person of the subjunctive (generally plural^ is used in exhortations. Its negative is /m^. E.g. "lot lit V, let us go ; idufAfv, let us see; fi^ tovto Tro^w/iti', let m not do this. § 256.] THE MOODS. 291 Note. Both subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by ay€ (ayert), (fyept, or tdi, come I These words are used without regard to the number or person of the verb which follows; as aye uifivfTe ndvres- § 254. In prohibitions, in the second and third per- sons, the present imperaHve or the aorisl subjunctive is used with fit} and its compounds. E.g'. Mt] TTotet TovTo, do not do this (Jiahitnally) , or do not go on doinr/ f/iis : fiff noi^trijs tovto, (simply) do not do this. Mtf koto, tovs vofiovs 8iKd(rrjTf nfj ^orfdrjariTe ra nenovdoTi Bfiva- fif) (i/opKeiTf, do not judge according '.> the laws : do not help him who has suffered outrages ; do not abide by your oaths. The two forms have merely the usual distinction between the present and aorist (§ 202, 1). NoTK. The third person of the aorist imperative sometimes occurs in prohibitions ; the second person very rarely. E.ff. VIII. SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE (IN HOMER). — INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. — SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH ov iirj. § 255, In Homer, the subjunctive in independent sen- tences sometimes has the force of a future indicative . E.^. Oi) yap TTfi) Toiovi Xhov dvipas, ovSe iBcufjiai, for I never yet saw nor shall I ever see such men. Kai nore Ttj eiTrija-iv, and one will (or wiay) some time say. Note. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take nv or Ke to form an apodosis. See § 209, 2, with the example. § 256. The tiisb person of the subjunctive, and some- times the third, may be used in questions of doubt, where a person asks himself or another ivhat he is to do. It i? negatived by firj. It is often introduced by /SovXei or fiovXecrOe (in poetry 0eXeL^ or ^eXere). E.g. EtTTft) Tavra; shall I say this? or /3oi3Xc( fiTrw ravra; do you wish that I should say this? Tlol rpdiranai; noi tt opt v6(o; whither shall I turn? tvhither shall I go? Tlov 8f) (iovKti KaBi^ufitvoi dvayvconfv; where now icilt thou that we sit down and read? Tt Ttr tlvai tovto (f)fi; what shall any one (i.e. /) say this is? So in Tt nddio; what will become of me? what harm will it do me? (lit. what shall I undergo ?) ii j ■ . ■' ! 1^ I !. 292 SYNTAX. [§ 257. § 257. The subjunctive and future indicative are used with the double negative ou fit] in the sense of the future indicative with ou, but with more emphasis. E.g. Ou fit) TriBrfTai, he ivill not obey. OiIt€ yap ytyi/frm, oCre yiyovfv, ov8e ovu fiq yevrjrai, for there is not, nor has there been, nor will there ever be, &c. Ov nor e^ tfiov yt fif) iradrjs rode, you never shall suffer this at my hands. OH toi nfjTTOTf af . . . aKovra tis a^et, no one shall ever take you ayainsl your will, &c. The double negative here seems to have merely the force of emphasis, and the subjunctive is a relic of the old usage (§ 255). The anrist subjunctive is generally used in these expressions. Note. This construction in the second person sometimes ex- presses a strong prohibition ; as ov n^ Kara^fjafi, do not come down (lit. you shall not come down) ; ov fxi) o-»ca»/^i/s, do not mock.^ The future indicative and the aorist subjunctive are both allowed in this sense. The imperative force is to be explained as in the future used imperatively (§ 200, N. 8). THE INFINITIVE. § 258. The infinitive has the force of a neuter verbal noun, and may take the neuter article in all its cases. It may at the same time, like a verb, have a subject or ob- ject ; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives. § 259. The infinitive as nominative may be the sub- ject of a finite verb, especially of an impersonal verb (§ 134, N. 2) or of cVti; or it may be a predicate (§ 136). As accusative it may be the subject of another infinitive. E.g. ^vve^Tj avra eXdelv, it happened to him to go; t^fjv fitveiu, it was possible to remain; ^8v ttoWovs f'xdpovs txfi-v; is it pleasant to have many enemies? (f)rj(riv e^tlvai tovtois fifvtiv, he says it is possible for these to remain (^eWti/ being subject of t^flvui). To yvwvai itnoTr)- firfu XafStlu eoTiu, to learn is to acquire knowicdf/e. Tovto iari to ahi- K(iv, this is to commit injustice. To yap ddvarov SeStci/at ov8fv uXXo €OTii/ ^ 8oK«iv ao(f)6u elvai pf] ovra, for to fear death (the fear of death) is nothing else than to seem to be wise without being so. Note. These infinitives usually stand without the article; but whenever it is desired to make the infinitive more prominent as a noun (see the last examples), the article can be added. See § 260, 1, N. 2. 260.] THE INFINITIVE. 293 ivas have hi for ridTij- o ahi- iiKKo ir of but as a 260, § 260. The infinitive without the article may be the object of a verb. It generally has the force of an object accusative, sometimes that of a cognate accusative, and sometimes that of an object genitive. 1. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse may follow- any verb whose action naturall}- implies another action as its object. Such verbs are in general the same in Greek as in English, and others must be learned by practice. U.g. BovXfrat f\0elv, he wishes to go: 0oi\fTai roiis TroXtras noXefiiKovs ftvai, he wishes the citizetis to he warlike ; napaivovfifu (toi fifpciv, we advise you to remain : TrpotiXtro iroXefi^aai, he preferred to make war; KfXevct at fifj anf\6tip, he commands you not to depart ; d^tov- aiv (ipxfiv, they claim the right to rule ; a^iovrai davflv, he is thought to deserve to die ; btofiai v/xtoi/ avyyvwfirjv pot f\fiVy I ask you to have consideration for me. So KioKvfi at (iahi^tiv, he prevents you from marching ; ovirfvKe dovXfveiv, he is not horn to he a slave: dra/SaX- XeraiTovTO Trotrti/, he postpones doing this ; Kivdvveiifi daveiVy he is in danger of death. Note 1. The tenses here used are chiefly the present and aorist, and these do not differ in their time (§ 202, 1, 2, and 3). In this construction the infinitive has no more reference to time than any other verbal noun would have, but the meaning of tlie verb gene- rally gives it a reference to the future ; as in d^iovrai davdv (above) Bavfiu expresses time only so far as davdrov would do so in its place. Its negative is fii] (§ 283, 3). Note 2. When the infinitive is the object of a verb which does not com- monly take this construction, it generally has the article ; as t6 TeKevrrjaai irdvTuv i) TTfTrpwuivrj Kar^Kpivev, Fate adjudged death to all. Occasionally even the ordinary verbs included in § 260, 1 (as verbs of wishing) take the infinitive with t6 as an object accusative, chieHy in poetry ; as t6 8pdv ovk r)dk\r)(jav, t/tey were not willing to act. 2. The object infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 203) fDllows a verb imi)lying thought or the expression of thought., ov some equivalent phrase. Here each tense of the infinitive corre- sponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood. See § 246, with the examples and Note. Note 1. Of the three common verbs meaning to say, — (a) y with the indicative or optative ; (c) Xcyo) allows either construction, but in the active voice it gen- erally takes on or itt. ,' I rp 294 SYNTAX. [§ 261. Note 2. A relative clause depending on an infinitive in indirect discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation ; ;is eVctS^ 8f yfPfvp dpfjxavoi, I am incapable of actiny in defiance of the citizens. 2. Any adjective or adverb may take the infinitive without the article as an accusative of specification (§160,1). E.g. Qeapa alaxpov opdv, a siyht disyraceful to behold ; \oyoi vpivxprj- aiputTOToi dKovtrai, words most useful for you to hear ; tu ;(aXf7ra>TaTa fvpelv, the thinys hardest to find ; rroXiTtia xaKtnf) avCr}", a yovern- inent hard to Hoe under. KoXXtora (adv.) ibflv, in a manner most deliyhtful to behold. Remark. This infinitive is generally active rather than passive; as TTpdypa xaXfTToi' woieiv, a thiny hard to do, rather than xa^^^^'J" TTOKto-^ai, hard to be done. Note. Nouns and even verbs may take the infinitive on this principle; as 6avpa i84aBai, a wonder to behold. '/.purTtveaKf fxd- X*Xv- apa ffh and a sixth form, tipyfi trt to p.^ tovto irot- tlv and eipy« o-e to tovto iroiflv, added to those given in § 263, 1, as equivalents of the English he prevents you from doing this. Note. Here, as above (1, Note) p.^ ov is used when the leading verb is negatived ; as oibfv yap avTO) toUt eirapKea ft to fii) ov ire- r)V(vai t/ tipo fipiv their is the )ress jose to ied the city to them to ffvard. Ai yvi/uiKcr nie^v (pov(rai, the women bringing them (something) to drink. Note. In Homer, where wo-rf is seldom used in its sense of so m (§ 266, N. 3), tiie simple infinitive may express a result ; as ris acjxof i^vvfr)K€ fidxfi\ovs &)0f- Xfii/, having too little power to aid his friends. (b) Sometimes wore is omitted ; as voarjpa p.(i(p^ ij (fttpeiv, a dis- ease too great to bear (§ 261, 2, with Rem.). Note 5. Verbs, adjectives, and nouns which commonly take the simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with toare or ws ; as ylfT](f)t(rdf.i€voi &aT€ dp,vv€iv, hainng voted to defend them; TrtiOova-iu Sxrrt (nixdpfjaai, they persuade them to male an attempt; povipa>Tfpoi Atrre fiadftv, winter in learning : oktyoi its eyKpaTtU fivai, too fete to have the power; dvayKij Stare Kivtivvevtiv,a necessity of incurring risk (§261, 1). § 267* The infinitive follows e^' e5 or e^' wre, on con- dition that, sometimes /or the purpose of. E.g. I 298 SYNTAX. l§ 268. Iff 'fit ■ *A «j»Tf firiKtri i\o«'iu, we rti' lease »/ou, hut on l/iis ' ^rt ^vyypa^at vonovs, chosen for the purpose of comp'diuf) laws. For the future indicative after these w«rds, see § 236, N. 2. § 268. The infinitive may stand absolutely in paren- thetical phrases, generally with w? or oaov. E.g. Th AfXra etrrl vfuxrrl, i)S Xuy<^ dnfiv, dvaTr«(f)t)v6s, the Delta has recently, so to speak', inutlc its appearance. So its tnos tlirtiv, so to speak; a>r arvvrofuag (or ipovaa, a citi/ cxccllinff in heantff : dvf)i) KaXiiis iTcrtaibtvpivoi, a man ir/io hnx Itcfn wcl/ ('(hiratctl (or u well- eilucatcU man); ol npta-iifis ol vno ^iKinnov 7r(p({)6*vTfs, the umbas- sadors who were sent hy Philip; uvbpts oi tovto noifiaoures, men who are to do this, 2. The participle preceded by the article may be used substantively, like any other adjective. It is then equiva- lent to he who or those who with a finite verb. E.g. ol ntir€i(rp,tpoi, those who have been convinced • napa toIs apinrnit doKovo-ic f'l/at, nmonff those who seem to he best . n rfju yvuipr]v ravrrfv €iirv, he did this secretly ; dnfBripd Tpirfpap^iav, he was absent on duty as trierarch. ArfiCopevoi (aaiv, they live by plunder. 3. Purpose or intention; generally expressed b}' the future participle. E.g. •277.) THK TARTICIPLE. 301 I §276. H'tive, slated is pre- il Go(h jl : dvt]f) ■ ft H't'lt- ■ ambas- nen who e used »quiva- dpinroti V TaVTTfV HS ova I 's (nnonij nces of which Kff. : ravra Vivaai ant three chiding / speak 'lich, &c. yresshuj vTfs are often connected (in position and in sense) with the temporal participle, while grammatically they qualify the verb of the sentence; as dfta KaraXa^ovrts irpofrfKiaro au enavaaTO, Necho slopped while diyyiny (jhe canal). Hdt. (li) The participle denoting opposition is often strengthened by Kaintp or «cai, even (poetic also Kai . . . irtp), in negative sen- tences oiSe or /i;;8«, with or without ntp; or by koi ravra, and that too : as firoiKrtipo} vtv, Kaiirtp ovra 8v(Tp,(v^, f pll'f '"'"i even though he is an enemy. Ovk hv irpo8oir)v, oidt nep Ttpdaaav KaKut^, I would not be faithless, even thouyh I am in a wretched stale. Note 2. (a) The participles denoting cause, or purpose are often preceded by ds iroXt- Ufiu, they found fault with Pericles, on the ground that he had per- tiuaded them to the war; dyavaKrovaiu cop fieyaXoiv riviav ditfartptj- (Mfpoi, they are indignant, because (as they say) they have been de- prived of some great blessings. (b) The participle denoting cause is often emphasized by or*, olov, or Ota, as, inasinuch as: but these particles have no such force as its (above); as are irais av, Tjbtro, inasmuch as he was a child f he was pleased. 302 SYNTAX. [§ 278. iil Note 3. 'Oo-Trcp, as, like, with the participle often expresses a comparison; as utawip rj8n 7ra>u or irpaypATtav, is under- stood ; as oi noXtpioi, irpoaiouToav, reox ptu rja-vxa^ov, but the enemy, as they (men before mentioned) came on, kept . OVTW I, e); as Aidy was i accma- Id be in and ov those iclio nd ? So npoari' (it havipfi d : eiprf- '.; anoppr)- ,and with iless they e mean- jsemblea ra - 1 . In this sense the participle is used with the subject of verbs signifying to begin ^ to continue ^ to endure^ to persevere, to cease^ to repent^ to be weary o/*, to be pleased^ displeased^ or ashamed ; and with the object of verbs signifying to cause to cease. E.g. "Ap^ofiai Xc'yo)!', / will begin to speak ; oi/K dve^Gp.ni C&v, T shall not endure to live, tovto txau diarrXcI, he continues to hai'e thi^i (4, Note); aitciprjKarptxoiv, I am fired of running ; rots ipatTotai \aip(ii dnoKpivofievos, 1 delight to anstjer questioners; fXeyxo- Hfvoi IJxBouTo, they were displeased a! being tested ; ala-xvveTai tovto Xeyoii/, he is ashamed to say thin {which he says)', Tr^v with a partici- ple generally has its common force ; as ttjv irpoiKa e^f * Xa/3a)v, he has received and hus the dowry (not simply he has taken it). 2. The participle ma}' be used with the object of verbs signifying to perceive (in an}' (^a}'), to Jind, or to represent, denoting an act or state in which the object is perceived, found, or represented. £.g. 'Opo) povp€vovs, he has represetlted those in Hades as suffering punishment. Note. This must not be confounded with indirect discourse, in which 6poi> ae KpvvToma would mean / see that you are hiding ; \ aKova ae Xcyovra, / hear that you say (dKova> taking the accusative). See § 280. 3. With verbs signifying to overlook or see, in the sense of allow, — irepio pdoi and iffiopdai, with TrcpiciSoi/ and firelSov, sometimes f78ov, — the participle is used in the sense of the object infinitive (§ 260, I), the present and aorist participle.^ 304 SYNTAX. l§ 280. !' 4 differing merely as tlie present and aorist infinitives would differ in similar constructions (§ 202, 1). E.g. Mi) 7repu8a>n€u vlipiaOelfrav rffv Aaicedatfioi/a Koi KaTapovrf- delaav, let us not ■ allow Lacedaemon to be insulted and despised. MjJ ^' Ihflv Bavovd* in' aor©!/, not to see me killed by citizens (Eur.). Ufpubtiv TTiv yriv Tprjdeia-au, to allotu the land to be ravaged (Thuc. ii. 18). (But in ii. 20, we find irfpubtlv Tfivy?,vTfir]dfjvai, referring to the same thing.) See § 204, N. 2. 4. With the following verbs the participle contains the lead- ing idea of the expression: KavOdvwy escape the notice of; Tvyxdv(t), happen ; 6dv(o, anticipate. The aorist participle here does not denote past time in itself, but coincides in time with tho verb (§ 204, N. 2). Kg. \riv, he happened to come (not to haoe come) Just at that time. ''Erf)OT)aav roiis Heptras dtrtKopLevoi, they came before the Persians (Hdt.). Ou8' apa KipKtfu «\d6vT€i iXfidofifv, nor did we come without Circe''s knowing it (Horn.). See examples under § 204, N. 2. The perfect participle here has its ordinary force. Note. The participle with StareXfw, continue (§ 279, 1), oixop.ai,be gone (§ 277, 2), dapi(€vy(av, he has taken /light (§ 200, N. 3); ov dafiiCeis Kara^aivav eiy tou Uupaia, you don't come down to the Peiraeus very often. § 280. With many verbs the participle stands in indirect discourse, each tense representing the corre- sponding tense of the indicative or optative. Such verb? are chiefly those signifying to see., to know, to hear or learn, to remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to acknowledge, and dyyeA.A.0), to announce. E.g. 'OpS) 8e p fpyov 8fiv6u f ^( ipyaa- pevrjv. hut I see that I have done a dreadful deed : IJKoviTf Kvpov (v KikiKia ovra. he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (el. § 279, 2, with N.);'oTav kXi'.v rj^our' 'Opeon^j/, when she hears that Orestes tvill come: olba ovfifv fniarupfvos, I know that I understand nothing; ovk f/Staav airov rtOvr) koto, they did not know that he was dead; (ireiSav ypwaiv diriarovpfvoi, ajXer theyjind out that they are distrusted; pffivTjpai eXdnv, J re- l§ 280. would :f>povrf- ed. M^ (Eur.), rhuc. ii. eferring he Icad- }tice of; articiple [jides in know it. TV\€ KOTO, le) just at be/ore the >r did we es under 279, 1), uent, and partici- i», he haa ntipaia, § 281.] VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 305 meinher that I went ; fiifivrffiai avrov eXtfoira, / remember that he went; 8fi^(o tovtov e^Bpov ovra, I shall shoto that this man is an enemy (pass. oUtos deixd^o-erai exOpos av)', abr^ Kvpou arpartv- ovra rrpwTos ^yyetXo, 1 Jirst announced to him that Cyrus was on his march. See § 246 and examples ; and § 211 for examples of the participle with 3v representing botli indicative and optative with av. Note 1. Arj\6s el pi and auep6s el pi take the participle in indirect discourse, where we use an impersonal construction; as SijXos ^v olopevos, &c., it was evident that he thought y &c. (like bij- Xov ^v oTi oioiTo). Note 2. With a-vvoiSa or a- vyy lyvoi a- Kv, I know that I learned this). Note 4. 'Qs may be used before this participle in the sense ex- plained in § 277, N. 2. The genitive absolute with m is sometimes found where we should expect the participle to agree with the object of the verb; as a>s noXepov ovtos nap* vpStv anayyiKd ; shall I announce from you that there is war? (lit. assuming that there is war, shall I announce it from you ?) where we might have Troktpov Svra with less emphasis, and in closer connection with the verb. \ lands in corre- \v, to hear \to prove ^ Viave done \hat Cyrus *Opiarr}U, IpfUOS, I loTo, they VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -tc'o? AND -riov. § 281* The verbal in -reo XptfOTeov eariv fjfxiu), we must go to war. (See Madvig's Latin Gram- ma:-, § 421.) INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. ii j § 282. 1 . All interrogative pronouns, pronominal adjec- tives, and adverbs can be used in both direct and indirect questions. The relative oo-rts and most other relative words may be used in indirect questions. (See § 149.) 2. The principal direct interrogative particles are rj and apa. These imply nothing as to the answer expected ; but apa ov implies that an affirmative, apa (jltj that a negative, answer is expected. Ov and /u.iy alone are oftcii used with the same force as with 3.pa. So fjidv (for fir) ovv). E.g. *H (TxrXj) e} iravTes Xoiev, h« was deliberating whether they should send some or should all go. NEGATIVES. § 283. The Greek has two negative adverbs, ov and fi^. "What is said of each of these applies generally to its com- pounds, — ovSiiq^ ovSi, ovT€j &C., and /jI»;8cis, /MiySc, firJTC^ &C. . 1 . Ou is used with the indicative and optative in all iiide- pendent sentences (except wishes^ which are generally elliptical protases, § 251, 1, N. 3) ; also in indirect discourse after oti and a)s, and in causal sentences. Note. In indirect questions, introduced by «, tvhether, fifj can be used as well as ov ; as ^ovXofiai epiaOai el paBatv tis ti km pepvijpivoi pfj oidev, I want to ask whether one who has learnt n tiling and remem- bers it does not know it? Also, in the second pi»rt of an indirect alternative question (§ 282, 5), both ov and pfj are allowed; as o-ko- iriapev « irpeirei ^ oi, let us look and see whether it is becoming or not; el 8e d\Ti6fs^pfi, nfipaaopai padeiv, but I will try to learn whether it is true or not. 308 SYNTAX. [§283 i.iJ '. 2. My is used with the subjunctive and imperative in all constructions (except the Homeric subjunctive, § 255, which has the force of a future indicative). M^ is used in all Jinal and ob/ect clauses after iva, otto)?, &c. ; except after /ni;, lest^ which takes ov. It is used in all conditional sentences, in relative sentences with an indefinite antecedent (§ 231) and the corresponding temporal sentences after cws, TrptV, &c. (§§ 239, 240), in relative sentences expressing a purpose (§ 236), and in all expressions of a ivish with both indicative and optative (§251). 3. M»y is used with the infinitive in all constructions, both with and without Ihe article, except that of indirect discourse. The infinitive in indirect discourse regularly has ou, to retain the negative of the direct discourse ; but some exceptions occur. 4. When a participle expresses a condition (§ 277, 4) it takes /AT/ ; so when it is equivalent to a relative clause with an indefinite antecedent^ as ol fxrj fiovXo/xevoi, any who do not wish. (See, however, § 277, N. 3.) Otherwise it takes ov. In indirect discourse it sometimes, like the infinitive, takes fiij irregularly (3). 5. Adjectives follow the same principle with participles, taking ^iri onlj' when they do not refer to definite persons or things (i. e. when the}'^ can be expressed by a relative clause with an indefinite antecedent) ; as o' ^^ ayaOoX TroXirai, {any) citizens who are not good, but ol ovk ayaOoi iroAiTat means special citizens who are not good. 6. When verbs which contain a negative idea (as those of hindering, forbidding, denying, concealing, and distrusting) are followed by the infinitive, the negative fiy can be added to the infinitive to strengthen the negation. Such a negative cannot be translated in English, and can always be omitted in Greek. For examples see § 263. [§283 [§ 288. NEGATIVES. 309 in all svUich [Jinal ^, lest^ es, in ) and /, &c. \urpose icative 3, both xourse. ^ retain eptions 7, 4) it se with do not ikes ov. takes iiciples, sons or clause {any) means those of ing) are dded to legative omitted 7. When an infinitive would regularly be negaiivcd by fi-q, — either in the ordinary way (3) or to strengthen a pre^ ceding negation (6) , — if the verb on which it depends has a negative, it generally takes the double negative firj ov. Thus SiKaiov i(TTi fi-q tovtov aop/xio)i/a ov;( opa, nor does he not see Phormio (i. e. he sees Phormio well enough). But if they belong to different words, each is independent of the other ; as ov 8t' a-rrecpiav ye ov rjo-ei *' ** ^<^^ surely through inexperience that you will deny that you have anything to say; ov povov ov TreiOovTai, they not only do not obey; el prj Upo^evov ovx vTTcSc^avTo, if they had not refused to receive Proxenus {had not not received him). Note. An interrogative ov (§ 282, 2), belonging to the whole sentence, is not counted as a negative in these cases; as ovk em TOV 8rip,ov . . . OVK T)de\T)aav avoTparevfiv ; were they not unwill- ing, &c.y 9. But when a negative is followed by a compound negative (or by several compound negatives) in the same clause, the 310 SYNTAX. [§ 283. negation is strengthened; as avev tovtov ovBeU th ovhkv ovSci/os av vfiuiv ovSeVoTc yivovro a^ios, if it were not for this, no one of you would ever come to he of any value for any* *-hing. For the double negative ov fi^, see § 257. ml ■-■•:?' PART V. VERSIFICATION. ICTUS. — RHYTHM AND METRE. S 284. 1. Every verse is composed of portions called feet. Thus we have four feet in each of tliese verses : — ^r\ao\^v irpoi | Toiis r](ro, — fiev irpoq, — tovs o-rpa, — TT/yous. In Greek poetry a foot consists of a regular combination of syllables of a certain length ; and the place of the ictus here depends on the quantity (i. e. the length or shortness) of the syllables which compose the foot, the ictus naturally falling upon a long s^dlable (§ 285, 3). The regu- ^ The term A/oo-is {raising) and ^eVis {placing), as they were used by nearly all the Greek writers on Rhythm, referred to the raising and putting clown of the foot in marching, dancing, or beating time, so that dtlais de- noted the \Mxrt of the foot on which the ictus fell, and Apais the lighter part. Most of the Roman writers, however, inverted this use, and referred arsis to the raising of the voice and thesis to the lowering of the voice in reading. The prevailing modern use of these terms unfortunately foUowa the Roman writers. c M i 312 VERSIFICATION. [§ 285. lar alternation of long and short syllables in successive feet makes the verse metrical, i.e. measured in its time. The rhythm of a Greek verse thus depends closely on its metre, i.e. on the measure or quantity of its syllables. Note. The fundamental distinction between ancient and most modern poetry is simnly this, that in modern poetry the verse con- sists of a regular comoination of accented and unaccented syllables, while in ancient poetrv it consists of a regular combination of long and short syllables. I'lie rhythm is the one essential requisite in the external form of all poetry, ancient and modern; but in ancient poetry, rhythm depends on metre and not at all on accent ; in mod- ern poetry it depnds on accent, and the quantity of the syllables Ci.e. the metre) is generally no more regarded than it is in prose. Both are equally rhythmical; but the ancient is 'a\»o metrical, and its metre is the basis of its rhythm. What is called metre in English poetry is strictly only rhytlnn.^ It is to a great extent uncertain how the Greeks distinguished or reconciled the stress of voice which constituted the ictus and the raising of tone which constituted the word-accent. Any combina- tion of the two is now very difficult, and for most persons impos- sible. In reading Greek poetry we usually mark the Greek ictus by our accent, which is its modern representative, and neglect the word-accent or make it subordinate to the ictus. Care should al- ways be taken in reading to distinguish the word^^ not the/ce/. FEET. § 285. 1. The unit of measure in Greek verse is the short syllable (^), which has the value of ^ or an | note in music. This is called a time or mora. The long syllable ( — ) hab ' wice the length of a short one, and has the value of a ^ note or J in music. * The change from metrical to accentual rhythm can best be seen in modem Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of the ancient lan- guage are retained, the rhythm is generally acoentual and the metre is no more regarded than it is in English poetry. These are the first two verses in a translation of the Odyssey : — ^dXXc T^v I &vSpa, 0«|4, rhv iro|XvTpoirov, | 8«ms to|o-oi5to«s Toirovs 8i|{jX6c, irop|6i^(ras ttjs | Tpotas t^v | {v8o|ov | irdXiv. The original verses are : — "AvSpa |iot I Ivvcirc, | Movcra, irojXvrpoirov, | os (idXa | iroXX^ nXd-yx^* llircl TpoC|T|s Ulpbv irro\t|c9pov {jircple (-) e of a i )e seen in lent ian- ■tre is no wo verses JUS pi force of )f modem what we 2. Feet are distinguished according to the number of times which they contain. The most common feet arc the follow- ing : — (a) 0/ Three Timen (in | lime). Trochee Iambus Tribrach yj axv€ AeycTC (h) Of Four Times {in ^ time). Dactyl _ w w (^aiVcTc Anapaest w w _. (rifiofiai Spondee ehrtov (c) Of Five Times (in | time). w — \j Kj \^ Cretic Paeon primus Paeon quartus Bacchius Antibacchius w ^ KJ KJ \J \J \J W W (d) Of Six Times (in J time). Ionic a majore v^ v^ Ionic a minore Choriambus Molossus (rare) Ditrochee KJ ^ KJ \J KJ KJ Diiambus w _.. w — For the dochmius, w . J/ /J J // J J J ^J J /J^J^ ^J J J J/ J J J^/ //J J J .^ / J J J J fjLOva-ofiavTi^ J # J ^ d7raXAay>J m J S J - I w _, see § 302. ), in which the arsis and thesis are ot equal length, and which toini the erjuat class {yivos taov). The more complicated relations of arsis and thesis in the feet of Ave and hix (iwes are not considered here. 3. The ictus falls naturally on a long syllable. The first syllabic of the trochee and the dactyl, and the last syllable of tiie iambus and the anapaest, therefore, form the arsis, the remainder of the foot being the thesis ; as jl n^, -i. w wi \j ^ —' NoTK 1. When a long syllable in the arsis is resolved into two short syllables (§ 286, 1), the ictus properly belongs on the two taken together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first. Thus a tribrach used for a trochee (_i_ w) w vl/ v^ m? one used for an iambus (^ _/.) is vj ^ w So a spondee used for a dactyl is J ; one used for an anapaest is '_- Likewise a dactyl used for an anapaest (_^^ for for ^ v^ _) is _ vl> v^. The only use of the tribrach and the chief use of the spondee are to repre- sent other feet which have their arsis naturally marked by a long syllable. Note 2. Although the principal ictus (which alone has been considered) falls on the arsis, there is generally also a subordinate ictus on the thesis or on some syllable of the thesis. (See § 299.) 4. A verse is sometimes introduced by an incomplete foot, consisting of one or two syllables equivalent in time to the thesis of the fundamental foot of the verse. This is called an miacrusis {avdKpova-L^ ^ stands for a trochee _ ^ or an iamlius ^ —. On the other hand, two short syllables are often con- tracted into one long sylHble ; as when a spondee stands § 287.] RHYTHMICAL SERIES. 315 for a dactyl _ y^ ,^ or nii anapaest w w Tlic mark for a long resolved into two short is "^s^ ; tlmt for two short con- tracted into one long is oo. 2. A long syllable in the arsis may be prolonged so as to have the measure of three or even four short syllables. A single syllable may thus represent a whole foot, including both arsis and thesis : this is called syncope. A syllable which includes three times is marked t_ ( Jj ; one which includes four times is marked l_i ( I ). 3. On the other hand, a long syllable may in certain cases be shortened so as to take the place of a short syllable in verse. Such a syllabic is called irrational^ and is marked >. The foot in which it occurs is also called irrational (ttoi;? aAoyos). Thus, in uAA' air i^Ofrnv {j_ ^ j_ >), the apparent spondee which takes the place of the second trochee is called an irrational trochee; in hovvai SiKr/v (> j.. ^ jl) that which takes the place of the first iambus is called an irrational iambus. 4. A similar shortening occurs in the so-called cyclic dac- tyl (marked -v^ w) and cyclic anapaest (marked ^ v^_), which have the time of only three short syllables instead of four. The cyclic dactyl takes the place of a trochee _ ^^, especially in logaoedic verses (§ 300). The cjclic anapaest takes the place of an iambus ^ _, and is found especially in the iam- bic trimeter of comedy (§ 293, 4). 5. The last syllable of every verse is common, and may be considered long or short to suit the metre, without regard to its usual quantity. It is called syllaha anceps. But the con- tinuous systems described in § 298 allow this only at the end of the last verse. RHYTHMICAL SERIES. — VERSE. — CATALEXIS. — PAUSE. § 287. 1 . A rhythmical series is a continuous succession of feet of the same measure. A verse ma}' consist of one buch series, or of several such united. Thus the verse TToXAa Ttt Sfiva, KovBiv ui/||6^/9u)7rov Suvortpov irikti •'i>: I'* ■ ' h ' I ^■ I. f ^1 ' 316 VERSIFICATION. [§ 288. consists of a First Glyconic (§ 300, 4), -o* w I _ w I _ w 1 1_ (at the end of a verse, -y^Kj\ —\j\ — <.) It allows the last syllable {syllaha anceps) to be either long or short (§ 286, 5). (c.y It allows hiatus (§8) before a vowel beginning the next verse. 3. A verse which has an unfinished foot at the close is called catahctic (KaTaAr/i^TtKos, stopped short), A complete verse is called acatalectic. 4. The time of the omitted syllable or syllables in a cata- lectic verse is filled by a pause. A pause of one time^ equiva- lent to a short syllable (^) , is marked A (for A, the initial of Xct/m/iia); a pause of two times (_) is marked A. CAESURA AND DIAERESIS. § 288i 1. Caesura (i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs when- ever a word ends before a foot is finished ; as in three cases in the following verse : — TToAAas I 8* lOLfxov^) . This caesura is a pause within a foot introduced to make the verse more melo- dious or to aid in its recital, regularly occurring at the end of a rhythmical series which does not end the verse (§ 287, 1). in some verses its place is fixed : see § 293, 4 ; § 295, 4. 2. When the end of a word coincides with the end of a foot, tlie double division is called diaeresis (Siaipeo-t?, division); as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis be- [§ 288. _ w I I— )wed by ,rt forms avOpiayrov , distinct arsis of i). See iistinctly be either ining the > close is complete in a cata- e, equiva- j initial of § 289.] VERSES. 317 urs whcn- iree cases iV. with the Bsura is a aore melo- the end of §287,1). 95, 4. I of a foot, division); aeresis be- comes important only when it coincides with a natural pause in the verse produced by the ending of a rliythniic series ; as in the trochaic tetrameter (§ 291, 2) and the dactylic pen- tameter (§ 295, 5). Notp:. Tlie follownig verse of Aristophanes (Clouds, 519), in trochaic (8) rhytlnn, shows the irrational long (§ 286, 3) in the first, second, and sixth feet; the cyclic dactyl (§ 280, i) in the third; syncope (§ 280, 2) in the fourth; and at the end catalexis and pause (§ 287, 6 and 4) with syllaba anceps (§ 280, 5): — ToKfjldrj vfj I Tou Ai6\vi\\aov rov \ (Kdpe \^avTa \ pe. _. >|_>|-^v^|l_II_^ |_>|_vy|_A A rhythmical series (§ 287, 1) ends with the penult of tiioveaov. This is a loyaoedic verse, called Eupolidean (§ 300, 7) VERSES. § 289. 1. Verses are called Trochaic^ Iambic, Dactylic^ &c., from their fundamental foot. 2. In most kinds of verse, a monometer consists of one foot, a dimeter of two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, or hexameter of three, four, five, or six feet. But in tro- chaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, which are measured by dipodies (i. e. pairs of feet), a monometer consists of one di- pody (or two feet), a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of six feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet. In most kinds of verse, there are catatectic as well as acatalectic forms (§ 287, 3). 3. Rhythms arc divided into rising and falling rhythms. In rising rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the iam- bus and anapaest ; in falling rhythms the tliesis follows the arsis, as in the trochee and the dactyl. Note. It will be seen that prefixing an anacrusis (§ 285, 4) of the same time as the thesis to a falling rhythm will change it to a rising rhythm ; as _ w | _ w with w prefixed becomes w _ I w — \\y'i and _ w v^ I _ V-' «^ I _ with w kj prefixed becomes WW — Iv/w |ww_. Many modern writers treat all iambic and anapaestic verses as trochaic and dactylic with anacrusis; as w : _ w I _ w |_ w for w _ | w _ | w _ I w A ; and ww:_ww ( _ww|_ww|_A tor \^\^ — Iww Iww Iww • 1*1 Km i ■ =^* 318 VERSIFICATION. r§ 291. 4. In Greek poetrj', the same kincl of verse raaj- be repeated without interriipLion, us in the lieroic I'exameter (§ 295, 4) and the iambic trimeter of the drama (§ 293, 4). Secondly, simi- lar verses may be combined into distichs (§ 295, 'i) or into snnpk ^u stems (§ 298). Thirdly, in lyric poetry, verses may be combined into strophes of complex rhythmical and metrical structure, with antistrophes corresponding to them in form. In the following sections, the principal rhythms found in Greek poetry are described. iWl 5. *■ i ■ ' i w'' 1 HHI 1 ; 'i '; ' 1 I ' \ 1 ;! 1! • i 1 / ' i t 1, TROCHAIC RHYTHMS. § 290, Trochaic verses are measured by dipodies (§ 289, 2). The irrational trochee ^ > (§ 286, 3) in the form of a spondee can stand in the second place of each trochaic dipody ; so that the dipody has the form, _»_ ^^ j_ xj' In trochaic verse, therefore, the tribrach j, ^ ^ can stand in any place for tlie trochee j_ ^ ; and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all the even places, that is, in the second part of ever}' dipody. An apparent anapaest (^ ^ > for _i. >) is sometimes used as the equivalent of the irrational trochee. The cyclic dac- tyl -\> w (§ 286, 4) sometimes stands for the trochee in proper names in both parts of the dipody. § 291. The following are the most common trochaic verses : — 1. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) : — KJ Ky A 2. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipod}', where the first rhythmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See § 293, 3. & (Toc^curalrot dtdrai, \\ Bfiipo top vovv \ Trpoaxtre. \^ \J \ W >"ll Vy > I KJ A [§ 291. repeated ., 4) and ily, simi- I or into I'ses may metrical form, found in § 293.] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 319 In English poetry each series is generally' made a separate verse ; as Tell iiie not in niouniful numbers, Life j« but Jin empty dream. 3. The Ithypballic, which is a trochaic tripody^ not allow- ing irrational feet, — fiTjiroT €KTaKeirj. \j \ \^ \ For trochaic syateins see § 298, Note. w es (§ 289, form of a Ic dipody ; liaic verse, ce for the and in all ry dipody. imes used yclic dac- trochee in )n trochaic w — w w_ A ill feet and led. There .nd dipody, , 1). See IAMBIC RHYTHMS. § 292. Iambic verses are measured by dipodies (§ 289, 2). The irrational iambus > _ (§ 286, 3) in the form of a spon- dee can stand in theirs/ place of each iambic dipody, so that the dipod}' has the form ^ j_ <^ _l. In iambic verse, there- fore, the tribrach ^ ^ ,^ can stand in any place for the iam- bus ^ j_ and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all the odd places, that is, in ihejii'st part of every dipody. An apparent dactyl (> v^ w lor > j_) is sometimes used as tlie equivalent of the irrational iambus ; and the cyclic anapaest ^ ^— (§ 286, 4) is used for the iambus in both parts of the dipody, especially by the Attic comedians (§ 293, 4). § 293. The following are the most common iambic verses : — 1. The monomcter, — TrpOS TTjV 6f6v. > v^ 2. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic), — (rfKci (re ttjs \ fi/SouXiaj. > \y ]> w Koi TOV \6yOV I TOP fJTT(0. > \^ \ \J KJ A 3. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipody, where the first rhythmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See § 291, 2. finfp TOV iiubp I inrtp^akel, || koi /x^ -yeXaT . | d(f)\fia(ii. i N if 1 ¥■' ■ I ';. ' f , if ^ 'J a^ I "'!ll I in "[; pi ■ ■■ ill ! I 320 VERSIFICATION. [§ 293. In English poetiy each series is generally made a separate verse ; as A captain bold | of Halifax Who lived in conn | try quarters. 4. The TRIMETER ACATALECTic, the iMOst common of all iambic verses, in which most of the dialogue of the Attic drama is composed. It never allows any substitution in the last foot. With this exception it may have the tribrach in any place. The irrational iambus > _ in the form of a spon- dee can stand in the first place of ever}' dipody. The traye- dians allow the (apparent) dactyl > 6 v^ only in the first and third places, and the cyclic anapaest only in the first place ; but in proper names they allow the anapaest in every place except the last. The comedians allow the dactyl > vi/ x^ in all the odd places, and the cyclic anapaest in every place except the last (§ 292). The most common caesura is that after the thesis of the third foot. The following scheme shows the tragic and the comic iam- bic trimeter compared, — the forms peculiar to comedy being enclosed in [ ]. >_- ^ KJ \J \J \J •^1 \J \J \J~ >_ >_ \J \J \J \y \J \J \J^KJ "> \J KJ [> \J \J] [w w— ] [v^ \j — ] [sj \.r- ] In general the tragedians avoid the feet of three syllables, even where they are allowed. The following are examples of both the tragic and the comic fonii : — (Tragic) -j^Oovos fifu «is \ TrjXovpbv ^|«cofi6i/ TreSoi', iKtdiju e'ff ot\fiou, affarou fls \ ipjjfiiav, "H^atoTf, aoi \ 8e ^PV M*^**" I fVtoroXdy. (Comic) 2> Z(v ^acriXtv • | to xPW** '"**'' I vvKrau otrov antpavTov ov\bi'!To6^ W^P" I y*»^0"i/ ovvtKa. The Iambic Tiimeter appears in English as the Alexan- drine, which is seldom used except at the end of a stanza • — And hope to mdr|it Heaven by niak|ing Earth a Hell. For iambic si/stems, see § 298. [§ 293. epaiate ^ of all le Attic n in the braeh in ' a spon- lie trage- first and it place ; iry place w in all e except after the aniic iam- 2dy being § 295.] • DACTYLIC DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. RHYTHMS. 321 § 294. The only regular substitute for the dactyl spondee, which arises by contraction of the two short bles of the dactyl (_L — from jl w v) • is the sylla- syllables, examples ic Alexan- stanzs — 11. § 295. The following are the most common dactylic verses : — 1. The dimeter, — /LlVOToSolKOS hoyMS fio'ipa dt|o)/c» 2. The trimeter (acatalecLic and catalectic), — ddv/xejX^ K(\a\drj(roi' wwl ww| Tiapdevoi I 6fi^po^6\pot _. wwl wwl A 3. The tetrameter (acatalectic and catalectic), — \^ \j \ WW — w w I ovpavi\ouTf 6f\oig d<0\pfjfiaTa. eX^er' t\7Toylt6fif\vai 8vva\p.iv. wwl — ww| I WW wwl wv.*! wwl A 4. The Heroic Hexameter, the Homeric verse. It always has a spondee in the last place, often in the first four places, seldom in the fifth (the verse being then called spondaic). There is commonly a caesura in the third foot, either after the arsis or (rather more frequently) dividing the thesis. There is sometimes a caesura after the arsis of the fourth foot, and rarely one in the thesis. The caesura after the arsis is called masculine^ that in the thesis feminine or trochaic, A diaeresis after the fourth foot, common in bucolic poetry, is called bucolic. For examples see the Iliad and Odyssey. 5. The Elegiac Distich consists of an heroic hexameter followed by the so-called Elegiac pentameter. This last verse consists really of two dactjlic trimeters with syncope (§ 286, 2) in the last measure ; as, — llaXAuf ^h\6r]val\r) || xflpas v\ir(pB(v c|x^*' w w I |l_jII ww| wwli_j At the end of the pentameter verse we can place _ ^ (§ 287, 4) in i)lace of i_'. The verse probably arose from u im k 322 VERSIFICATION. [§ 297. repetition of the first penthemim {Tr€v6-rjfit-fi€p€^, Jive half feet) of tlie hexameter. But syllaha anceps (§ 286, 5) and hiatus (§8) are not allowed after the first trimeter, but onl}' at the end of the verse (§ 287, 2). The last two complete feet arc always dactyls. A diaeresis (§ 288, 2) divides the two parts of the verse. The following is an Elegiac Distich : — Ti'y fie /3t|or, rt 8e | TtfmvbVf a\vtv xpv(re\ris * A(f}po\8iTrjs ; Tf 6vai\rjv ore | poi \\ firjKtri | ravra fif\\oi. V^V^I ^^^w'l WV-*! — W^^l \^ KJ \ I WwIl-jII KJ KJ \ N^\>>'|l_J Note. In the Homeric verse and in Lyric poetry, a long vowel or a diphthong is often shortened at the end of a word when the next word begins with a vowel. E.y. S> TTOTTOt, I ^ fioKa I Bf) iifTt\fiov\(v\TTi\ov *Apyti(ou x'-XiovavTiiu T^, the tribrach w ^ ^ , the cyclic dactyl -v w, and the syncopated trochee l_. ''■ i. ■ I II inliimii HJK \$ ' .; illl!! :. Ill fllj 324 VERSIFICATION. [§ 300. 2. The first foot of a logaoedic verse often allows special freedom, and it is then called a basis. The basis may be a trochee or an irrational trochee — . >, and sometimes a tribrach w *^ w. An apparent iambus (probably with ictus w — ) sometimes occurs (see § 300, 7) ; and rarely even two short syllables, ^^ w, stand for a basis in lyric poetry. Great license is permitted in using different^ forms of basir', even h\ vorses which otherwise correspond pucisuly (§ 289, i), ., >ix ^ ^00, 7 Abtsis is marked x. Wheo a vi i^e has more than one rhytlnnical series (§ 28/, 1), ' ich .s*^'-'es may begin with a basis (see § 300, 7). Sometimes an aiv?; j.usis (§ 285, 4) precedes a logaoedic vorse, either with or without a following basis. § 300. The following are some of the most inii)orlant logaoedic verses : — 1. Adonic: (rvnfia\oi ttrao. —\jkj\ v./ This is the final verse of the Sapphic stanza (6.) 2. First Pherecralic : firranxiKoKn Qfj^ais. Catal. "^evSeiri noKiXoiS' 3. Second Pherecratic : irai^os hxxr^opov arav Catal. f\6i(TT | — vy «^ | \j \ A (c) 0ura fiavra iravaayia. — \j \ kj \ -y^ w | — A 5. Three Alcaics, which form the Alcaic stanza: — (a) d(rvv(Trffii Ta>u duefuou OTOunP' •u : ,^\y I _^ I — \y w I — w I _ A (a) TO fieu yap fvdev KVfia KvKlubrrat w:_\vl->|-w^l_w|_A (b) TO 8* fvdtv afififs B* dv t6 fitatrov w: wl w| wl w (c) vai v> Three Sapphics and an Adonic (1) form the Sapphic stanza. /. Eupoiidean: 2) '< |a)/if |vot, itare — > w *^ vy .> pa> II 7rp6sv\fids c|X«vde|po>r. — > w — > v^ _ A See § 288, Note. Note. Nearly all the verses here described as logaoedic liave been called choriambic (§ 301, 1). If we consider the dactyl here as _v^v^ and not as -\j\j, it forms _ww with the follow- ing long syllable ; and thus, by the division hi' m.. common, the Pherecratics become (1) — \jkj — | v^ v^ f^ud ^w | v^ , (2) o I v-/ w I *^ and ^ | v . _; the Glycouics become (1) _ v v^ _ I »^ _ ^-' — » (2) . / j . v^ w _ K^ _, (3) w I w i .._ \^ w ; and the " apphic becomes _,^|_>^|_vw'^_iv^_w, with the Ar. -^nic _ »^ w | w • w I _^ ^wl_A \j \j _A 1-A 1-A RHYTHMS WITH FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES. § 901. Some of the more important rhythms with feet of five or six times (§ 285, 2, c, c?) are the following : — 1. Choriambic rhythms, with the ehoriambus _ ^ ^ _ as the fundamental foot : — itaiha p.fv avjrar Trdatv ai/|ra Briiiva. \J KJ I \J \J I V/W Note. Choriambic verses of this class are rare. Most so-c I'-^d choriambic verses are here explained as logaoedic (§ 300, Nott^ 2. Ionic rhythms, with the ionic a minore w w as the fundamental foot, admitting also the equivalent w v^ uj (§286,2): — ireirepaKtv | fi€V o ir€po-c|7rToXis ^817 /Sao-iAcio^ I arparo's eU dv\TL7ropov -yeiJTOva ^w/jav *A$afxavTi8(K "EXAas. \j \j — \j \y — .|>-'V-» If 1:1 ■tti 320 VERSIFICATION. [§ 302. A ditrochee _ v^ _ w often takes the place of two long syl- lables and the two following shorts. This is called anaddsis (tti^uKAao-is, breaking np) : — Tts o Kpaiirv^ j TToSi Trr}8rf\fiaTo^ cuttcItoCs avdaa-tov; ^ ^ I \j Kj I \j \j w I \y 3. Cretic rhythms, in which paeons occur by resolution of long syllables (_ '^ w w or w ^ ^ _ for _ v^ _) : — oi/K dva\ (fxpoifiav ^oaKuv, irpompylras axrj, \ riva 6poels "Koyov; \j \j I v^w^ — w— . w I v>» — ^^ vy W — \ KJ > vy v./ _ \\^— (for > I w _) \y v^ v^' vy vy I v^ (for \^ I v^ ) w I > _ (for \y I w _) [§ 302. naddaia iition of e funda- APPENDIX. hiefl}' ill n a foot nineteen idmitting common examples CATALOGUE OF VERBS. -) -) ) ^'A^ APPENDIX. CATALOGUE OF VEXIBS. Note. — This catalogue professes to contain only those verbs in ordinary use in classic Greek which have any such peculiarities as to present diffi- culties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur in some Ibrni before Aristotle ; and no forms are given which are not found in writ- ers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except sometimes the present indicative of a verb which is classic in other tenses, and occasionally a form which is given for completeness and marked as Inter. Tenses which are not used by Attic writers, in either prose or poetry, or which occur only in lyrical parts of the drama, are enclosed in [ ], except occasionally tlu' present indicative of a verb which is Attic in other tenses. The simple stem of each verb, when this does not appear in the present, i.e. unless the verb is of the first class (§ 108, I,), is given in ( ) directly after the present indicative. The class of each verb (§ 108) is given in ( ) at the end, unless it belongs to the first class, when it is left without a number. Verbs in /xt of the second class (in vixi, § 108, v. 4) are marked (II.) ; other verbs in m are marked (I.). A few Epic irregularities are not noticed in the classification. The modification of the stem made by adding « in certain tenses (§ 109, 8) is marked by prefixing (i-) to the first form in which this occurs. A hyphen prefixed to a form (as - jfw/ca) indicates that it occurs only in com- position. This is omitted, however, if the simple form occurs even in later Greek ; and it is not always inserted when the occurrence of cognate forms, or any other reason, makes it probable that the simple form was in good use. It would be extremely difficult to point out an example of every tense of even the best English verbs in a writer of established authority within a fixed period. The imperfect or pluperfect is generally omitted when the present or perfect \ given. A. [(Aa-), injure, infatiiate, stem, with aor. dacro, dffa; a. p. ddffdriv ; pr mid. darat, aor. dxtadfirfv, erred. Epic] "Aya^kai, admire, [Ep. fut. aydaofiai, rare,] r)ydadr)v, ■qyaadi^ri^. (I.) ^'Ayy^XXw (d77eX-), announce, d77e\w [d77cX^w], ifyyeiXa, iiyy€\Ka, iiyye\- fiai, iiyyeXdifv, fut. p. d77e\^^(70/tai ; a. m. -^yeiXd/iriv. 8e<.;ond aorista with X are rare or doubtful. (4.) ^m liiUii 330 APPENDIX. f'i .( 'AytCfm (ayep-), collect, a. Ifyeipa ; [Ep. plpf. p. Ayify^paTO ; i'. p. -ifyipO-nv, a. in. {yyeipdfirii') (Tw-ayeiparo, 2 a. m. dy ephfiriv with part, dy pofievoi.] (4.) "A7VVH1 (Fay-), in comp. also dyviju, break, d^u), fa^a, [rarely Epic ^|a], 2 IX -fdya [Ion. ^i?7aj, 2 a. p. e(i77>i/ [Ep. dyrjv], (II.) "•^'A-yw, /mrf, fi^w, ^^o (rare), ^x" (in comp.), ^fMi, -fix^Vt dxOt^ffonai ; 2 a. ifyayov, ■^ayd/j.rjv ; fut. m. d^ofiai (as pass.), [a. m. dfd/uijj', (Ion.).] [(d8e-), 6e aa^erf, stem with aor. opt. dS-qaeuv, pf. part. dSjjKtis. Epic] [(ac-), rest, stem with aor. dccra, S,aa. Epic] 'Ac(8tt>, sing, delau and dtlaofxai, ijeiaa. In Attic prose, ^Sm, qaofiai (9, ^pa, fjpKa, fjpimi, ■^p0T]v ; dpoOfiai, ^pd/njv. Poetic 2 a. m. dpdfjirjv. (4. ) ['Aijiii (de-)> blow, inf. d^vat, d^/xerat, part, dets ; imp. di^v. £Iid. dtjfiai, imp. dijjitr;!'. Poetic, chiefly Epic] (I.) AlS^ofiat, poet, atdofiai, respect, alSeffo/Mi, rjSeff/iai, ri8ia0it)v, ifScffdix'qv. [Horn. imi>erat. atSeio]. § 109, 2. AlWu, praise, aiviaia [otV^ffw], gwcra [b''''?<''ci]i -17''ffo» -WVl^^^t W^^l^* § 109, 1, N. 2. [A(vv|u&i, /a^e, imp. atviixtiv. Epic] (II.) ^ Aip^w (eX-), ^a^e, aip-qffw, VprjKa, rjprffiai [Hdt. dpalpriKU, dpalprjfiai], 'gp^drfv, a'lpedi^aofMi ; fut. pf. -gpTfiaofMi (rare); 2 a. erXop, ^\w, &c.; ei\6fjLr)v, ?\w- /uat, &c. (8.) Atpci), Attic i)rose form of delpu. See de/pw. Al, be grievei (only in pr. part, dx^wv, dxeiJwi'), and &xo|Jiai, be grieved ; fut. dKax'^cio, aor. dKdxf^tra ; p. p. dKdxw^i- (dKrfx^SaTai), dKdxV'^Oo-i, dKax^/Mfos oi" df?' X^fifvos ; 2 aor. ifKaxov, dicax^P-V- See dxwfjLai and i!(xoMa(- Epic] f'AKaxi Jtji', ijScffd/ii?!'. ^ff06jtir)»'. Pves. (tyymtivo'i Ep.,] liai. (4.) griewi (only in t. dKox^ *°*'- XT/juci/os or oLkt)- l^at. Epic] in use.] jf. dKOUKo], 2 pf. 'A\do)jiai, wander, [pf. dXdXij/xot (as pres.), w. inf. dXdXTjo-^at, pt. dXoX'^- fxfvos], a. dX-qdriv. Chiefly poetic. 'AX8a£vii> (dXSai'-), nourish, [Ep. 2 aor. ^XSai'OJ'.] Pres. also dXS^ffKw. Poetic. (4.) 'AXc^ffMo (ttXt^-), anoint, dXel^w, ^Xct^o, -aX^Xt^a (or -ei^a), dXT7\i/iyuo(, ijl\dr]v (rare). Mid. f. dXti^o- /xat, a. "^Xeixf/dfirfv, (2.) 'A\^$<>> (dXe/c-), ward off, fut. [Ep. dXt^ijo-w] dXe^Tjcrojuat or dX^^ofxai ; aor. iJXf^T/ffL. (-^Xe^a, rare), riXe^dfiTiv ; [Ep. 2 a. dXaX/coi' for dX-oXtTc-oi'.] (8.) ['AX^ofiai, avoid. Epic ; aor. ^Xed/ATjj'.] 'AXcvw, avert, d\e6. (6.) 'AXiTa£vo|Lai (dXtr-, dXirau-), [with Ep. pres. act. dXiTpafvca], sin ; 2 aor. 17X1x01', [dXXThfxr)v, pf. part. dXtTTj/nevos, sinning, Ep.]. Poetic, chiefly Epic (4. 5.) ^'AXXdo-o-w (dXXd7-), change, dXXd^u, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. ijKXd'yy^v. (4.) "AXXofJiai (dX-), leaiK aXoO/xat, ijXdnriP ; 2 a. rjXdfitjv (rare). [Epic 2 a, iXao, iXro, dX/xfi-oi, by syncope. (4.) ['AXvKrd^o) aiid oXvkt^w, lie excited, imp. dXiJKTa^ov Hdt., pf. dXaXiKTrj/xai Horn. Ionic] 'AXvcTKW (dX"/c-), «t'oi(i, dXi'^w [and aXt'^o/tai], ^Xu^a (rarely -afir)p). Poetic. 'AXiffKO) is for dXvK-ffKOJ (§108, vi. x. 3). (6.) 'AX«^dv6> (dX0-), ^)irf, acquire, [Ejuc 2 aor. vJX^oi/.] (5.) ^ 'Aiiaprdvtt (d/xapT-), err, (€-) a/xapr-^aofiai, TjfidprrjKa, Tindprritiai, i)fxapTT^- d-qv ; 2 aor. ifnapTov [Ep. irf^/3/30Toi/]. (5.) 'A^pX£ and e4iir-(^^oaai ] 2 a. riixiri- irXaK(i)i' or airXoKwi'. Poetic. (6.) ["Aiiirvwe, dixwivd-qv, dfAVvvro, all Epic : see dyairp^u.'] \*A|KJv« (d/ui't'-), i^^ard ojf ; fut. dniivu, dfivvoOfiai ; aor. •^M'i'»'«> ■fifivvd/J-V' (4-) 1 .: .1 M w -i' if . in 332 APPENDIX. *A^i-yvoii-€vvv|xi (see euvvfju), clothe, int. [Ep. a/x^i^ffw] Att. -a/i0iw ; v/u^/cffo, ■flixtpieafxai ; dfulHeaofjuii, afK^ieffd/iriv (poet.). § 105, 1, N. 3. (II.) 'Afu^i dpwxOe, 2 plpf. i7J'ui7eo. Ionic and poetic. ('Air-avpdtii), takeaway, not found in present; imp. dvpiipup (as aor.); a. m. dirr}vpdfxi]p (?); aor. part. dvo6pas, dwovpdfJLepoi. Poetic. 'Aira4>((rK (otTra^-), deceive, 2 a. rjiraipop [2 a. m. opt. aTro^oi'/tTji']. Po- etic. (6.) *Air(x8d/o(uu (fX^")» ^^ hated, («-) oirex-^'^co/iot, aT?jx^'?M<»* ; 2 a. dTrrix&6- A"?". (5.) ['Airdcpcre, si^Jcp^ off, subj. dtroipar), opt. -' lers. Epic] 'Ap^OTKu (ope-), please, apiau), ijpeaa, -qpiaBiiv ; dpitrofiai, ^petrdfirju. § 109, 1, N. 2. (6.) ['Api)|Uvos, oppressed, pf. pass. part. Epic] 'ApK^, assist, dpKiffu, ifpKeaa. § 109, 1, N. 2. 'Ap|mJtt» [Ion. ap|i.(i(r(r«], poet. ap|,.o£ii> (dp/xoS-), ./?<, apfidtrw, Hpnova {trvp- dpfxo^a Pind.), ^pjxoKa, i}pfji.o and o^vrta, draw tcatcr, aor. ifpvaa, -^pvadfirfv, ripvOrjv [-^pvffOrfv, Ion.]. ^ "Apx», ftej/i?i, nt/e, dp^w, ^p^a, ^pxa, ^py/iai (mid.), iipx^Wi apx^-nffofiai ; dp^Ofiai, rjp^dp.i]v. ['AtitoXXw (aVirdX-), tend; aor. driTrjXa. Epic and Lyric] (4.) Avalvoi {avoLP-) or avalvw ; fiit. avdvd ; aor. r}{j7)pa, rjvdpdrjp or audi'^ryj', avapdrjaofxai ; fut. ni. ai^afoOMOi (as pass.). Augment tju- or av- (§ 103, Note). Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (4.) Ai^dvtD or aiS| (av^), increase, (€-| av^riffw, au^r/cro/xat, rj&^rfcra, ryfl^TjKo, rjC^rffiai, v^^V^Vt av^v^rid (d«/>d5-), /ccZ, handle, aor. i^^ttcra ; used by Hdt. for a0dw or d0dw.] (4.) *A<)>-£t)|jli, ^c^ (JO, impf. a'^iTji' or t^^iiji/ (§105, 1, N. 3); fut. atpriau, &c. See iwi, § 127. ['A^vwrn {dtpvy-), draiv, pour, dv^u}. Epic] See a0i)w. (4.) ['A()>v, draw, dv(Ta, ri ^f' troubled, impf. dxi'i^M'?''- Poetic. (II.) Also Epic pres. &xo|Jiai.] See dKaxtJ^w* f"Aa>, satiate, dau, daa ; 2 aor. suhj. ^wfxep (or edp-ep), inf. dfiepai, to sati- ate one's self. Mid. (dofxai) darac as fut. ; f. dcrofiai, a. dadpLifP. Epic] )f. ^/AjLittt ; a. p. Inf. dprtixepai, to Llpf. dpi7pei»' and I, yiWrnj^. Att. E Bdj;at, -6^d^T;.' (rare); 2 a. ?/37j.; (§ 125, 3); 2 p. (/3«'/9aa) /9e/3tD, &c. (125, 4); [a. m. Ep. e/3-i/(Tdp.7ji' (rare) and e/STjcro/urji']. In active sense, cause to go, poet. (i^aw, i^-qaa. See § 108, v. N. 1. (5. 4.) , '^'^ r T!' i T^-^ Til ■ i: 334 APPENDIX. VBdXXw (/3a\-, p\a-), throw, f. [jSaX^w] /3oXw, rarely (c-) ^aWi^aw, p^pXtjKU, P^pXTinai [Ep. /3c/S6Xi;Ma»]> ^P^^V^V, /3Xr?5^, /3d^w, #/3a^a, pipan/xai, fpd, Znr, Piwaonat, ipiwaa (rare), pefiluKa, (/3e/3/w/xai) pfpiurai ; 2 a. f/Siw./ (§ 125, 3). Bi.driv ; 2 a. p. c/3Xd/37ji', 2 f. pXap-fiffofiai ; fut. ni. ^Xdrpofxai ; [fut. pf. /SfjSXdt^o- Mttt Ici 1 (3.) BXao-rdvu (/SXaerr-), sprout, («.) /3Xo (jixoX-, /uXo-, /3Xo-, § 14, N. 1), ^o, f. /xoXoCjuati P- /liuPXwKa, 2 a. (fj.oXop. Poetic. (6.) ^BoA«, *7BovXo)iai, wiVZ, ww/j, (augm. epovX- or iJ/SouX-); (c-) /SouXTjffo/tat, /3f/3oi;Xr;- /ttot, ipov\-fie-i)v ; [2 p. wpo-pipovXa, jyrefer.] § 100, N. 2. f(Bpax-), stem, with only 2 aor. f^paxe and Ppdxe, resounded. Epic] BptOM, &c heavy, Ppiffw, lppl ePpvxwdfiV" ', pp^xv^^i^- § 108, vii. N. (7.) hvvlw or ^vcii if-)-), stop up, piaw, ?/3ucra, pi^mfxai. Chiefly poetic. (5.1 CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 335 ti)Tr}v ; 2 a. Krjffdai, pt. 50)1/ ; fat. pf. [Horn. pves. MwTtti; 2 a. pf. p€p\d^po^ \a a0r]v.] Poetic, chiefly Epic] (3.) [To6m, bewail, 2 aor. (70-), 7601'; only Epic in active.] Mid. yodofiai, poetic, impf. 700x0 ; [yoi^ofiai (Epic), as active]. § 108, vii. N. (7.) ' Fpd(^, write, ypd\f/oi, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. iypdtpriv {iypd (Sufiad-), tmne, subdue, [Ej). f. da/ici) (w. dafidq,, Sa/xduiai) for Sa/idcrw, eSdfMaa, [didnrjfiai,^ ida- fJtd, fut. Maotxai,] aor. ^5eto-a, pf. 3f5otra, § 109, 3, N. 2 FEp. 5e^5otKo, § 101, 1, N.]. Fiom stem 8i-, [Ej). impf. Sio;/,] 2 pf. Moia, 2 plpf. ^SeS/etj/ [Ep. odSia, &c.]. St^e § 125, 4. [Mill. Uo}f.aK, frighten, pursue, Uufiai, Siolfxriu, SlecTdai, di/jfxevoi; also 8i«f4ai, /mr, Jtee; impf. act. iv-bUaav, chased aioa.y : poetic, chiefly Epic] t;; * CATALOGUE OP VERBS. 387 jnoi ; 2 a. inc, subdiie, (4. 5). fly Ionic. 2 p. S^SopKtt, iTOi, § 106, 1, 5^KT0, imper. come f^5£i5i?«To debet, tliere is T^plo-a (Theoc.\, 7pioiuoi, as act., (7). ). nor. ^5ei(ra, pf. stem Si-, l^^'- See § 125, 4. Si/)Hevos\ also , chiefly Epie-l AiairdcD, arbitrate, w. double augment in perf. and plpf. and in compounds ; StoiTiJffw, fiiyT-qffa (dir-cStpxTjffa), 8e5t]|T7;KO, 5e5tpT7;/xai, Si-gri^riv (e^-cStij- tt}^?;!'); diaiTT^aofMt, KaT-eSij]Tr}ffAfii)v. § 105, 1, N. 2. AkOKOv^tt), minister, i8idK6vovr ; iiSKoviiaw (aor. inf. StaKoi^^trcu), SfSidK^i')}- /uit, ^dtaKOfi^d;;!'. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with augment 5(7;- or 8c5ti7-. See § 105, 1, N. 2. At8i||ii, hind, chiefly poetic form for bi(a. (I.) \ AtSdo-KU (5(dax-)> for dtaax-cTKCtf (§ 108, vi. N. 3), teach, diSd^u, iSlSa^a [ididdffKijffa], Sedldaxa, Sedlday/Jiai, ididdx9r)v ; Sidd^ofmi, idida^d/iiiv. (6 ) \ AiSpdo-Ku (Spa-), only in comp., run away, -SpdaofMi, -didpdKa; 2 a. -ISpdv [Ion. -ISp-nv], -dpQ, -dpal-nv, -dpavai, -dpdi (§ 125, 3). (6.) \ A(8u|ii {So-), give, ddffw, iSuKa, diSuKu, &c. ; see inflection and synopsis in § 123. [Ep. ddfuvai or dbfiev for Sovvai, fut. Sidiiffu) for Sibata.} (I.) [A£|^i||uii, seek, with 17 for c ; dt^Vojuat. Ionic and poetic] (I.) Ait|fda», thirst, Siyj/'^au, idl\f/riffa. § 98, N. 2. ^ AoK^w (So/c-), seewi, '.] (4.) ."E8w, m<, see ^o-etw. , 'E|;o|iai, (^8- for fftS- ; cf. sed-eo), 5j7, [fut. inf. itft-iffffeffdai (Horn.):] aor. iffffdfjLTjv and hffa-, dadfi-qv. [Act. aor. e2.\ 'J p. (ti^- for fw#-) ffwi^a |l(iii. ew^l, as present , 2 plpt'. riiieeiv. § 104 ; § 109, 3, N. 1. (8.) \ EISov {IS-, FiS-), vi(l-i, saw, 2 aov., no j)res«nt ; t8u, iSoifxi, We or iS^, iddv, iSuv. Mid. (chietty poet.), iCSoiicu, seem, [Ep etVd/i"?"' and ^et "»«*« ^i't<^> tiKttaiii, ttKdaa or fl/cdffo, elVcacr/iat or yKaa/mi, eiKdadrjVf fiKaaihfffonai, (4.) (EtKw) not used in pres. (*«-), rcsemW<', apjnar, imp. rifcoi/, f. ef^w (rare), 2 p. loiKa [Ion. oZ/ca] (»ith foiyfj-ev, [tiKTov,] ft^affi, eiK^uai, eUuii, chiefly poetic); 2 pip. itpxeiv jwith ftVnr]. Ilpoo-Tji'^at, ar^ like |and Ep. ^i/cro or eiVcTo], sometimes referred to tiVfcw. Impersonal )Ioikc, ii scews, &c. For toiKa (Ik-), see § 109, 3 ; § 104. (2). (ElX^w (A-, eJX-), ;)res.9, roll, aor. e\«ro, pf. p. eeXnat, 2 aor. p. ^dXryv or &\r}vv,\ inf. aXi^fievai. Pres. pass. fiXopia'- Epic. Hdt. has (in con4».) -«t\7j. (4 7.) £%£, 6c, and F^j:.*, gro. See § 127, I. and II. vJIftrov 1^- for Feir-, feir-), said, [Ep. eeiirov,] 2 aor., no preseiit ; efn-w, ef- 7ro„.t, ctV^ [Ep. imp. fffireTf], eivfiv, dir, -e/jfo, -fpy/Mi, Ionic]; tp^o/xai (Soph.). [Epic also ^^/37w.] [Etpo|fcai (Ion.), ask, elp-/i, call an assembly (iKKX-qaia) ; augm. t^/cjcXt;- and i^eKXtj- § 105, 1, N. 2. 'EXaiivw, for f\a-vv- f lon.l; r)\aadfiriif. CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 339 ,. I 104. ;8.) na- ,] 2 II. a (2 pf. as (. (8.) or ^(caff/wit, f^w (rare), 2 Ktij, chietly id Ep. ^i«TO i seems, &•«• , p. iii\r)v or 3 {in coiuii.) tic lias eiUo- ei.t ; cfirw, cf- (opt, ftiraifxi, i/xT,!/.] Other ut. pass. ^17^1^" flp^a, erp7M«'. pVpl". ?PX*T» > at. Al9o[«p7«» 1 so re, 2 p, ^oAiro, hope; 2 plpf. idhirftv. § 109, 3. Mid. K\iroij.ai, hope. Epic] 'E\k^ia, vomit, fut. i/xu (rare), iixov/mai; aor. fifitaa. § 109, 1, N. 2. 'E|fciroXau, traffic, i/xvoXitau, &c. regular. Augm. ^/utt- or ivfn.it-. § 106, 1, N. 3. 'EvaCpM (iv&p-), kill, [Ep, a. m. ivnp(inr)v,'] 2 a. ^Ji/fipoi.. Poetic. (4.) 'Ev^irtt {iv and stem , -cVa, 'iadfxriv. Chiefly Epic : afi ^i'oxM<^<^< ^i'<>>x^^<''a> TJvc^xAiJMa'- § 106, 1, N. 3. 'Eopro^u (iopToS-), Ion. ipT<{fa», keep festival ; impf. WpToCoi'. § 104, Note 1. (4.) 'Eiravp/«i> and ^iravpUrKca (aup-), both rare, enjoy, [f. ^iravp^a-o/xat,] a. iirrivpdfiriv, 2 a. innvpSfirfv, [Dor. and Ep. ^iroCpoj'.] Chiefly poetic (6. 7.) 'EirC(rra|iai, understand, imp. iiiriard/x-nv, f. iirurT'fiffOfxapLrjv.\ (2.) 'Epivtro (fper-), strike, row, [Ep. aor. rfpeja.] § 108, iv. 1, Note. (4.) I 'EpiSaCvM, contend, for /p/fw ; aor. m. inf. epiSififfaadai, Epic. | 'EpCtw {ipiS'), contend, -^piaa, \-npi(Tdp.iiv Epic.) (4.) VEpoiuii (rare or ?) (ion. (Cpo|iai, Ep. ipiu or Jfw, aor. dpvaa and ?/)u(ra, i)f. p. ttpvfxai and er/juff/uot. Mid. {pi>o|iai, and clpvo)iai, take under one's protection, ipiao- tuu and tip-, epvadfirfv and fipvadpLttv ; witli Horn, forms of pres. and inipf. flpdaru (u), fpvffo, tpOro and etpOro, rlpwro, tpmOai and (tpvadai, which are sometimes called perf. and plpf. Epic] See ^vo|iai. S "EpxoF^ci^ {iXid-, eXevd-), go, come, f iXevaofxai (Ion. and poet.), 2 p. fXi}- \v0a fEp. €\i^\ov0a and ffX^Xoi/^a], 2 a. i}Xdo»' (poet. ^Xu^ok). In Attic ^rose, cl/it ia used for (XeOaofiai (§ 200, Note 3). (8.) *E(r9(ii>, also (orOw and (8w (0a7-), edo, eat, fut. IdofAai, p. idi^Soxa, iS^St- fffiai [Ep. e5iJ8o/iot], ij84ff6r^v ; 2 a. ttftayov ; [Epic pres. inf. f S/tewt ; 2 perf. part, ebrjdws ] (8. ) 'EimAw, /cas<, augment fJcrt- (§ 104). EvSw, s^ccp, impf. eSSou or ijSSoi' (§ 103, N.) ; (c-) eyS^Wj [-eiiSTiaa]. Com- monly in Ka9-paCv(i> (eiKf>pav-), cheer, f. fixppapQ ; a. eCtftpdva (or r]6p-), f. p. evpav0:^(TOfiai ; f. m. i'u f^X^^'Z'' (chiefly Ion.); 2 a. eax°^ (for ^"'''":"X"°*')» <''X'^» (Txoir^v (-(txoi/xOj <''X^5» (rXf"', ^^'■^ «^M<.] Mid. fx*>l'^''> <'*^*«fl' io, l^ofiai and axT^iffOfmi, eirx^' HW (8.) 'Et|rw, cooA;, (<-) ei^riffci and i^-^Ofiai, ijyl/rjaa- [■tjyf/riij.ai, r)\l/ij0rjy.] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 341 flPVP- with c. (2.) len, ip'flfiiUi- ) ote. (4) 1 ^ Z6m, live, w. fn»f fPi &C' (§ 98, N. 2); impf. Ifwi' and ffTji' ; j^i/jeu, .f^o- ' /UK, ff»^ro, il^riKa. Ion. fww. ^ ZfVYW|fci (ifiv- «f- jug-utn), 2/oA:c, fciy^w, ^feufa, ei^tvyfuti, e^tx'ixBriv ; 2. a. p. fi>577,i.. (2. II. ) Z4w, 6oi/, poet. |((C(i», fV(rw ; ^fftra, [-effff/iaj Ion, J. Zuvw|ii (fw), jfiVrf, efuKra, efwrr/xat, i^wffdixriv. (II.) pwrio), ask, i5$o/xftt. (2.)1 >. (tpiifMi and cc<('o?i, epiJff fl- ea, and impf >yVpX. *H|ft^, bow, sink, aor. ijuvva, [pf. vw-e/wt^-fivKe (for -ffi-rifivKe, § 102) Horn.]. Poetic, chiefly Epic. 1 OdXXtt (^o\-), bloom, [2 perf. riOriKa (as present), plpf. TeOrfKciv.'] (4.) [8do|Uii, j)r«2C «<, admire, Doric for dedoAiai, Ion. dr\iop.at ; ddo-o/iat, eddffd- firiv (Hum. opt. ^T/ffa/or').] [Odo|uii, mi7i*, inf. driadai., aor. idTtffdfir}v. Epic] (0air- or to*^, for Oaov, also intransitive.] § 17, 2, Note. \ @dirrc» {Tau Ui2 12.2 li£ '•2^r-^ii^ < 6" ^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STRUT wnSTIR.N.Y. MSM (716) •72-4903 M <>#: V ^ 4^ ;\ 7^ ^IMflrr ■ '^ 342 APPENDIX. ;!.<{ ' ! ^Svijo-Kw (^dfi'-, 6vdC-)y die, davovixat, ridvriKa ; fut. pf. TiBvii^ta^ § 110, iv. (c), N. 2, or TedvT^io/jiai; 2 a. idavov ; 2 p. (Wdma) § 125, 4, part, redvttbi [Horn. Tfdvrn!)i\. In Attic prose always airo-dapovfiai and a,ir-ida»ov. (6.) 6pd and Opdrru (rpdfx-> ^P^X-)> disturb, aor. fdpaia, i6pdx0ri» (rare); [p. rirprixa, be disturbed, plpf. Terpjfxfw, Horn.] See rap&aaa. (4.) OpavM, bruise, dpaiau, idpavaa, TiOpavafiai and HOpavfiai, idpaiffBrjv. § 109, 2. Chiefly poetic. Opvirrctf {Tpij- for ^/)u0-)f ctmsA, (Opvipa, TiBpvfjL/Mi, idpvtpdrjp [Ep. 2 a. p. -iTpijriv\, epij\f/oiJMt. § 17, 2, Note. (3.) 0pwc!-K«» (dop-, 6po-), leap, fut. Oopov/xai, 2 a. iOopov. Chiefly jtoetic. (6.) * 0v« (v), sacrifice, imp. iOvov ; diJ used chiefly in KaO-L^w, which see. See also ^(wi. (4.) "Iijlii (c-), send; see § 127. (I.) V'IkWo|Uu (Ik-), poet. Uut, coine, t^ofiai, ly/iat ; 2 a. Uofiifv. In prose usu- ally d-iKv4ofMt, From iku, [Ep. imp. Ikov, 2 a. l^ov, § 119, 8. J (5.) \'IXairKO|&ai [Ep. IXdoftai] (IXa-), propitiate, IXdao/Mi, IXdfrdriv, IXavd- firiv. (6.) ["IXtiIU, be propitious, pres. only imper. tXridi or tXadi ; pf. subj. and opt. IXi^Kw, IXriKoim (Hom.). Poetic, chiefly Epic] (I.) 1XX and tXXo|iai, roll, for elXXw. See cIX^m. 'Iiuivo-w (§ 108, iv. 1, N.), lash, aor. tfiaaa. (4.) ^ Iirrafiat (tto-), ^%, impf. Iwrdfiriv ; 2 a. m. itrTdntiv. Active 2 a. Iirrijv w. pt. irrds. csee ir{TO|/iai. (I.) ["Iirdifci, Doric for olSa, know.^ ["ImcM : for synopsis and inflection see itvKU).] "IoTTi|ii (ffTo-), set, place: see, for synopsis and inflection, ^ 123. (I.) 'I, IXaffd- Lj. and opt. 2 a. llTTTJI' 23. (I.) I. See lx«' Ka6a(p«» (xa^a/}-)* puri/y, KaBapw, iKddripa and ixdddpa, KeitiBapfuUt iKaftdpdrjv ; xa^apoD/MK, iKadiipd/iriv. (4.) Ka6-^0)iai (ed-)> ^^'^ t^oum, imp. iKadeibiaiv^ f. xadeSovAiat. See f|;o|MU. Ka6cv8», sleep, imp. ^Kddevdoi' and xadi^CSov [Epic Kadevhov], § 103, Note ; fut. (c-) Ka.e€v8-fiOrjiv, KaXv- 4»di^ofmi ; aor. m. iKoXvyf/afiriv. In prose chiefly in compounds. (3.) Kd|iVA> (Ka/t-), labor, KafMvfmi, KiK/xriKa [Ep. part, kck/xtjc^s] ; 2 a. iK&fiov, [Ep. ^Ka/u6/u);i'.] (5.) Kd|fcirT«* (xajuTr-), band, Kdn\J/u, €Ka|l\|/a^ KiKanfAai (§ 16, 3, N.; § 97, N. 3), iKdfi6i)p. (3.) KaTi)Y>p^t accuse, regular except in emission of the augment, Kartryb- povv, &c. See § 105, 1, N. 2. [(Kcuj)-), paiU, stem with Horn. perf. part. MKaifnidi ; cf. Tedyridts.] [K<8dwv|U, Ep. for ffKeddwvfii, scatter, iKiSaaaa, iKeddffdriv.] (II.) Kci|iai, lie, Ketaopxti; see § 127. KcCpo ( shear, f. Kepw, a. IlKeipa [poet, ^ife/woj, KiKap/uu, [(iKipdriv) Kepdeii ; 2 a. p. iKdptiv ;] f. m. xepoO/uu, a. m. iKeipdtirjv [w. poet. part. K€p>-] § 100, N. 3. See x&Xiu. KcXcvM, command, KeXeiffw, iKiXevaa, K€KiXevKa, K€K4X€v Sdra [Ion. -i^ra or rjaa], -KexipdriKa {Kepdi-, § 109, 6). (4.) KcilO« IkvS-), hide, Ke6 («•) [Ktidi^aw, -iK-ffirfffa ; 2 p. K^xi^Sa]. Mid. xi^doAiaf, sorrow, iKtiSeadfiriv, [£p. fut. pf. iceicadi^ofiat.] (2.) Ki|pilatrM (ici^pvK-)* proclaim, Kfipi^w, iKi^pv^a, KCKi/ipvxa', KCKi^pvy/Mu, iKif p^Oifv, KtipvxSi^otuu ; Kiipi^ofMt, eKnipv^dnfiv. (4.) [K(8yi||u, spread. Ion. and poetic for aKcSdwviu.] (L) [Kfvv|iai, mov0, pres. and imp. ; as mid. of KiWw. Epic] (II.) K{pvi)|u and m^vdn: see K^dwv|u. . Ktxdvc* (kix-), find, (i-) wxijo-o/toi, [Ep. iKtxV(^if-w] i 2 a. ^jctxoi' [and inl- XV like eo-Tiji/]. Poetic. (5.) K'XPIF (X/>*-)» lend, [xp'^<>> Hdt.l HxPV^'^i KixPVf^a* i ^xpWm'?''. (I.) KXdt« («c\o77-, k\Sy-), clang, K\dy^, KiKXavfuu; fut. pf. (im- pers.) K€K\a6ffeTai. (4.) . KX^, dreo^, ikX&aa, K4k\aeriv) Mrii|ii (Kop6-)> satiate, [f. Kopiou Hdt., irop^w Horn.,] iKhpeva, kckI^ ptff/jMi [Ion. -i^MaO' eKopiffdriv'f [Ep. 2 p. pt. KeKopi}(6s, a. m. hopeffd' f^W'] (n.) CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 345 Ep. 2 a. KI^OfMUf fiuu, ixri* ) V [and ^»c(- ,ijv. (1) » [Ep. Ki- (4.) sometimes It. pf. (im- 109, 2. Cm, ^icXiiiffo, rw, IkXb ^fXf- 'ut. m. »cXt- Ep. it^fcXSfft, (T/tOt, -^»CVO(- i;, and aef» ], KiKOfjifMi ; aor. m. tM- m. itcopeffi- Kopilovtt (xopi/^-), arm, [aor. Kbpwat and Kopvffffdnevos (Horn.), pf. p. kc- Kopv^/u^cos.] Poetic, chiefly Epic. (4.) [KoT^o, be angry, aor. eKbreaa, iKoreadfiijv, 2 pf. pt. KeKorrnis, angry, Epic] Kpdt«» (K/)a7-)> cry ou<, fut. pf. KeKpd^o/mi (rare), 2 pf. K^Kpdya (imper. k4- KpaxOt), 2 a. -iKpayov. (4.) KpaCvtt (Kpav-), accomplish, xpavu, fKpdva [Ion. ^xpi^ra], inpdvBriv, KpavBi)- aopxu ; f. m. Kpavov/iai ; p. p. 3 sing. K^Kpavrai (cf. iritpavrai, § 97, Note 3, (2). Ionic and poetic. [Epic KpaiaCvctf, aor. iKpi^ifva, pf. and pip. KCKpdam-ai and KtKpdavro ; iKpddvdtfv (Theoc.).] (4.) Kp{|ia|uu, hang, (in trans.), Kpep-iiaotiu. (I.) Kpf)idvvv|u (Kpeua-), hang, (trans.), Kpep-d (for KpepAaw), iKpipuava, iKpcp.d- adrfv ; [e'icpe/ioffo/iiji'.] (II.) Kpij|iVT||ii, stispend, mid. Kpiipv&p.ai ; only in pres. and impf. Poetic. (I. ) Kp£(«> (fptv-), creak, squeak, [2 a. {(KpiKou) 5> sing, /fpficc;] 2 p. {K^Kplya) KeKptyhra, sqiieaking. (4.) KpCvM {xpXv-), judge, f. icpti'w, iKplva, KixpiKa, KiKpXp.ai, iKptdrju [Ep. ^Kpfi*- Ctiv], Kpi6i^o/JMi ; fut. m. KpXvoviMi, a. m. [Ep. ^/cpti'd/ii^v.] § 109, 6. (4.) KpovM, beat, Kpoitrta, (Kpovaa, K^Kpovxa, -KiKpovpuai and -KiKpovffpxu, iKpoi- adriv ; -Kpoiffo/uu, iKpovadpLifv. KptSnrw, (KpSP; Kpvtce^, c^nc«, Kipata, tKvp obtain bij lot, Xi)fo/«it [Ion. Xd^o/iai], eCKrixa, [Ion. and poet. X^Xo7xa,] (jetXjjyfMi) el\'))yfji^vos, iXiix^W > 2 a. iX&xov [Ep. XeX-]. (5.) AafiPdvo (Xdf/9-), ^aA:e, \i^\f/o/Mi, efXij^a, etXijfifMi (poet. XAi^ju/Mtt), eXi}- ^077v, \ri ^c-j AcCiTM (XtTT-), ^cavc, Xef/'w, X^XeififMi, €XeL (Xiji'S-), plunder, act. rare, only impf. eXi^'foi'. Mid. Xi|t{o|uu (as act.), [fut. Xrftffofiai, aor. eXi^iitrd/u.i;!', Ion.]. Eurip. has iX-gffdiiijv, and pf. p. XAjjcr/xot. (4.) AUroropiai or (rare) XCtoimh (Xit-), supplicate, [iXiffdnijv, 2 a. eXtri/iiji']. [Ao^o, Epic for Xo«Ja> ; XoiaaofMi., iXdeaaa, eXoeaad/JLTjP.] Aowa or \6(ii wash, regular. In Attic writers and Herod, the pres. and inj])erf. genei-ally have contracted forms of X6w, as eXov, eXovfuv, XoO- juecos. AtSM, loose, see § 95 and § 96 ; [Epic 2 a. m. Ai^jutjc (as pass.), Xi^o and \0to ; pf. opt. XeXvTo or XeXOi^o, § 118, 1, Note.] CATALO'GUE OF VERBS. 347 [Ion. and ■^ov [Ep. xoi), cM- ,1.] [Ion. 1 (5) xt Hdt.]. ne), XV«. 01/.] Mid. 2 a. iKo,db- p. X^XoKa »]. Poetic. ] XfX^VoM*"* (see ctirov). e{a, €l!\oxo, [The Horn. to rent, rest, ; 2 a. ^Xtiroi', Xcu(rdiiixevos), desire eagerly ; 2 p. {ftinaa) § 125, 4 [part. fie/Muis (-wros or -6ro$).] A second p. isAfiova (jiev-) supplies the singular of (jiifMo). Mdpva|i.ai, fight (subj. ndpuwfiat, imp. fidprno); a. efiapvdadriy. Poetic. (I.) Mdpirru (/uapTr-), seize, ndp\j/(i>, ^ftap^a [2 pf. yAitapva Epic]. Poetic. (3.) Mdo-CM (imy-), knead, nd^w, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. ifudyriv. (4.) Mdxo|Uu [Ion. nax^ofuu], fight, f. /AaxoOfMi [Hdt. iiaxi, 6e drunk, only pres. and impf. Mc(po)fc(u (jiep-), obtain, [Ep. 2 pf. 3 sing, en/iope ;] impers. el/taprat, t^ is fated, tltMpiUyi) (as subst.), Fate. (4.) MJXXw, intend, augm. eju- or 17/1A-; (c-) /ueXXi^o-w, efiiWrfffa. Mikn, concern, care for, (e-) /xcXiJo-w [Ep. /ueXi}(ro/ia(, 2 p. /u^/m^Xa]; juepi^- XT^/iat [Ep. fjJfipXerai, ju^ju/SXero, for fiefiiXrirai, fie/JLiXriTo]; (^ifieXiidriv) neXifdfli. f/UKn, it concerns, impers. ; fieXi/iaei, tfiiXriae, fxe/ii\riKe. Mtl|Lova ifMv-), deiir 2 perf. with no present. § 109, 8. Ionic and poetic. See ttdofiiai. Mlm't remain, f. /uei>w [Ion. n^viia], ipxwa, (<-) yxiUmiKa. M^Rp'l** (§ 108, iv. b, N. 1), ponder, [iMep/xripl^w, e/*cp/tti)ptio] (Attic ■ifxepfti^ptaa). Poetic. (4.) Mij8o)fcai, devise, fii^ofiai, ifi7i grumbUt mvUer, aor. f/iv^a. Poetic. (4.) MvKdofuu (Mi^'<-)i bellow, [{)p. 2 pf. fi4fivKa ; 2 a. /ui/koi' ;] invxvffdiJLrjv. Chiefly poetic. § 108, vii. Note. (2. 7.) MvM, sAu< (^ 2ijM or «^e5), t»or. eftifaa, pf. fiifivKu. N. Naftt (va-), (2u«Z2, [twffffo, eraero'dAn?",] €vd, Aeop i(p, ^vi^ra, f^i^/tat or Wn^cr/uu, [^i^o-0i)i'.] [Ion.vf|^o, i/^tro, vrfrjffai, kc] 3. Nto and v^Ow, spin, i'i70-(i), ^i'i7(ra, itnjdrfp ; [Ep. a. m. i^aain-o.] N£{«i later yfurw (w/S-), wash, vlrf/u, ipi\f/a, vivift/xai, [•eV/^diji' ;] vl^oiiai, evixl/dfirip. § 108, iv. (6), N. 2. (4.) Nt(nro|uu (ctr), (jro, fut. tiaofiai (sometimes ultraofiai). Poetic. (4.) No4m, think, perceive, vo-^w, &c., regular in Attic. [Ion. hunra, -vipuKa, P^WfMl.] (7.) No|itl« (po/uS-), believe, fut. po/uu [poiiiaa late], aor. epSfiiffa, pf. »ep6- fdxa, vepbfuffiuut aor. p. epofUffBr/p, fut. p. pofwrd'^ofmi, (4.) CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 349 iKTo ; fut. itat; e/Jfii- nvxi^iiivy' 108, iv. 3, ic] (2.) TO.] ic. (4.) rfaNTa, -vivtiKa, ir(ra, pf. «'«^' S<««, «Ta//c, [aor. ?fc8oireirotij/i/i'ij). So sometimes iiioiiropiia,travel. ('08v-), he angry, stem with only [Horn. CiBvadniiv, <53(i5i/\6nrjv. In prose generally &ir-6\\vfu. § 108, v. 4, Note 2. (11.) "Ofiviiifct and ijivv» (6/u-, ^/lo-), swear, f. d/uoC/iat, d/xoaa, dfidifioKa, 6/xd)fiO' fffiai (with d/ti6/iOTa(), ufiddrfv and ufidadv ; 6fio«i«> ^f^op^u, 6/i6p^ofMi, &fJLop^a, wnop^dnijv; dir- o/jLopxOeU. Chiefly poetic. (11.) *Ov (Ex*\c also uvd/JLifv), 'ihydadriv. Ionic and poetic] (I.) 'Oiivo (d^vv-), sharpen, -d^vvio, &^vva, -^^vnnat, -Cf^ivOriv, [6^wdi/idriv, 6(f>di)aoyiai ; 2 p. tirwira (loii. and poet.). For 2 a. cldoi', &c., see >] f^p^X^V i ip^^ofULi, ihpe^ikixifv. "Opvviu (d/9-)* raise, r(m«e, fl/xrw, S)pca, 2 p. tfpwpa (as mid.) ; [£p. 2 a. Upopov.] Mid. rise, rusA, [f. 6poviMu, p. ^, i^pe/uat,] 2 a. uipbur^v [with (&/>ro, imper. 6pao, 6paeo, 6p\; d\t\rjKa, &\ripLai ; 2 a. &^\o» (inf. and pt. sometimes 6\€iy, dipXwv). (6. 5.) n. i. IIcUtM (raid; Traiy-), sport, vai^ovfMi, (irataa, TiiraiKu (iriraixa later), Hwaiff/Mi. § 108, iv. (b), N. 1. (4.) TlaUa, strike, vaiau, poet. (•-) vanfiau), fvaiaa, irivaiKa, iiralffB-qv. HaKtUn, wrestle, iraXalau, iirdXaiaa, iiraXal(fOi)v. § 109, 2. ndXXw (iro\-), brandish, (vijXa, wiirdXfiai ; [Horn. 2 a. dfirevdXdfP, as if from iriwaXov ; 2 a. m. firaXTo and TrdXro. ] (4.) nopavofUw, transgress law, augm. vupriv- or rapep-, vapavev: § 105, 1, Note 2. IlapoiWM, t7Mt^2^ (as a drunken tnan), imp. ivap^ovv ; irapoti'i^w, ivaptp- vi^ra, weirapi^ijKa, ivaptpvffiiiv. ndiroiuu, fut., sAaZ; acquire (no pres.), pf. rfirdfiai, irdadfiriv. Poetic. Not to be confounded with viaofMi, iirdadiniv, &c. , of rar^o/tat. CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 351 ^iStpdKa or d poet.)- (8.) !cly. (4.) [Ep. 2 a. *nnv [with ic. (H.) iptipvytiai ioi; [wpw- s), 2 a. m. .) It and oyrd- ougJU, («■) >0cXoi', used 3, especially sometimeif ratx« later), tOtjv. €va\(i)v, as if § 105, 1, unv. Poetic. ndirrw or irdrru (§ 108, iv. 1, N.), sprinkle, ndffu, tiraffa, ivd- ffdrfv. (4.) Ild^x** (irviB-firevO-), suffer, wdaofMi (for irtvd-crofiai, § 16, 6, N. 1); 2 p. viirov0a[Hom. iriitoaOe and ireir&dvia] ; 2 n. (wadov. (8.) naWo|iai (irar-), «a^, irdcro/xat (d), iiraadnrjv ; [Ep. pip. ir6ird(r/t77v.] louit and poetic. See irdo'0|fcai. (7.) ndriv, v€iJLdi)ffOfuu ; v^nxf/o/Mi, ivefiyj/dnrju. See pf. i of ir^iroro). IlriraCvtt (irerav-), make soft, iirirSva, iireirdv9r}v, veiravdi^ofMi. (4.) n{p8o|Mii, Lat. pedo, 2 fut. (pass.?) •irapd'^ofMt, 2 p. wiwopSa, 2 a. -iwapdov. n^9a», destroy, sack, wipato [ti kpaofiat (as pass.) Horn.], iirepaa, [Ep. 2 a. (w. Tpa^- for irepd-) firpadov, iirpadbyniv (as pass.) with inf. Tripdai."] § 109, 7 (a). Poetic. II^pvi)|ii, mid. vipvafMt : poetic for irivpdaKu. (I.) IU or itIttw (Trefl--), cooA-, ir^xf/u, tT(\pa, HirefifMt (§ 97, N. 3, a ; cf. iriftiru)), iir4eT)v. § 108, iv. 1, N. (4.) IIcTdwvi&i (ircTo-), expand, irtrdau (irerQ), iiriraaa, iriirrafMi {ireir4- rafffMi late), iireraffdriy. (H.) n^ro|Jicu. (iTfT-, ITT-), fly, (e-) vr-f^aofuii (poet. 7rcTi} fix, freeze, fl"i)fw, IjTTjfa, iriix^W (rare and poet.) ; 2 a. p. ivdyri», 2 f. p. vayfyrop-ai ; 2 p. vhrr/ya, he fixed ; [Ep. 2 a. m. kot- ^injKTo;] viiyvvTO (doubtful) pr. opt. for iryftviotro (Plat.) ; [vTiiioiuu, iiT'qiiip.iilv.'] (U.) it 352 APPENDIX. si (i ?i( [IlCKvi^it approach, urea, and im\i(. Epic] (I.) nt|&irXT|)u (tXo-), Jill, irXi^u>, iw\rf) ; 2 f. pass. wXrjfyTtfao/Juu and -TXa7i}(£/i>;i'.] § 109, 6. (4.) nWtt (irvv-), itotc, breathe, irve^aofMi and TvevaoO/iat, ^irfcinra, •ir^iri'evKa, [Ep. irhrvvfiai, be wise, pt. veirvvfjiivoi, wise, plpf. ir^irviJo-o.] [Ep. 2 aor. dfi-rvve, &P.-TVVTO, a. p. dp.-vvivdiiv ;] see &|iirwc. See irivv. (2.) Ili^a) {irvXy-), choke, -tvI^u [later -irf^^o/Mit, Dor. rvi^ov/Mi], tirv^a, ir4- irviyiMi, itrvtyifv, vyXyrjirotMi. (2.) IIoOIm, desire, troO-fyru, xodijaopjai, err60r}rfv ; a. ra. eppa- '^ifiriv. (3.) 'Pd(r(r» or ^drTt* {pay-), throw down, pd^u, fppa^a, -ippaxBy^v. (4.) •P<1« (^C7-). <'o>" ^pSw, rfo, ltii,w, Ifpe^a (rarely e/)pe$o) ; [Ion. a. p. f>fx^elrj, i,exe€ls.] (4.) 'Pin {pv-),flow, (xiaop-ai, ippevaa, (f-) ippiriKa; 2 a. p. fpp6-qv ; fiVT^o- iMi. § 108, ii., Note. (2.) ('P€-), stem of cfpijKO, etpTiputi, ipp-fiOiiv (Ippidrfv), prjOriffofmi, tlprjaopMu See (Iirov.) •PiiYvv|Jii (^of7-. At/-), poet. ^i7 354 APPENDIX. 'Pi-yto (^47-), shudder, [^L-ynffu,] kpply-qaa, [2 p. /ppiYa (as pres.)] Poetic, chiefly Epic. -{7.} 'Pt^dw, shiver, piyiixru, (pplyuaa ; inf. pt7wi' or piyow, § 98, Note 3. 'PtiTTW (pt0-)» throw, pi^u, fppi\f/a (poet, epi^a), ippltpa, (ppififAai [poet. j}ippifipMi, Horn. pip. fp^pinTo], (pplcpdriv, pitpOT^aofiat ; 2 a. p. ippi* T^v. Pres. also ^iirr^o). (3.) 'Pvo|icu. (tf), defend, piaofiai, eppvadnriv, [Epic, inf. pvjOai for />tj€ffdat ; impf. 3 pers. eppvro and pi. pcforo. § 119, 3.] Poetic. See cpvw. 'Pwirdw; befoul, [Epic i^vir({«i; Ion. pf. pt. ftepvirunivos]. 'Pwvvv|fct (pw-), strengthen, tppuaa, eppw/Mi (iniper. tppuao, farewell), eppiii' crdriv. (II.) z. SaCpM (crXp-), sweep, aor. pt. ai]pa^] 2 p. aia-qpa, grin, esp. in part, ccffij- pc6s [Dor. , faeiaa, aianKa, ). (3.) i, sinear, with ri for o in contracted forms (§ 98, N. 2), o-/x}j for a/u?, &o. [Ion. oijAw and o-yuiyxw], aor. p. Sia-fffirjxOeii (Aristoph.). Sirda», draw, airaffu) (a), laTuffa, tJiruKa, (airafffiai, lair&cOrfv, (riraffdifffo- fiai ; avdaofiai, (ffvaadfirjv. § 109, 1, N. 2 ; § 109, 2. SircCpo {(Tirep-), sow, ffwepu, ^airupa, fanapfiai ; 2 a. p, tairapriv. (4.) 2ir^v8(i>, pour a libation, aireiaw, ^aireiffa, taveifffiai ; a-jrelaofjLai, eairtiad- H-nv. § 16, 2 and 6. 2t« (o-rt/S-), (anvay-), ijroan, ffrevd^w, kariva^a. (4.) SWp'YCD, Zoi?e, arip^u, tarep^a ; 2 p. ecrropya. § 109, 3. Srcp^M, deprive, also r)P, f. aTpa-qffOfiai ; mill. e\iy-), dash, aor. iaTVA|(D (atjtay-), slay, Att. prose gen. dTT« ; crcpd^u), tV^a^a, eaipay/jiai, [^fffftdxOv (rare)] ; 2 aor. p. katpdy-qv, fut. atftS.yliffop.ai. ; aor. mid. -eV^a- ^d/iTji/. (4.) 24^XX«> ((r0oX-), (ffuS-), save, [also Ep. ffciw, w. subj. ffdr/s, (r6|;, &c.]; c-t&ffw, Iffwffo, (r^or(i>Ka, aiffuxr/Mi (or -UMat), (drfv, ffufir)aopai; ffuxrofiai, iauffdnr)v. (4.) r ! M^' (Ill ill' 356 APPENDIX. T. (Ttt-), take, stem with Hoin. iini)erat. Trj, [(TO"y-), seize, stem with Hom. 2 a. pt. reraydy.] Cf. Lat. tango. [Tav^w, stretch, rav^au, erdvuffa, TerdvvfffMi, (Taviff0T]v ; aor. m. eTavvaad lirfv. § 109, 2. Epic form of tc(ru (rapax-)* disturb, rapd^u, erdpa^a, rerdfMyfMi, hapdxOriv, ra- pax&T^ofiai ; rapd^ofmt ; [Ep. pf. (rirprfxa) TeTpr)x*^i, disturbed; pip. tct/)tJx«.] (4.) Tdo-co (Ta7-), arrange, rd^u, fra^a, Tiraxa, TiTay/Mi, irdx^riv, rax^V- ffOfJMi ; Td^Ofiai, iTa^dfirjv ; 2 a. p. irdy-qv ; fut. pf. Terdfo/iat. (4.) TctvM (rev-), stretch, revd, ^reiva, t^to/co, rhiiixai, irddriv, rSOT^ofmi ; re- voOfiat, iTeivdfvqv. § 109, 6. (4.) TtKin, finish, (re\^d-qv [Ep. iTdpi«Z/, [Dor. rrf^w), Ti)fw, ^rryfo, irrixBriv (rare) ; 2 a. p. ^rd- KTjj' ; 2 p. rirriKa {cs mid.). (2.) T(Oi||iv {6e-), put ; for inflection and synopsis, see § 123. (I. ) TfKTw {tck-), beget, bring forth, ri^opai (poet, also t^^w, rarely TeKoDpxti), Hre^a (rare), Mx'^riv (rare) ; 2 p. t^toko ; 2 a. *rejcoi', ireKbp-qv. See § 108, iii. (end). (3.) CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 357 go. ,n. eTavvaad- turbed; pU). xBri"* rax^V- at. (4.) di^ofJMi ; re- ■iUadriv ; fut. ] In compos. TfJLOV.] I, Wr/iiijifa, t4' Sfi-) ; fut. m. a. p. iripirriv fo/*ot (poet.), act. ripau in TCTtTjiis, both Tut. -rerpaviu aor. ^rpTjffo, 13 pass.,! T^TU- eiJf Ojuai ;] f. m. UK6/tTji'.] Po- ; 2 a. p. ^rd- ,rely reicoO/iOi), *»,i'. See §108, T(v« (ti-), witli t, pay, fttTO), irtaa, ririKa, -Tirurfiai, -iTlaOriv. (5.) [TCraCvM {rirav-), stretch, aor. (eTiTJjva) ririji/as. Epic for tc^i'w.] (4.) [TiTpdtt, hore, late present. | See Tcrpatvca. TiTpi& (T/i*a7-), cut, poet, for t^m"" J rftri^o) (rare), (rurt^a, 2 a. iriuiyov, irfidytfv (jfiAyeu for erfidyriffav ).] ( 2. ) ToplcD (jop-), pi&rce, pres. o'^ily in |Ep. di'rt-To/)eOi'To| ; f. [rop^w,] rarely Tcrop-^ti), [a. irdprfaa, 2 a. ^ropoi'.] (7.) Tp^ifM [Ion. TpdTTw], Bnv [Ion. ^rpd^^rji'l ; f. m. rpi^l/ofiai, a. m. irpey^dfi-nv ; 2 a. [^rpd- iroi' Ep. and Lyr.], irpdvuv, irpavonriv. § 109, 3, N. 2, ami 4 with Note 1. This verb has all the six aorists. Tp^o {rpetp- for 0p€', § 17, 2, Note), nourish, 0p4\pw, i0pe\pa, rirpotpa (late T^rpatpa), riOpaiiimi (inf. reSpd^Oai), idpktpB-qv (rare) ; 2 a. p. irpd' iiv ; [Ep. 2 a. iTp&fiivoi, [a. p. irpvxttiBriv Ion.]. Tp«»YM (rpeiv-), grTiaw, rpib^oiMi, [-^rpw^o,] 'Terpwyfuu ; 2 a. ^rpdyov. § 108, ii. (end). (2.) Tvyx^v*** (^"X-» '■e»'X-)» '«^ hairpen, rei^ofiai, [Ep. ^TiJxifo,] TCTi/xijica or rereuxa ; 2 a. KtVxo" (5- 2. ) TviTTW (rVw-), strike, (€■) tuitt^o-w, ^ru^a [eTi57rTT;(ro later], [reTU/ii/Mit Ion. and poet.] ; 2 a. trvirov (rare), criinjv (poet.) ; TuwTi^ffo/xat (as pass.); a. m. eTv\l/dfiriv. (3.) Tt^ {Tv(ft- for ^u0-, § 17, 2, Note), rawc smoke, smoke, rtOvfifMi, 2 a. p. •eTiaCvtt {ytpav-), weave, ixpOivQ, if^jjm, Cipaafxai (109,6, N.), ixpdvdriv ; aor. ni. vrivdfir)i/, (4.) 'Y«, ram, (law, Offa, bafjuii, {iaOiju. [Hdt. VaofMi as i)ass.] $a(vtt> (^ai*-), sAow, f. ^i/w [tpavebt], a. ^^tjw, iretpayKa, 7re>a(r/uoi (§109, 6, N.), t'^dvBriv ; 2 a. p. ^ipdvriv, 2 f. (pavqaoiiaL ; 2 p. Tre'^i/i/a ; f. ni. avovnai, a. m. €i>rfvd/ir)v (rare and poet.), showed, but air-ed«>. See§ 95; § 96; § 97, 4. ^4.) #d(rKM (0a-), say, only pres. and impf. See ^v^. (6.) $A«, «^«ic (pres. late), | Honi. impcrf. ^cte, fut. i)f. 7rc0^arc, €i.ffdiiiiv, [Horn. 2 a. 7re0(d6Mi7C> ] (2.) (<|kv-, «|)a-), A;z7Z, stems whence [Hom. irc^a/xat, ffc07jvov or ^ire(6^ofiai. and (pev^ovfxat (§ 110, ii. N. 2), 2 p. ir^ipevya (§109, 3); 2 a. iri6.ad0-^(TOfxai, i6aKa late ;] 2 a. act. l0apKa, ldapfiai ; 2 a. p. f$dpriv, 2 f. p. (pOcCprfffOfxai ; 2 p. 8t- i9opa ; f. tn. ipdepovfiai [Hdt. 0^a/o^o/iai]. (4. ) #dCva> [Ep. also 05t'w], wos^c, rfccay, tftdltrw, tBi0ifir}P [subj. 0inriv for (f>0i-t-nriv, imper. 3 sing. 0iff0cj, inf. 0di0iixevoi. Attic t. Epic t ; but always t in t0tnai, i0f0riv, iBtp.riv (except in contr. opt. ^flf^Ltv). Epic 0Ww has generally r. Chiefly poetic. The present is generally intransitive ; the future and aorist active are transitive. (5 ) CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 359 inrdx^Hai), biroffX^OriTi Tfiai (§ 109, brjva ; f. n\. pi]vdfniv, de- ] ', [Horn. 2 a. 2 a. redupl. #OUw (^rX-), love, ^tXiJo-w, &c. regular. [Ep. a. m. €Xdw, bruise, [fut. 0Xoffa> (Dor. ^XacraiD), aor. f^Xoo-a, ^^Xaff/uu, e«^Xo- o-di}!'.] See 6\do>. ^pd-yvi)|u (0pa7-), /cnce, mid. ^pd ; only in pres. and impt See 4>pdo'«rA». (H. ) #pdlc» {4>pa8-), tell, p&Ka, iripd(rd7}v (as mid.); [(ppaao/Mai Ep.], €pd(r(ra) (.4>pdy-), fence, pd^(a, iippa^a, iritppay/mi, ipdx9w » ipa^diir]v. See (^pd'yw|u. (4.) ^p£(r ipTK-), shvdder, pi^a, H(f>pTKa. (4.) ^pi^w (pvy-), roast, ^ptJ^w, e^pu^a, ir4(f>pvyfia , [c^pi^T'?'''] (2.) ^vXdir(rc» (^uXd^K-), guard, ipvXd^o), ^^jJXa^o, 7rc0i;\axo» 7rc0Aa7)Uot, e0u- X(tx^'?»' ; v\a^dfir)v. (4.) ^iip», mitt;, [^^upcra,] ir46pd7]v ; [fut. pf. veip^pffofiat Find.]. $vpd», mia?, is regular, tpvpdffw, &c. ^v«, (u), produce, ipdcrw, ivvKa, be (by nature), with 2 p. (tt^^vo) § 125, 4 [Ep. ire4>idai, efi-ire^O-g, vetpvtbs:]', 2 a. e6(a); 2 a. p. e^i/i}!' (subj. (pvw)', fut. m. 0i-i-p.riv, I, Epic I; but opt. i>6tnriv). t is generally 5) Xdjca (x^8-), yield, retire (pres. only in dva-xd^w), [Ep. f. x'^'^ofJ'^^^ ^^ -f'x^tTffa (Find.), a. m. exao-d/t?;!' (Epic, once in Xen. dia-xd(ra(T0ai); 2 a. m. KeKaSdfiriv ; fut. KCKadiqeta, will deprive (§ 110, iv. c, N. 2 , 2 a. ic^ko- dov, deprived.] (4.) Xa(p«> (xop-)j rejoice, (e-) xatp^^w, *cex(ip»?fo, Kex<^Pi1tMU and ff^x^PA"**' 2 a. p. (xdprfv, [Ep. a. m. x''7/'<*''0> 2 a. m. Kexo,pifJi'V>' '. 2 p. pt. kcxo-PV*^^ » fut. pf. KexapT/lffu, KcxopTjffo/MJti (§ 110, iv. c, N. 2).] (4.) XaX^, loosen, [xa\dff f- xo^ov/wit, 2 p. KixW"- (as pres,), 2 a. ex^vov. Ionic and poetic. (4. ) X^S** (Xf5-)» fut. xf<''<'OA'«t (rarely -x^ffo/tat), t'xf'aj 2 p. -k^x"^** > 2 a. ex^" (TOf ; a. m. (x^adfirfv ; p. part. Kexefffiivos, (4.) X^o> (x"-)! /'owr, f. x^w [Ep. Xf»^'«'l> f'- f Xf» [Ep. fX^va], -k^x^*^"* f^Xi'MO'. ex^^Vt X^^V'^^I^"-'' ; a. m. exedfirjv, 'Z a. m. kx^ixriv. § 108, ii. 2, N • § 110, iii. 1, N. 2. (2.) [(XXa8-) stem of 2 pf. part. Kfx^*^'^*» swelling, (Find.).] i 360 APPENDIX. X^Wf heap up, X'^<^> Hx^^"^* -K^xuKa, Kixux^/Mi, ix'^^Wt X<^<''^^o/xat. § 109, 2. XpaurfUtt (xpat'^M-)* avert, help, late in present ; [Horn. xpa(CMi}<'<^» ^XP"^' fffifjaa ; 2 a. ex/'<*'<''MO'']- (7.) Xpdo|uu, Mse, (perhaps mid. of xP^^)i X/"^<'Me«. ^X/"?'''''/*'?''* f^XPWat. exp'^OWi [fut. pf. »cexpi}^«* [Hdt. x/>«'"otJ. &c. see § 98, Note 2. Xp&«>, flfive wacles, XP^<^t ^XPV Xp^s and x/>V (as if from xP^w), occasionally have the meaning of XpUea, XPU^t, (4.) Xp^M, anoint, sting, xP^ffu, lxf*<''«» f^XP*M<»t (or -tcr^ai), ixf^ KixP<^<^f^h exP'^^V''* (II>) ^da>, ntJ, with 71 for d in contracted forms (§ 98, N. 2), ^^, ^^i*, l^ij, &c. ; gen. in compos., -^:J(rw, -I^Tjffo, -}f/i^ao/mi, -eij/ijffdfiriv. ^ti&ra, deceive, \l/etjT^ofmi, Jvri/Mi, euvif- 6yfv. Classic writers use eirpa/iriv (§123) for later uvtivdfi.riv (or euvjjffd- imp.) jd-fyrofuu. k4xpv/mi, 1 2. For xistf subj. /. 'Airrf- diroxpav, ^(xa, [Ion. ) meaning I^Tj, &c. ; [on.]; 2 a. fwtra [Ion. ia(, a. m. INDEXES. yr iuvijffd- N. B. In these Indexes the principal references are made to the pages of the Grammar. But a more precise reference to some part of the page, or to a section, sub-section, or note, is added in a parenthesis whenever it seemed necessary. For forms of verbs, see the Catalogue of Verbs. For forms of irregular nouns, see pp. 50-52. ..-.!? GEEEK IFDEX. 5 made to ce to some , is added • forms of lar nouns, A 5 ; open vowel 6 ; in contraction 9 (3, 4); becomes t) in temp, aug- ment 119 (end); a changed to rf at end of vowel verb stems 131 (1), in vbs. in fxi 156 (N. 1); changed to rj in 2d perf. 132 (3); e changed to a in liquid stems 133 (4); Doric d for ij 25 (1); d as con- nect, vowel 144, 147 (1); as suffix 182 (1), 185 (11). o- or av- privative 188 (a); copula- tive 188 (N. 2). ^ improi)er diphth. 6; by contrac- tion 9 (en w. partic. 304 (end). &Y€ and iLytrt w. imperat. 291 (top). A-ycvrroSi &c. w. gen. 228 (N. 1). A^ilpAts declined 54. d*YV(is, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4). A-yX* w. gen. 229 (2). dv«, augm. of ^0701* 120 (N. 4). d8cX<^l AV. gen., dat., and accus. 239, 242. d|iUvw|ii, augment 124 (N. 3). d|ioi(rPt)T^u, augment 124 (N. 8). du^w and dp4«ircpos 70 ; w. ail. 204 (N. 2). dv (Epic k4), adv. 253-256 : see Contents, p. xxiii. Two uses : in apodosis 253, in protasis and final cl. 254. In apodosis, w. second- ary tenses of indic. 254 (3), 268 (2), 264 (2), 267 (2), 272 (6), 276 (2); w. optative 255 (§ 210), 263 (2), 265 (2), 269 (2), 272 (ft), 276 (4); w. Tut. indic. (Horn.) 254 (§ 208, 2); w. subj. used as fut. 3G4 GREEK INDEX. (Horn.) 255 (2), 291; w. infin. and partic. in apoil. 255, 285, 273 (top). In protasis w. subj. 254 (end), 263 (2), 265 (1), 261) (1), 270 ; dropped when subj. becomes opt. 282 (3). In final clauses w. , augment 123 (§ 104, N. 1). dvrl w. gen. 236. A^ios declined 53. A^ioi and d^iou w. gen. 227 (N.). dirais, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4); w. gen. 228 (N. 2). Aircipos w. gen. 228 (N. 1). diriirr^w w. dat. 230 (end). dirXdos, dirXoCs declined 65, 56. dir)Li and diro8£8o|iiak 245 (N. 3). dir^XXvpii, augm. of plpf 122 (N. 2). *Airersonal pron. 71 (1), 206 (2) ; intensive adj. pron. 72 (N. 1), 206 (1); w. subst. pron. omitted 206 (1, IX.)', position w. article 204 (N. 6); for reflexive 206 (2 N.); compared 66 (end). 6 aCrrds 73 (2); tojJtoO, &c. 73 (N.). atlroC, &c. for iavrov 73. d(^lT))M, augment 124 (N. 3); opt. forms 176 (N. 1). dx9o|Uv<|> riv< Imv 232 (N. 5). dxpt as prepos. w. gen. 237, 229 (N.); as conj. 279. -do, denom. vbs. in 186; contract forms infl. 115-118 ; dial, forma 154, 155. B, middle mute, labial, and sonant 8 ; euph. changes before a lingual 14 (1), bef. a 14 (2), bef. m 14 (3); inserted between fi and \ or /o 13 (N. 1); changed to in pf. act. 138 {b). ialvo, formation 129 (4, N. 1). JdKXOS {KX) 13. Sao-CXcia 30, 182 (a, N.): fiariv 246 (top); ypd and 8avc(to|uu 245 (N. 2). Sdlt, accent 22 (3, N. 1). 8/, in & )Uv ... & 84 204, 205 (N. 1 end 2); in iipodosis 274 (2). -8«, local ending' .'i2 ; cnclit. 23. 8, augm. 124 (top). 8iaKov{(i>, augm. 124. 8vaX<70|iai, pf. 121 (top); w. dat. 233 (N. 1). 8iaTcM«i w. partic. 303 (1), 304 (N.). 8i8d, formation 130 (N. 3); w. two ace. 217 ; causative in mid. 245 (N. 2). 8l8u|ii, synopsis 159, 165, 166 ; infl. of /ut-forms 159-165; redupl. 157 (3), 168 (2); impf. 158 (top), cona- tive 246 (N. 2); .tor. in ko 137 (1, N. 1). 8£kt)v, adverbial accus. 215 (2). 8iopv(r(r«ii, augm. of plpf. 122 (N. 2). SioTi. 288 ; w. inf. (Hdt.) 294 (top). i dC6 GREEK INDEX. ¥■' m •r 1:1): SiirXdinoff, &c. (as coinpar. ) w. sen. 2^6 (N. 1). Si^dw, coiitnutioii 118 (N. 2). SiftiKdOw l&'J (11). 8)fc«««, acuunt ;V2 (3, N. 1). 8oul, 8oto< (Hum.) 6*J (N. 1). -Wv (-W) or -ti86v, atlv. in 186 (18). 8oK^w (SoK-) 130; inipers. SoKti 11)3 (N. 2); Mof« or 8^8o»cTa» in decroi's, &c. 298 (end) ; (u)i) ^Moi SoKtiy 298. 8pao-«{, adv. w. gen. 229 (2). €«T« . . . Art (fi) 307 (5). ilccOo, 2 pf. 123, 130, 133 (3, N. 1). P^. GREEK INDEX. 3C7 , coniv* to i4 ; Heldoiii .(3, N. 2). . 206. i)- i)h)f. mid. >'2 (N. 1). eruUy omit- iot-m)t«'). I), 169 {'A); I 161, 162. ;N. 2). a. iuH. 114 ; from 1 12^ {?!». (for €e) 121 (top). 70 ; wlu'thcr, ^ap in wishes 52 (11). ). »\t)' US copula and . 1) ; w. pred. or part. gen. ^S2 (4); l); stiiise 243 (N, 2). 4\dx, &c. w. fut. infin. and aor. 251 (N. 2). or pres. 4Xir£t, declinc, 276. 4ir^v 254, 275, 276. M w. gen., dat., and accus. 239; in comp. 233. Iiri for iTTcffTt 242 (N. 5). 4mev|UM w. gen. 222 (2), 218 (Rem.). MoTOfMii 168(1); ^ir/(rTwl58(N.3); accent of subj. and opt. 158 (N. 2); w. partic. 304. 4irpid|iT)v (irpia-) 158 (end); synop- sis 159; inflected 164, 165. Ip4(r 129 (4, N. 1). 4pflA>w. dat. 233 (N. 1). Ipi«, accus. of 37 (2). 'bpiUat, 'Ep)ii)s, declined 30. 4ptt>TdM w. two accus. 217. «s, stems of 3 decl. in 42. 4s w. accus. 237 : sco or eov (Ion.) 25 (3). €« to e (through tF) 45 (N. I't, 126 (2). I ft ' ,1 ! ( 368 GREEK INDEX. m: M ''} ■I i «u, aiigin. of vbs. compounded w. 124 ('2); w. TToUw, Trdcrxw, d/coiiw, &c. 217 (end); w. irpdvau) 218 (top). efi, pron. for o^ 72 (N. 2). cv8a£|iMv declined 56, 57; accent 21 (1, N.). cllcXms, 57 (N. 3), accus. 37 (2). cicp-ycriw, augm. 124 (2). ctuOii w. gen. 229 (2). evOis w. partic, 301 (N. 1). c^kX^tis, 43 (N. 4). citvoost c^vovs, compared 64 (N. 3). c^ipCcrKt.) w. partic. 303 (2). cSpos, accus. of specif. 215 (1). cdpvs, wide, Horn. ace. of 59 (N. 1). -CDS, nouns in 45, 182 (2). -viwf denom. vbs. in 186. |d>opd(i» w. partic. 303 (3). ^«j>' <^ or €()> ^€ w. intin. 297 (end) ; w. fut. ind. 278 (N. 2). ^XP^v or XP'^I^ i^ apod, without dv 268 (N. 2). Ix» w. partic. for perf. 303 (N. 2). exoMai 246 (top); w. gen. 222 (1). 4xOp troiioTw, &c. 232 (No. 5). ^8iis compared 64 (1) ; rjSluv de- clined 65. ^j^, 1\(, interrog. (Horn.) 307. i^c£8t)s, &c. (olSa) 179. fjtiv (el/it) 174. {JKurra superl.) 65. in nom. pi. of nouns in -ei% 45 (3, N. 2). wi 0"* y\%, in dat. pi. 1 decl. (Ion.) 31. f^Q-a-uiv (comp.) 65. T)v, diphthong 6; augm. of ev 122 (end). ^X<& decl. 46. V|«s (Ion.) decl. 47 (N. 1). 0, rough mute, lingual, and sui J 8 ; euph. changes before lingual 14 (1), bef. /A 14 (3), dropped bef. a 14 (2). OdXao-o-a decl. 29. ^o.^lXfa w. partic. 304 (N.). edirrw (ra^-) 16 (2, N.). Odpo-os and Opdo-os 1 3 (to]i). eATwv 207 ie 188 (d). I. J (2). ). :. 1). 85 (17); 189 (6). nouns in -ci)s 45 1 decl. (Ion.) 31. augm. of €v 122 (N. 1). glial, and suid 8 ; )efore lingual 14 ), dropped bef. a .04 (N.). I, N.). ! 13 (top). ,64(1). 222 (2), 224 (1) ; interrog. subj. 291 ",2, 186. tup). (N. 4). O^p declined 41. 6^s declined 41. -Oi, local end. 52, 186. -^tin 1st fior. pass, iniper. becomes ti after 0r,- 16 (3), 149 (3). Ov^o-KM {(fav-), metath. 134 (a); t; for draSO (N. 2); fut. perf. act. 139 (c, N. 2); perf. as pres. 247 (N. 6). OoluidTiov (by crasis) 11. epl|, rpixiJs 16 (2, N.). 9vy6kTr\p declined 48. I, close vowel 6 ; contr. w. foil, vowel 10, 44 (N. 3); length. tot 119 (end), 125 (11.), 128, 131,to«125 (II.); t added to demonstr. 75 (N. 2); modal sign in opt. 146 (end); iu redupl. of pres. stem 129 (end), 157 (3), 168(2); representing > of ja 15 (7), 16. i:afor/ifo(Hom.)69(N. 1). ldo|iat 131 (end). -ihifi, patronym. in 184 (9). -{8iov, diminutives in 184 (8). KSpis declined 57 (N. 2). i8p6w, contraction 118 (N. 3). IBpwetjv (ISpOw) 140 (VI. N. 2). ic or ii] as modal sign in opt. 146 (end), 147 (3). -llju, denominative verbs in 186. ti)|iii conjug. 175, 176; aor. in xa 137 (1, N. 1). lKv{o|fcai 129 (3). -iKos, adj. in 185 (13). tXuv? adj. declined 54. -IV in ace. sing. 37 (2). tv, Dodc for ol' 73 (N. 7). I'vtt final conj. 259, 260, 261. -lov, diminutives in 184 (8). -los, adj. in 185 (12). linriJTtt, nom. (Hom. ) 31 (2). 'I, augment 124 (if. 3). Kd9T)|iiai conjug. 177. KoAClu, augment 124 (N. 3). Ka6CirTT||ii as copul. vb. 194 (Rem.). Kal T^v w. infin. 205. Ka£ir^ w. partic. 301 (N. 1). KaCw 128 (3). KaK 128 (3). icXavo-idw, desidor. vb. 186 (N. 1). -kX^tIS, proper louns in, decl. 43. kX^ttttjs, compared 66 (end). kXCvw, drops u 133 (6); 114 (rf). KXii 52 (N. 3). Kvdw, contraction 118 (N. 2). Kpc£(r(r(i>v, KpdTurros 65 (1). 24 111 a 370 GREEK INDEX. r>l il i *> Kp^)ia|iai 168 (1); accent of subj. and opt. 158 (N. 2). Kplva, drops »» 133 (6). Kpva w. gen. 229 (2). Krdofiai, augm. of perf. 121 (N. 2); perf. subj. and opt. 150 (1). KT€£v» 128 (top), 133 (4, N. 1), 134 (top). Kv8p6$ compared 64 (end). kvkX

synopsis 86, 87; meaning of tenses 92 ; conjug. 94-103 ; Xi/wj/ and XcXuKtis declined 59, 60; quan- tity ot;^u 132 (N. 1). XtpcDv, X^VTos 65 (1). M, liquid, nasal, and sonant 7, 8 ; /i^X and fk^p for /iX and fip \Z (N. 1). -|io, neut. no'ins in 183 (4). (id, in oaths, w. ace. 216. |ialop.ai (/uo) 128 (3, N.). (laKp^s, decl. of 53; fiaKpip \v. conip. 234 (2). )tdXa compared {fxaWov, fiaXiffra) 67 (end). Mopadwvi.. &c., dat. of place 236 ' . (N. 11. ■ \ p.dxo)/iai w. dat. 233 (N. 1). lUya.9 declined 62, 63; compared. 65. \Uliuv for fielj^uv 65, 15 (end). -|iic6ov in 1st pers. dual 146 (N. 3). |Jbc£{(i>v 65, 15 (end). |u£po|iai, augm. of perf. 121 (top). [ktliiiv, |icto-Tos 66 (5). |UXas declined 58, 59. |UXci w. dat. and gen. 223 (top), 231 (top). |icXXw augment 120 (N. 2); w. inKn. as periph. fut. 151 (6), 250 (N). |i^|iVT)|Jiai, perf. subj. and opt. 150 (1); as pres. 247 (N. 6); w. partic. 304 (end). (ji^v, inofi^v . . . 664 204, 205. -|i€vai,-jA€v,ininlin. 158(14), 172(9). Mcv^cA>s and McWXAos, accent 33 (N. 2). |JicvTdv (by crasis), 11. |icers. sing. 14 (end), 145 (N. 1). 6, f|, T<{, article, decl. of 71 ; syntax 199-205 ; in Honi. 199, 200, in Attic 200, 201 ; 6 M^" ... 6 5^ 204, 205 ; proclitic forms 24, when accented 25 (N. 2). See Article. 8, rel. (neut. of 6s), for 6rt (Horn.) 288 (2). ivSuKovra (Ion.) 69 {^.). 8o«, •fjBf, T w. dat. 233. 6|tvv|fci (6/i-, ofw-) 135 (N.); w. ac- cus. 213 (N. 2). 8|ioios w. dat. 233. 6vap 50 (3). dvlvT)|u {dm-) 168 (N. 2). fivofia {by name) 215 (1). dvo^dj^tt w. two aceus. 218 ; in pass. w. pred. noun 194. igtivo), pf. and plpf. pass. 114 (d). 00 contracted to ow 9 (2). -oos and -oov, nouns in 33, 34 ; ad- ject, in 54-56. 8ov for oi5 78 (top). i>ir)], oirqvCxo, oirdOcv, 6iroi 79. fiirtoreev w. gen. 229 (2). oiroioSi oirtfo'os 78. oiroT* rel. 79, 275 ; causal 288 ; bvb- Tav 254, 275. oiroTcpos 78. 8irow 79. httvlu {6irv-) 128 (3, N.). 8irws, rel. adv. 79 ; as indir. inter- rog. w. subj. or opt. 284 ; as final particle 259, 260, 261, sometimes w. 6.V 260 (1, N. 2); in obj. cl. w. fut. ind. 2t)l, rarely w. &v 261 (N. 1); 67ra>s fir) w. Int. after vbs. of fcariwj 262 (N. 1), w. ellipsis of "leading vb. 262 (N. 2). &irm for (is in ind. , otcwv, iWoio'i 78 (N. 2). oTi, tMt, in ind. quot. 281, 282, 283 ; in direct quot. 281 (2, N.); because, causal 288, 289 ; not elided 12 <^-2). Stis, Sriva, Srtvas, orrco, orri 78 (top). ov length, from o 15 (6); for o in Ion. 25 (2). -ov in gen. sing. 28, 31, 32, 35 (2, N.); for -fao in 2d pers. mid. 145. o4, o4k, o4x 12 (2); accent 24 (end); use 263 (3), 260 (top), 307-310 ; ovK iad' birws, &c. w. opt. (without &v) 270 (N. 1). See oi |*^ and |i^ oi. oi5, ol, K, &c, 71, 72 ; synt. 205. oS rel. adv. 79. oiU 307 ; oidi eU and oiSeii 70 (top). o48' ws 24 (end); oiSi woWoO Sel 224 (top). oiWs 70 (top), 307; oiid^pet kc. 70 (top); ovdeU 8 and 5^ 208 (N. 4); TttOro and toOto as adv. accus. 215 (2); o{>Toan5 (N. 2). ovTots and oiiru 12 (3). ovx : see ov. 6^Cka (<50cX-), owe, 128 (N. 1); &€\ov ill wishes 290 (N. 1, 2), 268 (N. 2). ddi^XXw, increase 128 (N. 1). 6(HXX», owe (Horn. = dtptiXu), 128 (N. 1); impf. CbtpeWov in wishes 290 (N. 1). jtbcXos 50 (3). Il<)>pa, as final part. 260 ; until 279. -o« denoni. verbs in 186 ; infl. of contr. forms 115-118. -ou, &c. Horn, form of vbs. in au 154 {b); Horn. fut. in 6u (for d in perf. act. 138 (b). •n-aCttt, double stem 127 (N. 1). irais, accent 22 (3, N. 1); voc. sing. 38 (c). irdXou. w. pres. (incl. perf.) 247 (N. 4). wdp for vapd (Horn.) 12 (N. 3). iropd, w. gen., dat., and accus. 240, 242 ; in comp. 233. irdpa for vdpeari 242 (N. 5). -iraf>avo|i^, iroXc|it|;a> w. dat. 233 (N. 1); disting. Irom 7ro\e/t6w 187 (N. 3). iro'Xis, declined 43, 44 ; Ion. forms 44 (N. 3). iroXX6«, Ion. = voUs 63 (N. 1). iroXtfs, declined 62, 63 ; Ion. forms 63 (N. 1); compared 66 ; w. art. 202 (end); ol iroWol and t6 vo\0 202 (end) 220 (N. 1); ttoXi) and TToWd as adv. 67 (2); iroWta w. comp. 234 (2) ; woWod Set and om woWov del 224 (top). iro|iirf|v ir4p.irciv 214 (top). iroppM or 7rp6 w. gen. 229 (2). IloiruSdttv, IIoo'CbSMv, accus. 37 (2, N. 1); accent of voc. 21 (1, N.). 'ir6tro% ; irotrds 78. ir (or -pds) 78. irdrcpov or irdrcpo, interrog. 307 (.^). irow; 79; w. part. gen. 220 (N. 3). iroi? indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2). irou8,nom. sing. 37 (top); ace. 37 (2). irpaos, declined 63 ; two stems of 63 (N. 2). irpdo-o-u (7rpd7-), perf. 138 (6); 2nd perf. 133 (3, N. 1), 139 (rf, N. 2); seldom w. two accus. 218 (top); c8 and kokcDs irpdaffu 218 (top). irp^irci impers. 193 (N. 2). irp«rPcur/js, irpccrpirrris, irp^o-pvs 51 (26). irpco-pcvw, denom. verb 186. irpfv, formation 281 (IstN.); w.finite moods 280; w. infin. 281, 299; irpt.'^281 (1st N.). irpo, w. gen. 237 ; not elided 12 (N. 2); contracted w. augment 123 (N. 1), or w. foil, e or o 188 (3); irp6 Tov or vpoTov 205 (2). irpotKa, gratis, as adv. 215 (2). irp6s, w. gen., dat., and ace. 240, 241, 242 ; in compos. 233 ; irp6s, besides, as adv. 241 (N. 2). irpo(r8cxo|Uvi(> \kol i 188 (3). irptoTioTOS 66 (2). irpwTOS 66 (2); r6 irpOnov or irpCnoi', at first 215 (2). irvv6dvo|MU w. gen. 222 (2); w. par- tic. 304 (end). irci, indef., enclitic 23 (2). irtis; 79. ir«s, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2). P, liquid 7 ; sonant 8 ; ^ at begin- ning of word 7 ; pp after syll. augm. and in comp. after vowel 18 (§ 15, 2), 119; M/3p for/*/) 13 (N. 1). ^d, enclitic 23 (4). ^ffSios compared 66. ilalv«129 (4, N. 1). ^OMV, ^ao~ros 66 (9). {tio i^v-) 126 (2). ^i^Yvvfii (pay-), 2 pf. (ppuya 133 (3, N. 1). &T|{8ios, j^i)lrcpos, 66 (9). pt.y6w, infin. fiiywv 118 (N. 3). ^(s, nose, declined 41. -poos, adject, in, decl. of 63 (2). -pos, adject, in 185 (17). S, two forms 6 (top); sibilant, semi- vowel, and surd 7, 8 ; after mutes, only in ^ and ^14 (2); v before cr 15 (6); Unguals changed to at begin - after syll. after vowel Jp for /ip 13 p(i)7a 133 (3, N. 3). f 53 (2). ibilant, senu- I after invites, I); V before , deaideratives in 186 (N. 1). o-(|iiv6s, com])ared 64. vio, o-cO 72 (N. 2). o-cvtt ((Ti;) 126 (2). o-CMVTOv (Hdt). 74 (top). -iv (notcr^f) inTrag. 72 (N. 1). o-^<$s for ajftirtpoi 74 (N. 1). (N. 2). o-d>(i>tTcpos 74 (N. 1). 0-9WV aircov, &c. 74 (N.). OTColijv (of /xw) 148 (N. 1). SwKpdTTis, decl. of 43 (N. 1); ace. ^49 (6); voc. 21 (1, N.). o-wua declined 41; nom. formed 36 (1); dat. pi. 14 (2), 39. a-A)T'^p, o-uTcp 21 (1, N.). a-(d(t>p(i>v compared 64 (N. 4). T, smooth mute, lingual, surd 8 ; dropped before a 14 (2); dropped or ch. to p^ and nfiuap^oiiiai 245 (N. 3). Wv, Doric (= w. compar. 234 (2). t, Tp^x», &c. 16 (2, N.). -Tpia, fern, noiins in 182 (b). • rpifiw, iierf. act. 126 (N.); pf. and plpf. mid. infl. Ill, 112, 113 (N. 2). TpiijpTis, declined 42, 43; accent ^0 (if.l). TpiirXdo-ios \v. gen. 226 (top). -Tp£$, fern, nouns in 182 (b). Tpi\-6s, gen. of ftpl^ 16 (2, N.). -Tpov, neut. nouns in 183 (5). Tp6irov, adv. accus. 215 (2). Tpvx«, Tpvxw 135 (N.). TpwY«> {Tpdy-) 126 (top), 133 (top). Tp«S, accent 22 (3, N. 1 ). TV, Dor. (= av) 73 (N. 7). TwyxAvcD {tvx-) 129 (top); w. gen. 222 (1); w. partic. 304 (4) ; tvxop (r'c. abs.) 302 (2). Tiv.j.lon. (=0-15) 72 (N. 2). TtJTTTw w. cogn. accus. 214 (top). Tw for tIpi, and T«p for tivL 76. Tu», therefore, Horn. 205 (2). -T(i>p, masc. nouns in 182 (h). Ttis 79. Y, close vowel 6 ; contr. w. foil, vowel 10 (5), 44; length, to v 119 GREEK INDEX. 37r ibat. or adi* N.). (N.). 145. (N. 2). . 2). 78, 200 ('0- = ToicrSe) 75 Uuvl 142; for .)146 (N. 5)-. (3). ,vro« 78 ; to- 34 (2). op). for rt»'6s 76. B3 (5, N.). 59. i (4,N. l)fs« 5)- (2, N.). 182 (fc).. , J (N.); pf. and 111, 112, Hi 5, 43; accent ^^ 226 (top). [182 {h). 16(2, N.). ii 183 (5). [215 (2). top), 133 (top). In. 1). Lop); w. gen. 222 304 (4) ; Tuxo" '2(N. 2). ps. 214 (top), for Tivl 76. , 205 (2). [in 182 (b). ,, contr. w. foil. ; length, to V 119 (end); 125 (II.) 128, 131, to ev 125(11.) -vSptov, diniiiiiilives in 181 (8). vSwpdncl. of 52 (2'J). in, impels. 193 (top); Ooj'toj (gun. ab.s.) 302 (1, N.). VI diphthong 6 (3). -wia in pf. mrt. fern. 69-61, 149 (end). vlds decl. 52 (30); oni. after art. 201 (N. 4). (»|U, {.|Us(Dor.)73(N. 7). ifUrcpos 74, 207 ; v/i^rc/joi airuv, &c. 207 (N. 4). iviv, vpiiv, a(vta, synopsis of 90, 91 ; meaning of tenses 93 ; fut. and aor. inflect- ed 106-110 ; pf. mid. 112, 113, (N. 2), 114 {d), 15 (N. 4); forma- tion of pres. 127 {d), of fut. 136 (2), of aor. 137 (2), of perf. act. 134 (N.), of aor. pass. 140 (vi. N. 2); .synt., w. partic. 304, 305. dKivcpds cl|ii w. partic. 305 (N. 1). <)>c£So)iai w. gen. 222 (2). (b^pr^os, t^praros, ^piiXm, inflect, of contract forms 115-118 : pnrtic. \^«|r declined 39. Xc7»n- pounds 21 (1, N.). ^powlXfa vv. 6irwi and fut. ind. 261 ; w. nil and subj. or opt. 262. ipovTio-T'/is w. accus. 213 (N. 3). f>ov8o« {irp6, 68ov) 188 (3). ivXo| declined 39. '«v^«is, not contracted 59 (N. 2). IMS (0«i«O, %''^ accent 22 (3, N. 1). X, rough mute, ])alatal, and »urd 8 ; not doubled 13 ; euph. ch. before a lingual 14 (1), bef. a- (0 14 (2), bef. /* 14 (3); p before x 15 (5). Xal (xal al) and x,ol (Kal oi) 11. XOfUis declined 58 ; compared 64 (N. 5);. IT dropped in dat. plur. 15 (N. 2). \6jpiv as adv. accus. 215 (2). Xcip declined 52. X<4>wv (x^pelwv), \(tlpivro9 65. \<« iX^-), pres. 126 (2); fut. 136 (N. 3); aor. 137 (1, N. 2). Xol (Kal ol) and xal (^at ai) 11. Xpdoiiai w. dat. 234 (N. 2); w. dat. and cogn. ace. 214 (N. 2). Xpdci), contraction 118 (N. 2). Xpif| 168 (1); w. infin. 193 (N. 2). XPV" or ixPWt contraction 118 (N. 4); in apod, (without &i>) 268 (N. 2). X<^a declined 29 ; gon. sing. 29 (2). X«»pfs w. gen. 229 (2). ^, double consonant 7 ; surd 8 ; syll. augm. before 121 (2). J/do), contracted 118 (N. 2). \(f^<{>kar^r viKdv 214 (Rem. ). fl, open long vow(4 6 ; length, from 119 (end), 132(^): for o in stem of Att. 2d decl. 33 (2); nouns in w of 3d decl. 46, 47, voc. sing. 38 (3). ip, diphthong 6 ; by augment for oi 122. (S, interjection, w. voc. 213 (2). »8«79, 208 (N. 1). I 378 GREEK INDEX. ;"; ii^ f -v, nmsc. (lenom. in 183 (6). •«v ill gen. plur. 35 ('2, N. ), 32 ; -dv (tur -duv) ill lal dccl. "M, 21 (2). wv, iHirtic. of flfxi, 172 ; accent 22 (3, N. 2). (lip^ w. gen., as dat. of time 235 (N. 'J). -US, noiin» in (Attic decl. ) 33 (2); udj. in ut, uu 54 ; (>f. paitic. in ws ;»t»-t)l ; adverbs t57 (1). un, R'l. adv. 79 ; in rt'l. sent. 275 ; w. paitic. 301 (N. 2), 305 {N. 4); in wishes w. opt. 2S9 (N. 2); in iudir. quot. 281-283 ; cuusal 288, 289 ; as final particle 260, 261 (N. 1 and 3); like uircre w. inHn. 2U7 (N. 1); w. iibsol. inUn. 298. ott, l»repos. w. accus. 237, 242 (3). «»s, thus 79 ; accent 24 (end). (SoVcp, w. participle in comparisons 302 (N. 3) ; w. accus. absolute 302 (2, N.) ; Siffwfp hy (i 25(J (3) ; accent 24 (N. 3). MOTc, w. inlin. 297 ; w. indie. 271* ; ind. disting. from inf. 279 (Ht'iii. ); accent 24 (N. 3). (tfv, Ion. diphtlioii;^ 6. «i^6s, cadTos, Twt&To (Ion.) 72 (N. 6). ENGLISH INDEX. [N. B. See Note on p. 362. J Abandon, rbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225. Ability or fitness, verbal adj. denot. 186 (18). Ablative, functions of in Greek 212 (Rem.) Absolute case: gen. 229, 302 (1); accus. 302 (2). Abstract nouns, in compos. 189 (6) ; w. art. 200 (b) ; neut. adj. w. ait. for 199 (2). Abuse, vba. expr., w. dat. 230 (2). Acatalectic verses 316 (3). Accent, general principles of 18-20 ; of nouns and adj. 21, 22; in gen. and dat., of oxytones 21 (2), of Attic 2d decl. 21 (end), of 3d ded. 22 (3) ; of verbs 22, 23 ; of parti- ciples 22 (N. 2) ; of opt. in at and 01 23 (N. 4), 19 (§ 22, N. 1) ; of c(m- tiacted syllables (incl. crasis and elision) 20, 21 ; enclitics 23, 24 ; proclitics 24. Accent and ictus in verse 312 (N.). Acc'ouipaniment, dat. of 235 (r»); w. airoU 235 (5, N.). _ Accusative case 27 ; sing, of 3d decl. 37 ; contract, ace. and nom. ]>1. alike in 3(1 decl. 42, 45 (N. 1) ; subj. of inlin. 192 (2), 298 (§269, N.) 299 ; after prepos. 237-242, in compos. 242 (end) ; ace. ab.sol. 302 (2), rare'y w. partic. of personal verb 302 (2, N.) ; in appos. w. .sen- tence 196 (N. 3) ; in fin. as accu.s. 292, 293, 294 (2), 296 (2) ; re- tained w. passive 244 (n. 2). Other syntax of accus. 213-218 : see Con- tents, p. XX. Accusing, vbs, of, w. gen. 224 (2). Acknowledge, vbs. signif. to, w. par- tic. 304. Action, suffixes denot. 182 (3). Active voice 79 (1), meaning of tenses 92, 93 ; person, endings 142 ; use of 243 ; form of, incl. most iii- trans. vbs. 243 (N. 1) ; object of, as subj. of pass. 244. Acute ac(!ent 18 ; of oxytone changed to grave 20. Addressing, voc. in 213 (2) ; nom. in 213 (N.l. Adjectives, formation 185 ; inflection 53-63: see Contents, p. xvi. ; com- parison 64-66 ; agreement w. nouns 196, 197 ; attributive and pred, 196 (Rem.) ; pred. adj. w. copula- tive vb. 194 ; referring to omitted subj. of infin. of copul. verb 194 (N.3), 195, of other verbs 198 (N.8); used as noun 198, 199; verbal, w. gen. 227, 228, w. accus, 213 (N. 3) ; verbal in tos 150 (3), in T(?o$ and riov 150 (3), 305, 306, 235 (4). Admire, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2). Adonic verse 324 (1). Advantage or disadv., dat. of 231 (3). Adverbial accus. 215 (2). Adverbs, how formed from adj. 67, 186 ; from partic. 67 (N.) ; eom- pari.son 67 ; rel. 79 ; lo(ial, iVom nouns or pron. 52 ; numeral 08, 69 ; syntax 243 ; w. gen. 220, 229 (2) ; w. dat. 232 (end), 233 (top) ; assim. of rel. adv. to antec. 211 (n. 3) ; w. article for adj. 200 (end), 201 (top). Advising, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2). Aeolic dialect 2 ; forms of aor. opt. in Attic 153 (13) ; form of infin. and partic. 153 (14, 15) ; forms iu m 170 (2). Age, prouom. adj. denot. 78. 880 ENGLISH INDEX. i K H Agent, iiounH denoting 182 (2) ; expr. at'tur pass. ))y gen. w. \m'\t. 24 ( ( 1 ), by (lilt. (t'sp. jiftfiiir. jMiss. ) SM (.{), 241 (2); w. vi'iImiIh in t/os it;, ilat., w. vurl)ul ill r^ov Ity tint, or uucujs. 2:ir> (4), 244 (2), yu5, 306. AgriH-iiifnt, of vt>rl» w. uultj. tioiii. 1U3 (1) ; of tulj. iic. w. noun lUG ; of adj. w. nouns of ditf. gcnd. or numb. 11)7 (X. 1-3). Aim at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (1). Alcaics and Alcaic stanza 324 (5). Alexandrian |K'i'iod 2. Alexandrine verse (Engl.) 320 (end). Alpha : see a ; privative 1H8 (u) ; copulative 188 (N. 2). Alphabet 5 ; obsolete letters 6 (N. 2). Anaclusis in Ion. verse 326 (2). Anacrusis 314 (4). Anapaest 313; cyclic 315 (4); in trochaic verse 318 ; in iambic verse 319, 320. Anapaestic rhythms 322, 323 ; sys- tems 323. Anastrophe 20 (§ 23, 2). Anceps, syllaba 315 (5). Anger, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1) ; w. dat. 230 (2). Antecedent of rel. 209-211 ; agree- ment w. 209 ; omitted 210 ; as- simil. of rel. to 210, of antec. to rel. 211 (N. 4) ; attraction 211, w. assimil. 211 (end). Definite and indef. antec. 274, 275. Antepenult 17 (top). Aiitibucchius 313. Antistrophe 318 (4). Aoiist (first) 80 ; secondary tense 80 ; tense stem 83 (IIL), 137 (III.), 141 ; aor. in Ka in three vbs. 137 (1, N. 1) ; person, endings 142 (2) ; conn, vowel 144 (1), 145, w. end- ings 146; augment 84 (c), 119; iterat. end. aKov and aKdfirjv (Horn. ) 152 (10) ; Hom. c and o (for rj, w) in subj. 153 (12) ; accent of iiifiii. act. 22 (1). Second Aorist 80 (N. 1); tense stem 83 (V.), 140 (V.), 141 ; secondary 80; peis. endings 142 (2) ; cojin. vow, 144 (1), 145, w. endings 145 ; augm. 84 (c), 119; reduiH. (Hom.) 120 1 (N. 3) ; Att. redupl. 122 (N. 1) j iter, endings (Ion.) 152 (10) ; llniii. ill (7 152 (iS) ; l(»n. forms in subj. act. of M'-f"'"!'* 171 (7) ; ac- cent of iiiliii anartir. 22 and 23 (§ 2(1, N. 3). Aorist Passive (lirst and m>i-i)iid), w. act. endings 143 (3) ; t.nse stems 83 (VI., VII.), 140aiidl41(VI., VII), 141; conn, vowel : none in indie. M.'l (:j), in subj. and opt. 140 (N. 1), MJ {■.), none in impfiat. 149 (3) and intin. 149(1) ; accent of inlin. ami partic. 22 and 23 (N. 3). Syntax of Aoiist: indi(^ 240, disting. from inipf. 217 (N. 5), gnomic 252 (2), iterative 253; in (hipndent moods 248-251; when not in indir. disc, how dis- ting. from pies. 248 (end), 249(1), opt. and inlin. in indir. disc. 250, 251 ; inlin. w. vbs. of hoping, &c. 251 (N. 2) ; in partic. 252, aor. n(*t past in certain ca.ses 252 (N. 2), 304 (4). Indie, in apod. w. df 254 (3), 2«7, 268, iterative w. dt- 253 ; in protasis 204, 265, 267, 268 ; in rel. cond. .sent. 276 (2) ; in wishes 290 (2) ; in linal cl. 261 (3). Opt. w. dv 255, 269 (2), 276 (4). Intin. or partic. w. An 255. Aphaeresis 11 (N. 4). Apodosis 263 (1) ; negative of (ou) 263 (3) ; in jtast tenses of indie, w. dv 253 (end), 254 (3), 263 (2), 264 (2), 26 "?) ; various forms in cond. s» iit. 264-266, 267-270 ; w. protasis omitted 271 (2); repres. byinfin. or partic. 272(3), 273(4); implied in context 273 (N. 1) ; supiire.Hscd for effect 273 (N. 2) ; introd. by Si 274 (2). Apostrophe (in eli.sion) 11 (1). Appear, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304. Appoint, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace. 218; w. ace. and part. gen. 221 (2). Apposition 195 ; gen. in. app. w. posse.s.sive 195 (N. 1) ; nom. or ace. in app. w. sentence 196 (N. 3) ; partitive appos. 196 (N. 2). Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat. 233. Arsis and thesis, used in sense opp. to the Greek 311 (foot-note). Mlk^MrtiM ENGLISH INDEX. 38 1 122 (N. 1) ; 162 (lo); Ion. forniH in (171 (7); ^^■ tic. 22 iiail '-^^ l'ttN»ive (tivHt t'luling** l-l'* I (VI., VU.), I), 141; it>i'"- ic. 14:i (:5). >" N. 1). 147('), ) (3) luul inliii. I'm. wml purtii:. rutiixolAomtj IVom iiiii)!'. 217 5 (2), iterutivi! nooda 248-251; ilisc, how de- fend), 24y(l), udir. disc. 250, of hoping, &»'• ic. 252, aor. iu>t ses 252 (N. 2), in apod. w. A" itemtive w. Af '204, 2(55, 207, sent. 270 ('2) ; in iinul cl. 201 •55, 209 (2), 270 tie. w. dv 255. negative of (.oy) tenses of indie. 254 (3), 263 (2), • various lovniH 4-206, 267-270 ; A 271(2); repres. , 272 (3), 273 (4); ,xt 273 (N. 1); lect 273 (N. 2); (2). on) 11 (!)• ,. f. to, w. partic. f to, w. two a(!c. ,avt. p.u. 221 (2). reii. in. app. w. 1) ; nom. or ace. .'nee 196 (N. 3) ; 196 (N. 2). (lyiiifr, vr. dat. id). Assist, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 (2). Attain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (1). Attic dialect 2 ; why basis of Gram- mar 2. Attic 2d decl. 33 (2); redupl. 122, 120 (N. 4); future 136 (N. 1). Attraction in rel. sent. 211; joined w. assim. 211 (end), 212 (top). Attributive adjective (opp. to predi- cate) 196 (Hem.) ; position of ar- ticle w. 201-203. Attrib. com- pounds 190 (3). Augment 84 (c), 119-124 : see Con- tents, p. xviii. B.icchius 313 ; Bacchic rhythms 326. Barytones 19. I?asis in logaoedic verse 324. 15c or belong, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221 (top). Become, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221 (top). Begin, vbg. signif. lo, w. gen. 222 (1) ; w. partic. 303(1). Belong, vbs. si;;nif. to w. gen. 221 (top). Be.iefit, vbs. hignif. to, w. dat. 230 (2). Bocotia, Ac<»li;ms in 1. Brcatliings 0, 7 ; form 7 (N. 2). Bucolic diaeresis in Heroic hexam. 321 (4). Caesura 316 (1). <'all : see Name. Cardinal nund)er.s 68-70 ; decl. of 69. Caie for, vbs. signif. io, w. gen. 222 ('-'). Cases 27 (3) ; meaning 27 (3, N. 1) ; oblique 27 (end) : endings 35 ; syntax of 212 242: see Contents, pp. xx.-xxii. Catalexisandcatalectic ver.ses316 (3). Cau.sal sentences, w. conj. and indie. 288, 289 ; w. opt. (Iiid. disc.) 289 (N.), 288 (4) ; w. rclat. 279. Cau.se, expr. by gen. 224 ; by dat. 234; by partic. 300, 301 (N. 2). Caution or danger, vbs. of, w. n-f) 262. Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303 (1). Choosing, vbs. of, w. two ace. 218; w. aec. and part. gen. 221 (2). Choriambus 313 ; choriambie rhythms 325(1). Circumflex accent 18 ; origin 18 (Rem.); on contr. syll. 20. Circumstances, partic. denot. 300, 301. Claim, vlis. signif. to, w. gen. 221 (end), 222(1). Classes of verbs : eight of vbs. in w 125-131, two of vbs. in /ut 157. Close vowels 6 (N.), 10 (5); stems ending in 35 (top). Clothing, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217. Cognate mutes 8 (2, N.). Cognate accus. 213-215. Collective noun, w. plur. verb 193 (3); w. pi. p.irtie. 197 (N. 3) ; loll, by pi. relat. 209 (IS. 2) Collision of vowels, how avoided 8 (§8). 382 ENGLISH INDEX. III. ■■; ^ ■f- I ■! Coininand or exhortation '290, 289 (N. 3), 262 (N. 4), 272 (N. 1), 247 (N. 8); verbs of commanding w. gen. 223 (3). Common Dialect 2. Comparative degree 64-67 ; w. gen. 225 (1) ; w. dat. 234 (2). Comparison of adjectives 64, irreg. 65, 66 ; of adverbs 67 ; of some nouns and pronouns 06 (3). Comparison, verbs denot. w. gen. 226 (2). Composition of words: see Formation. Compound words 180, 187-190 ; first part of 187, second part 188 ; meaning of (three classes) 189, 190. Compound verbs 189 ; aug- ment 123, 124 ; accent 22 (§ 26 N. 1) ; w. gen., dat., or ace. 242 (end), 226, 233. Compound nega- tives, 307 ; repetition of 309, 310. Concealing, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217 ; w. infiu. and /t^ 308 (6), 295 296. Concession 272 (6), 289 (N. 3). Conclusion : see Apodosis and Condi- tion. Condition and conclusion 263 (1) ; conditional sentences 263-274 ; see Contents, pp. xxiii. and xxiv. ; classification of cond. sent. 263- 267 ; general and particular cond. (listing. 265, 266 ; comparison of Latin gen. cond. 266 (Rem. 1) ; cond. cxpr. by partic. 301 (4), 271 (1). Skc Protasis. Relative cond. sent. 275-278 : see Relative. Conjugation 84 ; of verbs in w 85- 155 ; of verbs in m 156-179. Connecting vowel 143 (4), 144 (foot- note), 82 (foot-note) ; of indie. 144, 145; of subj. 146; of opt. 147 ; of imperat. 148 ; of infin. and partic. 149 ; in iterative forms 152 (10) ; in forms in du 152 (11) ; omitted in perf. mid., aor. pass., and /ut-forms 143. Consider, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace. 218 ; w. ace. and gen. 221 ; in pass. w. gen. 221 (N.). Consonants, divisions of 7, 8 ; eu- l)honic changes in 13-16 ; double 7 (2) ; movable 12 ; consonant stems 82 (3), 35. Consonant de- clension (Third) 35. Constructio praeguans 242 (N. 6). Continue, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303 (1). Continued action, tenses of 246. Contraction 8 ; rules of, 8-10 ; quan- tity of contr. syll. 18 (§ 20, 1); accent 20 ; of nouns : 1st decl. 30, 2d decl. 33, 3d decl. 42-47 ; of adject. 54-58 ; of i)artic. 61, 62 ; of verbs in aw, ew, and ow 115- 118 ; in gen. pi. of 1st decl. 2 J (N.), of 2d decl. 32 (top); in redupl. (ee to €i) 123 (top) ; in forma- tion of words 181 (N. 3), 188 (3). See Crasis and Synizesis. Convicting, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (2). Co-ordinate and cognate mutes 8 (2, N.). Copula 191 (N. 1). Copulative verbs 194 (Rem.); case of pred. adj. or noun with infin. of 194 (N. 3), 195 (N. 4, 5). Coronis 10 (1). Correlative pronominal adj. 78 ; adv. 79. Crasis iO, 11 ; examples 11 ; quanti- ty 18 (§ 20, 1) ; accent 20 (2). Cretic 313 ; rhythms 326. Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 315 (4). Dactyl 313; cyclic 315 ; in anapaes- tic verse 322, 314 (N. 1) ; in iam- bic verse (apparent) 319, 320; in trochaic verse (cyclic) 318 ; in loga- oedic verse (cyclic) 323, 324. Dactylic rhythms 321, 322. Danger, vbs. of, w. /x-^ 262. Dative case 27 (3) ; endings of 35, 28, 32 ; in 3d decl. 39 ; syntax of 230-236 : see Contents, p. xxi. Prepositions w. dative 242 (2) Declension 28 ; of Nouns 28-52 : first 28-31, second 31-34, third 34-49, of irreg. nouns 49-52; of Adjectives 53-6.3, fust and second de(!l. 53-56; third 56, 57, first and third 57-59; of partic. 59-62 ; of irreg. adj. 62, 63 ; of the Article 71 ; of Pronouns 71-78. See Contents, pp. xvi., xvii. ENGLISH INDEX. 383 sonant de* I (N. 6). _ \v, partic. of 246. j_10 ; quan- i (§ 20, l); 1st decl. 30, 42-47 ; of tic. 61, 62 -, \nd 00) 11^- 1st decl. 2 J p); inrediilil- • in forina- .'3), 188 (3). >sis. gen. 224 (2). te mutes 8 (2, Rem.); case of with infin. ot 4,5). 1 adj. 78 ; adv. les 11 ; quanti- ;ent 20 (2). 326. iactyls 315 (4). 5 ; in anapaes- gN. 1); iniam- •) 319, 320 ■, m c) 318 ; in loga- 323, 324. 322. ii 262. endings of 35, . 39 ; syntax ot itents, p. ^ 3Lxi. Ave 242 (2) Nouns 28-52: .1 31-34, tlurd 'ouns 49-52; of iirst and second 56, 57, tivst and avtic. 59 62; of ,f the Article 71 ; See Contents, Defend, Vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 (2). Degi'ee of difference, dat. of 234 (2). Demanding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217. Demes, names of Attic, in dat. 236 (N. 1). Demonstrative pronouns 74, 75 ; synt. tZ08 : w. article 200 (c), posi- tion 203 (4) ; aiticle as denionstr. (Hom.) 199, (Att.) 204, 205 ; rel. as dem. 209 (N. 3). Denominatives 180 verbs 186. (6) ; denoni. Denying, vbs. of, w. infin. and fiifi 308 (6), 295, 296. Dependent clauses, moods in 248. Dependent moods 80 (§ 89, N.) ; tenses of 248-251. Deponent verbs 80 (top) ; principal parts of 84 (6) ; pass, and mid. depon. 80 (2, N.). Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225 ; w. two ace. 217. Derivatives 180 (b). Desiderative verbs 186 (N. 1). Desire, vbs. expr. w. gen. 222 (2). Despise, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2). Determinative compounds 190 (2). Diaeresis in verse 316, 317, 319 (end), 321 (4), 322 (top), 323 (4). Dialects 2 ; dialectic changes 25 ; dial, forms of nouns and adj. 31, 34, 43 (N. 4), 44 (N. 3), 45 (N. 4), 46 (N.), 47 (N. 3) ; of numerals 69 ; of the article 71 (N. 2) ; of pro- nouns 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78 ; of verbs in w 151-153, of contract vbs. 154, 155, of vbs. in fit 170- 172, 173, 174, 176, 177, 178, 179. Oigamma6 (N. 2), 45 (N. 1), 46 (N.), 123 (N. 2), 126 (2), 139 (d, N. 1) ; seen in metre 322 (1st note). IHiambus 313. Dimeter 317 (2) ; anapaestic 323, dartylic 321 (1), iambic 319 (2), trochaic 318 (1). !>i!iiinutives, suffixes of 184 (8). I 'iphthongs 6 ; iinproper 6 (3 and N. ) ; in contraction 9 (1, 4) ; in crasis 10 (a), 11 (6) ; elision of (poet.) 12 (top) ; augment 122* Dipody 317 (2), Direct object 191 (2), 213 (Rem.) ; of act. verb 213, 244. Direct dis- course, question, and quotations 281. Disadvantage, dat. of 231 (3). Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 (2). Displease, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w. par- tic. 303 (1). Dispraise, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224(1); Disputing, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (N. 2). Distich 318 (4) ; elegiac 321 (5). Distrusting, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2) ; w. infin. and fMrj 308 (6), 295, 296. Ditrochee 313; in Ionic rhythms 325 .(2)- Divide, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace. 217. Dochmius 313 ; dochmiac verses 326. Doing, ■■ 'js. of, w. two ace. 217. Doric dialect 2 ; future 152 (6), in Attic 136 (N. 2). Double consonants 7, 14 (2), 17 (§ 19, 2). Double negatives 309, 310, 292, 295, 296. See /irj o6 and ov /jlt^. Doubtful vowels 6. Dual 26 (end). JfTect, accus. of 214 (N. 3.). Elegiac pentameter and distich 321 (5). Elision 11, 12; ofdiphthongsl2(top); irepl, irp6, 6ti, and dat. in t not elided 12 ; accent of elided word 20 (3). Ellipsis of verb w. &u 256 (3) ; of (TKonei. w. 6ir(os and fut. ind. 262 (N. 4) ; of vb. of fearing w. ui) and subj. 262 (N. 2) ; of i»rotasis 271 (2); of apodosis 273 (N. 2). Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1). Enclitics 23, 24 ; w. accent if em- phatic 24 (3, N. 1); at end of compounds 24 (N. 3) : successive end. 24 (N. 2). Endings 26 (2) ; case-endings of nouns, 28, 32, 35 ; local 52 ; per- sonal endings of erbs 142-160 ; see Contents, p. xviii. i 384 ENGLISH INDEX. !• II, |i Endure, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303 (1). Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221 (end). Envy, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1) ; w. dat. 230 (2). Epic dialect 2. Epicene nouns 27 (2, N. 2). Ethical dative 232 (N. 6). Euphony of vowels 8-12 ; of conso- nants 13-16. Eupolideanverse317(lstN.),325(7). Exclamations, noni. in 213 (N.), voc. 213 (2), gen. 225 (3); relat. in 212 ; mark of 25. Exhorting, vbs, of, w. dat. 230 (2). Exhortations : see Connnands. Expecting, kc, vbs. of, w. fut. pies. or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2). Extent, accus. of 216 ; adnom. gen. denoting 219 (5). Falling rhythms, 317 (3). Fearing, verbs of, w. /*?) and subj. or opt. 259, 262, sometimes w. fut. ind. 262 (N. 1), w. pres. or past tense of indie. 262 (N. 3) ; ellipsis of 262 (N. 2). Feet (in verse) 311, 312, 313 ; ictus of, 311 ; arsis and thesis, 311. Fpininine nouns 27 (N. 3) ; form in participles 149 (end), in 2 pf. par- tic. (Horn.) 139 (N. 4). Feminine caesura 321 (4). Festivals, names of, in dat. of time 235. Fill, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. and gen. 223 (2). Final clauses 259-261, w. subj. and opt. 260 (l), w. subj, after past tenses 260 (2), rarely w. fut. ind. 260 (1, N. 1) ; w. ««' or /ce 260 (1, N. 2) ; w. past tenses of indie. 261 (3) ; neg. fi-^ 260 (top). Final disting. from object* clauses 259. Find, ybs. signif. to, w. partic. 303 (2). Finite moods, 80 (N.). First aorist stem, 83, 137. First passive stem, 83, 140. Fitness, &c., verbal adj. denot., for- mation of, 185 (13). Forbidding, vbs. of, w. /x^ and infin. 308 (6), 295, 296. Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 222 (2) ; w. partic. 304 (end). Formation of words 180-190 ; see Contents, p. xix. Friendliness, vbs. ex'or. : w. dat. 230 (2). Fulness and want, vbs. expr., w. gen. 223 ; adject. 228 (top). Ful- ness, formation of 'adj. expr. 185 (15). Future 80, 82 ; tense stem formetl 82, 135 (II.) ; of liquid verbs ISO (2) ; Attic fut. in w and -ovfiai 136 (N. 1) ; Doric fut. 152 (6), in Attic 136 (N. 2); second fut. pass. 141; fut. mid. as pass. 246 (N. 4). Fut. indie, expressing permission or command 247 (N. 8) ; rarely in final clauses 260 (N. 1) ; logularly in object clauses with 6irm 261 ; rarely with /xt) after verbs of fear- ing 262 (N. 1) ; in protasis 265, 269 (N. 1), 267 (N.) ; in rel. clauses expressing purpose 278 ; with i V or ^0' i^rre 278 (N. 2) ; with ov 1X7} 292 ; with 6.v (Hom.) 254 ; periphrastic fut. with fiiWw 151 (6), 250 (N.) ; optative 250 (4), 251 (N. 3), 261 (§ 217), never w. &v 255 (N.); infin. 250 (3 and N.), 251 (N. 2), 285 ; partic. 252, 285, 300 (3). Future peri'ect 80, 83 ; tense stem formed 83, 139 (c) ; active form in 2 vbs. 139 (c, N. 2), gen. peri- phrastic 151 (3) ; meaning of 246, as emph. fut. 247 (N. 9). Gender, natural and grammatical 27 (2, N. 1) ; grammat. design, by article 27 (2, N. 1) ; common and epicenii 27 (2, N. 2) ; general rules 27 (N. 3) ; gen. of 1st decl. 28, of 2d 31, of 3d 49; gen. of adjv\"tives 197. General disting. from particular sup- po.sitions 265, 266 ; foi-ms of 270, 276 ; w. indie. 270 (N. 2), 277 (N. 1) ; in Latin 266 (Rem. 1). Genitive case 27 (3) ; accent 21, 22 • of 1st decl. 28-31 ; of 2d decl. 32- 34; of 3d decl. 35, 4f (i, iN.), 44 ENGLISH INDEX. 385 and infin. .. 222 (2) ; -190 ; see w. dat. 230 . expr., w- top). Fui; j. expr. 10^ item fovnuH^ id verbs Ui(> [id -ovfiai 136 2 (6), in Attic it. pass. 111". (N.4). Fut- permission or 8) ; rarely m 1) -, logniarly ith 6tw$ 261 ; verbs of fear- 1 protasis 265, (K.); inrel. purpose 27 » , rr\ 278 (N. 2) ; nth &v (Horn.) ut. with /A^X^w . optative 250 1 (8 217), never fill. 250 (3 aiKl i5 ; partic. 252, 63 ; tense steiu I) ; active form I.' 2), gen. peri- ,nieaiung of 246, iN. 9). . of 2d decl. 02- Mf (i.i^.). ** (\. 2) ; syntax 218 (Rem.), 219- 229 : see Contents p. xx., xxi. ; gen. absol. 229, 302 ; gen. of inliu. w. ToO 295 ; juod. gen. w. inliii. 194 (end) 195, 198 (N. 8). Gentile nouns, suHixes of 184 (10), 185 (top). Glyconic verse 324 (4). Gnomic tenses 252, 253 ; present 252 (l);aori8t252(2),253,248(Keni.), in infin., opt., and partic. 253 (N. 3) ; perfect 253 (3). Grave accent 18, 19 ; for acute in oxytones 20 (top). Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2) ; w. partic. 304. Hellenes 1. Hellenistic Greek 2 (end). Herodotus, dialect of 2. Heroic hexameter 321 (4). Heteroclites 49 (end). Heterogeneous nouns 50 (2). Hexameter 317 (2) ; Heroic 321 (4). Hiatus, how avoided 8 (§ 8) ; allowed at end of vei-se 316 (c). Hindrance, vbs. of, w. jn^ and infin. 308 (6), 295, 296. Hii)pocrates, dialect of 2. Historic present 246 (N. 1), 248 (Rem.). Historical (or secondary) tenses : see Secondary. Hit, vbs. signif. to, av. gen. 222 (1). H«)ld, vbs. signif. to take hold of, w. gen. 222(1). Homer, dialect of 2 ; verse of 321 (4) ; Hellenes of 1 (end). Hoping, &c,, vbs. of, w. fut., pres., or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2). Hostility, vbs. expr., w. dat. 230 (2). Hypothetical: see Conditional. Iambus 313. Iambic rhythms 319, 320; tragic and comic iambic trim- eter 320 ; iambic systems 323 (N.). l!iiperativo 80 ; pers. endings and conn, vowels 148, 149 ; of verbs in fu 156 (end) ; syntax 258 ; in commands 290 ; in prohib. w. fi-^ (pres.) 291 ; w. Aye, (f>4pe, Wi, 2n (top); after olad' 6 290 (N.); per- fect 249 (N. 1), 85 (end). Imperfect tense 80 ; secondary 80 ; from present stem 82 (I.), 135 (I.) ; augment 84 (c), 119 ; person, end- ings 142 (2) ; conn, vowel 144 (1), 145, w. endings 145 ; /ii- fonns 156, 157 (end) ; iterat. end- ings (TKov and (tkoultjv (Ion.) 152 (10), 253 (N.). Syntax 246 ; how disting. from aor. 247 (N. 5) ; de- no^Mig attempted action 246 (N. 2); how expr. in infin. and partic. 251 (N. 1), 252 (N. 1), 285, in opt. (rarely) 283 (N. 1); w. av 254 (3), 267, 268, iterative w. &v 253 ; in conditions 264, 267, in Homer 268 (N. 3) ; in rel. eond. sentences 276 (2) ; in wishes 290 (2); in final clauses 261 (3). Impersonal verbs 192 (c, d), 193 (N. 2) ; partic. of, in accus. abs. 302 (2) ; impers. verbal in -Hw 306 (top). Improper diphthongs 6. Inceptive class of verbs (VI.) 129, 130 (N. 4). Inclination, formation of adj. denot- ing 185 (16). Indeclinable nouns 50 (4), Indefinite pronouns 76, 209 ; pro- nominal adj. 78, adveibs 79. Indicative 80 ; personal endings and formation 142-145; connect, vow- els 144, 145 ; tenses of 246, 247, primary and secondary (or histori- cal) 248. General use of 256, 257 ; in final clauses : rarely fut. 2C0 (N. 1), second, tenses 261 (3) ; in object cl. w. ciTrws (fut.) 261 ; after verbs of fearing w. jUi) : rarely fut. 262 (N. 1), pres. and past tenses 262 (end) ; in protasis : pres. and past tenses 264 (1), 267 (1), in gen. suppos. for subj. 270 (end) ; future 265 (1), 269 (N. 1), 267 (N.) ; second, tenses in supp. contr. to fact 264 (2), 267 ; in cond. rel. and temp, clauses 276, 277, by assimilation 278 (2) ; in apodosis 267, 269, second, tenses w. dv 254 (3), 264 (2), 267, 386 ENGLISH INDEX. ■■ ■ : 1 mi mi ■■• ■ ) 2t)8 ; potential indie, w. &v 272 ; in wishes (second, tenses) 290 ; in causal sent. 288 ; in rel. sent, of purpose (tut.) 278 ; fut. w. i <• ■■*♦ i> M 1* ;l t t "^ jl ■ ■ii i II 1 I f-t disc. 250, 251, future 251 (N. 3), 2H1 ; how fill- (listing, aa primary and secondary 'MS (N. 2). (leneral uses of o»'t 258 (3) ; in final clauses 2G0 (1); in obj. cl. w. 6vws (sometimes fut.) 261 ; w. fi-q after vbs. of fearing 262 ; in prot- asis 265 (2), 269 (2), in gen. suppos. 266 (fc), 27ij ; in apod. w. Af 255, 269 (2), rarely without dv 270 (N. 1), w. dv without protasis expressed 271 (2), potential opt. 272 (b) ; in cond. rel. sent, (as in protasis) 276 (4), in gen. suppos. 276 (end), by assimilation 277 (1); w. ?ws, &c., until 279, w. irpiv 280 ; indirect discourse : w. 8ti or ws 282, 283, w. dv (retained) 284 (end); in dependent clauses of 285, 286; in any dependent clause expr. past thought 287 ; in causal sen- tences 289 (N. ); in wishes, alone or w. eWe or et ydp 289 (1), w. ei alone 289 (N. 1), w. ws (poetic) 289 (N. 2), expr. concession, &c. (Hom.) 289 (N. 3). Future only in indir. discourse 251 (N. 3), or in obj. cl. w. Sttws (involving ind. disc.) 261, rare in rel. cl. of purpose 278 (N. 3) ; never w. dv 255 (N.). Oratio obliqua : see Indirect Dis- course. Ordinal numerals 68. Overlook, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303 (3). Oxy tones 19. Paeons 313 (c) ; in Cretic rhythms 326 (3). Palatals 7 ; as mutes 8 (2) ; euphonic changes of 14 (1, 2, 3) ; v before 15 (5) : pal. verb stems 82 (3), 126 (a), 127 (N. 1), in perf. act. 138 (b). Paroemiac verse 323 (3). Paroxytone 19. Par*^*:^iple 80 ; formation 149 ; de- clension 53 (end), 59-62; Doric and Aeol. forms 153 (15) ; of Mt-form 157 (/), 167 (1), 172 (10), 2 perf. in au>s orciis 62 (N.), 139 ■-^1 (N. 2, 3); accent 22 (end), 23 (top). Tenses 252; prt'S. as ini- perf. 252 (N. 1) ; aor. \s. \avOdvw, Tvyxavu, fpOdpii), not past 304 (4), 252 (N. 2) ; partic. w. dfxa,n€Ta^v, ciWj, &c. 301 (N. 1, a), w. Kaivep or Kal 301 (N, 1, 6), w. tij 301 (N. 2, «), 305 (N. 4), w. dT€, oto, ola, 301 ( N. 2, b), w. (SffTre/) 302 ( N. 3) ; fut. of purpose 300 (3) ; conditional 301 (4), 271 (1); as apodosis 272 (3), w. dv 273 (top), 255, 256 ; perf. w. ^x*** forming periphr. perf. 303 (N. 2), w. dyil forming periphr. perf. subj. and opt. 150 (1, 2) or indie. 151 (4) ; in gen. absol. 229, 302 (1), accus. abs. 302 (2) ; partic. alone in gen. abs. 302 (1, N.) j plur. w. sing, collective noun 197 (N. 3). Three uses of partic. 299 ; for details of these, in pp. 300-305, see Contents, p. xxvii. Particular and general supjwsitious distinguished 265, 266. Partitive genitive 219 (6), 220, 221, 222. Partitive apposition 196 (N. 2.) Passive voice 79 (1) ; personal end- ings 142 ; conn, vowels 144, w. endings 145 ; aor. pass, formed like active 142 (1) ; use of 243- 245 ; subject of 244 ; retains one object from active constr. 244 ( N. 2) ; impersonal pass, constr. 244 (end), 245 (top), 192 (end). Patronymics, suffixes of 184 (9). Pause in verse : caesura 316 (1), diaeresis 316 (end), 317. Pentameter, elegiac 321 (end), 322. Penthemim (2^ feet) 322 (top). Penult 17 (top). Perceive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2); w, partic. 303 (2andN.), 304 (end). Perfect tense 80 ; primary 80 (2) ; tense stem 83, 137-139 ; persoiuil ending 142 ; connect, vowel 144, 145, w. endings 145 (2) ; changes in vowel of stem 131-134 ; augment 120, 121 ; Att. reduplic. 122 ; sec- ond perf. 80 (N. 1), 83, 1^2 (3), 139 (d), of the /«-form 167, 169, ~ '"-' - ••- - ENGLISH INDEX. 389 (end), 23 s. as im- \avf>avu), t 304 (i), w. KaiiTfp 301 (N. 2, oy, ola, 301 N.3)-, fut. joixUtional lodosis 272 255, 256 ; y i)eviphr. IfiL foviuing x\ oi>t. 150 t) ; in gen. lis. abs. 302 en. abs. 302 |f. collective 'hvee uses of Us of these, Contents, p. suppositions 6), 220, 221, ositiou 196 hersonal end- tels 144, w. pass, formed \ use of 243- • retains one nstr. 244 (N. '. oonstr. 244 (end). 184(9). ma 316 (1), 117. (end), 322. 12 (top). , w. gen. 222 t'and!^.), 304 Inary 80 (2); Il39 ; personal :. vowel 144, (2) ; changes ll34 ; augment llic. 122 ; sec- l 83, 1.2(3), [rm 167, 169, 170 ; perf. mid. w. or ^. MV ' 50 GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. First Four Books of Xenophon's Anabasis, With an illustrated Vocabulary. Edited by Professors W. "W. Goodwin and John Williams White, of Harvard University. 12mo. Halt morocco. 355 pages. Mailing Price, $1.65; Introduction, $1.60 ; Allow- ance, 25 cents. Without Yocabulaxy. Mailing Price, $1.10; Introduction, $1.00; Allowance, 25 cents. rpHE Notes are copious, and much gramniatieal aid is given, chiefly in the form of references to the Grammar. A colored map is added, giving the route of the Ten Thousand: Until Professor White's Illustrated Vocabulary is ready, Profe& 8or Crosby's complete Lexicon will be bound with this edition. I Goodwin's Greek Reader. Edited by Professor W. W. Goodwin, of Harvard University, l^aio. Half morocco. 384 pages. Mailing Price, $1.65 ; Introduction, $1.50 ; Allowance, 26 cents. /CONSISTING of Selections from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus, and Thucydides; being the full amount of Greek Prose required for admission to Harvard Univemty. With colored maps, notes, and references to the revised and enlarged edition of Goodwin's Greek Grammar. Cebes' Tablet. Edited with Introduction, Notes, Vocabulary, and Grammatical Ques- tions, by Richard Parsons, Professor oi Greek, Ohio Wesleyan Univ. 12mo. Cloth. M pages. Mailing Price, 85 cents; for introd., 75 cents. T>ESIDES being an entertaining and instructive allegory, in the form of a lively dialogue, Cebes' Tablet is moderately easy to construe, and not «oove the comprehension of a boy of fourteen. As a drill-book on forms and constructions, especially on inter- rogatives and conditional sentences, the work should come into use, to say nothing of its own intrinsic excellence. Particular attention is invited to the feature of questions. Recommended for the second or third term's work as an alternative book to the Anabasis. A. E. Wells, Prof, of Greek, Ar- tioch Collerfe: The Anabasis never seemed to me interesting enough to the average student to make a fit introduction to Greek literature. I think this will meet my need exactly, GKEEK TEXT-BOOKS. 61 18, V. Goodwin 2ino. Hall L.50 ; Allow- tion, $1.00; d is given, • Thousand*, ady, Pro£e& edition. ersity. I'^joo. iiction, $1.50; ), Herodotus, Greek Prose ^ith colored ed edition of matical Ques- ^esleyan Univ. •od., 75 cents. egory, in the •ately easy to fourteen . ally on inter- ome into use, liar attention or the second abasis. to make a fit literature. 1 y need exactly. Seymour's School Iliad. With Introduction, Commentary, and Illustrated Vocabulary, by Thomas D. SuYMOUK, Professor of Greek in Yale College. Books I.-III. Square liimo. Half-leather. 371 pages. Mailing price, $1.35 ; for iutroductiou, $1.25 ; allowance, oO cents. Books I.-VI. 478 pages. Mailing price, $1.75; for introduction, $1.60; allowance, 40 cents. rriHIS is believed to be without exception the ideal Iliad for school use. The introduction, which contains forty-five pages, pie- seiits, in a concise but systematic form, the most important facts regarding Homeric life, the Homeiic poem, Homeric style, syntax, dia>,ct, and vei'se. The text is printed in the large and cioar type that has distinguished tho College Series of Greek Authors. The commentary has been adapted to the wants of l)eginners in Homer. The notes are copious for the first three books. They are less copi- ous for Books IV. Lo VI., but the commentary on Book VI, is fuller than that on Books IV. and V. One finds numberless evi- dences that the editor did h^s work not only in a careful and in a painstaking and sisholarly way, but with personal pleasure and with sympathetic regard for the difficulties of beginners. The vocabu- lary described below contains more than twenty wood-cuts, most of which are new in this country. A. H. Buck. Prof, of Greek, Boston Univ. : In this book i)oth editor and publisher seem to me to have done their best to furnish a positive and valuable help to an easy and ade- quate preparation for college work in Greek poetry, and thus to have made a notable contribution to the cause of classical learning. Angle Clara Ghapin, Prof, of Greek, Wellesley Coll. : It seems to me particularly rich in what may be called literary apparatus. With such a guide a teacher will have no excuse for teaching the Iliad as merely " a queer kind of prose," as Professor Seymour says. (Dec. 16, 1889.) William Gtoodell Frost, Prof, of Greek Language and Literature,' Oberlin, Coll.: The Introduction is admirable for its selection of mate- rial, and sound in the views ex- pressed. Of course the Vocabulary is a feature which appeals at once to every student of Homer. I observe at random through both Vocabulary and notes numerous felicities which reveal conscientious and loving care. I can hardly see how the volume as a whole could be improved. Charles Forster Smith, Prof, of Greek, Vande.rbilt Univ., Nashville, Tenn. : I do not doubt that it will be universally conceded to be the beat school edition of any part of the Iliad that has yet been put on the Ameri- can market. I shall recommend Pro- fessor Seymour's Iliad to all the schools that fit boys for us. '%«»*•,•'■,■ »■ I h ' II 52 GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. IP K I I' If •., i '1: *"^"'l 1: ->**■■ ■^■'-^' iii- ,, ^!- .y j.v)*W»|- ■"Hs^:. :i\ • I W. A. Bobinson, Prof, of Greek, Lchiffh L'nic. : It seems to me to be easily lirst of all American editions. Alexander Kerr, Prof, of Greek, University of Wisconsin : My im- pression upon receiving a copy of Seymour's Iliad was that Ginn & Company had surpassed themselves, if that were possible. Seymour's Iliad in its present form has in my opinion no competitor, and, of course, I shall recommend it to uiy classes in elementary Greek. Sobert Sbarp, Prof, of Greek, Tidane Urdversity, La. : The Sey- mour's Iliad I regard as much the best, botli for convenience and for the judicious help afforded the stu- dent, of uU the editions for the class- room that have come into my hands. Homeric Vocabulary. A Concise Vocabulary to the First Six Books of Homer's Iliad. By Thomas D. Seymour of Yale College. Square 12mo. Cloth, x + 105 pages. Mailing price, 80 cents ; for introduction, 75 cents. A SPECIAL Vocabulary to Homer is open to little objection, if any, since the words are found nearly in their original significations and constructions. Its advantages are obvious. This Vocabulary has not been compiled from other dictionaries, but has been made from the poem itself. The maker has endeav- ored to give nothing but what is important for the accurate and appreciative reading of the Iliad, and yet to show the original and derived meanings of the words, and to suggest translations which should be both simple and dignified. K. B. Youngman, Prof, of Greek, Lafayette Colleue : It is the best of all. From cover to cover it speaks the praise of editor and publisher. The thing that pleases me most is the abundant, but not burdensome, quotation from Virgil, Horace, Mil- ton, and the Bible, showing similar- ity of thought, expression, habit, and experience. This cannot fail to add much interest to the study of Homer. John B. Kieffer, Prof, of Latin and Greek, Franklin and Marshall College: The introduction and the notes are precisely what the student needs, and not least amongst the ex- cellences of the book is the judicious care that has been exercised in ex- cluding things the student does not need. T'.a execution of the book leaves nothing to be desired. Charles M. Moss, Prof, of Greek Language and Literature, Illinois Wesleyan University: The vocabu- lary, I think, is a wove in the right direction,— toward saving students a needless waste of time. It is well enough on paper to talk about a stu-'| most telling use of. dent's getting so much from use of a large lexicon ; but that advantage is mostly imaginary, if I may judge from thirteen years' experience in the class-room. What is needed id something that will give what a stu- dent (not a professor) can make the of. of Greek, s the best of rer it speaks id publisher. > me most is burdensome, Horace, Mil- (ving similar- )n, habit, and )t fail to add idy of Homer. rof. of Latin und Marshall ition and the ,t the student longst the ex- the judicious jrcised in ex- dent does not of the book lesired. 's Iliad. By loth, x + 105 e objection, leir original Dvious. dictionaries, has endeav- accurate and original and ations which advantage is I may judge experience in is needed \a ve wliat a stu- can make the GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. 58 Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek ¥erb. Rewritten and Enlarged. By William Watson Goodwin, LL.D., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard University. 8vo. Cloth. xxxii + 464 pages. Mailing Price, $2.15 ; Introduction Price, $2.00. T)ERHAPS no other work of scholarship has enjoyed the unique and unchallenged preeminence of Professor Goodwin's Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. Published both in England and in America, it has long been the standard for the English-speaking students of two continents. It is only necessary to say of the new edition that it is a most careful revision and a judicious enlargement of the pre- vious one. Full use has been made of all contributions, Ameri- can and foreign, to the discussion of the subjects here treated, as well as of the author's own further investigations and maturer judgments. The work is presented as something indispensable to all stu- dents and teachers of Greek. A copy of the Table of Contents, which contains twenty-two pages, will be sent to any teacher who desires to see the scope of the work. Letters endorsing the work in the strongest terms and emphasizing its practical value have been received from the most eminent scholars, both American and British, but the pub- lication of recommendations would be superfluous. Selections from Xenophon and Herodotus. With Notes adapted to the revised edition of Goodwin's Greek Grammar, and copperplate maps. Edited by W. W. Goodwin, Ph.D., LL.D., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature, and John Williams White, Ph.D., Professor of Greek in Harvard College. 12mo. Half-morocco, vii + 397 pages. Mailing Price, $1.65; for introduction, $1.50. Greek Inflection. By B. F. Harding, Head Master of the Belmont School, Belmont, Mass. 12mo. Cloth. 54 pages. Mailing price, 55 cts. ; for introduction, 50 cts. "[RESIGNED to economize time for the teacher, by furnishing a large number of words for ready use, as paradigms, in the cl»,S8-room, and at the same time to suggest a systematic and sei* entific treatment of the noun and verb. ^**»fc,r. 11 m If I / Ml : '^ I '•^m I,!; -v*^ i 54 .*•■> '-v;^ HF -"^-r^i i V GREEK TEXT-BOOKS. The Irregular Verbs of Attic Prose. Their Forms, Prominent Meanings, and Important Compounds ; together with Lists of Related Words and English Derivatives. By Addison HoouE, Professor of Greek in the University of Mississippi. 12mo. Cloth. xii + ';i68 pages. Mailing price, $1.(J0; to teachers, and for introduction, $1.50. rpHE material treated in this book is here much fuller than in the lists of Irregular Verbs in the grammars, and much more accessible than in the lexicons. The book contains after the Regular Verbs, — pure, mute, and liquid, — the Irregular Verbs of Attic Prose in alphabetical order. Prominent meanings and special uses of frequent occurrence are given, often illustrated by translated examples. The most impor- tant compounds are added, and also many related words, — forming a very practical sort of introduction to word-formation. The first declension alore is represented by about 400 substantives, and this indicates the vange of vocabulary. The English Derivatives, of which there are over 450, will prove, it is hoped, an attractive fea- ture to teachers and students alike. To the latter they will be an additional support in learning some five or six hundred Greek words, and will broaden their knowledge of their own tongue. George M . Forbes, Prof, of Greek, University of Rochester, N,Y.: I have examined it with great care, and and arrangement, and is destined to become a favorite. W. H. Appleton, Prof, of Greek, Swarthmore College: I have long thought that such a book was greatly needed, and I shall put it in use at once with my classes. I have no doubt that it will prove to be all that it seems to promise. find it admirably adapted to supple- ment grammar and dictionary. I shall recommend it to my students. Angle Clara Chapin, Prof, of Greek, Wellesley College: It is a model of convenient classification Medea of Euripides. " Edited, with Notes and an Introduction by Frederick D. Allen, Ph.D., Professor of Classical Philology in Harvard University. 12mo. Cloth. 141 pages. Mailing price, $1.10; for introduction, $1.00. rPHE Introduction contains a full discussion of all the principal questions arising in a study of this play. (Edipus Tyrdnnus of Sophocles. Edited, with aq Introduction, Notes, and full Explanation of the Metres, by John Williams White, Ph.D., Professor of Greek in Harvard Uni- versity. 12mo. Clotli. 219 pages. Mailing price, $1.25 ; for introduction, $1.12. luds ; together By Addison isippi. 12mo. lers, and for lUer than in much more e, mute, and letical order, currence are most impor< 8, — forming 1. The first ves, and this srivatives, of ttractive fea- ey will be an idred Greek tongue, is destined to rof. of Greek, I have loug )k was greatly it it in use at I. I have no ove to be all ie. t^ H^ ctOlxMx 6d. QlillXjul, .L^ t^lll, t'\ ItlPCtVi r^;^T(^, ^^Kuj^ ^f^i/-, 1 U-lcL^Lt:' Va.v T^t^u.^'T^' ^^a.t,n)^ ^ccKu.v ^'|